■,.'-, 






• % V * 






•o- * 






















y 


• 8 b ~V- 

- 














•y 












^ 


-^ 


<?*, 








^ 



,' V 






&0' 



rt> •% 



^ <* N 



,0o 



c X 












,\ 00 ^. 






V 







' / 


% 


^ 










#• 


^ 




% 


/ 


^ 


, V ' « < 


0-, 


x° 


o 











-0 & 









<(y s A 



^ 



rO v c ' * a <£, 






A- Xj 

^ C 



60 



1 A u 






o> 



O0 v 



O . >/ ,, 



'**c 



'< 



W : ■:« %«,*■ 



s s ^ 



* , ^ 



r ,#a- °; 






.*=) ^ 



o o x 






V 






' ♦ ,, 



O0 v 

j5 -c 



o x 









; ^A : A,n 

./'% = >■ aa 










^ -J- 












vA ^ 



.V 






-/• / 



HEBREW CHRESTOMATHY. 



BY 

y 

MOSES STUART, 

ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR OF SACRED LITERATURE IN THE 
THEOLOGICAL INSTITUTION AT ANDOVER, U. S. 



REPRIXTED WITH THE CONCURRENCE OF THE AUTHOR. 



THIRD EDITION. 




OXFORD: D. A. TALBOYS, 

MDCCC XXXIV. 









<? 



oxford: printed by TALBOYS AND BROWNE 



THE 
PUBLISHER TO THE READER. 



In presenting to the public this edition of Professor Stuart's 
Hebrew Chrestomathy, the publisher believes he can pre- 
face it with nothing better than the following extract from 
a letter, received from that gentleman, in reply to one re- 
specting the reprinting of his Commentary on the Epistles 
to the Romans. 

" Justice and propriety oblige me to say, that the manner 
in which you have executed my Hebrew Grammar, (two 
copies of which have come to hand, and for which I sin- 
cerely thank you,) is very attractive to me, and a pretty 
good pledge that you would fulfil my expectations in the 
manner in which I could wish my book to be presented to 
the British public. Your reprint is certainly a book that 
neither you nor the correctors need to be ashamed of. We 
outdo you in Hebrew type — that is no fault of yours ; you 
outdo us in paper, in ink, in the general neatness of the 
whole thing — and I believe there are fewer errors of the 
press in your edition than in the American one. 

" I hope you have found encouragement to print the 
Chrestomathy also ; without which the Grammar will have 
but an imperfect circulation; and with which it has had a 
large one in this country." 

The same pains have been taken to ensure a correct im- 
pression of the present work, which were taken with the 
Grammar ; and it is believed with equal success. 

The publisher has only to add, that he has prevailed 
upon the Rev. Mr. Reay, to superintend the work in its 
progress through the press. 

Oxford, January, 1834. 



WORKS BY THE SAME AUTHOR. 

A COMMENTARY on the EPISTLE to the HEBREWS. 

Republished under the care of E. Henderson, Doct. Philos. 8vo. 
bds. 14s. Lond. 1833. 

A NEW TRANSLATION of the EPTSTLE OF PAUL 
THE APOSTLE TO THE ROMANS, with a Commentary. 
Republished under the care of John Pye Smith, D. D. and E. 
Henderson, Doct. Philos. 8vo. bds. 14s. Lond. 1833. 

A GRAMMAR OF THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. Re- 
published under the care of Mr. Pauli, professor of the Hebrew 
and Chaldsean languages ; and the Rev. J. Jones, of Christ Church. 
Fourth edition ; reprinted with the concurrence of the Author. 
8vo. bds. 14s. Oxford, 1831. 



THE AUTHOR'S PREFACE. 



The title given to this little volume, (Chrestomathy, from 
the Greek xpw r ^i pa-H, simple instruction, easy learning,) 
may seem strange to an ear accustomed merely to our com- 
mon circle of English words, among which it is not found. 
It has, however, been long in general use, among most of the 
nations on the continent of Europe ; and not in the Latin 
language only, but in their own respective dialects. It is 
a convenient technical word ; and on this account, I have 
adopted it as the title of this work. 

Chrestomathies, in Latin and Greek, have long been em- 
ployed for the instruction of youth, in most of the countries 
of Europe. The utility of them is so evident, that scarcely 
any one has ventured to call it in question. A great variety 
of them are now current in our own country ; although they 
do not bear the appellation to which I have been adverting. 
So general, moreover, is the conviction of their utility, that 
the practice of employing them has extended to all the mo- 
dern languages, which are studied among us to any consi- 
derable extent. The French, the Italian, the German, and 
the Spanish, all have their respective Chrestomathies ; and 
this, to the great convenience of learner and teacher. 

On the continent of Europe, however, where Chrestoma- 
thies, in nearly every language that is studied, are almost 
universally employed, there has been some diversity of opi- 
nion among the learned, about the expediency of employing 
Chrestomathies in the Hebrew language. The late J. G. 
Eichhorn, of Gottingen, so well known to the literary world, 
in his Bibliotheli , (a long continued and very able work, 
made up of learned reviews, essays, etc.,) was accustomed 
to speak with much disregard of Hebrew Chrestomathies, 



VI PREFACE. 

and to protest against them. Others have done the same 
thing. But the reason of this is evident; and it must be 
acknowledged, also, that it was sufficient. Of all the He- 
brew Chrestomathies which I have yet examined, (and I 
have seen most of them which have acquired any consider- 
able name,) none have been conducted on a plan, which 
affords substantial aid to the learner. Most of them have 
been almost a mere reprint of select parts of the Bible ; and 
oftentimes, of some of the most difficult parts of all the 
Scriptures, merely because the rhetorical qualities of the 
pieces selected were very striking. Against such Chres- 
tomathies Eichhorn might well protest ; for why should not 
the student at once purchase his Hebrew Bible, and study 
in that the lessons printed in his Chrestomathy, rather than 
purchase another book which offered him nothing more than 
a part of the simple text of his Bible ? 

A few Chrestomathies have contained notes, mostly of a 
kind which have respect to higher or lower criticism; but 
very few offer any considerable assistance in respect to 
grammatical analysis. Of course, books of this class have 
never satisfied the wants of beginners, and therefore they 
have soon fallen into neglect. 

So far as my knowledge of Hebrew Chrestomathies ex- 
tends, none have yet been published, which are like the 
present in regard to the specific object to be attained. It 
remains therefore for an experiment to be made, in order 
to determine whether a Hebrew Chrestomathy, more fully 
adapted to the wants of beginners than has been usual, will 
not find as good encouragement, and be of as much utility, 
as a Latin or Greek one. On this experiment the present 
little volume ventures; not claiming to have accomplished 
all which may be desirable, but aiming at least to break the 
way, in which others may follow, and do for the Hebrew 
that which has in some cases been so admirably accom- 
plished for other ancient, and for the modern languages. 

That which is done viva voce in the lecture-room, and ad- 



PREFACE. Vll 

dressed to the ear of Hebrew students, on the continent 
of Europe, it is my aim to exhibit here to the eye of our 
students, on printed pages. The author of this small vo- 
lume, while he cherishes the highest regard for the profound 
and extensive erudition of many scholars and teachers in 
the old world, still professes himself unable to see how a 
beginner in Hebrew, who receives oral instruction ex ca- 
thedra, (and writes down as well as he can, which at the 
best must be very badly at first, what is dictated to him, 
phrase by phrase, or word by word, and then cons over 
what he has written,) can be more profited, than to have the 
same instruction, of which he has made but an imperfect 
copy in his notes, fully exhibited in a well printed book, 
and so arranged, that recurrence to it is, at all times, easy 
and without the danger of mistake. With all his deference 
to the great masters of teaching in Europe, he cannot per- 
suade himself, that in this point they are not mistaken, at 
least with regard to the elementary part of linguistic study ; 
and above all, in regard to such a language as the Hebrew, 
the writing down of which is so difficult for the unpractised 
beginner. No wonder that so few in Europe ever pursue the 
study of the Hebrew to any great length, while the process 
of acquiring it is made so tedious ; and while (it may be 
added) their studies are conducted on a plan, which makes 
the learner rather a passive recipient than an active agent. 
The human mind, from its very nature, cannot long follow 
such a course of study with much satisfaction. 

In regard to the selection of pieces for this Chrestomathy, 
it has been my design to choose those which are easy, and, 
in some respect or other, of special interest ; and which may 
therefore serve at once to excite the student and to instruct 
him. If any one should suggest, that there are other pieces 
in the Old Testament of equal or of superior interest, and 
which ought to have been preferred, I shall not dispute the 
point with him ; for in a book, which is all divine, and of 
such a compass as the Old Testament, it would be strange 



Vlll PREFACE. 

if some thirty chapters should comprise all that is striking, 
and useful, and beautiful. It were easy to make out many 
more volumes of Chrestomathy, like the present, and yet to 
leave much behind, which one must pronounce very ex- 
cellent. My plan has been, to take that which might serve 
to aid and to instruct the beginner; which is easy, and yet in- 
viting ; and in following this plan, I have, of course, omitted 
most of the awfully sublime parts of the Old Testament, 
nearly all of which are replete with exegetical and gram- 
matical difficulties. How incongruous it would be, in a se- 
lection of such pieces as the present, to be guided only by 
rhetorical taste, and to make out a book merely containing 
" the beauties of the Bible," no considerate person will fail 
to perceive. 

I have extended the selection so far, as may serve the 
purposes of an introduction to the regular, exegetical study 
of the Hebrew. My views of the importance of accurate, 
grammatical analysis, are sufficiently explained in the notes 
appended to this volume. In estimating the present work, 
I must beg the reader to remember, that my principal de- 
sign is, to aid the student in the grammatical study of the 
Hebrew. All else besides this, is added for the sake of 
smoothing the way, and making it more attractive. No stu- 
dent of any understanding, can long content himself with 
the mere study of words, forms, and syntactical construc- 
tions ; he must understand, in some good degree, the mean- 
ing of what he reads, in order to take any pleasure in it. 
Recognizing this principle of our nature, I have all along, 
from the very outset, added such brief exegetical remarks 
as may assist the beginner, and make his progress more 
agreeable to him. As the notes advance, they become (as 
is proper) more exegetical and less grammatical. But no 
grammatical difficulty whatever is wittingly passed over, 
without an attempt at explanation. The exegetical remarks 
are, for the most part, very brief; but, I would fain hope, 
such as are better adapted to beginners, than if they were 



PREFACE. IX 

more formal. What is sometimes given in a single sentence, 
has cost me hours of study. But the parade of learning 
would ill become a book of this kind ; and I would rather 
hazard the imputation of having written too briefly, than of 
having made out a great book, which the learner could 
neither relish nor understand. A case like the present I 
take to be one, in regard to which it may be truly said, 

[Aeya fiiftXiov peya, kclkov. 

Some of the investigations, which led to remarks made at 
the close of various pieces in this selection, have cost time 
and effort which critical students, and probably such only, 
will know well how to estimate. If these remarks should 
prove to be useful to the learner, either in the way of in- 
struction or of excitement to further investigation, it will be 
more than a compensation for all the labour bestowed on 
them. 

The expense of publishing books of criticism on the He- 
brew language, and of printing Hebrew, is a thing that is 
yet but very imperfectly understood, in our country. That 
the public may be enabled to make some proper estimate of 
it, and so to judge, on good grounds, whether the price of 
books like the present is put too high, it is proper to state, 
that the labour of correcting a printed sheet of Hebrew, 
with the accents, is at least twenty-five times as much as 
that of correcting English printed with a type of the like 
size ; and that the labour of the printer in setting up and 
correcting such a sheet, is at least six times as much as that 
of executing a sheet in English. Then the labour of the 
original writing or composition, where so many Hebrew 
words are to be written as occur in the notes to this volume, 
is, at least, four times as much as that of composing a like 
quantity in mere English. Besides all this, no sheet is con- 
tained in the present volume, which has not, in the printing, 
gone through at least five several corrections or revisals, 
besides the corrections of the printers. Let those who 
know how to estimate the severity of such labour judge, in 

b 



PREFACE. 



view of these facts, whether the present book, and others of 
a similar character, can reasonably be asked for at a lower 
price than that at which they are actually sold. 

If the reader should find the Hebrew text contained in 
this volume to be accurately printed, (which I trust will be 
the case,) he must attribute this, in good part, to the un- 
tiring diligence and praise-worthy accuracy of Mr. William 
G. Schauffler, of Stuttgard in Germany, a member of the 
present Middle Class in our Theological Seminary, who 
made the three first revisals of it, as it came from the 
printer's hands ; to the kind and valuable aid of Mr. C. E. 
Stowe, one of the assistant Teachers of the Greek and He- 
brew languages here, for the present year, who went through 
with another complete revisal ; and to the unwearied dili- 
gence and patience of the printers and publishers, who have 
spared no pains to accomplish all which I wished to be done. 
Several errors in the text of Van der Hooght, (from which 
the Hebrew is copied,) have been detected and corrected ; 
but how many more are committed, time will develop. He, 
who has once printed Hebrew, will never boast of security 
against being detected in some errors. The types break off 
or draw out, and frustrate the hopes which his labours at 
correction had led him to cherish ; the ink does not always 
reach the minuter vowels and accents so as to give a due 
impression ; and where there are so many objects of atten- 
tion, as the printing of Hebrew with vowels and accents 
necessarily presents, humanum est errare. I can only say, 
that I have done all which my time and circumstances ren- 
dered it possible for me to do, in order that the text might 
be correct. The ivhole book has gone through the hands 
of Mr. Stowe, as well as my own, in the correction ; and al- 
though not immaculate, will, I hope, be found to be so far 
accurate as not to give the student much trouble. 

As the circle of elementary Hebrew books is now com- 
pleted, and a Lexicon, Grammar, and Chrestomathy will 
not, all together, cost more than the former price of a He- 



PREFACE. XI 

brew Lexicon, it is to be hoped that the progress of Hebrew 
study may keep pace with the facility and cheapness of the 
means to aid it. Hebrew is now accessible to all classes of 
people, who may wish to learn it. Private persons, for their 
own advantage and gratification, may study it. I venture to 
affirm, without the fear of being contradicted by any one 
who has had experience, that the Hebrew is now more ac- 
cessible than the Latin or Greek, and can be learned in less 
than half the time which either of these languages costs. 
The apparent difficulties, at the outset, arise from the dif- 
ference of its written characters, (especially of the vowels,) 
from those of our western languages. These difficulties, 
however, speedily vanish: and then the simplicity of ar- 
rangement, of declension, and of conjugation, in the Hebrew 
language, is such, that the progress is much more rapid 
than either in Latin or Greek. The imaginary terrors, in 
which this language has been clothed, belong to some of the 
older books of instruction, and not to the Hebrew itself. I 
do most earnestly hope that the day is coming, when the 
subject of Hebrew study will be treated with more candour 
than it has been in our country, for a century past ; and 
that the obscurity which has been thrown around it, by such 
treatises of former days as have invested it with confused 
and confounding mists, and the terrors also, which have 
been merely imagined to exist by such as are reluctant to 
make the exertion demanded of those who embark in the 
study of it, or have not enough of the energetic spirit of 
acquisition to urge them forward in such a study, will vanish 
away before the illuminating and enterprising spirit of the 
day, and never more make their appearance. Incepisse dtmi- 
dium est. A moderate part of the time that has been spent 
by many an excellent minister of the Gospel, in the pursuit 
of Commentary on the original Hebrew Scriptures, in order 
that he might understand the meaning of them, (which, when 
he attains it, is only a secondary source, and the correctness 
of which, he must, without a personal knowledge of the 



Xll PREFACE. 

Hebrew, often be unable to estimate,) would have enabled 
him to go directly himself to the original source, and to 
satisfy his own mind by original evidence. May the time 
speedily arrive, when this will be better understood, and 
more extensively believed ! 

Should the present volume meet with sufficient encourage- 
ment to open the way for more works of a similar nature, it 
is my design to go on with the selection of other appropriate 
parts of the Hebrew Scriptures, so as to complete a full 
course of exegetical study in the Hebrew language. The 
present volume is designed as the first in such a series. 
The extent of such a Course of Study, will depend on the 
encouragement given to works of this nature in our country, 
and on the measure of health which it may please a kind 
Providence to bestow upon me. It is not my design to pub- 
lish in extenso any more of the Hebrew text, as in the pre- 
sent volume ; because every student should of course have 
a Hebrew Bible. A selection, however, from the Hebrew 
Scriptures, adapted to. a proper course of Hebrew study, is 
what I intend to make ; and on this, will be written critical, 
grammatical, and exegetical notes. The last will, of course, 
be the predominant ones, in all future publications designed 
to be a continuation of the present. But as the whole 
course will be adapted to beginners, so more particular at- 
tention will be paid to their actual wants, than any of our 
present commentaries have given. The forms, syntax, and 
etymology of words will never be neglected, nor any pains 
spared to lead the student to an accurate and fundamental 
knowledge of what properly belongs to philology. 

M. STUART. 

Theol. Seminary, Andover, 



CONTENTS. 



PART I. 

EXAMPLES FOR PRAXIS . 



Page 
1 



PART II. 

EASY SENTENCES FOR BEGINNERS 



1—7. 



PART III. 

SELECT PORTIONS OF PROSE. 

I. Original creation, Gen. i, 1 — 2. 

II. Work of the first day, Gen. i, 3—5. . 

III. The work of the second day, Gen. i, 6 — 8. 

IV. The work of the third day, Gen. i, 9—13. 

V. The work of the fourth day, Gen. i, 14 — 19. 

VI. The work of the fifth day, Gen. i, 20—23. 

VII. The work of the sixth day, Gen. i, 24—31. . 

VIII. The institution of the sabbath, Gen. ii, 1—3. 

IX. The formation of man, etc. Gen. ii, 7 — 17. 

X. The formation of woman, Gen. ii, 18 — 25. 

XI. Temptation and fall of our first parents, Gen. iii 

XII. Their trial and condemnation, Gen. iii, 8 — 19. 

XIII. Wickedness and condemnation of the Antediluvians, G< 

XIV. Threat of destruction ; and building of Noah's ark, Gen 

XV. Entrance into the ark, and prevalence of the flood, Gen. a 

XVI. Abatement of the flood. Noah and his family leave 

Gen. viii, 1—20 

XVII. The building of Babel, Gen. xi, 1—9. 

XVIII. First calling of Abraham, Gen. xii, 1 — 4. . 

XIX. Second promise to Abraham, Gen. xv, 1 — 6. 

XX. Third promise to Abraham, Gen. xvii, 1 — 8. . 

XXI. Abraham offering up his son, Gen. xxii, 1 — 19 

XXII. Appearance of Jehova to Jacob, Gen. xxxv, 9 — 15. 

XXIII. Birth, education, and flight of Moses, Ex. ii, 1—15. 

XXIV. Appearance of Jehova in the burning bush, Ex. iii, 1 

XXV. Commission of Moses, Ex. vi, 1 — 11. . 

XXVI. Institution of the Passover, Ex. xii, 18—33. 



n. vi, 5—8 
vi, 13—22 

i, 7—24. 
the ark, 



6, 



15 
15 
15 
16 
16 
16 
17 
18 
18 
19 
19 
20 
21 
21 
22 

23 
25 
25 
26 
26 
27 
28 
29 
30 
30 
31 



XIV 



CONTENTS. 



Page 

XXVII. The ten commandments, Ex. xx, 1—17 32 

XXVIII. Renewal of the same, Ex. xxxiv, 4 — 8 34 

XXIX. Nadab and Abihu destroyed for offering strange fire, Lev. x, 1 — 3. 34 

XXX. The blessing upon the people of Israel, Num. vi, 22—27. . . 34 

XXXI. Destruction of Korah and his company, Num. xvi, 23 — 35 . . 35 

XXXII. Water brought from the rock by Moses, Num. xx, 7—11. . . 36 

XXXIII. Various exhortations by Moses, Deut. vi, 4 — 9. etc. . . 36 

XXXIV. Death and burial of Moses, Deut. xxxiv, 1—8. ... 37 

XXXV. Passage of the river Jordan, Josh, iii, 9 — 17. . . . . 37 

XXXVI. The sun and moon arrested in their course, Josh, x, 12 — 14. . 38 

XXXVII. Victory of Deborah and Barak, Judg.iv, 13— 24. 39 

XXXVIII. Death of Sampson, Judg. xvi, 23— 31 40 

XXXIX. The calling of Samuel, 1 Sam. iii, 1—14 41 

XL. Combat of David with Goliath, 1 Sam. xvii, 38—51. ... 42 



SELECT PORTIONS OF POETRY. 



XLI. Hallelujah Psalm, Ps. cl 

XLII. Exhortation to bless God, Ps. cxxxiv. . 
XLIII. Exhortation to praise God, Ps. cxvii. . 
XLIV. God our benefactor, Ps. cxiii. 
XLV. God merciful and faithful, Ps. ciii. 

XLVI. God our Creator, Ps. c 

XLVII. God the mighty king, Ps. xciii. 
XLVIII. God's kindness, Ps. Ixv. 

XLIX. God our refuge, Ps. xlvi 

L. God who wields the thunder and lightning, Ps. xxix. 
LI. The Lord our shepherd, Ps. xxiii. 

LII. The king of glory, Ps. xxiv 

LIII. The book of nature and of revelation, Ps. xix. 

LIV. Who shall dwell with God, Ps. xv. 

LV. The lot of the righteous and of the wicked, Ps. i. 

LVI. Longing after God, Ps. lxxxiv. 

LVII. Shortness and vanity of human life, Ps. xc. . 

LVIII. The evils of intemperance, Prov. xxiii, 29 — 35. 

LIX. A vision of the night, Job iv, 12 — 21. . 



43 
44 
44 
44 
45 
47 
48 
48 
50 
51 
52 
52 
53 
55 
55 
56 
57 
59 
60 



PARABLES. 

LX. Parable of Nathan, 2 Sam. xii, 1—7. 
LXI. Parable of Jotham, Judg. ix, 6—20. . 
LXTI. Parable of the vineyard, Is. v, 1 — 7. . 
LXIII. Parable of the vine, Ps. lxxx, 9—20. 



61 

61 
62 
63 









CONTENTS. 


XV 


NOTES. 




Page 


Page 


Notes on Part I. . . .65 


No. XXXII. 


. 191 


Notes on Part 11. 






73 


No. XXXIII. . 


. 191 


Notes on Part II] 






108 


No. XXXIV. . 


. 192 


No. I. 






111 


No. XXXV. 


. 193 


No. ir. 






113 


No. XXXVI. . 


. 194 


No. III. . 






114 


No. XXXVII. . 


. 195 


No. IV. . 






115 


No. XXXVIII. . 


. 196 


No. V. . - . 






116 


No. XXXIX. . 


. 199 


No. VI. . 






117 


No. XL. . 


. 200 


No. VII. . 






118 


HEBREW POETRY. 


. 201 


No. VIII. . 






122 


No. XLI. . 


. 204 


No. IX. . 






127 


No. XLII. . 


. 205 


No. X. 






137 


No. XLIII. 


. 207 


No. XI. . 






142 


No. XLIV. 


. 207 


No. XII. . 






147 


No. XLV. . 


. 208 


No. XIII. . 






152 


No. XLVI. 


. 210 


No. XIV. . 






153 


No. XLVII. 


. 211 


No. XV. . 






155 


No. XLVIII. . 


. 211 


No. XVI. . 






158 


No. XLIX. 


. 214 


No. XVII. . 






161 


No. L. 


. 216 


No. XVIII. 






165 


No. LI. 


. 219 


No. XIX. . 






167 


No. LII. . 


. 220 


No. XX. . 






168 


No. LIII. . 


. 224 


No. XXI. . 






170 


No. LIV. . 


. 228 


No. XXII. 






172 


No. LV. . 


. 229 


No. XXIII. 






173 


No.LVI. . 


. 231 


No. XXIV. 






175 


No. LVII. . 


. 233 


No. XXV. 






176 


No. LVIII. 


. 236 


No. XXVI. 






178 


No. LIX. . 


. 238 


No. XXVII. 






179 


No. LX. . 


. 240 


No. XXVIII. 






. 186 


No. LXI. . 


. 241 


No. XXIX. 






187 


No. LXIT. . 


. 243 


No. XXX. . 






. 188 


No. LXIII. 


. 245 


No. XXXI. 






. 189 







PART 1. 

EXAMPLES FOR PRAXIS. 



VERBS. 

No. I. (§ 212 seq. Par. I.) 

VDp B£p ^p *?pD *?I0D HDD tD^D 1DD Jttfb Dp 1 ? (V) 
i _i T _> T _i T >_ T _ T - T - T _ T _ T '-T\y 

: nptf Vp# ^ ^p# W^ IDtf D£$ D&ttf flDfo "i^P 

'-T ,F -T '-T '-T "T "T -T "T ~T 

No. II. (§ 220 seq. Par. II.) 

0»U P» (to© ^P T 09?) »? 0??) ™ to 

: (^attf) Wtf fej tfp^ iy jajj (5) 

No. III. (Comp. § 78 seq.) 

: ]pr\ totfs tote DJ3 d^3 wi phi bu bm npa tea 

"- T ~ T - T T T - T •' T ' - T "T -T '- T - T 

No. IV. (Comp. § 78 seq.) 
: Dip ^2p 0BO ^SID ^nD tDD T3D ^1D p 1 ? IDT 

-'t -'t - t -t -t -t -t -t -t -t 

No. V. (Comp. § 78 seq.) 
: spp TO /1D1£ IDS ^BD S^D TJ^D ^DD ^0 ID 1 ? 



-T ~T "T "T 



2 



PART I. EXAMPLES FOR PRAXIS. 

No. VI. (Comp. § 78 seq.) 
J pB^T *?ia TO 1/13 TO nm 1033 tf 13 TO ^71 

' - T -T -T -T -T -T -T - T " T ~T 

No. VII. (Comp. § 78 seq.) 
:i3p flSB !%X 13D TlD "SflD "ttD J13^ ID 1 ? TIT 

-'t -t -t -t _ tt -t -t -t -t 

No. VIII. (Comp. § 78 seq.) 

npB ao3 As s]Di spa ife in aVi i&a i*?a 

'-T -T -T -T T -T ~T -T -T ~T 

No. IX. (Comp. § 78 seq.) 

: spa to ma to 



T " T " T 



No. X. (§ 224 seq. Par. III. IV.) 

:ity to TO nprr •sjiwi Dnn awi ysrr ttfin ran 

-T ~T ~T '- T ' - T -T - T ' " T -T-T 

No. XI. (§ 229 seq. Par. V.) 

: nni Dyta byn lyz pnt> ^s ins trri ina in? 

-T -T -T -T-T -T -T-T - T -T 

No. XII. (§ 233 seq. Par. VI.) 

rbv ntfD r\m nm n^s m? m? ma ^i rai 

-T ~T -T -T -T -T -T ~T - T ~T 

:ywym 

- T - T 

No. XIII. (Comp. § 111 seq. also Par. V. etc.) 

dsh prn rtrn ytcn ttqn nrj prn orn spn («) 

- T 

yntj tit ins sinn jnt tfrr ttj ttha to (5) 

: to 105 iidt to in inzo n33 mo -idd iao (V) 

-T ~T -T -T -T " T "T -T -T -T \ / 



PART I. EXAMPLES FOR PRAXIS. 3 

No. XIV. (§ 224 seq. Par. IV.) 

d^k nna ]m bnx *nnK -na ma im pnx !?ik 

_T -T'-T -T -T -T -T -T'-T -T 

:1dn 

No. XV. (§ 240 seq. Par. VII.) 
:rT3N PON *HnK *5)DK 1DK *?3K *?m* T3JK 

TT TT -T "T -T - T - T "T 

No. XVI. (§ 243 seq. Par. VIII.) 

: w Dtf* tf p* tv no* ^ i^ r<y yr by bw (a) 

TT -T ' T "T '-T '-T "T — f "T "T "T \ J 

J BT Y^ ^ 1^ #T \P' IV IS* JW ttfl* fj) 

-T ' -T ~T " T -T ' '-T '-T T ~T "T \ / 

No. XVII. (§ 248 seq. Par. IX. 

*:id^ pi i^ py id^ ^ zw 



■T ~T "T'-T "T ~T "T 



No. XVIII. (§ 251 seq. Par. X.) 

llfr TO ptf "ID"' TD*— :j&* j-^ » rw 



•T'-T "T - T 



No. XIX. (§ 252 seq. Par. XI.) 

:tftM isa bm bn Dpi ^ sp: biz vu yn mj 

-T -T -T -T '—t -T "T "T ~T ~T "T 

No. XX. (§ 256 seq. Par. XII.) 

*?ty %>b nan tpa y?n ppr ^r pa Wa Wa ?ra 

-T "T -T -T - T ' '-T ~ T -T " T - T - T 

:nn3 

- T 

No. XXI. (§ 267 seq. Par. XIII. XIV.) 

pa »fp mo *py -vw iw aw bw pw nw "nn («) 



4 PART I. EXAMPLES FOR PRAXIS. 

: iw inn jna (b) 

No. XXII. (§ 276 seq. Par. XV.) 

Kin an (vbti) xbn xbi K^n am nds ma ataa, 

TT TT\TT/ " T TT TT TT TT TT TT 



T T 



No. XXIII. (§ 280 seq. Par. XVI.) 

nss roo rra hod hdh rot hot nrn n^ rm 

TT TT TT TT TT TT TT TT TT TT 

: tvu) rm mp mp mp 

TT TT TT t't TT 

No. XXIV. (§ 293.) 

irvtb nw no* ni^ nnt^ mtf nstf 

-T ~T "T ~T -T -T "T 



NOUNS MASCULINE. 

No. XXV. (§ 345 seq. Par. XXV.) 

/■vote "n^ p'ro nta t& "13 yi-ir t^n 1 ? *rip -y>y 

No. XXVI. (§ 347 seq. Par. XXV.) 

•rpyD yyti -dvd b&n iDttfa iwd itfa b^D tavi 

t-:-t:- t-: - t : - r : • r t t • t •• 

: bbr^ Win bm bbSy 



T T 



No. XXVII. (§ 350 seq. Par. XXV.) 

yinrj *rtsao Dipa pna "lim ftijn ffrfc arcy tfYijj 

: itbd 



PART I. EXAMPLES FOR PRAXIS. 5 

No. XXVIII. (§ 353 seq. Par. XXV.) 

nn? bw 2& npy pny prrr y&i nni nw u)m biz 

TT T" T" P TT 'tt'tT TT TT TT TT TT 

T T ' T T 



No. XXIX. (§ 356 seq. Par. XXV.) 

jtfn* wi pw o^b bur isp i;v tw bra ip -na 

"T " T ' "T " T " T "'T "T " T "T "T "T 

No. XXX. (§ 359 seq. Par. XXV.) 

(1) A form, § 363. 

)r\2 lyz byi_ np. "Q# tfsg nnn ]33 na n** jna 

: Dm onb np3 ybp yr»3 

(2) E form, § 364. 

bps is* utf? npb aba -uv nnto nit bjn Dfra ?toa 
: pw *)bn nns tjj? to pgn Din npn on ^ 

(3) O form, § 365. 

nrfi 133 few TOi inii rnfc bis -i»fo bnfc ]2fc 

(4) J. form in verbs 137 and >*$, § 366. 

V52 °5? ^ Y?7 T? 15? n .^ T? ^ ^ *FV3 I?.** 

(5) Forms derived from verbs H v> § 367. 

w ^ *:wj *jn ng rtp *jhd ttd ^n ^n vrr *jei 

:>ba tu no t6 ^3 



O PART I. EXAMPLES FOR PRAXIS. 

O form of the same. 

: *>y w nn w **n w w ^t ot 

•t: *t: *t: # t: *t: *t: • t: *t: • t: 
(6) Inf. Segholates, § 368. 

natf Din nKS) iKt-^p jinn wrr Din w 1221 

No. XXXI. (§ 371 seq. Par. XXV.) 

wis ]ro nn'p -12^ tp'v pav nm ten rri mh 
: ratoj ifijw t?Vi ]fiy ipso inp 

No. XXXII. (§ 374 seq. Par. XXV.) 

irn no** B)» 53 n^ ttfa in tiro "jdd ph in p 11 dd 
1 .. ....... 1 _ T .. _ T _ .. 1 i .. ' _ _ T 

npj dik pwd ?[ttfnD njttfa n^ p? ^nn pp :ny w 

' t t ' t-: " t -: - t:v - : t: t t't tt 

No. XXXIII. (§ 377 seq. Par. XXV.) 

ntD nnto nnD npno na?n hjkj n*r>D nah ns£ 
: nDJD n^D nana rf?rr» nn?D 



NOUNS FEMININE. 



No. XXXIV. (§ 380 seq. Par. XXVI.) 

nste rwbn ntoa rfe® rwth jtop rrcha nans 

t • : t • -: t • -: t ••. : t : 't : t ••. : t : 

: ni^n nito rtervt nyip n^iy nnto rn«ra ny-v 

t • : • t t • : t t t ' : t • : t • : 



PATH I. EXAMPLES FOR PRAXIS. 7 

No. XXXV. (§ 383 seq. Par. XXVI.) 

niao niyto n^ mastf n»tei hdd: n^rr rfaj 

t •• t •• t" : t t ; ' t t : • t't: t t -: t t : 

T T T "• T" T " 

No. XXXVI. (§ 387 seq. Par. XXVI.) 

nsin rfeo? m^ rraa nft#K n^^i nsn asps 

t : v t : - t : • t : • t : - t : • t : • t' : ■ 

: nni nrrip rr:ipy rnnta nrrm rrr»y man 

t: t t • :'t t :t t t: t t : t t : v t : v 

No. XXXVII. (§ 390 seq. Par. XXVI.) 

rbtiftfr ripaig jibDD maa r6w rnnte no/tin 

ni^ Dib/iD rnb*ra ntfty rfefra roniD ^pfe 



PART II. 



EASY SENTENCES FOR BEGINNERS. 



:p«ra Bsrttf ovfta 1. 
: D\-frKn raw* yvirrnx 2. 

1 • v: t : • t t t 

tnsrra Prtto fn^JT^? 3. 
:dW Dipn^ri 1 ?** 121 4. 

it : ' t «.-• v: - : ^ * 

:*rrnDK vubx ^n 5. 

' iv t : • • :j-t • • : * 

i^b ir\B ^12112 6. 

i- • -t ' : it : • 

:nDttf *6 *rrn»N -ntfa ntotDipna 7. 

itt ' :It : • v -: tm ' : v 

arm* mxa vhx itfa min ^ -iBDln n 1 ? 8. 

iv : v v- : • t v -: t t - - • 

- it - •• t t -: ' •• 

trepan rtrrt n^m 10. 

it : - t - t : It : 

- It • • t : - : ' * 

:^r^^ D^pa 12. 
:JTjnrop* flaj n^> 13. 



PART II. SELECT SENTENCES. 9 

:^an mr\ *a D-ra ntitfra jrrt* rrtr 14. 

v it rJ" • t t ::--'• t : 

:rm Dn0Tp rum rrtrr run* nD:n n->rm 15. 

it • • ' : - ».- : at : - : • t : t - * : 

rntoD ptdV run *y»DVn oy:r:n na^n :ra 16. 

I : - ' • -1- ' • : -at t t : t : 

:i^ /rain aaftn fori nnfc no?)D nnfc 17. 

- IT -J- •• ; - AT " T 

:d*ijq ^t^inn m^rr rrtrr!? is. 

!•-■•• AT : - t x ^* 

nYrtoa n^tttow D^irta /vote wote 19. 

t : ' : : - : v a* t t : - ' : : - 



:r6«to fen \jvotei iNDD van d*d$3 nim 20- 

tItt :- ft : • ' • •• • - T -<. t: 

:toi* ruwn ^D3 un hk ntfw Mr? in 21. 

1 - • : at - - : t t 

:"W#£ D^nn ti mr\ *)3 nw tf*n 22. 
:ran hep* dw *sn p«ra mi? ;ii:ra 23. 

it t v - : _ * t : ' a* - : t : 

:npT DWi Dtth nma 1 ? p«ra ns? 24. 

'it : • • t : •• : at t : • ' • - vjv 

:yw vyn vpym ras 16* Dim ^in 25. 

-|"T* T t : '■•- : - AV 'vr •• 

:DDn nw own *n pnx >5 d^n nipD 26. 

it t v - : • t : ' a* - ■ - ' : 

ibwm vnsto? ■sfttrtrn ytfsr^rrp *6 onm 2*12 27. 

I" : - tt : •• : - <st - :v • t : : 

:id^d3 dw zb pro p^ nnn: s)D3 28. 

:*pjywfrTD siia*j *pgg«3 rrtrr-to* *?i 29. 

:rnay lina ^s^i mm id-id rrtrr run* 30 

"tt-: t •• : • : at : t - t : - :• " v * 



10 PART II. SELECT SENTENCES. 

srrtrr rnrrn prn vrya, •sit ttha-oTrta 31. 

it : •• : at •• : - •• : - t 

sjno tid rrtrr» r^-im yiy "s^ nf^^i ions 32. 

It" t : - :• : at - ••. : v v:-a vjv : 

\yty& dwb rh$i?\ dwiid nirr pirn 33. 

it : • '• • - - • : a- t : f t : ' t 

:Ytjb to* nirrn ta-n i$jt dt» n 1 ? 34. 

i-:i- -t t - a:- --: tt 

:ND3 ftp rnrraa, ^ wn rtW D^O MJfifi 35. 

I" • • 't t : • • - ftv -: • t : - -: i 

nnn^ nra nto Ynno nV^na nDDrrrtip 36. 

t : • t • ': 'a T " - t : t 'i: 

' V IT • 

:nn raa ifttto ^pb\ ftja iziniBh 37. 
:ma"^n prmrmi mnssh itf* "sjtt & 38. 

vit " : - t •-:!-: a- •• ■ • tt 'vjv 

:amn njrre tto ni^ m*t3jn mtoy 39, 

i" t • 't t : ' vjv : at •• vjv : • vjv — 

:«p^» ttm 13131 tfiD nfyjh rtasjrw t^a 40. 

:tv -ri^D irrm ^d 5 ) "ii^p d^dn ^k lito 41. 
:nn-TQT vbn jrnb po-rr6ttft ruin ns nto 42 

,. .... .. T ... at t: - : t •• -: - 

trnrv nS^b \r\y\ nn£ -vdi c]D|^ *v>;d 43 
TisD m rn'^i rana tcfcaa jnftrrrcoD 44 

• : - tt : v : at-:i- '•• - : - -a v - : ' 

iircsa run tthon-s 1 ? roita nnn run a^o 45 

I •• • T T T AT - J- T T • " "' 

jtthpa nnn sfeuin ^sbi flryq /W*n d*d irate 46, 



PART II. SELECT SENTENCES. 11 

tnbv rra 1 ? ron inn nnfe ruHm 47. 

I"t* tt : t : -a- t t : 

;"iit£r^j5no inns itoud nso infc yttfs nnfc 48. 

v It 'v - : :•'-•;- at - •• - vv, 

rtrrkyb "ibw ^ds 15 vq*£ qjg 49. 

: tfnp> JTl^n^ VSfi im W&* ^D3 \H3fr 50. 

it' :• •-.-:!-: ■ a* : jt • : •• : • 

:i^3: #piD ivtertw ten^na bw ^ 51. 

i : - '•• t t : a t • : • : • v 

j/vnttfD bytib win na irpN^Dn nsnrip Da 52. 

tiatwi pro yrVia, nin' otf tir^D 53. 

it :•:'•-■ ' t at : •• - : • 

trtttoi Vravr n^a yo«h D-m im intto 54. 

it • : • v;v ■ a t : • vjv : t t ■ •• 

:na>*t£p *d n*o:i mm -vr^nD tete^ tcfla nn 55 

tIvt- • t-: - : a--: 1- «• : - : • - ^^' 

: pms to# n^nfc 9 ) fitttfrrar o^m mo 56 

It : • - t v -; 1 : ' a T - : • - : vjt ^^* 

I- -J-: - : ' t: a vjv - j- : J ' ' 

ivbw xb Mrs item ptm» ; *6 onpttt ny 58. 

i-T" -t : - -t: a'vt* *'t : ■• ^^« 

sin* dots nw np-r» xb nnp& iti 59. 

t/fetoD nttfa nin^ /Vda rbm firo jt:i 60 

v it : - t • t : •• at - -:i- t *j- ■ 

*:/w vstt nrta W%2 itiu) rmo id# 61. 

1st t t : v a :- " t : • •• 

:^/innaa D3nn )v6b icm bzp] m$ #d# 62. 

mpn an nin 1 ' rw t^irn 1 ?* ntattfn& ni:n 63. 

'it • t : --:i- a- v : t -: I- - *"-" 

* QerinW 



]2 PART II. SELECT SENTENCES. 

: D3)T xb iii m'^Di iDtf hot i*>n v^ G4. 

it :v V J T : AT" v '•--<■ ' •• w 

:*«&* *d d^d» tfw Yron «ha *w trrfcrai 65. 

it :• • • v: •: a : - • T ' : • T T T "**• 

svwbto vhma ^ W3? "lBtf^D 66. 

!• t -!•• • : - t a - • '-"-'• 

ronwrn nw rrtir n*h rjn nyow ]t'k 67. 

iv-: - t t t : a t '-J-: - - i 'v j v ' 

: trbysv *py$ rips tfwrg nag aijwr^ 68. 

fsjWT lWwa. Vtj ^t tew vna Vgx* 69. 

yam itt^rtsi^ rrtrr-ra im-ib o^ate 70. 
1 ._ v _. T AT _ . v . A ... .j. .. . _ 

: Wjp n 1 ? pteft r snfe nrato arte -nora ttfw 71. 
naau* natn^a «w ray to dwi rat 72. 

iv • : t* : i" - at" • t : -jv 

tnirr d^d n'w .-ittfasa tthi W 73. 

it : t-. •• at : • tt • t * 

: nti'bw nirr ow rrnr *b npoy nrottf 74. 

it t • t : : at 'T'-.-a t 

«nqyp cw simia* nrw p^s ytfi 1 ? *)ftfc 75. 

7 t : • a- - •..':• t< t ' • • t t : *• " 

: &®xb 
y-iaa, ^ tuna vaa iw urnm warn Drfra 76. 

' vjt t - j- T It • TT "T A-- ; It • J •• t : • v: 

' 1 v t : • t : ' av : - 

w ^3 :to*?rp ^nrr 1 ? *tisi *\rmtirb nrsbs 77 

- •• t • : it • ' : it : • a 1 : - ' :1t : • t : i T ' ' " 

paoron "tid ibxb -imtixb 

• I- -: 1- : - t •• 'a v T ; • : 

:^miD> TDn rrtrra retern ytth*? autoD mi 78. 

lv : l: v v at 1- - - -: ; T tit • : - • - w * 

* 1 nw 



PART II. SELECT SENTENCES. 13 

:D»isrta V3 rvny\ ww wku) rrirr nana 79. 



it t : t 



nbrtb nna nyn vrf?a niir— wx ^m nttfa 80. 



T T AT V: T 



:D5&m vkt 1 ? a^ao rrtrmjaVo ran 81. 

:ia-nDm nain nti» rnn 1 ; ato-ra wn -id^d 82. 

:jmcw nrpKaTnai a^na^A rrirr anp 83. 

tDwrtf-ry sijtodw nion D*»D$na rrirr 84. 

'i* t : - ' :it v: 'av : - ■ j- t - : t : 

d*tn nan nSnn spratfo ^irmna 4-np^ 85 

t t at- : ' v t : • t. •• •• : - : :'it : • 

: rrirr jwin nbna} 

it : - • t •• : 

toe ^a dtk ^ai dvi5« ^fron np>-™ 86 

' vt : •• : at t - : ) • v: ' : : - 'tt - w 

1 i t v: iv 

: van* irm tfrta nar*TS«o rrirra 87. 

• it :v : - : t v;v •• -: : • t : •■ 

:iT toid rrtrma te-v n 1 ? fe^a 88. 

it t : : at • 

♦♦rrirr nntD 1 ?^ run DY>a ^-^ totofc ntfa 89. 

It : ;••:-: t t : a t v • : - •• : - ^*" 

:nn ^ipa wribxb W)n *p"wui cwwrta 90. 

it • ' : • •• ;• t 'at ': • • - t t «' v « 

triNnrferty ^Vra f?£ *nfa rt^y rrirr-a 

1 V I T T T - T 'vjv at : - t : 

*3 ;nrt^ d-tk era »ao Tjnao wt mm 91. 

' v It ••-: t t • • • a- • • t: -tv -: **■*■• 

;ymi cpn nnbtoi aViaa dwi ru:n 

- it •• -: '■• t - : • : «'t • • t : - : • 

:«ma D^aaia «&h na-fi dw nali nfanfcn 92. 

It *t 1 '• : *att - J - v: -: ^ ' 

:tQiB^ *?sny "wan ^ n^-nD mow 



A- -Jt 



14 



PART II. SELECT SENTENCES. 



in :n$a tty rrsrfHDi bvrny Efaa pwna 93. 

B)N :ww ! Gr*6 d^doi ^rw tfn rrv-or 

' - it •• : - • t i : a--: I- : - -t 

IT •• T T V AT • v: 

biKDfr :fr ^nmfti linKT -lajw f?rra Dip in 94. 

: i ' j- T I: t: -sv ■• : ' v: iv v'-a ' •■ 

:rwna *fri po* spy* ?rra *6v\nfcwa 

iv : v : *t : - -at : -: i- 

pwTra-i igna in;rp djbk nD«;i nv»a yw 95. 

'v it • • 

■tfa ti^a nuttf H-r^ ^t dwi tin D3 96. 

i • • : - * : at : • • t : 

it : • t t •• : a T ; It : ' - t 

jWm prf?N ^ »a j«q; *a ^n nipirno >3 97. 

: nix vty atarra ^ yattf* inpyxn 

itt tt t 1 • A-« - : • 't-:i — :». 

-*6 ;D^r) *w mcfci tftoaai avrnn pa 98. 

1 1- • : — - : •: A v:iv • - i '••i\ 

:^3ra w^ o^pn .imit Dun 

it : • -t ••••: a T :v 

nwxb \±> ra ra vxw tibi Taa ^*tt 99. 

v - : 1- • - at : • : • -v •• ' v 

1 •• • — ; - : • at t 

*pntf» ns vfrp in no^ rrtnrna iVw im 100. 



PART III. 

SELECT PORTIONS OF THE HEBREW SCRIP- 
TURES, IN PROSE AND POETRY. 



I. The original creation of the heavens and the earth, and 
the primitive state of the latter; Gen. I, 1, 2. 

' v it t " : ■«. - t - •■ * - v: t t * " : 

m-n Din/i "os^y ^m ^rtii nfun rum y-ikm 2 

: <*> : •■ : - ' vi : t t:It ' v t t: 

\tmn *&*?)> nsjrriD crn 1 ?** 



II. The work of the first day ; Gen. I, 3 — 5. 

"tin D*r6a *n*i : "ltonrro -fia w d s h^k idk^i 3 4 
^tfrrn am li^rj pa Dvfrtf !to3 nto-^ niKrj 

•.w •:!- t:at t't ' v v - : t • v: t': — 

:inK dv npirrm 

III. The work of the second day ; Gen. I, 6 — 8. 

V3. y=OD vm d^dh ^ina, yp"> w D^« im^ 6 

i .. • ; - • • /at- : - '• t •: • v: v j- 

D^n rs ^0*1 app-irma dtt^ wi : D"^ d^d 7 
.__'.. ...___>. TlT .. . „. _j._ . lTT . v _ 

tp.^ ^?? "^ D ?^n r^ ?*fn!? ^ryj*? ~>^ 

-wi a'Tjrwi d w ^pn 1 ? ovfra *np*i : p"wi 8 

..,_ VJV ..,_ ' A tt - '■ tt • v: t':*- I- •:!- 



16 



PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 



IV. The work of the third day ; Gen. I, 9 — 13. 

' t v • - t - -<- • • - - ' T . • •» v j- 

m&b mfot* K"ip s i nznm TW&n nx^™ inx 10 

T t-- • v: t .:— I" # :i- ^tt — vtI": tv 

tntana dvi^m h-m ww mp man mpo^ vnx 

1 • • v : :— a ■- t 't -v - ■•':•: ' t lv 

jn? ynto n'w wHi rwn aitfifl ovfrtf -iDtfn « 

-v - •: - •••••< v v ' v t t •• : 1- • v: v j- 

1 VAT T ._ v _. . : . . ... < . . ) .. 

m'ynb in? ynra nw not v-ian atfm :pnrni 12 
Dvf?N tarn ynyzb ta-fan? n# a nrri^ yjn 

V. The work of the fourth day ; Gen. I, 14 — 19. 

b^irib Q^rj yjna jtifcp w dt6h "19*1 14 
dw'm uhstefn nh'xb wn n^n p:n DV»n pa 

•t : • -: j : : t : t:at - •• - 

Y"iarrty i^r6 mbtfn ppiz rtSmb wn :dwi 15 

' v at t - • t : ■ - t - - ' • : • : • t : I* t : 

tin wbisn nSxftn wna Dvfra tyri nmm 16 
ibprr niKDn-JiKi ovrr j"6$od^ ^ran littftn 

' 't - t - v : - v jv : v : t - -r - 

DV3 totoVi imrt^ "van!? d* yp-a is 

: • : ' v It t - • t : -att - - '• : • 

Dvfw *m ^tfnn V11 i^n m y^n^i n^jbi 

• v: : — v a - •• t • : - : t: — 

pya-i dV -iprnm n'Tjnm tairo*^ 19 



VI. 77ie wor£ of the fifth day ; Gen. I, 20—23. 

*)iyi n*n #33 \n# o^bn Erroh wriba -id***) 20 

' : at- vjv ' vw • - - : : • • v: v j- 

ovfra *o:n : D^Disfn rp*i ^s~fy Y"wrri>y ns»y> 21 

. .... t :•- • it t - - '• : •• : - ' v t t - '*• : 



PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 17 

wai> spa 6)fy"^D riai dm 1 ? D*sn *ntf i^ 

.... i TT i - T ... vi-: • - - :it v -: 

a •• • v: t vst:- l • • v; : — 

1 v it t •.•;•' t : ■ - - v : • : 

: won dv iph^m n"unrrn 23 



VII. The work of the sixth day ; Gen. I, 24—31. 

rvmi rtPD 1 ? irn wj v^kn K^in d^h -.2^1 24 

t ■• : t • : t - ■••<••• v t t •• ■ v: v j- 

tin Dvfra twi :p"vm rWDb yurtnvn &D"n 25 

• v: -j— 'i- -:i- at • : ' ■••«■ :i-: ■•••r/T 

t •• : t • : t •• : - v: t • : v t t — 

iDrfji :iton3 ovf?a jrg ^nra 1 ? ™™n "ran 26 

vw t t : v t t t : t ••• : - ■ - t - : t - 

\cbx3. D"n*rma wribx »"ih*i :yi»rr^ 'rain 27 

: - : t t it v v; t : •- v it t - •• It 

:d/i& vr& mpy\ -o? \nfe k-q D*rfr« ote 

it t t t'": tt a t t '•". vjv : 

ot ns dtt^n on 2 ? id^i frrf?>* Dna ^n^i 28 

: : • v: vt v - • v: t vjt:- 

t\tyy\ D*rr nra mi rotfam parma wtai 

' : t - - : • : t <■>•-. : • ; ' v <-t t v : • 

v: J- ' v It t - v jv It t - t : • - t - 

♦JsrVj -i#n snr jn? n^jr^-m 05b \nri:) niin 
jrn jn? vyns ta"-itfN wrrtarvutt pkrrta 

-at - •• ' •• • : v -: ' •• t t v: ' v t t t 

■ - t - t : v t t — t : it : t : v : i* ?t 

t v t t vjv v -: ' v t t •• : 

-^tik D s r6a *m : pnm nb^ i"w p-v 31 

t v • v: :-- 'i- -:r *t : t : v v.- • v;v 



18 PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 



VIII. The original institution of the Sabbath ; 
Gen. II, 1—3. 

Dto DTfra by\ : DKasrt^i nam wmn ibyi 2, 1 

... _ ._ It t : t : vu t : • J- t - ••. :- 

^yattfrr ote raw n'w ifoK in:?i6p tPitfn 

v <t :- it t v -: : - : t ■ 



IX. 77ie formation of man, and the condition in which he 
was at first placed ; Gen. II, 7 — 17- 

-•- t t-;it • TT T TlT v v: t : v •- 

W :nrr t^: 1 ? aian w a^n jiotto vsaa, 8 

_._ , T _ V jv : t t it -:l- a- - - : • t - : 

t t it v t vjt- v'av • vr : - ■ v: t : 

1 " t t t -: it • v: t : - : — itt v -: 

1 T - ' : • - - * " : *r -: I- : : v : - : t : v 

tin Jiip^n^ rtpD *w -irm :jm nto zi^nn yjn 10 

' : - : •. tt: itt -v- - ' ••: 

-Trmn d^ iD^Nin n^nnK 1 ? mm tis* otto) pn n 

t v it •• I" t t t : - : t t : •• t ■ t • at - 

t t -: t •-: 1- ' vjv t •• •• - ' A • 

PNi nb'izn an) lira wnn ynttn nm* :intn 12 

v ;v : - v : - t a • - ' vjt t — : I Itt - 

-bi jin nniDn wn iinra 'wn nnarrotfi :dtoh 13 

T " *• ~ ' A • • " - TT - I" : - I - 

' •• 1- 'vv • • • : - tt - I-- : 1 ' vr/ 

mm nf-n :m3 win '•ya-n -inam ■vjtsto ns-rp 15 

t : ' it : ■ • : It tt - : a - - : '• 

;mD^ trftyb rorpi •inmri crwnnN dv6n 

it : t : t :t : •.••• - : j at t it v • v: 

tea prryy ^bD nbab trotrrty &rtbn mm w 16 

t t - ' i" • <s •• t t it - • v: t : -:- 

»3 s)3DD *?:>&n ^ jm nto form yya 1 ) t^Rn 17 

AV ' TT - " " ' • " I" 

\r)V2F\ JTIQ !)5DD ^DN DV2 

1 t ».v • ' : t -: : 



PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 19 

X. The formation of woman ; Gen. II, 18 — 25. 

'mb aiarr nm hSenkb Dvfra rhrr norfi is 

a - : t t i t v: • v: t : 

T T T V "T- * - T - T " : V T - - - T. 

vjv t t it t': 1 v -: : a t': • - : • 

rrDrQrrW* rtottf mxn *op^ ttotf win rrrr 20 

t •• : - t : •• t t it t': •- i : t - 

vv t t 1 t t : Wt - — : * - t - 

ltt^«i Drorrfy norm dtt!?k rrtir te*i :^^3 21 

at •- t t it - t •' : - v: t : ••-- I : v : 

rrirp jh*i : mnnn nto i5D s i vjtj^sd nn>* npi 22 

t : '•/•- tiv : - t t :•- t :- • - - '- — 

nam TT&xb DT^rrp rrtfrWH y^rma DTt^ 

t«.v •":- at • : t t it • '-t v -: t •• - v • v: 

-t-:i- vv< - - - t t it v - It t It 

-nnpb ttfwb ^ m$ *np nmb ntoiD ittai 

t't:I--. • •• • t • "'t- : a* t : • t t 

pm tom-iNi yaaviN tfnrntr P"^ : n^-t 24 

' - t : a -.• : • t v t-;i- I 

•••••: :!•- it v t t : t: : • : 



XI. Temptation and fall of the first parents of the 
human race ; Gen. Ill, 1 — 7« 

rrtr nfcy -rctot rn&n jitt fea D^Sy mn ttfnam 1 

JT : <.T T )•.'-: V T - J- - * T JT T T T - - 

xb ryftbti no^na *)>* nWKrr^» n&tf*i dv^n 

j • v.- j- t l" '-< t • jt v v - a- v: 

att - v v.t • it v J- It - ' J" <- ' : 1 

prrfim im wn ns^i \bzto prryy nso 3 

't - ' 1 : jv -: ' •• t j- : • l- \t - '?• ;• : • 

-p P wji ^1 -uba teDRn *6 ovfta idk 

' v a <.; • ; : •.• • : 1 < • v: j- t 

1 ••. : ». I AT • IT V tTT- v j- 1 ••. : 

av •• l" k } : : • : v • jv : t -: : • • v: -j- •< 

* p-nt» nnw WXl 



20 PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 

*3 n&Nn mm :jm nia *jrtf D^riVrta d'jttti 6 

j. T • IT VJ— ITT J I" : I • I" v • : I 1 

vyn nami D^y? Nirrrrmn w ^Na 1 ? vi?n nia 

' ■• t <t : v : • - •■ it j t -: i- s* : t -: i- : ' •• t 

nay preh»yDa ywi totf in insa tobi ^itorA 

w ■ ^t • : - 's- • - _ a- - i : • • '/- • - - : - : 

an dbtv ^ $h*i ofrctf >w rnnpsni :bzti*i r 

a" «•• ••. i" t' :j-— v •• : j* »■ t : '- t • - i- 

:rh3rr an 1 ? iw n:Kn rbv VBm 



XII. Trial and condemnation of the same, for their first 
offence; Gen. Ill, 8—19. 

rvrb |sq ^nna DvfrN nin^ 'to-jin wattfn 8 

- j : \t - >• - ; • ic v: st : ' v : • • I- 

dvt^n nirr ^so imtfNi dinh Harm*) ovn 

jt : •• : • : • : ttIt .._.._ A _ 

anNn-^N d s ;-6n nin 1 ' mp*i :pn vy "nina, 9 

at t it v (• v: jt : in-"':*- it - '//•■ v. : 

mw pn \nyatf ?6p-nN nam trra^N i 1 ? nam 10 

^T "IT AT" -H-T J'r'l V V - TlV- (. V J- 

dw *3 n^ Tun *a nam tNinw ^n DYjns « 

v •• j- ' : j- • •< v - I- ti-'t • k. r j •• i- 

saaartaa wbib wi*er n$N YitfHon nnN 
Nin nay rmro n#N n#Nn anNn nam mbm 12 

^* • t- t j-t jv -: t 'It at tit v i- t : it t 

tok 1 ? D^rf?N nirv nam \b5m v^n"ia Vmnj 13 

*.t *it •}' ■••: st : v - i" it ' >.•• t • ) • t : it 

:tafei *0N^n t^ran nt^Nn naN.ni jrtoy nN-rna 

I" it -v.- • • jtt - t • IT v - A- T J 

ninN JnNT jtw ^ SnarrtN 1 D*»rf?N rhrr nam 14 

< T T J' T J - TT " V J" V: T : 

^Hn *\Tirby mfcrr rm bhiy\ nararr^a nnN 

' •• •- j' : 1 : - av t - j- - 1 • t •• : - t ■ t - 

?y\ nm jt&n 1 nn^Ni ;w >d^3 ^Rn nsyi 15 

j-- ': l" • t jt •• : ' Iv - ;••: t v.- /tt: 

nnNi tfNn *rsw vm nynt pn nynr yy\ rrcterr 

ct -: j' : 1 : < at : - j-- *.'-::-' r- t • it 

•srJtoor ranN n^nn nbN nifirNrr^N :np^ ^3-v^n 16 

j" : • v : - <t : - - t jt - it v i -, t jv : 

Nim ^hpton i(&tx*>rx\ d^i h^d nsya ^inni 
^. 1 ..i T j . 1 .. . v . A . T j. .).. vvv . '.. ,... 

^rjn^N ^ OTtf ^ nbN din^i :^2~^a , » \i 

'•••:• 'j : t : - t j- - t jt t : it t : • 

i5aa bzxn xb ibxb v ri^s n^N yyrrp ^DNjni 

AV -v- J ' • • • <v -: ' •• T • 

w bb mbixn iinsva Twaipa nanNn nnnN 

j--: ». tv-: 1 t* : ' v -: i- t t".It <t -: 



PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 21 

sJWma nbw) rf? rvmn tttti Ytoi iwi is 

vr v vt:-it: 'at - j- : - i- : - : '■'./: 'lv- 

-*?n raitf T? Er6 : ^rin *p9« /una imfen 19 

' ; I <- vv - J ' v - <— : lv t - 

isor^Ki m "lBjna .nnp*? h-jed ra nD-ran 

V.TT V: T - JT T I* T :VlT\ TV.' ■ J* T T -; JT 

I T 

XIII. PFic^ecfoess and condemnation of the Antedilu- 
vians ; Gen. VI, 5 — 8. 

nar^ai yi»:i d^kh run nsi >a rrtrr *nn 5 

T : •/at t wtit j- t sft- - -»• t : :j — 

nii/n mrr on 3*1 : DVrrte jn pn in 1 ? mtinD 6 

jtt I* T : vjt'- 1 - t i- ' j- • j : : - 

t : v J- 1 • v *.-•- :•- ' vatt It t It 

t t -: It j-* : - •• • t t v -: <t tIt v v : v 

*a twotfrl tftrun h&dttp rrana-ry dtnd 

j* *at t - j - : v iv - t •• : - t t !•• 

: nirp wa in nxd mi : djt'w *3 ^om 8 

it : ;•• •• : \" tjt - : i« • — j- •;<.-• 

XIV. The threat of their destruction repeated. Noah is 
commanded to build an ark, for the safety of himself and 
family ; Gen. VI, 13—22. 

-it : it i- -t : jt t t t <•• - : ■ v: 

:rwrma anWD urn dptosd dot v-ikh 

' v iv t v it • : - i". I-: av •• : • «. T t ' v^ t 

at •• - v jv -: 1- v r - v ••-: j- •• ' : < — : 

nw -rato nh : 133:1 wtd-1 mo nnfe msai 15 

w-:i- ■>••■ -: v: v I - ' v • • j- • -jt jt : -It: 

HDN ontfon rdnn Tifc hdk jtind te^ttf prnfe 

t - <• • -: t •• - V < T - j •• s : A T 

nhrb nwr\ 1 nrft tnriDip n^a D^tth ram is 

T — jv-: 1- - j It t '1 \x - -»• : t : t 

rr^T^a mm nnsn rfty&te n-ton n^N^N") 

jt • : v.t •• - -jv t : - : • tjv- : t - v: 

t t t j ,# - : ' v t t • - j - - v • •• 

YiN^ntfa bz D*D$n nn™ D^n rm iVi^K 

' vit t v -: j "Att - - «.- • • - - j v -: 

runrr 1 ?** m^ im \nn:mN \nbpm urw is 

t •• - v t t at ■ f • : v j' '• -j- it:- 



21 



22 PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 

- t t • It ' ' v.- t I" : j' : : • : 'j:- t t - 

•sjinN jiTm 1 ? m^rr^ win *?bD n^ttf T^-teo 

at • j-:i- : it"' - v >■• t ^ • *s- : t t t i- 

pt^d 1 ? rtararrp 1 ) inrft 1 ? nu™ ;w mp:n *dt 20 

t • : t •• : - • •• . * : J tI" i :i- it'": jtt 

T^N J)to'» ^3D D^# mVZb HD1KH Mai *?i)D 

' iv •• ;t ^ • *s- : A" • : wtt:It v jv ^ • 

•• tI" jv -: t -: 1- t • ' : '- jt -:' I -: I-: 

bbl rto torn jrfioN 1 ? Dn*?i ^ rvm *p*?n dhjdki 22 

-a -v.— it : t : ivt : -r : jt t : 'a-: •• <. T : -it: 

:n*w p D^n^K ink rm -itfa 

itt >• v' v: -J JT v — 

XV. Entrance into the ark, and prevalence of the flood ; 
Gen. VII, 7—24. 

m^rrta in** Yoi"ntf^ totfw vn? ni ton 7 

at •• - v ». • ^r t 1- : s : • : t t - jt- 

nbnarpD*! rnintsn nanarriD j^dh *d \bd 8 

- *.•• v -: j : ' t • at : t>.v •• .»v -: 

-dt nn^n"^ nr^ wa d^ n^ti jrrcrrNn 9 

jtt ».t " - v -0 v st •-.: •- : Itt-: It 

j- : • : «.-:i- -i v <•• v: jt -jv -: l- at'-: 

rrt»D~ttW nit^a tv-iarr^ -vn ^ikarr w own 11 

< •• 1- - : • * v it t - <.t _ _ j.. A . T _ 

rirwi nk"i ainr^ hw^:) wpu ron ova 

j ••. -: 1- t - J : : : - t ': : • v - j - 

dV> dwin Y-i&rrty Dttfan *m nnnsa dwh 12 

j- t : - ' v at t - v v.v - j • : - it:-- • v.- t - 

DrrrDtth nis &2 fr-Tn Di s n D'iia :nW> D^nai 13 

;t: I" : - Jt v - < - v v : t:it v.* t ; -: 

i.t • ^t t i" : v s : - v j- : -a ■• ; vi.vt 

T * : t •• : - t : t • : jt - 1- r : r ■•■ It •* - 

wn"^i ttWD 1 ? y-mrrty 'win frD-in- 1 ?^ 

' j t t : a" • : v \.t t - ;•• it vjv t t : 

at " - v - V. JT- Itt t j • v. " * : 

• t - : 1 • - •» «■ " _ : t t - t • • - : • <- : 

* v»p2 xnn 



PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 23 

a* v: (. jt • jr.* -: i- t t t t • <t'": tt 

-by dY» toehk tesn w :Vbei mm -liiDi 17 
toa Dim ninrrriN w D^bn -la-vi Y"wn 

j- •• t^t- t •• - v : •- • - - J :•- ' vat t 

ybiy) vmrrby nto sqti d^dh -ra:n :nan is 

1 \' }••- ' vat t - *. : ; :*- * i> — ->::'- ' v It t 

-^ ito ito nna b*brn :d^h ^r^ mnn 19 

v. : j : i» : It • - - : • It - ;•• : - \.r " - 

"te nmr-itfK trrnan ohnrrta -iedi "pan 

t - v. - v -: : - • t iv t ••. : I- v a t t 

•at - (. : it t .- - : • t - <" : v •• -: • It t - 

< t ' v t t - J" It jt t t -: '- I* t Iv <. ••.:!- 

to riarrty ritpn ntftTtoto mm*! nDi-an 

*. : ' vat t - 'j- - - Wv - t : t -j- t •• : - 

nitfa feo vim iwr nvr/iDiflj i#k *?3 j-tn»n 22 

Jv -: • t - : • - - : • v -: It tit 

^%-by 1 -^ 1 D^rrtoJia rrDi : via ra^m 23 

j.. . _ Jv _. 'j : - t v -•- i" i/r t t iv 

&hm sftsrryi ibdVtp norErry bias toikh 

■ - t - j - : v v - t •• : - <t t i" t t -: It 

♦♦mm in** i#ai nrijtf iKtth Yiarrp nnD^ 

it •• - v. • ;■••-: I- - -j - vst'- ' vat t • *. t*- 

t dV il&D 5 ) D^DTT VIKrH^ D*&PT m^l 24 

i (._ . j. . - : i v a t T - • «.- - j : :-- 



XVI. Abatement of the flood. Noah and his family quit 
the ark ; Gen. VIII, 1—20. 

nbnirr^vw mnnrta jw ni"/iK ovfra ibn 1 
raw yiNrrty nn ovfra -djw nuna irw n#a 

t t- ' v t t - - ;■ v: ••-:!-- a t •• - (. • j-.- - : 

atoi D^Dt^rr ninai Din.n ni^D FbB«\ :d^dh 2 

r • t * - • at t - *.•••-: I- : j : : - : It • - -It - 

•srt^n rian too d^h totf*) tD^&rrp Dttfun 3 

' J T ' V(.T T 3- " "J" ~ S--.T- ' IT T - • VIV- 

rorvt ;dV na^n Dntforr nibft D^bn norm n^tfli 4 

-<t- l v.t : ;• • -: ••': • • - - j : : — a t 

v,- v a - (. jt t It : • : • : - v j - t •• - 

ttnnn -w item "srt^h -vn D"»am :tDiiK nrr 5 

v j - v- t : j t t • : It t -: )-• r 

:onnn *tfm wi^ tcN4^ ln^2 hw ^'wyn 

l; t iv ;•■ t v. : • v jt v : • • -: It a- • -.- i T 

kx •• - ' ) - v - j- : •- a j- t : - ' \- ■ • ;i- 



24 PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 

— or lith irty iwi myrrna n^i ;n*w "lttfa 7 

T T <••••- A-. | T ... (.- - : - | TT | T - : 

a • 1- (. T - ... j- - 1- » v | T t j- ■• • «.- - v y : 

T ; it i : it t-: It j- : \r - • - - 'j--. : • 

^ ninrrta vbtk awn ptfrnp 1 ? niin rwrr 

j. T •• - V T •• T <t- t : - - : T T 

nnfc aa*i nftp*> Vr r6t0*i pwrrta ^3-ty d^d 

•;t r-T- t v't'- t <- : • - ' VA T T T j-- : - • «.- 

'v^i- a- •• - : (.. T j- : • vjt- it •■ - v it •• 

j- : t <t •• t- It ■• - • vr v j — 

•1^3 m jn*i rrsa spa JTrr6y nam any 
onn» w nyattf -ftp bn**\ ty-iarr ^d d^dh 12 

A- •• -; k . T J- : • ^ VJT'- ' V IT T J 1 " • V - 

wi :nty vtoraw nBD , »-*fr') niY»rr™ rtettfi 13 

•:l- 1 v.t •• 1 jt :It 1 : t - v — :- 

*ia-n u)iiib rrrma fatona nitf rfiaa-wi jifma 

J : It v - jt v : ' -It t t " I" : - - : 

*rrh ninn nD3D™n^ ni -ion vikh ^d d^pf 

. T •• - J"* : • V - -<T~ ' VA T T J" " • »- 

rootfa •dttfn birm imixn ^3 -lain nam 14 

st : • : ... - ... - It t -; It ;•• : ^ : It r- • : 

' vIt t <.t :it v a- v -j- : v: 

mnrrp *^ i-)btib nh-bx dv6» isti 10 

at •• - • v I ^ v (. • v: .»•• -:- 

t - It t ' It • 'v.v t !••: ' jv t -r : : • : r - 

v-j"." t t : i» t ■•• : - st t t t • ' : • v -: 

toT) ns 1 ) ywa sfiritth •sfjna *mi YiKrrty totfirr 

<* t : -> t ' v t t j : It : at • j - " : - ' v ^ t - ;•• It 
1 • *.t t I" : ) : • : ^t t - a ..<.••- ... | T T 

YiKrr^; ^Din ^S ^^n-^D 1 ) ^Dnrrte n^nn-^3 19 

' VAT T J" ». T T : V V T T T -I- T 

at I- -<.••: • -^ '-.•;— It •• - ' • <. : It v •• j : : • : 

■-J — t - ' j t • t : - jt ■• : - j • ' — 

tnatDa f)bi> 



PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 25 

XVII. The building of Bethel, and the confusion of lan- 

guages ; Gen. XI , 1 — 9. 

*.•:- I" t -: v.* t : at v jt t ' v«.t t t .>* :- 

: Dtf !q«m n^ttf v-iaa nypa wskm aipD oy wa 

it : j — (.t : • ' vw : -jt': • j : : — vViv ■ jt : t : 

nsntttti D^n 1 ? rua^j nan VBrrta tc^a *nDtf*i 3 

(.t : : • : • ■• : jt : : • t t< •• •• v j* : I- 

iv t jt t t •• j- : v t : t •• : - <v t • : - at •• : • 

Wxi) *fis&i *vi? fa^rbis 1 nan no^i : ifthb 4 

j : t : • • jt v : • t jt : I - v I - 

' v it t t j- : - ' u'y a- <.t v -: - : • - r - 

(. t }.• -: at: • - v : v.* t v j : • t : vj"- 

rirm nsftn Vm ay in rhrr -l&ri*) :dikh 'oa 6 

- - <t t : tv <- J- t : v j- It t It j- : 

1) v •• j" t • I t - : a -: 1- jt • 1- v.v: t \ : 

Dnsfr d# n^nji rrro nan :/nto^ jdp -i#k 7 

att : <-t jt ;It: t :l" tt< i —I- v. :it jv —. 

ona prtrr ys^ ^nm /ism t^a tifoifl* n 1 ? nttfa s 

i>T ;t : vt- i" " j- : <■• : : • j v -: 

)irbv ityn nn 1 ? storm p»rrta ^3"^ Dt^D 9 

'•• - 1 • t j : • 1: :-l- ' v*tt t j- : - (.t • 

V"i»rr^3 riBfc rrtn* ^a otf^a *?ia riatf mp 

' vat t t j- : vt : j- t jt • v t t : <t't 

v It t to-: - t : jt • v: t • 

XVIII. The calling of Abraham, and the first promise 

made to him; Gen. XII, 1 — 4. 

v.' : : - I • ;' : : -I- j 1 : 'v t : - v t : v <- 

I'vb ^iwi naia -i^k vi^n-^ spaa jra^) 2 

j : ' : v iv : t' lv : - jv -: ' v it t v ' a- t j- • 

fra^a^i :nma rrm *rbtf rtoaiti oti Wh 3 

t : it -: 1- Itt : l":iv 'av : v.t : - -: I- ' :vjt-;i- t 

rrattfD bb ^ra ••d-qji ^ *bbpm tmo 

/ : : • v ' : j : : •: a T ». ' : v»- : ' v-:jt : 

i?^ rfw vbx na^r -i^a Dia» ^»i inDinrr 4 

'•:;•- t : t •■ <v ■ v -; i- t : - vj*— It t -: It 

t t j* : • : • t <•• t v t : - : a *. • 

:pno i/i^a 

'it ti- v •• : 

pn V"BP * 



26 PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 

XIX. The second promise made to Abraham, while residing 
at Mamre; Gen. XV, 1—6. 

Dni*r^N him— an mn rhxn unyin i nrm i 

t : - v t : - : <t t v ■• t j* t : - j- - 

*\iyv rf? pa baa nhna NTrr^x nba 1 ? nrm 

«.' : it : 't 'j- t -it t: - jt • - a •• iv-:l- I- 

*!ryw-rT& mm *a*ra ohna "ibj^i nfco nnn 2 

• v • - • v: <t -: t : - v J- i : ;•• : - 

ptoEH K^n tfrat p^a'pi nny ■sfan ^awi 

l v jv - «. • •• • v jv ' v A« • - : 'j» v.- it : 

nam jn? mnna tib ^ in anna naiw nnntot 3 

j" • : -at tv-t j • J" t : - v j- viv • v: 

i&vb toa nim-m nam tmfc tthV w:rp 4 

t •• <t : - : •• • : I- r- v •• v 

:*rah* wn was n^ W ins nt wv* n 1 ? 

' iv t I" *. ' v •• • j-" jv -: • I* av k' : It • J 

nsjo-i mfo&n aa-tann 'im^S mnhn ink «srt*i 5 

. T . _ T _ JT .. _ V - T - " 

mm rla ft la^i Dnfc ibo 1 ? tavrDa D'drjpn 

V.V :l* J V J- AT J t • I- • • T J - 

\wix ft rat^ri nima parti :*pnt e 

'(tt : «. tjv : :— at i- Vv:iv: 'tv :- 

XX. T^e third promise made to Abraham, at Mamre ; 
Gen. XVII, 1—8. 

nim vh*\ w«> Wm na# dwp D^aa vm i 

t : t"- a - t - j" : \.tt ->•:•'•.• t : - j*:- 

v*b tf?nm *hv ^»"^» tea 10*1 oSi*rto* 

v- t : 0" - : • -- j-* i" -; t •• v <- t : - 

raiai na'a 1 ) wa vmn nanw idwi mm 2 

jv : - : 'av •• j- •• v.* • : jt : v: i* t ;•• :iv 

■urn vas-^y o-aa Vs^ :nto -r*to:i nniN 3 

j- -:- a t t - \.r : - J'- 1 : J : • v : i 

ji»m "nrw wo nan w nb** 1 ? ovfra in>* 4 

t • t: 'a t • v.- • : i" • • -: i ■• ».••••: ^ • 

d-dk *ptfviN n^ *npn6i Jtfia lisn na 1 ? 5 

AT : - <.' : • v -j j-'t- i : I- j -: «.- : 

:*rwu D ^ liDn-nK »a Drma to# mm 

' I* - : v j -: - 0' t t : - ' : • <t t: 

D'cte 5 ) D^ab *pnrtfi nto ntoa ink vnam 6 

v.. t : a* : '*.•-: : j : • ' : I <•••:• : 

D^a 1 ? ^ nvn 1 ? D^ty jini 1 ? Dn^i 1 ? ?rnn« njnr 

!•• ' : < : i* at j- : • *.t i : ' -j:- -: I- s'-: :- 



PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 27 

• j- t: at (.-•-. -: I- ' - - : ' v jv t ••< w: ' vjv 



XXI. Abraham offering up his son; Gen. XXII, 1 — 19. 

tin hdj Dvfotm rhikn onrnn Vm vm 1 

it* • v:jt: v •• t j- t : - - - *:l- 

norfh pjsjh iDs-rn Dma** v!?» id»W Drraa 2 
prorvm rnfTN—i#K Tvnrnx ^z-nx vSrnp 

' t : • v t : - t v -: <':!•: v » : ■ v t '- 

"rn» ^ n^ ritf -liitym rmfen y"W"^n *6"^ 

j- - -< t : t <■•-:!-: at • i - ' vvv v ': v: 

'v t t : - •• : — ' lv •' j- «.-.• -: ■ t iv 

mi \i*» inyj ^tf"J"ia ng3 YibrrriN tarrn 
Dip&rr 1 ?** -sfth dd»i n^y w Jm*i to prop 

\t- v v— 'tjt- t j---: »-- : - a : ' jt : • 

nnnn^ Nteh *tM>$n ova :ovft»n ft--)o*r-)tfa 4 

st t : - t •- • : - J - I* v: It j -it Iv -: 

Drnna 10^1 :prra Dip&rrnK k-pi wii» 5 

t t : - v - ' I Tl- \ t - v :; — i/r •• 

v-t :l" — - : j*-: 1- -: l- • jvt : tt : 

"/i» brrDK np*i :dd^n ru-itttti mn^i n:ny 6 

t t : - ' Iv •■ -: t j t : iv-: I- : • : a 

tfarma yVq rip**) to prnrty riton nbyn *& 

v t v t : 'j*- : ' jt :• - vr t It j*--: 

"^» prop -i&ri-n srrpp orotf -D^i rfaaDrrriNi 7 

v ' t :• v - it :- iv " : -» :"l- v/»v-:l- - v : 

"id^ ^n ^Jin nb*i s nK -10^1 raa nmiN 

a- : *JV • v *•- ' T v j- • T <T t : - 

on-aa nD*n irbyb n'm nw mbm ^»n nan s 

t t : - v It : «.v - .*•• - : • •• jt : ■"• t <" • 

(.v •■ : j ■>— a- : <r : ■/•/ - .» v :l* • v: 

'•„••- • v: It j - It jv -: ' t - Iv t- It ;- 

-jiK tdsfi ownha w*i nirarma amia d# 

'=•1— a- -It v ' i-l— -••;•- v tt: - < T 

xmyb byton rritDrr^ tiife dtfn to prop 

I- "It - v- ■ -....- - v<t- : ' jt : • 

vhvb rbwnrrr<x m^ Si^nx onni» n^"i 10 

t : • vav-:i- i- v \ — t v t t : - <- : •- 

TDK"! twattfrrp nin^ *n^a rt» nVi 5to"/i» n 

-.-(.- ■ -t - ' « t : '<-:- t •■ t 1 :-- i : 



28 PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 

• : -t jt - j- t a : *■ - )- - : v ' : it 

_ _ . _ ■■ • ; : — t •• v t t : - t •- • lv * 

^arma rrp*i Dmna "sfc-n mpa pD2 troo 

• - t v 'j-- t t : - •••<••- at : '- : \r : - jtv:iv 

Dto&mjtf Drraa Nnp s i :to nn.n nW -irfwi 14 

'j t - !•• -jt t : - st':*- i : -J- <.t r--:l-i- 

rrirr ira o^n" idk , » nttfN rorv 1 ni;r a-inn 

<.t : j- : - j-- tI" v — av :• jt : ". •- 

"p mv} nrvizirbit nirp ir»te anp-n tnKi 1 15 

*.• •■ at t : - v <r : ';- : - ^t':-- lv t!" 

<v -: — < • at : \ ; •:<.-:• j • v - 'It t - 

via *p2r/iN rotor? tib) ntn nrnrma rwy 

v ^ j ' : • v t : <.- . t j : v - jt t - v t. • t 

mnrriN nznx n:nm *j:h:i» "spn^ij :*rTrp 17 

'-: :- v <;v - t : -: ' : v It -: 'j- t i- 'lv •: 

' vat t j*' v '-::-: j -: It : • : it : I - j- v 

viyjrta orraN 110*1 r^pi ot«i -lttfa npj; 19 

tt : v t t : - t<t- l-' : t : v.- t )? -: ':••' 

1x22. bifida nto*i ynto naa-fo r-rrp w^i »p?i 

>•• : • it t : - •••/•- -at j ,# : v v.t :l- i ;l*— :;'vr- 

XXII. Appearance of Jehova to Jacob ; 
Gen. XXXV, 9—15. 

Tim din naa ito Tii? apsH?a wrbx *n*i 9 

' v w :- at-: j — *. ' -:l- v <• v: t - -- 

' : • ■• 't* 1 'a- : 1- j' : • i« v: ; I- I 

-na aip*i nb# jtjt !?a"WDa s 2 npr lii 

/*•':■- ' v : jv :l- •• t : • * <• ' -: I- 

' jvt-:I" v t : t a-.- • jv :i- c j-': j •• : 

rf? pn^ nr\i2xb ^Jii n^N viKn-nNi :-i»^ 12 

j' : ' v.t : • : ->t t : - : «^-t jv -: ' v t t v: I*— 

vbsm bjpi ixmrrnx )nx Tina isnT^i n^jDN 13 

v.tt •• -;~ ' v It t v ' )•• :• ' <:• -: I- ;'-::-: tAv : v 

rrn-^D ip^ n-^i :iDN -m-itfa nwftz wnbx 14 

t •• - ' -:i- 1 • ):• • v -: 'it- a- ■,•; 

^dj n^ ^d^i pa nn-^D ir)N in^"!^ Dipi^i 

' vv t v t '< 'vat vjv - v. • i\ • v -: \> t - 



PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF PEOSE. 29 

im oYpar? DtfviN npj£ *np*i tiDg n^tf pan 15 
fiarrfia mfat nw Yna nil 



XXIII. Birth, education, and flight of Moses ; 
Ex. II, 1—15. 

ntixn inni :^-n2~n^ rrp*i n^> ma «fa* 7^1 2,1 

>.T 'IT -J I'" - V \— A'" J" • K' '-.-J-- 

jt : 1-: : i" - j -J* ■••<••- 'a- v j- - 

-j- '-!•- • : - -it : It I : i- t: 

owm "r^rma na own ran 5 ! idto rmnm 

V JT" V V - V T V <T~ VAT- *-T " I- Jt I : - - 

r$rb priori 'Minx aatruni nfcTi ratir^ epaa 4 

: - » j : ■ : - - •/<■•- I ivtI- 

ijira rh.nrmK *rvn nfe*n irfy ro*?n nvfiwi 

' j : t •• - v •••<•— «■>: - J- - *. : I t ;v -;i-.- 

^roani bram tnrrpm n/iDirhtf r6#ro tpbn 6 

;••:-• v - tt j : -- fty -<.- •• • : v.v - 

'•• -I- : - - v -: v j- iv <■• : • it 

viK ^ pwn nnnyn p rip^o n$a f? \n*npi 

... » lT 1 v . .. , A . i-: , T \. K... .. JT . ' T . <T l T . 

t : - It '-.•■•- -A- v : - - n v i - vIt - 

.... ._ _ JT ... s _ vIt - }" v vr': •- 

TOttma ]nx *ah ^ vrMvn rim i^rrna 

'a--t : v 'j- v v-:l- • 'j- • •• : v - v<v - 

•inkim i^n biw ^r\pw) i^n rraten npm 10 

... ._ .... . j- : -- 'i- • : - w.v - -jt -i T 's - - 

: <t': -•'- 'a- : it • : I- : - 

n#D byw Dhn Dtrca 1 wj wnnwn &ftn-p ^ 11 
n^D nso tehR k^i Drt^non »*i*i vn»"^ mswi 

jv - • : • J* :-- at : • : :\~ t v v j 

a. j- • ;<.— T 'v<— IT vi- K' : • 

*kta D^a »x*i :^ina wiiaw n^rrn» w 13 
.... j_ — 1 _ ^.. . :M _ . . . _ v i — 

n^b yb-)b ^d^i b*o onny Dn?3»nw rr-im 



T^T T T IT 



30 PART IIT. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 

•• t : <- • : ' : it j- v - 'iv •• iv - 

< T •- a- ; • - v t:*.- t /■•• -: 1- •■ jt - ••• : t : I- 

"tin runs yotf*i i^mn yrto pa iib^i rrttto 15 

<- : •- It t - J- v- t - 

♦13& ritfo ma*i nttfErnN :ftr6 ttfpm rrin -mn 

'it : • ' viv : vj— : - 

XXIV. Appearance of Jehova to Moses, in the burning 
bush ; Ex. Ill, 1—6. 

no rfa ton i-ur ttferna rnft rTTi ntto 1 

at : • J" <. : 1 ^ : • ^ v -jv jx t 

ovf^n irrbx toj '"bto^ in» i&jrrrm arm 
■sjtaa tfa-na^a i^» rrin* ■?!&?& a-n train 2 

' j • f - - : -jt ■■ jt : - : - t— tI- 

wra room iftta nyia n^n nam *n*i n^Drr 

>v v iv : - : •* t j-* v : - <•• • : : — av : - 

r/ : - - v v : v : jt t I--, t v v j - It \ 

*3 mm N-n :n:iDn -wirvb ynn n-tn ^inn 4 

j- w .: u — iv : - j- : ■ i - *. - av - v T - 

nb*i niiDn ■sjtoo wrbti y#n Kipi rrta-ft id 

v ^- v : - ' j ■ • v: t •■ t':*- ft : • jt 

-bv nbn yipprbx idni vysn id^i n#D n#D 5 

1- a -: j- 1 : • - v v.- •!•• • v i- iv ;v 

v*?y iftiy nm n#K Di'pan *a *p&n *wd t^ 

tt J" t - <v ' t - j- ' v : - j- •• ' vt : 

*ribx T^ *rf»* ^a "^h Jwn ^ip"niD"TK 6 

s- ■» ' • t J" v: • it v - i v\ - : - 

vfe n^D ino^ imp v6«n pnr vfo* on-aa 

TT v <" : — 'a-;I- j-' i" ' \.t ; ■ ->•• v: jtt : - 

iDvfrarrttf taenia am ^ 
,. v . , T v ,_. _ ,.. .. T j. 

XXV. Commission of Moses respecting the oppressed 
Israelites; Ex. VI, 2—11. 

:nim ^n vbx id*i ntc^D"^ dt6>* -uti 2 

it : J'-: «-t " v j- *v v i« v: ;•• - : - 

*itf ban ipy-^i piwte Dmntf-^x ^^i 3 

AT - j" : \-:i- v : ' Jr :• v ^t t : -_ v t--i t 

-n» \nbpn oil ton 1 ? ^lij k 1 ? ffirr ^d^ 4 

• <'•-: - : ivt • : v.- ^ t : J' : 

via ^^ W3 v^^"ri^ dh 1 ? nn 1 ? on^ wna 

' :• )■: -J" -at : ' v jv v <.v t j-t t • • • : 



PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 31 

/iparna \nybitf w i on :pd nan«?« dtv-od 5 

'- -: 1- v • : - t j- -: -r : it ;t v -. lv •• l\ : 

"TIN 13TN1 D/lfc DH1VO CH3«b *U0N bitlW* >S2 

k. : vit *t j* *-:l- "v : ■ }•: —. ■• t : • J- : 

\n*«rim rrtm ^ !5rn&*-^ ib» p^ :wia 6 

j. .. 1 . T . j. _. .. T ...... . j ... .. T i- • : 

omaro ddjin *r6»n anso rbiv nnhn ni™ 

atti-jI- iv : v j- : - • : • - : * J : • - - • •«• : v 

wn&i : d^ a Dno3tf:n rrotM yi-o dodk rn^i r 

' :'-it: i- : *.* t : • t : - j: • v : v <• : -it: 

»:»na d^tj D t^!?. d 2^ WJTJ 1 ! d ^ ^ D ,:ina 
:d*tshd jii^no nnnv nina wartan Dipri 1 ?** rhir 

• i T : • ; : • -*.-_• v • v j- - v •• j v: t : 

j.. T . T .. . TT <v _. > .. T T v .. . „ <m .. ,... 
dd 1 ? nnK win apirfn prnrt Dmaa 1 ? nnfc 

/.•t -it • -it: 'a - : 1- : it : ■ : jt t : - : t 

torittn *ia-to p nro n:m :nirp ^ nttf-ito 9 

<*>•• t : • j-- : v 'v.- -r.* )•• -\- it : ;•-: vt t I 

it 't <r -. 1- - v'j • v v : It <: 

njn3"^t iii kb tnbK 1 ? nt^D"^ rriiT -Q-m 11,10 
:tah»o ^Nnttrm"n» nWn ansa •nte 

1 . _,.. L .. T . . ,.. . ... t- - v -at: • 'vjv 

XXVI. Institution of the Passover, and the smiting of the 
first-born in the land of Egypt ; Ex. XII, 18 — 33. 

rfco fejRn mja tinb dv itiv n^aiKn i&ma is 

A - V. : I V V T V < T T T t : - s • It 

a>i* nwtf :to vi'nb onwi -man dv lj; 19 

• t j- : ' v it t ■•* v - :;■ : v : St v it j 

nm3Ji raona to*rta 1 5 P2V333 **)?£ n 1 ? "1&0 
■^ :v")Kn mmi 1 ) "132 WnttP mj?a Ninn ttfs-n 20 

t ' vit t /-: v : i- •• t : • Jr-zl" • - v<v - 

:ntea ^D^n covnitfto ^ba •toRn xb m&ra 

1 - v. : 1 v •• j : 1 : a"* j v v.v : - 

?d#d dp6k id*i ^*nfr* ^prta 1 ? rrto *opn 21 

: f av -: v j- v.- t : • *••':• r : -j:- jt : •- 

dot 1 ?!) \riD2n writ) nynhBvtob ]m mb mm 22 

v :'- : -it - 1 -. 1- : iv •• l : : • : ' ^ kt ': 

<•••:-•: — v -: jt - •••:-: •• jt--. — 

Dh^i *pi n^K xnrryn nnr^n *jn«r^»i fypttfarr 

v - : 'at - jv -: it - ' ■ : - j- : v :''':- - 



32 PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 

v.- : ' ■' : - - - t - v <t t: • - : • v 'j: ■ 

jrntf an \w xb\ nnhjvby rijir np^ nwran vntf 

av - jt t - v v.v : - : 1 ; • iv •• it v j t 

' v t t v j t i- t t : it - ' (.v t : J' : ' t : 

vv : - : a- • jv - : 1- <.vt -jt : 's-* v -: 

hd dmsl dd^k no^"^ rrro triKtn mawt 26 

•jt a-.- •• : vv •• -: ; : 1 c t t: I - jt -: it 

rnrp;? ^11 nD3TQ? annDW :o:fc nRjn rnigrj 27 

j :t : • - : • : •• t : • i- : <•• t - - t jv -: 

tt^«i nra^i oyn ife&i ^n whttiki onso 28 
final n^D"Jia rrirr mi -liws ^*nto* ^a tiwi 

' <.-: 1-: jv v jt : st- v -: i- a- T : • j- : v-:l — 

^iaa-^a nsn nirn nWn rsna 1 vm : ftp p 29 

: t jt • t 1- t: — : j--: i- j-:i- i t V* 

•naa *ry ^D3% i^rr funs -)5ao onso y^a 

j : -< : * - j- - : - < : • • - : • ' vr : 

Dp«i :nftna "roa to) ^Yan /vaa n#a bttfn 30 

'ttt It •• : j : < : a - j- : vv -: • : - 

myx wn unwrby] rnwby\ win nW rtyiB 

'jtt : j*:- •-:• t: t t -: t: < t : - :- 

t':*- 1- u- !•• >v -: • - J" l* -at: • : it : 

T3| % tfnn fo*5 ^ *fo$i nW iSn^-n nttfD 1 ? 

iv : v - : vt : v j : • j : a- t : • j-* : - vv - 

sp^i Djna^ "itf>*a vrp Dmpa-DH d^&tdu 32 

a-t v.v : - • jv -: 1- -j ': jv :'- : - v : i 

mftb nyn-by onsb pnwi :\nk~n-i Dram^ 33 

v.- - : t t - • - : • '<—.•: iv- l* - <.v : - i- 

!• •• ;t\ v : It j- ' va t t • jt : - : 

XXVII. T^e ten commandments; Ex. XX, 1 — VJ. 

bj» : "nba 1 ? n ^n am^n-^ dk d^» naTi 2 7 1 

it I •• vi" t )' t : - t j 1 * • v: j-- -:- 

jr»aa on»D v"^ T'DK^in i^k n^n^x ni»T 

j- • •(.-:• ' v jv •• ' -j' - I sv -: ' av v; jt : 

w&by onn» D^n^M ^ n^rmrtl? jdhi^ 3 

itt - (.-••-: j- v. -y : jv : I- i l« t~ 



PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 33 

- - • • - t - <v -: t : t : v y j' : v -: I- l 

"*6 : vn*6 nn^D o^a, *itf a i jthto viaa, -haw 5 

l ' vItt - j- • • v. )•; -:l- -at • ' vv.t t j:- —J- 

wife* rrtrr 6jk ^ Dinyn rife nnb mrmtfn 

' v v: <t : -It j* a- : t it j: vv t jv -: I- : • 

"fen tttt&ttrfe? M2"fe? nha fly ips xh bx 

- : j' •• • - ii- T st '■■ t'- j- 

noitffe "ana!? D^s^f? ion ntyjn p*oti£ dseh e 

J" : l : 1- -: I : a- t -; I- v *.-.• v j : It : I : ^ .. . 

: \nto 

It : • 

ripy xb 53 wrafr strife* nirp-ottfvw K&n *6 7 

'».•-: < j* :at - ' <.v v: jt : \- v -jt • ./ 

: it- ». : v jt • v -: •/' t : 

iS^Jn dw /1 w : it^p 1 ? m$n d^"jin libr 9, 8 

-: 1- -T •/<•• 1 :'-: v.t - - J v ^t 

jt l- v.t - • : - : ' iv ; - : t t «.• t : 

^rrarnrr) 1 nna roafes-fe) viWT\-)& wife* 

' v • ' : • jt - t t : t jv -: I- i ' A v v: 

^ :*HW2 nt^K twi waro* k *m»ai top n 

j* ' Ivt : • j:-—. :i": ' v : v : ' : It -:l- <' : : - 

via p»rr/wi D^oi^rr/i» rifrr rrtgy ty>w~nm 

' V T T V : ' J-T - V T : T T *T V I" 

to p"fer Tattfn ora rwi Dintftrfer/iw dvt 

's- •• '•• - rt- • : - j - -CT- t v -: t v : t - 

nrrc^pi nssfn Dim** rrtrr 

,.. : i- : i- >.T - - J v :;t : 

fer Tib 1 * pTW iy& TO*rfi*tt TijTJTK 123 12 

-< ' vt ' j • -:l- - - : 'av • v: ' v.- t v ;•• - 

\yb }nh Tiife* mn^i^ nmxn 

'It J" ' v.v v: ;t : v -: t t-:jt 

SPDHJn *6 13 

It : • v 

:*)Nin rib> 14 

' it : • *. 

\2hin rf? 15 

l : ■ 1. 

:w ny *pm rw/r*ft 10 

'v It ./■• v.'-: !•• : ;■.-; I- I 

Tnyi *rjn n#tf i&nrr*6 *pn m libnn k 1 ? 17 

< :- : »v •• vj" : - i 'av j- «. : - J 

i^jnb n#a bit) \Hqtv) ViW) \na*n 

'Jv •• : ;v -: v ; -: I- j : t -ji- 



34 PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 

XXVIII. Renewal of the same ; Ex. XXXIV, 4—8. 

Vin n#D 0310*1 Mtoma min nn 1 ?-^ toSsn 4 

1.. _ <v .. . — . ,. T • T -: ••. I- : :•- 

iTn rrj-w \nfe nirr rm ivm ^d ^rrbx tow 
Dttf toy isw) ]iya, frtfp Tin :d^i» nr6 w 5 

at <. • ;■— :*- ttIv t : v<"~ I" t -: > \ vi 

Knp^i V33"tof 1 nin 1 * -am trnm Dttfn $ip») 6 

t':*- tt - jt : -:i — it : v.- : jt':-- 

lorrm d*sn •sp** P^m Dim to* nim 1 rrirp 

v j:- - : • v. — ' :• jv a - : \. - j~ T : jt : 

mmm ytfsn fly kwj D^to* 1 ? tdH -isti jjiidni 7 

at t -: - v.-t i»T r- • t -: it v v ;•• ivv:lv 

^irton D^:rtof rrtha fly 1 ips rrpi* tib fiMi 

j- : - : • t t 'j-: j'- '-.— : j '-.— : 

i&f\ ntib -lrwi : D^ii" ton D^tftotf-to? D\h s 

'j'- av v -:.- T ... . C . ...... -C . T 

it : •- T : v- 

orf? nto 1 ? Dtysntf) tfr D^:na rnrrDy Dttfrm 28 

v v< t : - j- t : - : J' r : - t : • jt • : - 

mi nx riribrrby niwi nnt xb ra to)>* n 1 ? 

j.. . . ..< ... - _ J :•- AT T J 'I.- - T J 

i- t : - vv.v-: • : - 

XXIX. Nadab and Abihu destroyed, for offering strange 

fire ; Lev. X, 1—3. 

< : •- t : - j* • -:i- tt -: i- !•• : j':*- 

#a nirr ^E) 1 ? sanp*i mbp rr6y flaw i^n inn 
rrtrp ^stoa $** retro :o.nk ms *6 i#k rri? 2 

u- : ;■• : • • 0" •■ >" - It \.r • j/ sv -: tt 

-bit hWd id*w ;rtrr ^*b vid*i Droa towro 3 

It : r- : • v-.r- at j - 

tfTja* ^pa '-lb*^ 1 nirr ninnffK &n firm 
iftna dti T13N wrrbi *jirton 

' 1 -: 1- v.— a-'t v v.t t t j- : - : 

XXX. The blessing to be pronounced by the priests upon 
the people of Israel ; Num. VI, 22—27. 

-too hrorto* w nb^ ntwrt« mrr nirm 23,22 
.... _ : 1- ... <.. - 1 .. ,... ... tT . j.. _._ 

ton 1 ? niDK ^^ m-na ^^ nb -idn 1 ? v^n 



PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 35 

*ptot roa i rrtrv -w s'^notthi niir *pi:r 25,24 

' iv •• ott st : "t ' iv : : •: it : ; ' : vIt: 

tofrtf *6 dttn *p&* ros 1 nirv ai^ nam 26 

It <-' : j-t: »-..•• tt <t : t • tt;s !■ 

:M")1K Wl totlto* ^2"^ WJlN -lD^l 27 



XXXI. Destruction of Korah, Dathan, and Abiram ; 
Num. XVI, 23—35. 

nbxb myn-bx iin nb^ ritftrta rrtm isti 24,23 

a •• it" it v )•' - 1 •• jv v vr : i" -:- 

n&ft Dp*o tDTiNi ym rnrrptnb mdd foyn 25 

'tJt- it •-:!- 'jtt -'«.-:•: -t • tI" 

1- t : • J-': • <.t-: I- > :!••- a t •-:!- 'jtt v 'w- 

tttwan ^na §ft> v& rw ntixb rnyrrbx nam 26 

<• t -: it •• t: It - •• t j •• t- it v •• -:- 

raarrp nnb Httortaa wzrrbm nbxn nytfin 

». t • v av t jv -: t : *.: • I- : v •• t • t : It 

cn^iRi yn mjrpttfD ^d ••fan tDrwtorrtei 27 

(.t •-:!- ^t t -'^ - : • s- •• tI"— it t : 

v •• t: It -v< • t • j : it t • -: i- t t : a* t • 

mrun rma nttfD nDtfn jdbzdi Dm:w DiTittt) 28 

1 . ,.. . ... v _ it - : iv •• : jv •• : 

-0 rfcarr ttWarrta /i» nVw 1 ? wftttf nin 1 '-^ 

VA" t I*-: I — t ;■• -: 1- • -t : jt : I* 

mpEfi n^K pnD"» d-iarrta jiiDS'DK pate *6' 29 

- '•.. : v •• J ••• : t t It t < : • I- • ■ v 

n&narDNi wnbti rrtrr tib Dirty ip& trifcrrfe) 30 

t • : •: • itt : vt : j av ••-: i'-t* t tjt t 

dnk rwby) fvirrm nmxn nrasrt riirp xiy 

t <t : it t • v <t t -: It t : it t : jt : • 

*a dot rbfctf D^rr rrvi on 1 ? -ntf*r^3"fiNi 

s- v : - I* t a : <.• - j :It: vt jv -: t v: 

nil 1 ? tfitoa Vm irrtnm** rfearr M«n -ixm 31 

•• - : - .- *:i- it : v vv it j- t-:It -j -: i' 

jv -: <.t t -: it j '- t • - vA" t C t :- - t j- 

nrte ybzpi') jtstjin nan nrarn :Qmnnjn 32 

vt v- : • - t ■ v ■ v t t <- : • - iv •• : - 

-ty n*o nip 1 ? -ittfN drorrta /ini txvFsarnw 

t <-•• : -' : jv -: t tit t <•• : av ■• it v: 

Dsrvi nb'xu) n^n nub ititrb?) an rrn jttfann 33 

<- : - t a : *•• - sr." t sv -: t : /•■ :••- i : it 

im bvriiD^by\ ibnpn ^jna ni*i Y"»^^ drrtp 34 

•j-: —. " t : • t : it't - ; • v : i- v t t v ••-: 

' v it t v- t : • ' v : It j- at' : jt vv •• i 



36 PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 

d'tind} D s t£tonn ™ ^kjti nirp nxti m& ttftfi 35 

• - t <••-:!- J 1 * - at : j- •• ».t : it /•• : 

XXXII. JFafer brought from the rock, by Moses, for the 
children of Israel ; Num. XX, 7 — H- 

bmrr\ nBDrr jin m : ibxb rwrrbx nirr nan 8, 7 

<••': - : v - - v j '- 1 }•.• v v.t : ■>••-:- 

y*?Drrta Drrani Trm r»n»i rinK rnyrrji** 

-^y - v sv : - • : ' • t j -: I- : t - t- It 

--.--'• • - jvt t •• 1 : at •• j-t: *.v •• I" : 

-J1K n^D npw !DT;r^^ myrma jtwh 9 

•jv ;' — it • : v : it- It v /t '■ : • : 

prtttt nufo *bhp«) nrm "wara rrtrr» *j3ta n^Dn 10 

y-rK: sv • ':-- it • w -: I- at : j-- : • • ».v — 

D^ibn krwotf D*r6 nm*) ybDn vs-hx bnprrnx 

t : • v t v j- -at - j-* : v i-t't - 

Yt-tin rrito d"t*i : d^o dd 1 ? waft ntn yternDn u 

t v v vt- - "It wt .»• v - -Jv - • -: 

mtfm D*»in d*d wx»i Dwn> ^n^m yterma ipi 

::;••- • - -j- : i— -at-: I- v - : --jv - v 's— 

: myy\ rrwr 

It • : J.T" It 



XXXIII. Exhortation to love God, to obey his statutes, 
and to inculcate them on the rising generation ; Deut. 
VI, 4— 9, 13, 17, 18. 



r»K raroo tiro* 1 mn^ wrfra mm *?*nto* yotf 5,4 

v." t : - jt : it v n : v.- v: n : *•• t : • v- : 

ssptortoi!! spetortom spnWaa, wribx nim 

'lv : t : *.'::- t : j ' : it : t : ' av v: jt : 

-by Di^n toid r^N itfa rf?Kn annin -vm 6 

<. - -r :- : s- it v -: v •• t j- t : - t: 

*fjvna wntfla on mm w'hib Dnmcft t^an 1 ? 7 

'•••••: <' : : • : at v.t : - • : ' vt : jt : - • : Nvt: 

n^ 1 ? Q^")^ HE?^ ;PP^ TO? JW!?!?^ 8 
rtttD"^ Dmnm : wy pa nbab 1 ? vm tv~^ 9 

J\ : - jt : - : ' lv -- * j" «. t i : ) t: V.-t - 

:jd$j=) iDttfrn ihyn Into mm wfr» mm-\nN 13 

-!•• t • ». : • A- : 1- j : <. T ■ ■ -j:- v.- st : 

vpro vjTrin D^rt^K mm jito-\nK ynnvn -notf 17 

\t\ : Jr T- : A v •• i v: jt : t. : • v : : • j t 



PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 37 

whb nirr ^3 ntem i^n nw :"sps -nw* 18 

1 - - : at : J- - : i - : ;tt - t * t : 'it • _ ;v -: 

>- : • v -: t - ' vjt t -.■ t : - it : t t t - j • 

jot 1 ? mm 

1 iv -: 1- v T : 

XXXIV. Death and burial of Moses ; 
Deut. XXXIV, 1—8. 

nliDBn wn-i iin in m ^ into riinyD nito bw 1 

t : • - < : J- v t <:-!■• v 

-/fa parr^r/ia rrtrr :in>m inT »j9-ty nm 

t-jt t t v st : •• : — a •• : j-- : - i.-.- -: 

"jiki nVirrKn D*n 13? rrnrr vi^s r»xi nEtoi 3 

v : 1 -: 1- it n- l- t : ' v jv t ■• : ftv - : 

"Tj? DnDJin Ti? irrr tops, nisrrj-M min 

1* t : - r •• : s-': ■ t ■ - v: w - 

Watf]] n^ nkn rm? vbx rnrp id^i nyi 4 

• : - : • jv -s ' v t t < t •• t : v - i 

n^nx limb -)vxb ifyfa pn^b ofra*6 

tav : v v -. :- : •• ' -i- : ' <t : • : t t : - : 

sv t tt- 1 -: 1- ; tit : '••••■: ' j- » : v 

ink iip^ :rnrp *B~by n^io p**a, niir-ay 6 

< ':•- it : j- u- ' v jv : -jt ; iy 

"TIN &H JTmfrl "1^3 JT3, ^D 2*tf» V1N2 >JD 

• ;-t 1 : a : J" i t ' v jv : 

rotf onwi naD"p, nto tn-rrr ditt tv irnnp 7 

<.tt ^ : v : st •• v v iv - j - v.- tj\': 

bxntip ^2 ba*i : rin 1 ? or^i fry nnnrrN 1 ? \nba, 8 

s- t : • •• : :•- i •• tr i : *. •• jt -: it i a : 

m W ID^I DV D*tt6t0 2K1D flintf-i nt^D"HN 

*.• : J- : :'*- <s j- *.t j -. - : -jv 

into ^ntt 

iv ■••;■• 

XXXV. Passage of the rive?* Jordan, by the children 
of Israel ; Josh. Ill, 9 — 17- 

~nx wottfi ran wz torwn v^rbx yt'w inm 9 

: • : t •• j <v- t : • j" : v -i\ : v j- 

>3 pyun .rifcta ^din^ id^i :d3^k nin 1 ' nn^ 10 

•j- : I" : - •-. : v j- Iv ■• I v: rr : <-•■ : • 

•-:i-: 1- v v •• : • j* 4" : <nv : ;'• : ».- y 



38 PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 

parrta flro Jinan ]n>* hsn pon-m nb^m « 

' v at t t ' «. -: • : - ' J -: •• • i- : - : f v: it : 

wit -My >j# dj 1 ? vip rwi :in»a era 1 ? my 12 

jtt J" : v t <': t - : l- : — v.- •• : • r- 

t t : v It - vr v • ;t v • a" t • • «.■•;■ • 

"!?3 tiro riirr ina Vttto Dorian *kn niD2 rfaa 

t ' < -: t : -: •• : i ■'-: I - j" : - j - j : 

v •• t: jt *• t t -< : • •:- it v )" \. :-i~: t: at : • 

^26 Jinan iin^n *attto o^inam TTvrrna -ihy 1 ? 

.>••:• v.* : - j t it *• : I •-:!-: a-- : — v i-:i- 

Dorian ^11 vrvrny ftiarr »attto fctifb) tnyn 15 

•-:!-<••:-:••: — - tit <•• : i : it t 

"by ate frvrn d^dh rrcpa fetoj flnan wtt 

.. T '...__. . AT _ j.. 1. . ». : : • ' t it j- : i 

onTr? D^n rwi frop *b* te i\rvnrte te 
tot diki nto prrin iim-n -iDp n^ybte 

• t <t t !•• :'••:- tv •• j't t : -.: • 

rrterro* ra-iyrr w by on^ro irra "rso StfH 

- iv - t ^r t ■: it st j- • : 1 - : t : it j- • v -; 

D^nbn rrDjw :inn> m my Dym vna:i -l&n 17 

• -: 1 - j : -l — 1 • : vjv *. : it jt t : at : • j- 

pn prwi ^ina nanna mrp-nna vnan ^til 

'a- t 'v : - - J : -jt t it v t : • : t It •• :' I 

>iiirrte -lDrrnttf** ny niina nnay Wn&»"toi 

t - v -: <- t tjtIv • : 1 " t : r: 

sTTwrna -hay 1 ? 

XXXVI. yAe swra aw<# woo?z arrested in their course ; 
Josh. X, .12—14. 

nbKn-ji« frtrr nn Dra rrirr 1 ? yttfirr "ut ?>* 12 

v: it v t : <•• : t i- ••. : <•• - : jt 

nya:ia ttotf te-M* wyb 1 id^i ^nto* ^a ^*b 

' j ; • : v v< •• t : • J-- •• : v j- a- t : • j" : v.-- : • 

ny tey rrm writer* dm :tftet pnya rrn dMt 13 

tt -J"t: v v - •- it- ' ■:/■ : -vrl 

<-:i — a T t - vj- vt : J' —. t: 1 0* 

: i- t -» : ^ t JT 1 : ■ - t - J* -; I- •.*■••- 

tth« ^ipa nin^ i»tc6 inn^i v:*b wnn tfi^a mn 

a> 'j : (.t : - -> : • t -: i- : jtt : - < - t t 

:^n^ nvbi nirr >a 

l" t : • : vt : • t : j* 

v. 10. p Q-f«^ 



PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 39 

XXXVII. Victory of Deborah and Barak ; 
Judg. IV, 13—24. 

v : - v jv •• <- : : • t v t : I* ' •• : — 

-j- v *,• - v J -: I" <"> • jv -: jt t t v : 

dVtt nr ^ mp ph:rto rnin ^Ditai s-rtmhp 14 

<V J' ' ' T T V t : V - ' I •• 

asp rrtrr K^n *rra, inD^DTiK nirr jra nttfa 

jtt v.t : J -: ' vt : t : I" v <t : - t v -: 

tfl*a D«fca mw "rin^ ihd p-ia, nn *rcsft 

s- ^-t-: vsv-:i- t j- •• ' tt ■/<■— ' avt : 

v : vsv t t v : t : I" v t : tjt- It-: i- 

tyo mon? t-pi p-a ^ ym*b njn&rro 

j- .. #7T . r vs .._ 1 AT T J- : • vw • : -jv-: i- i- t 

nrwi haSn nm* «rn pSm :rt:nat m*i msn&n ie 

J" -: 1- : v v t <•• -: i- - t ' t t It : - : t;t- v.t t : v - 

~^b intrp nOTjrta Vb^_ n$m n^nn ny rnnftn 
"!?n v5rffl d^ know : irony mm xb yih 17 

t : - : jt t : I* : it v - v.- : • j v v 

"^D'V^ pa ofttf *a » -on ntfa ^ S*rk 

' V IV ' J-T ' "< T J- A- '•• - VJV V V." "T V J 

t : i- j-': ■ "t j- "- i- '•' - vjv (.-• ' •• T 

ion awrta ^a rr«D tfn* rrw v^ -mm 

-<t- AT • -v.- " JT 0' -: ST t •• V J - 

t ^v •• v s- it • : - v." - : - t v: t t v •• 

THtovitf runs™ \n&s ^ d^ - d;d wrwn 

s v - : •- 'a -, t j* •<.- - : jt '«• : - 

rms Toy rrfo im^ mhdd^i sinptf™ zbrm 20 

-jv v.-: t v •• v j- I" - :- \": -- -jt t iv 

rizrwn -mi "snatch *& t^ima frm S-ifcrr 

^ 1--: vr t ;'•••• : t • • t t: v a t 

i/v-jin -QrrntfN by npn) \m mow ton* 21 

-: v v v v I- j-t 'j- •- '-It : : j- t : «.• 

bn&i tea aiim htb rapsn-DK Dtorn ^n&i 

T - T '• < T~ TT : V'jV - - V V ST- V T 

rmnttm yiNa rastfn tfijna, nn^n-jiK ^rwni 

;- ;. I : ' V AT T I.-:*- 't - : "T - V <'-;•- 

by tfum AnD^D™jn^ trft pin nam inb^ W) 22 

"t <•• *• - t : l" v 'j-- ' t t j" • : It- '-(.t- 

v -: v.* t t t v : -: j- v j- t': ■ 

in*™ jid b%h kio^D nw\ wbx ay*) ulpm nnx 

vt - : •• j" t : I" <" ■ : t v •• jt- a '•• - : j T - 

-f?D vy nx wrtn Dta ovfta ywi tinpm 23 

'viv ' j-t I- - J- • v: <-:-- 1 't - : 



40 PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 

j t •• t : • 1- : <- '•..••- I- t : • >•• : v : • -at : 

pa* <nn wfon -nttfa iv i»sr?te pa* fy n^pi 

->-t v • : • jv -: -< '-at: v Iv ' j-t k- t 't: 

x-it : 'viv 

XXXVIII. Deaf A o/ Sampson ; Judg. XVI, 23—31. 

Dnvfra pr6 ^vrrrrat nart> bow Drntffe *ntn 23 

iv ■• iv: ' jt: ^t -iv . - s:* : viv • : • : j- : - : 

I": 1 ' J : • c -T : •• v: '<-t : j- at : • : 

jki spina *a Drwfor/ia Mm DJn Vifc -in-m 24 

-t : It j- av ■• i v: v <.;!-:- t t < : — 

wrfi dn» anna jini ttanima to wn 1 ?** 

;•.• -:i- •• : - j- - : i- •• : •■ : j v -t : <•• v: 

wip lia^i o:b atafa vn tu^VrrnN na-n 25 

-> :'• : j- t • j : • :- i-t -: v it : • 

i&tf*i JDn-iayn pa toto to ditjb 1 ? pron 26 
wo"m v /Pk nrp-in vr»a p^n^n -)vxrbx p&Dttf 

:l- • t j- - t : ' j- -: 1- - v 

xurxbv ywhx\ urvby fai jran n#K D*Ttwr7i» 

Iv •• -: V- t v : a-.- ••-; ' j t • >. — jv -: • \ - It 

Dvrafrs *r»D ^3 natbi onbam rin^an k^q mm 27 

ft' : • : J" : - v. t t : • t - : • t-: it <■• t » - -; 

1 j : • v.* It t • : j* • t -: •••<:• t - 

rfirr *ynt i&tf*) rfinMa tWotf mp*) nitf&tf 28 

• v: jt -: a- - v.t : ■ -j : • jt':«- ' l : ■ 

nop-iN") Dvftan rorr Dysn ^a w w-trn So ^na? 

st':It •: • v:It v - -<- - ' j- T ■':•: -: t -j- :t 

tin fifeotf r\sb»\ sdvtc^bd w vWd nruropj 29 

v ' : • :•- l- : • : • v- - j- : ■ -j- - '-.- 

tod**) on^y ftM jran nt^K tjwh n^ 1 w 

\-t— v •■-: jt • - - <v -: ':• t - J" - j- : 

' : • v j- 1 : • jt v : <. • i- jt v av ••-.- 

-^ mn fe^ nia ion d^^b-d^ ntfsa nb^ 

v -: ... - < : |.- ,s •/ -: <-t t t - : • t : - 

vrm nn^i :vm jr»on n^K^ D\r> iriiDB rcnn 31 

t v :!•— it - : v •• k- -:!•• ■ - : j- •• 

pa ihi^ nap^i 1 ••fow i^h^ Wi vt^k d^di 

' <• j :': •- j-:i— J : — ■ t j-- t : 



PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 41 

tos# iwm vaa nijD nap a ^Nrutfa pa 5 ) riy~\x 

J- t y : a- T - J t v 'v.- : t : v J- t : t 

it t ;• : v *.•• t : • 

XXXIX. !TAe calling of Samuel ; 1 Sam. Ill, 1—14. 

riirv ini ^ ^ rrtnrna mv)o ^iDttf -)yjim i 

t : j- : a* •• j- : ■ vr : v ;•• t : -f : - s- - : 

Dto w :v")3^ lirn ra Drrrr D^a V rprr 2 

J - •:- ' It : • (. t r m •• t j*t - Vr <t t 

top *6 JTina ••torn w totoa aaw ^jn wnn 
^avra aa'tf towottft naa^ did Dvfr>$ to ♦•n^l^ 3 

«.■• : :/r : st 1 :— i* v: ' i —. it v -. r : 

^ rwnpns fori nDtfn *%r^a rvi :^n natfi 5 

t jt't I* • : • v <- ■ •* v ' tjt- ■!•■ • :• j - 

mrv vp*\ :a:^ ^1 aatf aw vi*np-rf? id^i e 

t : 'vj- It : •- ' :•%.•— at: j ■ ^t't I v i- 

v j- • •• v 'vj- •• : !t<t- : j': 

:aatf y\ti ^a via-ip-** 1 ? no^i ^ /imp *a fon 

it : j! *.• : • jt't i v s>" *>• t . it t >■ • : • 

-w v 1 ?* rfcp ontoi rnrma yr did ^ftiDtcto 7 

- : it" «r v^v: at : v j-t vvv •■ : 

■An Dpn rwhtea SwDtf-tfip rfur ^d'^ :rnrr 8 

'vj— 'tt- • • : - •• : i ': jt : 'v - it : 

rftrr >a *%? ta^ ^ n^ip *a fon iDtfi %-^k 

<.t : j- • •• vjt- a- t <-t't j- • : • v J- 

-DK frm aatf ^ Twot^ >l ?y nDtfn ny-6 aip 9 

tt: t : X- •• : • j- ■■ v - -It- j--' 

16*1 *nay ybW *a rrtrr nan iriDHi t^ ^P 1 * 

'vj-- 'ay : - - v j- t : J" - t : - It : ' v •• jt': ■ 

jnp*i aawvi rnrv tfa*) :totoM aaw b^ottf 10 

/r r :— ••-;•- T : <t- i ■ : ■ *.- : •- ■• : 

iki 5wd« "1DN*1 ^P^ 1 ^ D ^ D ^?^" D ^ 
^ai» mn ^!)D^» nin^ id^i :T?ay j»w ^ 11 

sr it s : v t : v <- ' iv : - - v )- 

v\tf rwfeun tiro^"^a S^ ^n'^a nai prtfly 

j- ; t *.v • : : J t v -: A" t : • : *.t t jv 

"i^"^a n» % -l ?K D^p^ Win ova iw 12 

/■•■ -: t y • •• v 'j* t - < - it: t 

<• :'- : r -t v -: j -: i- a t - v •• v -j- -: 

2. h vrn 



42 PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 

^ ryib w^ p 1 ?! :db nro rfn via Dr6 14 

a* •• j" : • : ».- : • V-t: It it • ■> : t t v t 

ivbty-iy miay* rata, fyr/va, ftp -wbrrDa 

it - vr : • : -jv : -x •• i- s -: •■ - :• 

XL. Combat of David with Goliath; 1 Sam. XVII, 38-51. 

-fy nttfrn wip ™ t4d tvttih toatf ttfi&n 38 

v<.: -'; Vt: t- *t v < T ■• : — 

byn nnn-jiK tit -iiim :tintf infc tfa^i ittfan 39 

- •• : - v j- t j : — 1 : • <- J' : — <•> 

t v • T V T • I J* V V T vj- t - : 

in D"»on ww n 1 ? ^ n->>*a rott toiirfc 1 ? 

».■ T J" • :- • A' • J J- VI" T VA'T -J- I 

vbn ni^an ft-nra*i Yra V?pD np>i :v^d 40 
ntfM wn ^m djtsS awn ^narrp 1 min 

v -: s- it • : • t vjt- ■ j* t -: 

'v— !•:•:- v <.-•- at : j :'-: \ : - - o 

n&rt attfe tiNm wto mpi f?n \n^sn 

(. T .- ;•• -v t: a- t v v't: 0" • : • : - 

-*3 s irTtn 9, i Trrna r&rn rntften io:n nnsfc 42 
i. A .. . ._ ^._ .. r . .._ .^. . . . _ s — i TT . 

wttfrsn td*i rnanD nsroy nb^iM tw rm 43 
bhm /iftpaa ^0*3 rvwns *ai» i^n i^rta 

$••'-:- a': — <.- •• it jt - i- • t vjv-: «t 

TIT^K VW&Sn ID^l :ViT^2l ttttw vrafcsn 44 

a- t v i* : • : - v j- it !•• <-• t v -j' : * : - 

j- v: iv : ■ \r t - ^ : ' : jt : v t : v : - •• jt : 

*fr* Ka hnx ^fofwn-bH th n&tfi :mt^n 45 

... JT T _ . ; . . _ v . T v < _ , v T _ 

nirp Dttfa T^^ran *djw atmi rinrai anna 

jt : •• : »•„••• t j- it : a • : j- -: i- viv : 

dvpt jrtsnn itfa *?kt^ nto-iya Ti^a rriNaa 46 

j - t : 1- •• jv -: «.•• t : • J : - I- o" '•" t : 

^ ron oV>n Dvuflte rurra t:s vvnii T^a 

' ? : v - j - • : • : <••-: I- vjv • -t: ' vt i- 

dtt^k tth *3 n»rrta bri V"»^n n^n^ D^isfrr 
^. ... r . <r 1 v T T T .|.. . 1 V(Vr T j__ . . k _ T _ 

nwii nnna k 1 ?"^ nfa bnprrbz inn :^ite^ 47 

v -: 1- vjv : j • v - jt't - t : I" : I- t : • : 



T I- <• AT 



45. s"Dn nns 



PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE AND POETRY. 43 

inoi th mr)pb yip*) if^i vroftsn Dtna rfm 48 

J" -:- a # t J-': • <.-';•- ■:;•- • : • : - yr • tt: 

• t - : •- !■:•:- ;-'; • ittiI-i- ' tjt- • t 

"^ te*i irrcDn parr yatam in^D-^K vnflten 

j •- : - : v v t <- : • - a : • v *■•:•:- 

pan* 3^pa Wterrp ivj prm imna VJ9 50 

'v v t -Iiv- •:*•:- ' • <• t ' -v:iv- t : It u-t 

' tjt- i- t - : J" vvv: a- •;- <.• ; • ; - ■„• ';-- 

<t : : • - : - v j '- • - • : • : - v -: i- - • t 

s : • - a v v-t t : • - •• : j : - t : - • 

nan o-rtaa ntna D^ttfrsn 



l\T- «.T 



XLI. Hallelujah Psalm ; Ps. CL. 

t : j- 

Wipz bxrbbn 

a :'t : J" : - 

at i : • : -«. 

-Erttf yam nm^n 3 
nto teja «»m%fT 
toffctt *]ha vrMJn 4 
:n$n d^m vrifth 

- at ••::•: : -i 

irgrvi *Wraa vn%n 

t ;•• - : t t : -v j 



44 PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF POETRY. 

XLII. Exhortation to bless God; Ps. CXXXIV. 

prim wraarta rrtrp-na irm i nsn i 

at : J" : - t t ;k v j : It <•• • 

i •• - t : I- : j- :1 r 

tip nyrntto 2 

v 'a iv " : : 

:rrtnm» trdi 

it : v : it 

1V«d rrirr w-q* 3 

a • • t . ft J ' : y It : 

V IT t • J- T 

XLIII. Exhortation to praise God; Ps. CXVII. 

a* t t :<. v j : - 

tDnaarrta irrrafr 

l- ••. It t : - 

Yron 1 w%> -& *a 2 

: - "T <-t j* 

t : jt : vv:iv 



IT 



XLIV. God our benefactor; Ps. CXIII. 
I IT ^H l 

t : J- 

rrirr> my -Mrr 

at : J" : - : -* 

it : r- v : - 

TihD rrirr Dtf w 2 

at : jt : J" <• : 

it - : t - •• 

a ; v j:' - : • • 

:nirr Dtf bbrh 

It : J*" t ••. : 
at : i" t . - -n 

:Yitaa D^Di^n ^y 

1 : «J- t - <.- 



PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF POETRY. 45 

*■■ v: jt I- •*. 
v it t ;• • : - - 

' V IT t ■ J- T - 

at jttI" J* '* : 

:ffaN on* riBtfab 

A . . . . j. . i : 
n&y rati Dy 



mrrDa 

-)• T - 



t •• : }• t - 



XLV. God merciful and faithful; Ps. CM. 

1 rnb 

• t : 

at : v • : -v. J* : it 

1 . r T j.. .. _ T i. T . 

niiT-ritf WSJ! raQ 2 

(■t : v • : -<. J* : It 

It : t • : : • - : 

♦ai^rtobi nbbrr 3 

•a- -; t : -J- - 

vywbfiirbib Nsfifr 

• : it -: l- t : •• t 

o"n rroa ^tfsn 4 

• :at - - j- • J-* 

PW3 -rata) ttrtnnh 

• : It : v/v- •• - : ■ 

at : 'j t : -r 

invwyrbzb msstotA 



46 PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF POETRY. 

ntfD 1 ? V3TT yrt* t- 

<">-.• : jt t : - j* 
It i- -: •• t : • J- : • 

rfirr parti Dm s 

at : ! j - : j - 

nDm-n d*bn tin 

v it - : • j- - ' v </.• 

«"T -r/T I 

1 • jt : «. : 

at t jt •: t -:■•-*. 4 

na% tea ott^d rfn 

|"t ^-t •• -: 1- j : 

parrty D^Dttf ft±d *sj 11 

vat t - • -tv - j : • <• 

it ••: - : - j-t 

at -: 1- • t : • <. ' j : • 

o^n-hy na orris 13 

a* t - tv j- - .: 

:vaT~fy rnrr Dm 

it ■• : - t : J- • 

a" :• j-t v 

: It -: jt t r t 

vd* t»13 tfiaa 15 

a t t j-t IV V* 

' i-t 'j- v t - ' )■ : 

•iaaw teTnap rm *a ie 

av •• : j t ;It - J <• 

jt I- t : v<v: 

at m : - tv. - : 

:ma ^n 1 ? tfnrnn 

i- t )•• : • 't : • : 

inna nottfr is 

a • : j- : 1 : 
It -:i- t'\ • J- :l : 

tooa ran Derate mn** 19 

a : • ' J- •• • - t -«. t : 



PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF POETRY. 47 

nvbh i riirp oia 20 

;t t : - t : j : it 

i-m w nb nan 

at: J" — \ " J • 

ti-cn ^to yb^ 

it: 'j : - : " 

W32rt3 Tt&V foil 21 

at t : t t :». J : it 

:Wtan w v/ntflD 

1 : ;•• t : it : 

v'TO"^ 1 nirr oi3i 22 

t -: l- t t : < : It 

irf?$Dfc iiiDpD-^4 
:rrtnrn» ^sli *:ra 

it : v • : - r : it 

XL VI. God our Creator; Ps. C. 

rrnnb niata 

at : j : • 

:pKprta rifrr5 wnn 1 

v It t t t - J* t 

nrrDta rrirr-™ nny 2 

at : • : jt : v j : • 

:rt>rQ vis 1 ? ^2 

itt : • t t : j 

DTi 1 ?** wn nirp-^j tin 3 

;• v: v t : i- 

;at-: j : tti. j 

rrrtna 1 vn&& ^a 4 

t : tt : < 

at • : • jt i" —. 

:to# nana i 1 ? rrtn 

1 : .» : it j 

rron D^iyb nim atana 5 

a : - jt : t :v j i- 



48 PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF POETRY. 

XL VII. God the mighty King ; Ps. XCIII. 

tfaV /ma ??d mm 1 

r* t v *• t t jt : 

■mnn w rrirr tfzi 1 ? 

at - : • J t :<. j- t 

tetania ^hh iterr*)** 

at •• j' -: : • ' j t 

T IT jt !•• 

riim i rtnra m'm 3 

t : t : < : it 

D^ip jrnru wtw 

at ' j t : j : it 

tow jrnru wtt* 

it : t j t : <. : ■ 

• <- ' • 

at •• : : • j- ' - 

:,rnrr> oinaa tto 

it : j t - i* - 

v 'a t -: 1- J ' : I- : 

iuw ymb riim 

I- t ' v j : t : 

XLVIII. Gorf'5 kindness in providing for his creatures 
Ps. LXV. 

:t>h5 Tnb niatD n-23»b 

r j* t : : • -y - : l- 

at • : - /" 
It ;t t t v t 

^d nan njty mrr 4 

•«sv : jt -:<. J ,# : • 

l" : - : n - •• t : 

n-ip/w -ran 1 ntto* 5 

•• 't : j- : • < •• : - 



PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF POETRY. 49 

nnsrr yaifr 

' jv '• -: v : • 

'av " J : t : : •<. 

' v t I- ' : 

ttW Tt^ vwn pixz i rfiUiSi e 

A-- : • j" v: •■-: -v ' vjv : t < 

:bwn dv) pintwrta mono 

'!• : jt: ' v •/••:'- t j- : • 

fobs onn V30 7 
irrwm imi 

it : • t :v 

i&toxb itom orrti tfatf 

I- ••. : ' j -.1- v ••- ' j : 

wihtotD nwp ■at^ ww 9 

' av I •• t':(. j- : I :<•- 

I* : - VJVT r V «. "JT < 

npp^jni v-ian mps 10 

t'v': j :- ' v t t t :'< — r 

d^d n^d dvt!?n As rririttfyri nil 

•at "jt * v;v. vjv t v : : - - - 

rrtron pr>a Din yon 

tiv •:■'/■• • tt : / T 

mna nro rm rroAn 11 

tav : J" - " -v t jv t : 
l" t : jt : • tv : 1 : j* • : • 

^rmto n^ttf nnray 12 

'av t 1 j- : t : -•*. 

-qid ni*o Jisyv 13 

at : • j : -::•<. 

jnninn ntynii Wn 

t : 1 : - j T : ■ : 

• t j : It 

-U-ISW D">pl3jn 

at : - 1- V t -: 1- 



50 PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF POETRY. 

XLIX. God our refuge ; Ps. XL VI. 

!• j t -: - -'a •• : • -;■• - : I- 

?jn nom vh mfox 2 

a t jv -: 1- tv. j* v: 

nfeD rc«M rfiisn m?y 

1 : jt : • t : jt: v 

via -vara, ftTrifr p-by 3 

1 VAT J* T : T •(. J" 

:ote* nba, onrr atoll 

I* - J- : • t -> : 

wo nftrf asm 4 

at •• J : :v jv;iv 

:nbo Mm** virrwy^ 

t iv j t -: 1- : v.- t -: : • 

DTt^iri^ mm* v3bsj im 5 

a* v: • i : - 1: t t : t t 

1 : v j- : : • ': 

Btajrfei n:np:i wribx e 

a ' - t :'• :>- J' v; 

npa nto 1 ? d^k rmr 

'v 1 -> : • ■ v: t;v: .- - 

rrirfeo nroo Dta -idpt 7 

at:- -it • v. J t 

;« »aw Mp2 ifij 

' v it ; t ' : -»-t 

at • j t : jt : 

Cnbo npy vrba *$ natoo 

tiv 'j-:i- ;•■ v: t jx : • 

At : j -: : • -:<. j I: 

V It t J - (.t v -: 

yiKn rrcp""ry Bi&nbD mtfD 10 

' vrr t v"': - t : • J' : - 

jron y^pi izw ntip 
ttfaa *w rtb:o? 

i" t ^ : • t -: 

a- v: j- it • : <. j : - 

ty-iaa, ona tftei ona 

' V IT T J T • - J T 

•uay jiton:* niir 12 

at • J t : jt : 

irbv ipy^ vtba m9 nnfrD 

tiv 'j-:l- v v: t jt : • 



PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF POETRY. 51 

L. God ivho wields the thunder and lightning ; 
Ps. XXIX. 

* 

abn *ia rfiifb -inn i 

A- •• J" : T -\ J T 

:?in t\33 riW$ -mn 

It j t t .) T 

totf lils rrtrrt son 2 

a : j : t -v j t 

ittHjrrrnrn rnrr£ fnftntfn 



j -: 1- : I* 

cribrrty riin^ b>ip 3 

•j- - - T : 'j 

is* : • j t - 

I* - • j- - t : 

roa rfirrtop 4 

-a - Jt : 'l 

hto rrirv ^ip 

it t iv t : ' ^ 



D*na iaw nirr bsp 5 

A . T _. j.. t :<- 'j 

'it:- ;•• : - v t : ;••-:- 

Cartas owi e 

I- •• : ' v j : ' : • : j t : 
1- j -:i- •• ;t : 'i 

-ma bw nirp bsp 8 

at : • j*t t :>. 'j 

:icrrp -ma rivr *?tp 

i-'t j- : • t : j*t 

ftfew WW i rhiT ^ip 9 

t - J" : t : '< 

j t : ' v v: iv- 
1 t ;•• ••. * t i" : 

2& bufob rrirp 10 

iSTT J — t :<. 

itbfyh ybn rhrp nttfn 

It : vjv t : :•)••- 

yv toj^ ty rftm 11 

*"'" J - : ^ t : 

: oftifa torn» tra> 1 mrp 

it- j - v \» T : t : 



52 FART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF POETRY. 

LI. The Lord our Shepherd ; Ps. XXIII. 

a- T : ; : • 

It : v j /t : 

•a- • ;- v vv J : ' 

\^bnT jimao *»"ty 

i : '- j- : 
vt : - <• : " " I- <- 

ft* T • JT - I* T <T ' I 

paony nan ^tiytfltti jittitf 

at : 1 v ■>••• t : ••. - t : -: i- 

irvyi ^Dta ^>o ptsb rwh 
*»n *D^a ^stv nom nto 1 tjk 6 

at - J" : t • : : •». v jvt < ' <- 



i-T ' v j : t 



LII. 7%e King of glory ; Ps. XXIV. 

-taS -nib 

; : • • t : 

nato v*mn nin^ 1 

AT : ' V JT T T -V 

:nn ■at^n ^bn 

at t : j* - - 1 h 

snrta* nYinrtyi 

Tiv: 1 : t: - : 

nin^-ini rfw^D 3 

at : - : jv-:I- 
1 : 't : • ' t j* 
/t •• - 1 V : 



:jt - jtt 



PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF POETRY. 53 

it : • : J- : • *■ : 

niiT jixd mil at^ 5 

at : -r •• T T :*. JT • 

:^jw ^rfrao n\n$\ 

\ : - j- v: I- t t : 

vtfl-H *vn m e 

at : 1 J -A 

:nbo npr *pa9 ntfpaa 

Tiv 'j-:i- ' wt J- ': - : 

v •• it • t : < : 

at X* : • : it • s. 

1 t - 'vjv t: 

> T - ' V <V V I* 

ni^i my mm 

a • : j • T :<. 

It t : • .> • t : 

v -it • t : < : 

D^iy ^n/13 wttn 

at j" : • : \. 

i t - 'vjv t: 

I'insn f?D nr win ^ 10 

J T - V <V V J V 

rfians nim 

<■> t : jt : 

:p6d nton ^o win 

TlV J T " 'VW < 

LIII. 77*e £>oo& of nature and of revelation ; Ps. XIX. 

to-flaa onsDD D^bttfrr 2 

a- : r : - : ■ - t - 

- N- t It i' - tt J" -: 1- 

IDfe ^ DV^ DV 3 

v a - j- - :<. j 

\wrrm nW# nWi 

- it v - : t : - : t : ;- : 

a- T : ' j- : v v ' 1- 

It ■ ;t : • ■ : 

D^p_ ar 1 yiKn-^32 5 



54 PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF POETRY. 
av <> j-': • 

IV T V J T 

a t ••. I- j" t t :<. : 

■I ' jt • : r t 

t I • - t - <••': • 

at ': - j t 'i : 

i t - i- t : • ' r- : 

tflM jinntfD niD^oji nirr miin 8 

vat - j- : t • :». jt : <- 

:\na jwana ni&N^ nirr rvny 

• iv - r : - t t v;iv jt : j •• 

A-- •• : - : • t :<. jt : <•• ' • 

:dw jtvn& rria, nin 1 ' nisb 

■it •• j- • : t t ->t : ;- : • 

TyS maty rhinto I ni,T jint io 

J- t v vv t : t : <- : • 

:mr *&& Jiaa rtr^nosicto . 

it : - ' : t av v: jt : •• : : l- 

m ?3#) nn-ta Dnan-in n 

at jt • tt'v • t v:lv - 

dpq -inn spnjrDU 12 

av t jt : • '::-«. I- 

:m npy aSotefe 

It 'vj- t : t : 

ri^a Jiifrntf 13 

' a-t I- -> • : 

. p,.._ j t : ■ * 

tjnny #n 1 dh-td oa 14 

at •• jt j' : : • 

it - jv • : 

.... 1 T . . ,. 

' a-.- T : j- • ' j : v : 



PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF POETRY. 55 

LIV. Who shall dwell with God? Ps. XV. 

■mb to 

r t : 

*rbrra:i THna nim i 

'avt: It : jt i- t :«. 

1 iv : 't j- : : • i* 

nm^ rm -nil 

it:* v v: r m : 

Sfth-by 1 Wrrrfj 3 

: - t 1 

at t j - * " : jt t i 

tto'ip-by winft ninrri 

1 ' : - jtt 1 t : v : 

t : • <t • : <v : • 

izy nirr wimai 

a" -: jt : j- : • 



i*t j : - t : i- : • 

' vv : ' j-t 1 < : - 

j'-r J ' • t - - v : 



LV. !TAe blessedness of the righteous, and the overthrow 
of the wicked; Ps. I. 

• t j" i: - 
>• t : v- -: 1- ' - t ^ <••• -: 

idjp rib mwsn Tra 

at t .) ' t -v vjv : 

itt j • •• j- : 

ton rnm mirQ dn ps 2 

■»:••■ t : 1- : <■• <• 

;rWn ddv niirp Yrrrt/iM 

t : itt .r v :v ^ t 1 : 

•;t •• : - - v T ' ■• : t t: 

iW2 tn> i ihs ittfN 



56 PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OP POETRY. 

a • i J" t : 

DWin p-*6 4 

a- t : It V- l 

- I r.- : • v -: ' - r 

at : • - • t :v. j'\t 1 '<•• - 

A r. . _ 1 VJV T .^ _j.. ,. 

I- J- t : ' vw : 

LVI. Longing after God ; Ps. LXXXIV. 

It: jt : ■ ■' • v : : - -> • : 

rrirp nS^vb %3J 1 rm , ?3"D:n hh)dd: 3 

:-: •:- t:It -: t : : • 



;t : v : - : 



it j- 

jva jin^d 1 nia^-Dii 4 

jt : <t 

r6 ip 1 nYrn 

t "j" : 

t -»v : v t v T v -: 

rrtaax rrtrr wrtnaTD"Ji» 

at: jt : ' v : : •«. 

it I" • : - 

*rrpa ^u)'v mwi 5 

'av •• j- : 1 •• : -v 

t iv ■ j : - : 

'a t J I TTl J" : - 

toaa^a rrtfob 

it t : • 

sinvinth twb Man p&ya 1 nay 7 

a • : 'jt: - t t -v ' vj- : <•• : i 

:rrrtb may* /rtinaTM 

iv ;v : - t : 



PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF POETRY. 57 

: Iters mfotirbx ron* 

' i • : j- v: v v.- Ti- 

viten nyotf /Vtonx DTt 1 ?^ mir 9 

«">• t •. : jt : • T :*. J* v: <t : 

:r6o spy vfra ninarr 

Tlv 'j-:i- v v: t •-: l- 

a- v: j" : ••'Vs. 

jnrrt^D *js Dim 

' iv • : )•• : •• - : 

'v/r " ' ••••• -: 1- J 1 <• 

a- v: j- : '•• : -t. • : - t 

;• v: vt : '•• t v v <; 

rrtff y^ lam in 

at : 'j-* t:<. j*' 

:dwq mWi!? 2i&httD* tib 



mans nw 13 

at: -it : 



s^ra ran D-m nttfa 

' it -.>•■ t t r- : 

LVII. Shortness and vanity of human life ; Ps. XC. 

-»• v: It !• vv : t • : 

w£ /wi run** fiya tfm 1 

T T •>' T T -V. J T T "IV. 

nil in 

it j : 



r& onn 1 dim 2 

t'.. j* t v<v : 

bin 1 ) via Wrtrani 

A .. ... i „ Jv •• j : - 

1.. ;T _ T _, T |.. 

at - - v:<. J-* t 

It t •• : J 

j : »■•••.•"« • t 'v jv <• 

ihar» *a !rt&nK 



:it - jt 



58 PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF POETRY. 
a :i- jt- t : -\ 

\tf?w totd ipia 

'at t: ' j-T 'v -v. 

:tfn*i Wrtb* mi# 

i-t: -»•• : vvt 
'av - : j-t l- 

: It : • > ' : It -: I- 
'av:v : j- 1-: jt - 

:^!3 liND 1 ? ub^ir 

' iv t J : • ■•••.-: 

'av t : v : j t ••t\ T J' 

v iv : •• t i* • 

rtttf TODttf DH3, I WJlWW 10 

t t <• : • -»v t •• : ••• : 

t t <" : : • <• : 

tiNi tey oarnn 

vatt jtt t : t:«. 

jrrsy-n ttfrr ?:r>3 

Tl\T- ' JT 

'av - J - •• «. 

terras? ^riKnp?) 
jrrtrr p wd* jydd 1 ? 12 

a- 'j- "tv J : • 

It : t j- : ■ t : 

mD-iy rrtir raw 13 

AT T T * JT 

:*rajrty oram 

' Iv t -: - •• t • : 

ttdji npi-n w$to 14 

' A v : - 'v j - j- : - 

l"T t : t : : • : j-r: -: 

vjvsy jito^a -urrDto 15 

at • • j • •• : -v 

:mn w*n iiniir 

IT T J* T : 

w^g ¥rn3oH?» run* 16 

'avt:It 'jvt-: v jv ti- 

:Drrca"!?y n-nm 

iv •• : - ' :It-: 1- 

u^y wfr» rrtrr aw i to 17 



-< <• 






PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF POETRY. 59 

wb»y mate wr nww 

a- t jt : I "T\ J- -: i- 

,.. . , .. T ,..r. ,_ 
LVIII. 7%e emZs of intemperance ; Prov. XXIII, 29 — 35. 

i owe ^ *&* ^ •na ^ 29 

•t : • <• : -: <• : ; j* : 

oan dot *dS rrttncA 

at • j- t : •:«.-• • : 

:dw /vfrfen ^ 
|. T .. _, . . _ . . 

jwprty annND 1 ? 30 

'•at - - J'-: 1- : 1- 

:todd niprf? D*»a9 

'i T : • : - • t - 

fry Dten tnpa 
irish tArna imnK 32 

at • jtt : •-:-<. 

ttthBJ $JB3M 

jth? -int tw 33 

at j :• ' V "V. 

thtasnn -qt %aVi 

1 •-. : - y - : ' : • : 

0^3, 1DW3 n»m 34 

at v : J" : t • t* 

t^nn ttftfia, 2ivy\ 
vr^rrtn to 35 

• • T - • ; • 

•;jtt - • t -: 

1 A 1 • T J- T 



60 PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF POETRY. 



LIX. Divine admonition in the visions of the night ; 
Job IV, 12—21. 



ia^ i:n >?ni 12 

<st\ : JT t - "» 
t :<"it j : v I- • • : •*. 

sonttoa^ar nn'i'in fen 
rrurn ^>op ins 14 
j Tn3rr mtosy nT 

' a -: 1- j- t - - :>. 

tn'^B myfr n&Dlh 

i* t : j--: 1- •• - : 

imOB T3NTi6l I TOP* 16 

• *M> mb rwon 

at •• vjv : t :>. 

:y?2#N ^pi toot 

it : v 'jt <.t t : 

piw ni^KD itftoan 17 
ma "into 1 * vifefcrDN 

vIt j- : • •• l- 

?w xb vnya, in is 

a- -:i- j t t-: in. 'j-- 

:r6rwn d^ vitf^Dii 



it t: It y t 



IDIT^n *JDW ^N 19 

■• It - : I '<- 

DTD> "lSjya TtfN 

at : jt T Iv jv -: 

itijn&b dwst 

vq* my 1 ? -ipiao 20 

a t \ v vtv 'v J • 

;-TO* nxib n s 'm ^id 

i- -r.-T ■ •• ;• : • 

D3, W yDr*6n 21 

at jt : • j- • 1 -; 



PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 61 

SELECTION FROM THE PARABLES OF THE 
OLD TESTAMENT. 

LX. Parable addressed by Nathan to David ; 
2 Sam. XII, 1—7. 

: mi iron t® mx nhx iyz -vrr wba w i 

it jt v : v.- t jt v t v j* : t • t -: j- : 

bzrpx vriy\ nto nann npn-i ]*& rrn i# 3,2 

l" jt t : 1 : )•• : - v. t t j ^r t ■ t : 

Vwn nrrt nlip itfa hmp rna ntitaa-DN ^ 

J-: '- tv-:- t't jv -: t. - ': <- - t : • 

Wfl toboi ^brin Ifibd hit viirqsn toy 

...... < . - • - at : - (.t t • : :j • 

rnbb rfiSwh Vimum 'Sstten nmb Wm wn 

-v t -: 1- 't : • • - '<-t : — • t iv 

wvb nfe^i tftnrr tfwn rifca:m» nfcw i 1 ? Han 

VT t v-:i-- T T J* t - : • v '-•- A J T - 

"bx Sbri*i -rto tth«a th sttrirro :v^k Nan 5 

a : *.' t •;• t ^ 'j- -i-- it •• jt - 

-mi jjint n©n tfwr nwarp *b nin'm im e 

v : 1 jv it «.- t v t ' v j- T : . - ' tt 

■mrr/ia .rw "itfa apy dww D^ith rfeaan 

jt t - v t t <v -: 'v •• • at : - : - j" - : <.t : • - 

nnx nrrbto vv iiDtfi : ten-rib ntfa tyi n?n 7 

jt - <.*t v VrT v s- it t 1 jv -: *.- : v - 

sttfwr 

I* T 

LXI. Parable of Jotham ; Judg. IX, 6 — 15. 
*abtiF\ K>b**\ Kite JTa"tyl DDtf *tya"te JISJDK^ 6 

r : — :j— • j- t : v : <•• -: i- T : t*— 

••oatfa im zxn tfarqy ^teb ^te^a-na 

iv : • jv -: it\ j •• • v/,v : 'vw • -: 

ibip afew DTiinn tfrina Tbum *te nnvb rpin r 

v ' jt •- • • : - j : -:i— 'v- t : j— 

y&tttt DDttf *tya *!?K wd* on 1 ? id^i Knp^i 

j- : •: v : J"-: I- ~ "' < : • vt v j- at':'- 

Dirty n'tinb crcbffi tabn Tflte :d\1^n D^te s 

<.v •• -: - j : • • •• jt : it < t i- v: iv •• —. 

pfin urb -ib*i :wty rente mb nm**i ^te 9 

vt v <- i" t jt : t •(. — > : - 'vav 

d^ni ttrtte nay rantfa ^ttfrviN Winn 



?. b roba 



62 PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE AND POETRY. 



at- :- <.••• it j : I- I- •• it - - it • :-jt: 

• : - t: iv t •• : - v t v < - I •■ t r : t : v.- • : 

- v. t • : - jt : at - v.* t i : v : ' • : t 

\vshy iybn mrvb )*ub dwt no^i idot 12 

I-t ;• : t :<.- • : '-/at- «.• •• It ; : I- I* ■■ It 

nD'ran ^-ivrm Winn pin on 1 ? io*tai 13 

-r- - : 1- • j* v • : -t: Iv vv - v t v <- 

-bz *nnifr) tD^rrfy yvb \nrbm Dntoai D\ito 14 

t ; : i - !••• It - - v.t • : - jt : a- t-:I- v.- v: 

na^n no^ t^jnto una yb imrrbx D^yn 15 

t t It v j- I-t t : vr - ' J" at t It v v •• it 

fykb mfe ott^d cina ,nft*o ok dwt^h 

'y v : <• • : 1 v - jvv:lv • • -it 

•flOMPTID &** K^n v&-dm *Vib ion !|to DD^ 

t t It ' <••'.- . . a- • ; j - : <. v ••-: 

t'lte&n n-uma team 



it:- ;•• : - 



12. }? roba 

LXII. Parable of the vineyard; Is. V, 1 — 7- 

a : - : <.• j- • • . • i« T t <• t 

: picn^ l'ipa- rrrrb mn ona 

i v it ' v 'v'jv : <.••!• ;t t vjv 

pn'w -inw sinfeo*) vip?jm 2 

1 .. .. T ._ .. 1. _ ._ jr... _ ._ 

a j" t '-.v.- - : : t: • ' v<— 

f \ : -J — «.*T-: j -: 1- •/-:- 

rrnm tfw d^wi* atctt* nr\in 3 

at : j* : *v-t i : -»•• -jt- : 

I- : - ' j- (.- •• t : • 

a . • v.* t .> : • : - : -> -: l- 

tEWaa W) b*±iy rri'wb wp yrro 

v : v jt t !• t - : 

liftb mm fro-wio non 

•• t : jt t : t 1 : <•• t 

ivwzb mm rm vis 

it : • : ;t t : >. ■• : ' ) t 



PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF POETRY. 63 

-Ti" j : "t* < t t J- • -:i- 

jwi "Vbtf n^ 

•att *.• t jtt: 

it t itt j* : - I" v — ; • t iv <- : 

WnttP /va hiNaa rrirp ona *a 7 

•• t : • j- t : <t : v v j* 

iW«i ya:j rrnrr tfw 

at -: 1- «.- : t : j* : 

nsMb rom idb^d 1 ? lpn 
:npw nam npi^ 

LXIII. Parable of the vine; Ps. LXXX, 9— 20. 

- a- - • j- : • • vjv 
tTv t • - • r- t : 

ma 1 ? jvus 10 

t av t : T J" • 
T V T T J" : -- 

1 v it •• - : - 

pfe onn 1D3 11 

AT • J* T J T 

I- •• : - T vt-iI- 

d^tjt rrrctp nWjn 12 

AT - T jv • ': j— 
t iv ' : I tt v : 

T AV : T : J- T TTV 

jth n3jH?a srnai 

' v it •• : j t t t : 

nya wr hudd-d* 14 

-at • j- -; t jv : : - : 
Tiv : ■ j- t i'l: 

»5 aw Bixaii ovfr« ^ 



n v 



na-fi D^ttro Ban 

a- : • j- t • J" - 

1 'vjv ' : 

ww rwantw* mai ie 

'av • : jt : It v -: t - :«. 

:^ ptjtobh prtan 

' It t : i- * " - : 



66 PART I. NOTES ON NO. I. 

graphical accuracy., whicli cannot be acquired equally well in any 
other way. But the student need not write out all his paradigms 
fully. Of some, he may make skeletons ; writing out only the 
3d persons singular and plural of the Preeter and Future, with 
the Inf., Imp., and Participles. But let him also write out many 
paradigms fully. And where there is a class, and the instructor 
attends to them all at the same time, the correction of one exem- 
plar, which exhibits a written paradigm, (if the correction be 
made viva voce and in presence of the class,) will of course 
serve for the paradigms of all the class ; as they can be required 
each one to correct his own paradigm, while in the lecture room, 
agreeably to the directions of the instructor. 

I would earnestly recommend to all teachers and learners, who 
make use of this Chrestomathy, to pursue the method here 
pointed out. Experience has long since taught me, that seemingly 
rapid advances, at the commencement of Hebrew study, are not 
to be regarded as being of course real advances. He will ulti- 
mately make the most rapid and sure progress, who carefully, 
deliberately, and with great pains-taking as to grammatical prin- 
ciples, lays a foundation broad and deep, on which he may erect 
a superstructure at his will. I venture to pledge myself, that if 
the method above recommended be followed, neither learner nor 
teacher will ever see cause to regret it ; nay, that both will be- 
come fully persuaded of its usefulness and importance. 

The examples in No. I. are chosen, with much pains-taking, 
from roots which have neither Gutturals, nor Quiescents, nor 
Aspirates in them, in order that the student may have as little 
difficulty as possible to encounter, in the first stages of his praxis. 
A few of the examples have a final Resh ; but such a Resh 
usually makes no irregularity, excepting that the Future (and its 
cognates) of such verbs not unfrequently has a Pattahh final. 
But in the examples here selected, this is not the case ; and all, 
therefore, which are ranged under a. may be declined, in respect 
to their vowels, after the model of 't=>j7 . 

Those under b. are declined after the manner of ^7 in Par. I. 
of the regular verbs. There are but very few verbs of this kind. 



PART I. NOTES ON NOS. II. VI. 67 

In No. II., the examples under a. resemble T2J, ^5^, ^Ntt? 
in Par. II. of the regular verbs. The student must resort to the 
Lexicon, in order to determine the forms of the respective Fu- 
tures, etc. The verb 'NE7 properly belongs to verbs ^ Guttural; 
but it was necessary to employ it here, in order to exhibit the 
peculiar forms of the 2nd person plural in the Prseter of Kal. 

The examples under b. comprehend nearly all the verbs final 
Hholem, that have three radicals in Kal Prseter. Of the last 
four of them, no Infinitive Future or Imperative occurs. 

No. III. exhibits verbs whose first radical is an Aspirate. In 
writing out the Paradigms, the student must recur to the princi- 
ples respecting Daghesh lene, in §§ 79 — 82. E. g. ^?, (2 not 3) 

79. 1,* the same principle applying to a single word, which ap- 
plies to the beginning of a chapter or verse; Fut. '^1, 80. 
Imp. b»5, etc. Niphal bft??, by the principle in 80. Fut. ^»?\ 

78. Note 2. Piel Fut. ^3% 80. Pual Fut. bay. , 80. Hiphil 

bn^n, 80. Hophaiboan, 80. Hithp. b$ann,'"79. 2 ; an d so 

of all the other examples in this species of verbs. 

No. IV. exhibits verbs with an Aspirate for the middle radi- 
cal. Kal Inf. ^}, 80. Fut. isp, 79. 2. and 81. 2, Note 2. Imp. 
iaf, vpT, 80. Part. *®Y, 80. Niph. 1?T3, 79. 2. Fut. "Of, 

80. Piel 1?T, 71. also 78. Note 2. Pual "13$, ib. Hiph. "T^TH, 

79, 2. Hoph. ism, ib. Hith. "i?tnn, 71. also 78. Note 2. ' 
No. V. exhibits verbs with an Aspirate for their final radical. 

Kal Inf. const, in 1 ?, Fut. i»^, Imp. itf?, Part. TO'lb, Niph. 
ID 1 ??, Piel *rab, Pual ^b, Hiph. T^n/Hoph. "T^n, Hith. 
"f^bi^n, all according to the principle in § 80. Also Imp. 
Fern, '^b Um-dhi (not ^b lim-di), 81. 1. Plur. *n*h, ib. The 
same is the case in the Imp. of Nos. VII, VIII, IX, which follow ; 
e.g. Imp. iSt?, ^5P ; ipsp, "HtfS; STI3 , ^rj3 , etc.; comp.81. 
1, 2, and Notes. The same principle applies, of course, to all 
cases of the like nature. 

No. VI. exhibits verbs with two Aspirates for the two first ra- 



* In ail references, the first number refers to section (§) in my Hebrew Grammar ; the 
subjoined numbers or letters, to subdivisions in the same. 



68 PART I. NOTES ON NOS. VII. XII. 

dicals. Kal tfibs , 79, 1, and 80. * Fut. ttfeq? , 80. and 81 . note 2 ; 
also 79. 2. Part. &%% 79. 1 ; also 80. Niph. Bfcap? , 80; also 79. 
2 ; comp. 81, Note 2. Fut. K?n3> , yik-ka-bhesh, 7*1. and 78. Note 
2; also 80. Piel fi*59, 79. 1; also 71. Paul ^23, ibid. Hiph. 
UT'Sprr, 80; also 79. 2. Hoph. 272^, ibid. Hith. B^On, 

79. 2; also 71. and 78. Note 2. 

No. VII. exhibits verbs, with two Aspirates for the two final 
letters. Kal Prset. "T3 1 ?, 80. Future Isfy, 79. 2; also 80. 
Niph. T? 1 ??, ibid. Fut. TpVo SO. Piel ~r?V, p ua l ^., 71 ; 
also 80. Hiph. T^n, 79. 2; also 80. Hoph. "T^n, 79. 2; 
also 80. Hiph. -rsVjn, 71 ; also 80. 

No. VIII. exhibits verbs, with Aspirates for the first and third 
radicals. Kal Prset. M , 79. 1 ; also 80. Fut. Sfc??, 80. Part. 
ins, 79. 1 ; also 80. Niphal 3*53, 80. Fut. 3??1, 71; also 80. 
Piel >?3, 79. 1 ; also 80. Pual 3*3, ibid. Hiph. ^PH, 80. 
Hoph. 2l?7i, ibid. Hiph. ajanrTj 79. 2; also 80. 

No. IX. exhibits verbs, with Aspirates for all their radicals. 
There are very few of these, in the Hebrew language. Kal 
Prset. nn3,79. 1; also 80. Fut. ±=151, 80; also 79. 2; also 80. 
Niph.Snpa,80; also 79. 2; also 80. Fut. Niph. 30f», 71 ; also 

80. Piel 2n3 and Pual 3n3, 79. 1 ; also 71 ; also 80. Hiph. 
^ripn,80; also 79.2; also80. Hoph. 31-pn ,ib. Hith.3ri3r)n, 
80. 79. 2 ; also 71 ; also 80. 

Remark. If the student will diligently and faithfully pursue 
the writing off of the various paradigms with Aspirates, he will, 
in this way, speedily acquire a familiar knowledge, not only of 
the usual forms of regular verbs in general, but of all the minuties 
which pertain to the mode of writing them, when they contain 
Aspirates, in all their different conjugations, moods, and tenses. 

Nos. X. XI. XII. exhibit verbs 3 Guttural, 37 Guttural, and 
v Guttural. The diversities of the Future, Imperfect, ect. are to 
be sought for in the Lexicon. The exercises in these are very 
important, in respect to the attainment of a proper knowledge of 
the manner in which the composite Shevas are employed in the 

* In accumulated references like this case and others which follow, the design is, that 
they should answer to the various cases in which Daghesh lene is admitted or excluded, 
as they successively follow each other in each word. 



PART I. NOTES ON NOS. XIII. — XVII* 69 

Hebrew ; and also of a knowledge of the manner in which the 
Gutturals affect the vowels, employed in connexion with them. 

No. XIII. exhibits examples of verbs with Resh ; viz. [a) 
Verbs "fe. (b) Verbs !TO. (c) Verbs ^. In these it will be 
useful for the learner to exercise himself, so as to acquire, by ex- 
perience, an accurate knowledge of the various departures from 
regular analogy, which these species of verbs exhibit. 

No. XIV. exhibits verbs MS, whose M is treated as a Guttural. 
The principles by which these are regulated, are to be sought for 
in § 224 seq., which treat of verbs Pe Guttural. ^nW (marked 
with*) has two forms; for which consult the Lexicon. 

No. XV. exhibits verbs NS, with a quiescent M. Those with 
(*) have two forms ; see Lexicon. Those with final H, may be 
omitted until after the exercises in verbs Hv, 

No. XVI. exhibits, (a) Verbs of the first class *&, with Fut. 
Tseri in both syllables. Actual instances of the Fut. do not 
occur in all the examples, but they are ranged according to pro- 
bability; § 244. a. (b) Verbs with final Pattahh and penult 
Hhireq long; § 244. b. It should be added, that the penult 
syllable, rather than the ultimate, distinguishes these two spe- 
cies of verbs; e. g. ^T., TT. belong to the class a, because they 
have Tseri in the penult, and take Pattahh final only because of 
a Guttural or Resh, § 113. But in the class b. the penult vowel 
is Hhireq ; and besides this, the Imp. Inf. and Fut. usually re- 
tain the first radical, viz. the Yodh. 

No. XVII. exhibits all the verbs of the second class ^. Of 
these, **TOJ belongs, in Kal, to class 3d ; it is only in Hiphil, that 
its characteristics are developed. It should be noted, too, that 
"^ and V!?tj produced as examples in § 249. of the Grammar, 
are not reckoned in the list contained in § 248. Note. This is 
because ^?J, in one form and meaning of it, belongs to verbs of 
Class I. It is only when it has the sense of finger e, that it be- 
longs to Class II. As to Vi?T> it has no Hiphil, and consequently 
there is no certain means by which we can characterise it ; but 

the corresponding Arabic verb, viz. Iski, belongs to the genuine 
class of ^ in that language. 



70 PART I. NOTES ON NOS. XVIII. — XXIV. 

No. XVIII. exhibits all the verbs of Class III., whether they 
belong wholly or partly to this species. Further examination of 
this class of verbs makes me more inclined to assign them, in 
general, to roots ]5, as Simonis and Eichhorn have done. But 
these lexicographers are not consistent throughout with them- 
selves. For example, they call the Daghesh in the Inf. of ^?J, 
(in iZ^v 2 Chron. xxxi, 7), Bag. affectuosum (!); and the Fut. 
of ")^, viz. "f^l etc., they say, is borrowed from ^?; to which, 
however, they assign no meaning kindred with that of "l^l . So 
also, nj-jB^ (1 Sam. vi, 12), is said to borrow its form from ^^?; 
all of which does not stand well together. 

As to the form n3J a it may be referred to the root nn3 , Hiph. 
HPSn, formed according to § 261. in a manner resembling that 
of the Chaldee. But the student had better follow the Lexicons 
in his praxis; I mean such Lexicons as conform to the arrange- 
ment of Gesenius, which differs from that of Simonis. 

No. XIX. exhibits verbs ]S, whose different Futures, Impe- 
ratives, Infinitives, etc. must be sought for in the Lexicon. 

Nos. XX. XXI. exhibit verbs 3727 and ^27, many of which also 
present more or less variations from the Paradigms; all of which 
should be noticed in the exercises upon them. 

In No. XXI. a. exhibits such verbs as have 1 quiescent; b. such 
as have a regular moveable 1, and are to be regularly declined ; 
c. verbs Ayin Yodh, which exhibit peculiar forms in Kal only. 

No. XXII. presents verbs ^^, with various combinations of As- 
pirates, Gutturals, etc. ; to which due attention should be paid. 

No. XXIII. consists of verbs n7 5 in most of their varieties. 
The student should practise writing off and declining those which 
have Gutturals, Resh, etc. in them, as well as the others. The 
Lexicon will give him the various forms in the different conjuga- 
tions. 

No. XXIV. contains verbs J"P, the peculiarities of which are 
designated in § 293. 

Note. For verbs doubly anomalous, see Grammar, § 294 sq., which exhibits nearly 
all the cases that occur. 



PART I. NOTES ON NOS. XXV. XXXII. 71 

NOUNS MASCULINE. 

No. XXV. nouns of Dec. I., with immutable vowels. The 
word i"VD^D belongs here., only in its singular number. No. 
XXVI. nouns of Dec. II., with only the final vowel mutable. 
No. XXVII. nouns of Dec. III., with only the penult vowel 
mutable. 

No. XXVIII. nouns of Dec. IV., with the ultimate and penult 
vowels mutable. The few which have a Segholate form in the 
construct state, may be discovered by consulting the Lexicon ; 
see § 355. 5. 

No. XXIX. nouns of Dec. V., with ultimate and penult 
vowels mutable, but in a peculiar way, so far as it respects the 
construct state ; § 358. 3. 

No. XXX. exhibits nouns of Dec. VI., which has a large va- 
riety of forms. The divisions, 1, 2, 3, etc. explain themselves. 
The student should in a particular manner bestow his attention 
on this declension, both on account of its frequency in the lan- 
guage, and the difficulties which attend it. 

No. XXXI. nouns of Dec. VII., all of which seem to be mere 
participials, having the form of the Part, present in Kal, and 
almost exclusively an active sense. 

No. XXXII. exhibits nouns of Dec. VIII., which are not very 
numerous in the language. In making out the various forms, the 
student will be careful to note, that for the vowel-changes he 
must consult the other declensions, according to the nature of 
the vowels in the words belonging to this. It is the reduplica- 
tion of the last letter of the ground-form, in case of accession, 
and this only, which characterises Dec. VIII. 

It should be noted also, that strictly speaking, *">^ and Ty> 9 in 
the Paradigm of Dec. VIII, (Gramm. p. 228), do not belong to 
Dec. VIII., because the final letter is not actually doubled, when 
these words receive accession. So far as the mere mode of de- 
clension is concerned, these words belong to Dec. I. ; but in re- 
spect to the real implied nature of them, they rank with words 
in Dec. VIII. 



7^5 PART I. NOTES ON NOS. XXXIII. XXXVII. 

No. XXXIII. nouns of Dec. IX. These are quite uniform in 
their changes, and are but a small class in respect to number. 

NOUNS FEMININE. 

Nos. XXXIV — XXXVII. exhibit the various classes of fern, 
nouns. The anomalous plurals of Dec. XIII. will require par- 
ticular attention. The Lexicons afford the necessary aid for 
making out the various forms of them. 



PART II. 



NOTES AND EXPLANATIONS. 

In the Preface to my Hebrew Grammar, p. vii, I have given 
general directions for the first reading or study of the same, re- 
commending that the parts included in brackets should be omitted, 
and that when the student has advanced as far as the declension of 
nouns, he should begin to read and parse in the Chrestomathy. In 
addition to what is there generally said, I would now add, that 
the various accounts of all the irregular verbs may be lightly 
passed over, in the first reading of the Grammar ; for the object 
of this reading is rather to show the student where he can find 
what he needs, than to make him acquainted with the details of 
the various forms, etc. of the language. When the student, there- 
fore, has advanced to § 332 in the Grammar, and made a beginning 
in his exercises on Part I, No. I, of this Chrestomathy, as directed 
in p. 65 above, he should then commence his exercises in Part II. 
of this work, taking only a few words for the first lessons ; and at 
the same time, he should continue his grammatical recitations re- 
gularly, and also his exercise on Part I. as mentioned above, adapt- 
ing them, as to length, to the time which he has to spare for 
them. He must be cautioned here, against yet making the Chres- 
tomathy a principal study, and the Grammar and Praxis only 
a subordinate one; for the main object of the Chrestomathy is, 
to introduce him to a thorough knowledge of the Grammar and 
Praxis. 

In going forward with the Grammar beyond § 332, the student 
may confine himself, for the first reading, principally to what is 
printed in large type. When he has advanced to the Syntax, let 
him stop there, and commence again with his Grammar, reading 
carefully, but not committing to memory, what is included in 

h 



74 PART II. DIRECTIONS. 

brackets; and after the brackets are omitted, (i. e. from § 332 
onwards,) reading in like manner what is printed in small type. 
During this second reading of the Grammar, let him commit to 
memory and recite regularly, the Paradigms of verbs and nouns, as 
they respectively occur. This will greatly facilitate learning to 
parse and construe in the Chrestomathy ; while, on the other hand, 
the exercises here will much facilitate, and render more interest- 
ing, his exercises in the Grammar and Praxis in Part I. above. 

The teacher should take special care, all along, that the les- 
sons in the Chrestomathy be so apportioned as merely to pro- 
mote and accelerate the acquisition of the Grammar, and not to 
interfere at all with real and solid progress in it. Students are 
usually very desirous to push on, in obtaining a knowledge of the 
manner merely of translating Hebrew words, and seem to be satis- 
fied that they are making rapid progress in the language, when 
they can translate a considerable portion at a lesson. But this is a 
mistake ; and often it is one, which leads on so as utterly to de- 
feat, in the sequel, all accurate study and knowledge of the He- 
brew at a future period. Students will usually go on as they 
have begun to proceed ; and it is harder to turn about, and break 
up old habits of loose and inaccurate study, than it is to form a 
correct habit at the outset. 

It is for this reason, that I have chosen, so far as I am able 
by means of the Notes which follow, to conduct the student in the 
way of thorough analysis, from the very beginning. I have tried 
both ways of studying a language, on myself and on my pupils ; 
and I am most fully persuaded, that for adults, it is best to enter 
radically into analysis, from the very outset. It may be different 
with children ; but in the business of this Chrestomathy, children 
are not concerned. 

I have endeavoured to leave nothing unexplained in the Notes, 
which the student may know, and ought to know, in the initial 
stages of his study. All my readers have before them, in these 
Notes, what I should give them if I were personally present as 
their instructor. By proceeding in this way, they will go slowly, 
indeed, at first, but surely. In a little time, principles will begin 



PART II. DIRECTIONS. 75 

to appear plain and familiar. Apparent irregularities in the forms 
of words will diminish apace, by a constant reference to those 
parts of the Grammar which explain them ; and these once mas- 
tered, the progress will be much more rapid in Hebrew, than 
either in Latin or Greek; for the former language is far more 
simple than either of the latter. 

In going the second time over the Grammar, the student should 
proceed on through the Syntax. On completing this, let the 
study of the whole Grammar be immediately recommenced, with 
more particularity than before ; and so a fourth, a fifth, and (at 
least) a sixth time. The regular recitation, at every Lecture, of 
some portion of the Grammar, should not be intermitted at all, for 
the first six months of study. 

In regard to the Accents, I have introduced but few of them 
into this second part. I did not wish to embarrass the student 
with too many of them, at first. I have used only such as serve 
for the larger pause-accents ; or such as mark & penult tone-sylla- 
ble. The latter I have employed, principally for the sake of di- 
recting the student where to lay the stress of voice, in reading the 
Hebrew words. Those which are not marked with any accents, 
have the tone on the ultimate syllable, according to the general 
rule in § 99 of the Grammar ; a considerable number, also, which 
are marked with pause-accents, have the tone on the ultimate. 

Most persons who study the Hebrew, either partially or wholly 
neglect the accents. They do so, because it seems to require 
too much time and attention to become well acquainted with 
them. But such a knowledge of them as is requisite for gram- 
matical and exegetical purposes, may be attained with a very mo- 
derate share of attention. Let this be obtained gradually, from 
the commencement of study, and the loss of time occasioned by it 
will never be felt. The student may rest assured, that he never 
will regret having followed this advice. The accents are not, in- 
deed, of any binding authority ; but they are often a grateful 
exegetical and grammatical aid. At any rate, no Hebrew student 
can fail to perceive, that an acquaintance with them is desirable. 
He need not go into the fictitious schemes and subtilties of a Was- 



76 PART II. DIRECTIONS. NOTES ON NO. I. 

muth, a Boston, and many others, concerning them ; but their 
general and usual powers and object, he ought to understand. 

In reciting this second Part, the student should be required to 
give an account of the principle or the rule, in the Grammar, to 
which any and every reference is made in the Notes that follow. 
The instructor will thus be enabled to determine, whether the 
student has bestowed due labour upon the acquisition of what he 
professes to recite. 

Should the learner, at any time, feel himself unable to con- 
strue any of the select Sentences, in Part. II., he will find, in the 
Notes, a reference to the place in the Hebrew Bible from which 
any sentence is extracted. He can, therefore, consult the cor- 
responding English translation, if necessary. In regard to such 
passages, however, as are taken from the book of Psalms, the 
English and the Hebrew verses do not always correspond. The 
reason is, that in Hebrew, the title of a Psalm is reckoned as its 
first verse ; but in English, this is never done. Consequently, 
when the Psalm has a title, the English verses are one behind the 
Hebrew, and must be looked for accordingly. 



I. Ps. vii, 12, 3'nb^, ground-form sing. «T^ ($eio a h), Dec. I., 
the final He having Mappiq, 84 *, and consequently being move- 
able. The vowel under the He is Pattahh furtive, 69, which, not 
being a proper vowel, falls away when the word is changed by 
receiving the accession 0\, which forms the plural, 325. The 
1 in the sing, is omitted in the plural, because the syllable joined 
on to make the plural, has a Quiescent in it, 65. ETrT?N agrees 
with tt^W, a Part, in the singular, 437- 2. 

fctfitf, act. Part., root BBfif, 202. It is here (and so often 
elsewhere) employed as a verb in the present tense, announcing 
a general proposition, Syntax 527. a. Meaning : ( God vindicates, 
decides in favour of, the righteous/ 

* Note. Throughout, the first reference in figures, is to the Section ($) in the Hebrew 
Grammar. If there be a second, or third reference connected, they relate to subdivisions 
under the first. But -when several sections are referred to in succession, the signs §5 stand 
before them, or th« word and, or also, is inserted between them. 



PART IT. NOTES ON NOS. I. III. 77 

P"*??, adj. used as a noun, and employed here in a generic 
sense., i. e. as a noun of multitude; with vowels immutable, and 
therefore like Dec. I. of nouns ; Ace. after ^5"^\ Synt. 531. The 
accent under the word i"^??, although of the same form as the 
Methegh, is not one here, and never is one at the end of a verse, 
but is a Silluq, 85. Note; also 93. No. 1. The two large square 
points, after p^^ are the Hebrew period, called p^OB FpD^ i. e. 
end of a verse. With these, Silluq invariably stands connected, 
being either on the ultimate or penult syllable of the final word. 
This explanation will serve for all future cases of the same nature. 

II. Ecc. iii, 17, HN sign of the Ace, 408. 4. and 427. The 
ground-form f"IS 3 with a long vowel (Tseri), shortens that vowel 
here because Maqqeph follows, 89. 

^ETjn^ the syllable rj is the article, whose usual punctuation 
is H followed by a Daghesh forte, §5} 162, 163. As the Daghesh 
cannot be admitted into the *">, 111. the vowel Pattahh belonging 
to the article is prolonged instead thereof, 112. ; see also 152. a. 2. 
3^*5 is an adj. employed as a generic noun (like P >: T? in No. 1.) 
of Dec. IV., in the Ace. here, governed by tGQtp.. Note; the 
position of the Ace. before the verb or Part, which governs it, 
seldom occurs in Hebrew, except among the inversions which 
poetry occasions. 

ltBXg\ 3 Fut. of toZti, hh 1% 198.; meaning: < God will con- 
demn, pronounce sentence against, the wicked.' tDStp''. may also 
be rendered in the present tense, 'condemns,' as in universal pro- 
positions, Synt. 504. b. 

&fh$r\ 3 n is the Art. here, 162. seq., and 152. a. 2. The use 
of the article before E^H ^, (a kind of proper name,) is not com- 
mon, 413. For D^rpg, see under No. I. 

III. Proverbs xxx, 5, ^2 (kol), Kaph with Dag. lene, 79, 1. 
Ground-form v3 (kol) with long pure, which is shortened 
before a Maqqeph, 89. In Hebrew '3, all, is a noun; and 73 
is in regimen here with ^"]P^, 332. rVTOS'^Sj lit. universitas 
verbi. 

rnpw, Dec. XII. 387—389. see Parad. of Dec. XII. Ground- 
form '"H^, being derived from the masc. form, *"*£$, having 



78 PART II. NOTES ON NOS. III.— V. 

only the final vowel mutable, in the singular, agreeably to the 
laws in 381. f"HpS is in the Gen. as it regards ^?; but in re- 
gimen or the construct state, in respect to »*P bN, 434. b. — HP '$? : is 
in the Gen. after iTlpH; see for the word, under No. I. above. 
In Latin, we may translate the three words PplvN n*]p&T72 f by 
universitas verbi Dei. 

riBV)^-, fern. Part, from the root *)1?> Part. pass. mase. is 
fpn?, 202. of Dec. Ill; hence fern. ntpi$, 323.; under exam- 
ples in Par. of Dec. III. see 0^237 with its feminine, in 323. 

IV. Isaiah xl, 8. ^ . CO nst. of W, Dec. IV. 354. see Par. 
of Dec. IV—^lfrM, plural of Ppbg (see No. I.) in the suff. 
state, 334. ! G\- being the suffix of the 1st pers. plural ; see Par. 
in 336. The plur. ending E\ is dropped in order to receive the 
suffix, 339. The accent (;- i. e. Tiphhha) under the H, is a Dis- 
junctive, 93. No. 4 ; which is used here, in order to mark the 
tone on the penult syllable, 100. j. 

Q^PJ, Fut. of D^p, 268. b. see Par. of the verb. Meaning : 
' Shall endure, continue.' — DT13/?, f a preposition, 152. b. govern- 
ing the Ace. here. — nb'll^ Dec. II. 347- and Par. 

V. Psalm cxix, 11. ^bsj, 2J prep. 152. b. with Dagh. lene, 79. 
!,__ vab,, noun from ^b, Dec. VIII. 374.; also 375. b. For the 
shortening of the Tseri in J?., when it receives the accession \ 
(sufF. pronoun) see 129. c. a ; comp. under 128. b. — For the suflf. 
pronoun \, see 336. Par. 1st pers. sing, under b. 

^.?5?* verb 1st pers. Prseter, root 1?^, 194. The conjunctive 
accent Munahh (- 93. No. 21.) marks the penult tone-syllable, 
100. d. Meaning : e Treasured up, laid up/ 

^^l"}^, for the word rnpH, see under No. III. above, ^r. is a 
suffix-pronoun, 336. Par. a. 2d pers. sing. masc. The (f) after 
the penult vowel (?■.), is the Accent Silluq, 93. No. 1. The 
form of the word with the accent on the ultimate, would be, 
?Tni]P^ 5 m which case, the first accent under the Kesh is Me- 
thegh, see in 66. under E. g. But in consequence of the tone being 
thrown back, 100. I. the Silluq falls on the Sheva under n and 
converts it into Seghol, 148. The form /Tn^M, in No. III. above, 
becomes f"H^ here, because, the n being thrown into another 



PART II. NOTES ON NOS. V. VII. 79 

syllable, the Resh and its vowel make a simple syllable, which 
causes the vowel to become long, 130. a. 

VI. Psalm cxix, 161. T]!?*!^, ^ is a prefix preposition, in its 
original form ?B; but here (as usual) the ? assimilates with the 
following 1, and is written in it by a Daghesh forte, 71- comp. 
406.; so that ^-iyr»=Tjyr ?».— ^ is from n^f, Dec. IV. 
see Par. It is in the suffix state, 334. having the pronoun *f ap- 
pended, 336. Par. a. 2d pers. masc. For the difference between 
the const, form P^?), and the suffix-form, see Par. of Dec. IV. 
The reason of Qamets under the 2, in such forms as ^^. , T^S 5 ! > 
etc. is found in the mode of syllabication. In the cases just named, 
the Resh is thrown into the last syllable, which leaves the syl- 
lable simple in which 'D. stands, and of course prolongs the vowel, 
130. a. — In regard to the accent over the *T, i. e. the dot over it 
like a Hholem, it is a distinctive accent, named Rebhi a , 93. No. 
10. It is added here, because it has an influence on the Pe at 
the beginning of the word which follows, causing Dagh. lene to be 
inserted, although Pe is preceded by a vowel, 79- 3. Were it not 
for such an accent, the Pe would of course omit Dagh. lene, 80. 

*N19, Kal. Prseter, Fut. A. The student should here search 
the Lexicon for the conjugations of this verb, which are actually 
employed, and make out a synopsis of them. — For ^21 < see No. V. 
It is the Nom. to THQ here ; and the Nom., in Hebrew, is more 
usually put next after the verb. 

VII. Psalm cxix, 158. n^prjM, root Wp, in the conj. Hith- 
polel. 175. b. The H- at the end is paragogic, 205. also 125. b. 
In regard to the penult syllable ]»J, it is originally Pattahh, 271. 
f. which is here prolonged by the pause-accent, (Athnahh, 93. 
No. 2,) and becomes Qamets, 144. I. The form of the word, 
without H- paragogic, and without a pause-accent prolonging its 
vowel, would be tfiHOIpf]^ ; the more usual form of words in this 
conj. would be as toto"lpi~l^ 175. b. Meaning: "I was struck 
with horror/ or ' I was filled with loathing.' 

^^^, commonly a pronoun, 168. but here a conjunction, 409. 
a. — TfJTTpN , see in No. V. where the pause-accent makes a dif- 
ference in the penult syllable. — ^$^7, root "ifttjp. The form, 



80 PART II. NOTES ON NOS. VII. — X. 

without the accent Silluq, would be ^^j see Par. I. of regular 
verbs, Kal Preet. 3 pers. plural. But the accent restores the ori- 
ginal Pattahh under the Mem, and lengthens it, 146. 

VIII. Deut. iv, 2. ^Sp'in, root *1PJ, verb ^ first class, see Par. 
VIII. Hiph. Fut. 2 pers. plural masc. The Yodh between the 
two last radicals and characteristic of Hiphil, is here omitted, as 
being quiescent in the preceding vowel, Hhireq, 63. The full 
form would be ^pin. The Dag. lene is not inserted in the il 
which begins the word, because the preceding word ends in a 
vowel-sound, and has no pause-accent upon it, 80. 

nyjn, the H followed by Dag. forte is the article, 163. — ">$fc3 
is a proper relative pronoun here, 168. — > ^^, 164. 1st. pers. sin- 
gular. 

n ?^, from nj^ a verb n?, a Part, in Piel; the 1 is move- 
able here, 268. a. Note, comp. 271 . b. ; see Par. XVI. Piel. The 
Part. »T-]^P 5 preceded by the pronoun **P^, i s used in the room 
of a verb of the present tense, Synt. 527- a. — D 50^, ^ the sign 
of the Ace. 427. E? f fragment of a pronoun, 2 pers. plur. masc. 
336. For the manner of union with HM (DN), see 408. Par. of HN 
sign of Accusative. The Ace. a 5 j "l^, is governed by the Parti- 
ciple, Synt. 526. a. 

IX. Proverbs xvii, 27. W^ p Part. act. Kal, 202. from T\bn , 
Fut. Pattahh with rough enunciation, TJ^Hl, 225.—- -THEN, 
ground-form *">?^, Dec. VI. E class, 364. ; in the plural, with 
the sufF. "P- attached, 336. Par. c. 3d pers. sing. masc. In order 
to receive this suffix, the appropriate ending of the plural ( Q S) is 
dropped, 339. ; see Par. XXIV. 

9rn\ root ?T r of *Q first class, Part. act. Kal, 202; for Pattahh 
furtive under Ay in, see 69. For peculiarities in Hith., see Lex. 
— r\V^ r , with Silluq (93. No. 1.) which prolongs the Pattahh 
under the Daleth, 144. -TO? (the orig. form) is properly a fern. 
Inf. form, Dec. XIII. 390. ; comp. 195. Note. The masc. form of 
the Inf. is H (de a y) with Pattahh furtive, 69. ; the fern. Segholate 
form, therefore, is ^U, 141. It is used as a mere noun. Mean- 
ing: ' Knowledge, knowing.' Governed by ?!P\ Synt. 531. 

X. Obad. verse xxi, HiT^}, veha-ydka, and [the kingdom] 



PART II. NOTES ON NOS. X. XIV. 81 

shall be, Prset. with 1 used for the Future, Synt. 503, e. root 
n;n verb nV, 280. Par. XVI. For Methegh under the first He, 
see 66. e. g. and 87- c. 

'lyi^?, an anomalous form. The true original points of the 
word H-jni are unknown ; the Jews, from time immemorial, having 
omitted to sound it, when reading the Scriptures. Instead of 
the proper word (TUT, they read ^Jl*?.. Accordingly, Hin^ b has 
the appropriate vowel-pointing of "OlNb, an abridged form of 
^"^i, 119. c. 1. n'VPb i s i n the Dat. of possession, after 
n^y/JI , like the Latin est mihi, est tibi, etc. 

rl^h^ri, n art. 162. nyft>$, Dec. X. 380. Norn, to ruyfi . 
The Dat. of possession more commonly follows, as here, imme- 
diately after the verb of existence, and the Nom. of the verb then 
succeeds. 

XI. Proverbs i, 7, ™T., Dec. X. in the const, state, from 
nMn : 1._PT}n?, see in No. X.— mttfHn, noun of Dec. I. because 
all the vowels are immutable, fern, ending n\. 319. Note 2. in 
const, state with ™J; for which last word, see in No. IX. 

XII. Proverbs i, 22, D^P^, Dec. I. plur.— JN$P\, verb «b 
from Nji», 276. Par. XV. Fut. 3d pers. plur.— n^J, for Qamets, 
see in No. IX. 

XIII. Proverbs xviii, 15. 2b 3 see under No. V. — V^ , Part, 
in Niph. from V* , 273. and comp. 268. b. Declension III. 350. 
and Paradigm.— 713,7; , Fut. Kal from n2f? verb rib, 282. b.— 
™i?j see in No. IX. But the Daghesh is here euphonic (not lene), 
75. a. and is called Dag. conjunctive ; for the word ^VS i s P re ~ 
ceded by a syllable ending in a vowel, which has no accent upon 
it (comp. 80.) and Dagh. lene would be omitted in such a case. 
The two words, nyjJTTJfyi, are read, yiq-ned-da-ath. The Maq- 
qeph between them takes away the accent from the first word, 
89. 

XIV. Ps.xciv,ll. njn^inNo.X.— ?iV,No.ix.— n'i^n», 
Dec. XI. or XIII. const, plur. — E1N ? Dec. IV. but it has no const, 
or plur. state. — ^ that, conj. — ™P they, or they are, Synt. 469. 
In *1^P, the *!- is paragogic, as the penult accent denotes, it 
being under the first syllable. The accent here employed, is a 



82 PART II. NOTES ON NOS. XIV. XIX. 

conjunctive, viz. Merka, 93. No. 23. In regard to the penult 
tone, see 100. i. 

^?V7 ■> ori 'g- f° rm ' , ?\? ? which has its first vowel changed by 
a pause-accent, 144. Dec. VI. A and inform. 

XV. Proverbs ix, 10. nbrV] , Dec. X. const.— n^^n (hhdkh- 
ma) Dec. X. Gen. after rhT]h\, 332.— -Wr*, No. XI. Before 
this word, the verb of existence (Hjn) is understood, 554. In 
such propositions it is very rarely expressed. 

f^Tj, see in No. IX. where the larger pause-accent prolongs 
the first vowel. Here, the accent (which marks the penult tone, 
100. a.) being only of the second class of Disjunctives, 93. No. 5, 
it produces no effect on the vowel; as is often the case. — CtpTp , 
lit. of the Holy ones, i. e. of God, the plural being used as plur. 
excellentice, 437- 2. g. The sing, is E^iJ, Dec. III. For the omis- 
sion of the Vav in the plural, see on D s rp$ under No. I. — '"f?^, 
Dec. X. the verb of existence being understood before it, 554. 

XVI. Eccles. i, 18. ^*" 12 ? , ^ a preposition, Dag. lene, 79. 1 ; 
^"l, Dec. VIII. form as e. no plural ; with Maqqeph ~2~} (robh) 
short 0, 8Q.— DM, from D373 , with pause-accent, 93. No. 2.— 
nVH, "I conj.— *T»t>V, Fut. Hiph. from n?;, 243. b. HS$ with 
accent on the penult tone, 100. a. — SIHpH , Dec. I. the vowels 
being immutable. 

XVII. Prov. xii, 1. nn'H for M 63. also 202. and Synt. 
527. e.—^O, Dec. II.— *tf»kV, 1 conj., V&fo, 202.— nrpHn, 
Dec. XII., n at the beginning Raphe, i. e. without Dag. lene, 80. 
and 83. because of the preceding vowel, with conjunctive accent 
on the penult tone, 100. a. 

XVIII. Ps. xxii, 29, ri)7i^b , No. X— nyibsn, ibid.— bw^ : 

202. and 527- a.— O^a , ? with Dag. lene, 79. 2. The full form 
would be E^Sn^ 9 but the article H suffers syncope in such cases, 
152. a. Note. 

XIX. Ps. cxlv, 13. ^rfp^a , TVChto , noun fern. Dec. I. in 
the sing., a Heteroclite in the plural, not ranking under any of the 
declensions, with vowels immutable; e. g. plur. nVD^ , 326. c. 
For the omission of Dag. lene in the 2, see 82. b. — t[ sun°. pron. 
of 2d person, 336. Par. a. 2d masc. singular. 



PART II. NOTES ON NOS. XIX. XXI. 83 

J "!^f^, in reg., the verb of existence being understood before 
it, 554.— ^3 (kol), 89.— M3bfr, from dV»*, Dec. II. For the 
omission of the 1, see 63. Lit. thy kingdom ps] a kingdom of all 
ages, regnum universitatis seculorum, i. e. eternal. — ^T^J <^^^^, 
H instead of *!, 152. c. 4. noun of Dec. XIII., *T suff., point over it 
is the accent Rebhia, 93. No. 10.— "^ [bekhol), 89. Beth with 
Dag. lene, because a pause-accent precedes, 79. 3. — "Wl , Dec. 
L-.-l'lJ, J instead of 1, 152. c. 3. 

XX. Psalm ciii, 19. D*»0f3 for nfOtfttSf, 152. a. Note, H 
being the article ; E N £t£7 ? dual form, but used as plural, 329. Note 
2. For the accent at the beginning of the word, see 93. No. 5. 
95. a. The real tone-syllable is the penult here, 100. b. — T^n 
Hiph. of lpQ 9 TPn is a contracted form, used instead of r'P'T, 
268. b. e. g. 

Wp3 , root ^§3=frtt-H3 j the "1 being assimilated, 107- 1. c. 
In all the suff. and plur. forms, the Dag. forte is dropped, e. g. 
i«p3 t riMt?? ; etc. and so in 'l«p3 } 73. Note 3. This practice is 
so uniform, as to point to the necessity of another root, viz. WP5 
Dec. VI. e. where all the forms may be made; considering all 
the instances of the plur. to be in reg., or in the suff. state, as 
they may be considered. But if these forms may be all regarded 
as coming from MD3 a they belong to Dec. VII. 371. — i suff. pro- 
noun, 336. Par. b. 3 masc. sing. 

\TEfZD* , * (for I) 152. c. 4.— rfi^B , i n No. XIX.— i as above. 
— 732 (instead of ^H 2 /), 152. a. Note. v3, kol not kol here, 
because there is no Maqqeph after it. — rnjPE, with Silluq (93. 
No. 1.) on the penult, which restores the original vowel (Pattahh) 
under the W, (for the original ground-form is ^^^,) and prolongs 
such restored vowel, 146. It is a verb Preet. 3d pers. fern. 

XXI. Proverbs x, 1. ]5, Heteroclite, forms in the sing, mostly 
of Declension VII.; but not all, e. g. const. 1? , plur. ^32. 
— D?n , Part, adjective, Dec. IV.— TVSb), Fut. Piel from nsb, 
§§ 235, 236. 

^, Heteroclite, see Lexicon; the accent on it is Athnahh ( A ) 
93. No. 2.— 15*, * 152. c. 4.— rDVl, const, of njVl, Dee. X., 
theme «"*5J, the verb of existence ('"^'7) * s implied before it, 554. 



84 PART II. NOTES ON NOS. XXII. XXIII. 

— lEN, *1 suff. pronoun ; <2N from C^ 3 Dec. VIII. d. ; for Daghesh, 
and vowel-change, see 129. c. a. 

XXII. Proverbs x, 4. E7Nn, so written for 2?"!, 270. 1. and 5. 
cornp. 117- 2. EH is a Part, form, from W*n. It is in the Ace. 
here, governed by H^37 ; but such a position of the Ace. (viz. be- 
fore the word which governs it) belongs rather to the liberties of 
poetry, to which class of composition the book of Proverbs belongs. 
—n£&, Part. pres. from T1WV 3 282. b. and Par. XVL— *(*, with- 
out Dag. lene in the D, because a vowel-sound precedes without a 
disjunctive accent, 80. in reg. with H*a~! ; which last word is of 
Dec. X. Lit. njan. P]3, ^e £arad of sloth. 

y± 9 const, of *T}j Dec. II. a. — D"»!£nn, a dj. with Qamets im- 
mutable, because it stands for C^Tn, 112. and 32. plur. of V^HJ. 
— "^SEj Fut - Hiph. 3 pers. sing. fern. (T the Norn, is fern.), 
from " ! ^?, Fut. in Kal is with the rough enunciation, ^V), 225. 
Par. IV. The accent under Shin is Silluq, 93. No. 1. ; that 
under the Tav is Methegh, 87- a. 

XXIII. Prov. x, 6. riEn&, plur. Dec. XI. c— BWn (for »«1 
118, or for E7NH 119. c. 3.), a Heteroclite in its plur. forms, e. g. 
D^t&N'lj etc., if considered merely in respect to appearance. In 
reality, a?rf-l=tt?M\ 119. c. 3, and D*#*feD^fcp sJ 118.; and 
these forms would be regular in Dec. VI. i. It is preceded by the 
verb of existence implied, 554. 

^ -1 152. c. 4. ; s 2 const, of H^ p l ur . ITS and HVQ, a Hetero- 
clite. tPV&l, plur. Dec. IV.— n&D), Fut. Piel of HD3 , 282. 
6. — ^Q, Dec. IV. On the sense of this latter hemistich, com- 
mentators are much divided. Umbreit, the latest commentator 
on the book of Proverbs, understands s ? as designating the organ 
of enjoyment, and construes the clause thus : ' The injustice which 
the evil man practises, prevents his enjoyment of divine bless- 
ings.' This, however, seems rather far-fetched. May not Rom. 
iii, 19. I'vcc Tray a-ropa <ppayy, cast some light upon the phrase? 
The sentiment may be, c The man of violence, instead of being 
blessed of Jehova, shall be treated as guilty ;' or, (as it seems to 
be here expressed), e No plea for himself shall be admitted, his vio- 
lence shall cover, i. e. stop, his mouth.' — aro^a avrov typayflr^eTixu 



PART II. NOTES ON NOS. XXIII. XXVI. 85 

Another explanation is, perhaps, equally probable, if not more 
so. ^Ejn may designate the violence done to the wicked, not done 
by him ; and so be the direct antithesis of JTO'Tj? blessings, in the 
preceding clause. So Ziegler understands it, in his commentary 
on the Proverbs. The sense would then be, ( Violence, i. e. se- 
vere punishment, shall stop the mouth of the wicked, i. e. strike 
him dumb, render him unable to speak ;* a lot very different from 
that of the righteous, ' on whose head blessings rest/ 

XXIV. Prov. x, 7- ^?X (also *">5?.) with ace. Munahh mark- 
ing the penult tone, Dec VI. e. and d. const, before P^? ; which 
last is used in a generic sense. — n ?"J-? < , < prep, pointed with 
Hhireq because it comes before another Sheva, 137- and its own 
proper point is Sheva, <, 152. b. But two Shevas before a vowel 
are inadmissible, 90. 2. comp. 43. seq. ; consequently the first 
goes into a short vowel, 137- — The verb of existence is under- 
stood before n^Qv (which is of Dec. XI.) and the noun with its 
preposition, is used as an adjective, 442. ; i. e. ' The name of the 
righteous shall be blessed/ meaning that men will bless or speak 
well of them. 

Dtt?1, (I 152. c), const, of D#, Dec. VII. a.-- 2f£}\ s 212. 1. 
P n with Silluq, 144. 

XXV. Prov. x, 9. nYin, 202.— DV13, (for Qinn^, ]52. a. 
Note,) Din with 1 merely a fulcrum, 64. because the Hholem 
here is pure ; before Maqqeph it is E^ torn, with suff. EJ*] , 
e. g. as Haig , etc. 129. c. b. Dec. VIII. /.— ife., Fut. of ^T T> 
the quiescent •» of the root is dropped, 244. a. The usual form 
is ?[.^ ; but in the text, the final syllable of this word imme- 
diately precedes an accented syllable in the next one, which causes 
the accent to be thrown back, 101. d. and consequently the long 
vowel Tseri is changed into a short one, 129. a. — ntSJ3 f Dec. 
VI. h. used as an adverb here, 403. b. Athnahh marks the 
penult tone. 

tiS2Q 3 Part. Piel from tip? — ^?T? , plur. with suff. Vu 
§ 336. § 339. ground-form TO, Dec. VI. a.— Vl^. t Niph. Fut., 
root 3TT , 243. b. For the final Pattahh furtive, see 69. 

XXVI. Prov. x, 11. "Tip*?, Dec. III. const.— n«PT , sing. TJ, 



OO PART II. NOTES ON NOS. XXVII. — XXXI. 

which however is used only as an adjective, Dec. VIII. i. — ^, 
see under No. XXIII. —Dlgn 71QD), see under No. XXIII. 

XXVII. Prov. x, 19. 3*14, No. XVI.— D^^, plur. Dec. IV. 
a._V?rr, Par. IV— 3H0g, ground-form 37^?, Dec. VI. A.; for 
Qamets under 5, 144. — ^™if, dual with sufF. V-, from n ?^?, 
Dec. XI. a.— bv?tp», Part. Hiph. from bab . 

XXVIII. Prov. x, 20. In H?|., the accent Munahh marks 
the penult as the seat of the tone. — "TJ^?, Part. Niph. — V^%, 
Dec. III. ; verb of existence before it, Synt. 554. — 2?. f No. V. 
— to i?P3, 5 con j. here becomes 3, see b in No. XXIV. ^5?P, 
(without accent ^P,) a proper adj. Lit. ' The heart of the wicked 
|js] like something little, or, like a little thing ; i. e. is mean, 
worthless. 

XXIX. Prov. xvi, 3. % Imp. of V?j, 257—™/!^ X de- 
volve upon Jehova, i. e. confide, or commit to him.— Tf^S5> 
with Methegh under Mem, 87- a- and Athnahh on the penult 
tone-syllable, plur. suff. Tr., root H^tt, Dec' IX.— .^1, ) conj. 
^b\ Fut. Niph. from ^3, Par. XIII.; the round dot over the 
Kaph is the ace. Rebhia, marking the penult tone. — Tpi|ptpr]E , 
plur. suff. Tr., Dec. XI. and XIII., from mtiqn , with Silluq 
on the penult. 

XXX. Prov. xv, 33. mjl, No. XI.— TO, const, of Dec. II., 
verb of existence implied before it, 554. — \3? T), "1 conj. ; b prep., 
with Hhireq short, 137- ; ^, const, plur. of E^Q ? which has no 
sing., 327. 3. The probable ground-form in the sing, is ^f , 
Dec. IX. ^35 c used as a prep., 407- c. For b with Hhireq, see in 
No. XXIV.— "tab, Dec. Ill— HOT, Dec. XI., verb of existence 
implied before it, 554. Meaning : ' The fear of Jehova, i. e. piety, 
is the instruction of wisdom,' i. e. wise instruction, 440. or, a 
learning of wisdom ; ' and before honour,' i. e. exaltation or praise 
from men, ' is humility/ viz. a humble, unambitious spirit, is of 
greater worth than any honour which men can bestow ; or, ' honour 
is preceded by humility/ i. e. the way to attain true honour is to 
be humble. 

XXXI. Prov. xvi, 2. *T}1, const, plur. Dec. VI. a.—'W, adj. 
Dec. VIII., sing, and in concord with b3 ._Jl\p2?2 f 2 prep., ^J*3?, 



PART II. NOTES ON NOS. XXXII. — XXXV. 87 

from V?, Dec. VI. o. dual const. § 338. § 339, suff. in 336— ph 
Part. act. Kal. — mn-Y"!,, comm. gen. Dec. L, sing. H-l"! with Pat- 
tahh furtive, 69. For fem. plur. see 327- 1. comp. 321. Mean- 
ing : 'In a man's own view his actions are pure ; but Jehova, 
who looks upon the heart of man, estimates him according to the 
character of his spirit, or internal man/ 

XXXII. Proverbs xvi, 6. HJMJ, J for 1, 152. c— TUJM, a n 
abridged form of A?P^, 107- 2. The prep. 2J is understood before 
it. — " , ?P > !, Fut. Pual from ""'??, used as present tense, 504. b. — 
f\V (yZ-von), Dec. III.— nHTJvasi, -n 152. c. 4.; ^ prep.— n^D, Inf. 
const, as a noun, 519. — ^^ , £3 prep, for ]^, 406. The ) is com- 
monly assimilated with the letter which follows it, and written by 
a Dagh. forte, 107- 1.; but here the Dagh. is excluded, 111. seq. 
— 27J adj., ground-form V") , which the pause-accent prolongs, used 
as a noun here, 445. Meaning: 'By kindness and faithfulness 
sin is covered,' i. e. is forgiven, the punishment of it is remitted; 
' and by piety Incomes] turning away from evil,' i. e. reverence for 
God occasions departure from evil. 

XXXIII. Prov. xv, 29. P" 1 ^, adj. and predicate of the sen- 
tence; therefore placed before the noun, 446. — £ before E^?H, 
see 3TJS in No. XXXII.— rtXjiyi, -1 152. c. 4.; rbzr) const, of 
Dec. X. — ^P\ pause-accent on the final vowel lengthens the 
Pattahh, 144. 1. 

XXXIV. Prov. xvi, 9. Z&V., Fut. Piel from n^n._Jl3-H, 
suff. form of T?.7I, Dec. VI. a. — nyr^, for pointing see nSn^b 
in No. X.— r?J, Fut. Hiph. from F©.-J '^¥g, Dec. VI. suff. 
state, from "T??, class A, Methegh under Tsadhe, 87- a. Silluq 
under Daleth. Meaning : ' Let a man devise his way,' i. e. lay 
out plans for his future employments and success, e it is the Lord 
who must establish his goings,' i. e. his success depends on the aid 
which the Lord may afford. 

XXXV. Prov. xvi, .12. rQS'V), Methegh under Tav, 87- a. 
D'Qbp, Dec. VL-rtBH? , Inf. const, of HOT , used as a noun, 519. 
preceded by Hjn understood, 554.— 3H2£j, Dec. VI. E class. The 
pause-accent here has no influence in prolonging the vowel which 
precedes it, 149. it only marks the penult tone. — HjTTCa, point- 



88 PART II. NOTES ON NOS. XXXV. XXXIX. 

ing of the prep. 2, 137; 7 nas n0 Dagh. lene, although it follows 
a silent Sheva, 81. 2— fW\, Fut. Niph. of l 8 © .—MB? , see *WC?g 
in No. XX. Meaning : ' It is an abominable thing for kings to 
do evil ; but by the practice of equity, the throne is established.' 

XXXVI. Prov. xvi, 16. T12p n} for Methegh see § 87. j. rare 
form of Inf. const, from ^JiJ, 283. 2.; used as a noun const. 519. 
SIlSTFa, mat-tobh, with Dagh. euphonic in 13, 75. comp. 170. 
Note. — V^rjP, £ is the particle of comparison, 454. Daghesh 
omitted in n, 111. 

iTOfyij reg. Inf. const, of najj, used as a noun const. 519. — 
"TJP? , Part. Niph. from TJ2 ? sense of the Latin Part, in — dus, 
529. — *]*?§*?, ?? comparative here, 454. ; 3 instead of 3, 144. 
Lit. The acquisition of wisdom, how good compared with gold ! 
and the acquisition of intelligence is to be chosen, in preference 
to silver. 

XXXVII. Prov. xvi, 18. *&h , in No. XXX.— rn$ , Dec. VI. 
E class. The accent Merka, 93. No. 23. marks the penult tone. 
7^| , Dec. III. 554. the Athnahh under S belongs to the final syl- 
lable, the accent being placed on the letter which immediately 
precedes the vowel of a syllable, 98. — ]V?l#3 , Dec. III. d. — HD2 ? 
Dec. VI. k. with He Mappiq, 84. const, state before TVD f Merka 
marks the penult tone. — T^, see in No. XXXI. Meaning : 
' Pride precedes destruction ; and haughtiness of spirit is the pre- 
cursor of stumbling,' i. e. of ruin. The prep. ^^p. signifies before 
in respect to time, as well as in respect to space ; see Lex. 

XXXVIII. Prov. xvi, 25. &?., indeclinable, peculiar, see Lex. 
TpJ. , with Munahh on the penult tone. — *£5 < , before, i. e. in the 
view of, in the sight of.-— PWTHON, n. a f em . suff., 336; TJ^ 
which precedes, is comm. gender, and a fem. suffix may follow. 
The adj. ""^J, a ^ so agreeing with TJ?., is masculine ; comp. 451. 
— NTH, const, plur. of T?.?., the 3 being without Dagh. lene, 81. 
1. because the ground-form O^P^" 1 ? excludes Dagh. lene. Mean- 
ing : ' There is a course of conduct, which men may judge to be 
right, but which leads to destruction.' The phrase f\$|P5"H 
means, ' deadly ways, destructive ways.' 

XXXIX. Prov. xvi, 81. nng* , const, of. Dec. XIII., the ac- 



PART II. NOTES ON NOS. XXXIX. XLIV. 89 

cent Munahh (93. No. 21.) marks the penult tone syllable. — 
rgjjgn, Dec. XIII., accent as before.— nyfr, 554— TH with 
Merka on the penult— H,^, Dec. XI.— «2afi, 3 pers. fern. 
Fut. Niph., agreeing with nytP. Lit. A crown of beauty is old 
age, should it be found in the way of righteousness. 

XL. Prov. xvi, 28. iTDQrjn, ? for ^, 41. and 65.— nW;, 
Fut. Piel; for final Pattahh, see 236— P^, Dec. Ill— irja, 
Dec. II._Yn?B, Part. Hiph. from "HS, 527-— *&&, Dec. I. 
Lit. A tale-bearer separateth intimate friends, ^vH being gene- 
ric, i. e. having a plural sense. 

XLI. Prov. xvi, 32. nils, 446.— 'H^N, Munahh marks the 
penult tone-syllable, from t|n«, Dec. V. d.— D?SN, Dual of *1« : 
which is a contraction of H3^, Nun being occulted, 107- 2.; ac- 
cent Tiphkha anterius, 93. No. 5. the real tone-syllable is the 
penult, 45. a. In the form ?]&, with an implied Daghesh, (a com- 
pensation for the 2 dropped), it belongs to Dec. VIII. ; see in 
Par. XXVII. Lit. D^W "H"!^, the protracted of anger, i. e. he 
who protracts his anger, who is patient, forbearing. — TlSap^ Q 
compar., see under No. XXXVI— b#B for b&iD, Part. act. 63. 
— "Q^P, £? compar. particle, as before; "Q', Part. act. — ""'"'V, 
Dec. I. as to the sing., but plur. Dec. VI. p. 

XLII. Prov. xvii, 1. nils, No. XLI— na, fern. Dec. VIII— 
nrrin fern, of ^n.—nf?W, Dec. XII., fern, of iblg.—PTa, 
408. Par. of ^.-JTina, » comparative, 454— ^, Part. 202. 
Note 1.; or participial adj. governing the Ace. after it, 511. 
e. g. — ^CP?, const, pi. of nsj, Dec. VI. E class, governed by 
«^,511.' 

XLIII. Prov. xvii, 3. *nS», Dec. VII— *1?S^, for ^n 1 ?, 
152. «. Note, Dec. VI. a. The tone is on the penult, but the ac- 
cent (Tiphhha anterius) is prcepositive, 95. a. — ^rj'Jr for ^lltTy? f 
152. a. Note, Dec. IV— ]nsi for )rj\ZL, act. Part. 63— nia 1 ?, 
see No. V.— rnrn., 554. 

XLIV. Prov. xvii, 9. n$Op, part. Piel. — 37E72, tone on pe- 
nult, 95. a— Hfe?, Part. Piel.— rnqig, Dec. X., Methegh 
under the Aleph, 87. a.— nab" (for rtflttf), Part. act. of mtf, 
followed by a before the noun which it governs, 506. — "^"J^ 

N 



90 PART II. NOTES ON NOS. XLIV. XLVII. 

2 Raphe, 80. Meaning: e a matter, a report, a thing.' — TH£D, 
Part. Hiph., 527.— H^W, No. XL. 

XLV. Prov. xvii, 13. S^E, Part. Hiph. from rfitf, 268. b. 
Par. XIII. — ^?*3j Dec. X. fern, of 3H, which properly involves a 
Daghesh forte; and this is the reason why n ^"2 nas the first vowel 
immutable, 111. and 127. — ®^, Fut. Kal 3 pers. fern., agree- 
ing with riyn, root Bto .-JtfT5», suff. state of H%, Dec. VI. o. 
with preefix Mem. 

XL VI. Prov. xvii, 14. Vt&B, form of Part. act. from IBS ; 
used here as a noun, however, for the act of letting out water. 
The form has been a great stumbling block to critics, who seem in 
general to have supposed, that words of this form could denote 
nothing but an active agent ; e. g. ^|?^ a shepherd, 'P'in a 
sailor, ^!1N an enemy, rTpn a seer, etc. But it is a mistake, 
to suppose that this form always implies an agent. For example, 
"TOT 1 residuum, the residue, H7YS7 a holocaust, and fern. J Tlv^ 
lead, are clear cases of a different nature. In accordance with the 
tenor of these words, may "It-^S be understood as meaning, e the 
letting out ;' which being a kind of active sense, is even less re- 
mote, than the examples above, from the common analogy. In 
this way, all the obscurity about the text is removed. 

As the sentence has a comparative sense necessarily implied in 
it, the particle 5 as, is to be understood before *")t^2, 559. — D 1^ 3 
329. Note 2. with accent prsepos.— H^«n, 554.— I'VTO, Dec. III. 
Meaning : c When strife commences, it is like the bursting forth, 
or the letting out, of water which is restrained or dammed up ; 
which, when thus set at liberty, will rush with accumulated and 
increasing force. So is it with strife; which, when once com- 
menced, grows in violence as it continues.' 

^1, No. XXX.— -SWin, Inf. Hith. with final Pattahh, 
236. used as a noun, 519. lit. the growing warm. — ^l^, *7 art. 
152. a. 2.— E?ifc?, Imp. of E?tM , with Vav fulcrum merely, 64, 
inasmuch as the Hholem here is pure, 212. 5. Meaning: 'Be- 
fore contention waxes warm, refrain from it.' 

XLVII. Prov. xvii, 17- ^3, const, of ^, 89.— 2^ for atfWj 
Part. act. 63. used as a verb, 527. a.—?"?.^, n art. 152. a. 2.; 37 



PART II. NOTES ON NOS. XLVII. XLVIII. 91 

with Patt. furt. 69. — HW, a Heteroclite, but essentially of Dec. 
VIII., as the plur. is essentially of a Daghesh'd form., 58. — n *^^7, 
b prep. ; iTjSfcssrPjSj 58, because the first Qamets is impure and 
therefore immutable, 127- and 111. In respect to actual declen- 
sion, it belongs to Dec. X. — Tbj^ Fut. Xiph., 243. b. Sense: 
'He who is a true friend, (?T^ the friend,) will be constant in 
his affection ; and a true brother will help in times of adversity.' 

XLVIII. Prov. xvii, 19. nrfM, No. XLVII.— 3H£g, accent 95. 
— TTSa, Dec. X. Lit. he loveth harm, that loveth strife.— ■?&$, 
I understand here, with Umbreit, as meaning, ' the consequences of 
transgression,' viz. punishment, or harm. So n^t|n sin, and ]137 
iniquity, also mean, the consequences of sin, viz. punishment, 
misfortune, affliction. In respect to this sense of 2?^?? , comp. 
Dan. ix, 24. So often, dfAccoria in the New Testament. The like 
expression in Proverbs is, "All that hate me, love death." In this 
way a truly poetic parallelism between the two members of the 
sentence is preserved. 

Ppa^/Part. Hiph., with He Mappiq and regular, 84.— Vu^S, 
from rim f Dec. VI. E class, with suff. \— tfjEE? , Part. Hiph. 
with final Tseri shortened to Seghol, 89. — "^j? , with accent, 144. 
i. q. " , 5v ? - Meaning: ' He who demeans himself with haughti- 
ness, will occasion his own destruction.' 

I understand this figurative description of pride, or exaltation, 
as grounded on the custom of princes, nobles, and wealthy men, 
in the East, erecting a lofty portico in front of their dwellings, 
through which the entrance into them lay. The ruins of the 
temples in Egypt, at Baalbec, Palmyra, and other places, exhibit 
the same taste in architecture. In reference to this same custom, 
(an emblem of honour or elevation,) I understand the terms Sub' 
lime Porte, (Ital. Porta, Germ. P forte), as applied to the Otto- 
man emperor at the present day. The lofty gate (for so Sublime 
Porte means) is a designation intended to point out him who lives 
in the dwellings connected with the lofty gate, i.e. the gate which 
by way of eminence is lofty, or the most lofty of all ; in other 
words, it means the emperor or reigning monarch. Whether 
this explanation does not better accord with the oriental manner 



92 PART II. NOTES ON NOS. XLVIII. LV. 

of framing designations, than the explanations commonly given of 
Sublime Porte, the reader acquainted with the style of the East 
may judge. When the same terms are applied to designate the 
Ottoman emperor and his divan, i. e. his council, they are em- 
ployed in a like figurative way. 

XLIX. Prov. xvii, 25. ^2N, root ^, for the suff. form, see 
Par. XXIV. No. II— ]5, 554.— Vpi?, i n apposition with P>, 
435. — *"^^, the accent Rebhia is over the Mem, 93. No. 10. and 
marks the tone-syllable. — \n"jb ; l\ Part. act. fern, from T?J, used 
as a noun of Dec. XIII. a. Sense : ' A grief, or cause of bitter- 
ness, to his mother.' 

L. Prov. xviii, 6. V15b, const, dual of Dec. XI., from H5b, 
n without Dag. lene, 81. l.—^n}, Par. XX., Munahh marks the 
penult tone. VS-"1 5 *) 152. c. 4. ; VD phiv, with suff. \ ^ a Hetero- 
clite from nS.—nifcbq^ p l. of Dec. X., Methegh, 87. a.— 
^"JHI j 277- c. Sense : ' A fool's lips come along with (cause) con- 
tention ; and his mouth calls for smiting ;' i. e. he loves conten- 
tion, and calls for, promotes assaults. 

LI. Prov. xviii, 7. ^ , const, of HS .-Jlb-nnriP , mehhit-tal-lo, 
Dec. X., with Dagh. euphonic in the b, 75. a. Synt. 554. — ^'iT^, 
a verbal noun from E7J2J, Dec. VII. b. Synt. as above. — ^53, 
from 2?P3., Dec. VI. a. suff. form. 

LII. Prov. xviii, 9. n«inn : a, p ar t. Hiph. from n5n._Jin5Mb^, 

suff. state of rDHbQ ? Dec. XI., (for rDrf?B 118.) with S otiant, 
118. Note 2.— K^n, is he, 469— rvn#B bpjb, lit. to him who is 
possessor of wasting, i. e. to a waster or prodigal, 444. c; iTnipa ? 
Part. Hiph. 

LIII. Prov. xviii, 10. b?3» , const, of Dec. IV.— ZW f const, of 
Dec. VII., 554—12 , into it, form in 408.— V-Vi; , Fut. Kal of ?Tl, 
used for the Present, 504. b. — ^?^3, Part. Niph., lit. is elevated ; 
i. e. is secure, safe, like one who betakes himself to an elevated 
place, and thus places himself out of the reach of enemies. 

LIV. Prov. xviii, 13. S^», Part. Hiph. from MP", -O-T n^O, 
he who gives answer to any matter. — 2~]T£2 } before, as an adverb, 
403. «.— ribjJM, &v-ve-leth, with penult tone— ^n, 469. 

LV. Prov. xviii, 14. ^b^ : , Fut. Pilpel of b^, 176. 3— 






PART II. NOTES ON NOS. LV. LX. 93 

''nbnE, suff. state of Dec. IX., from nbq£, Methegh, 87- a.; 
for the suff., see 3/9- 2. and comp. suff. in 309. c. — ^^5^, fern, 
adj. from «?3, 323. Part, under V.—^W\ with epenthetic H2- 
suffix, 309. d.; VW\ Fut. Kal from KKO, 296. d. The fern. suff. 
H- refers to H-V),, which is of the common gender. 

LVI. Prov. xviii, 21. njg, Dec. VI., penult tone.— EW1, 
Dec. VIII. — "^ const, of TJ, Dec. II. Lit. in £Ae hand of, i. e. in 
the power of.— ^SqVj, suff. plur. Part, of inK Dec. VII., Me- 
thegh, 87. a. The fern. suff. K\. relates to p2?b as fern. The 
Rebhia over Beth marks the penult tone. — b^^ } Par. VII. — 
PTJ"]3, with suff. fern., Dec. VI. 5. Meaning: c Those who love 
it,' viz. the free use of the tongue, or slander, etc., ' shall eat the 
fruit of it,' viz. of a slanderous disposition. 

LVII. Prov. xix,2. ttfgjj TOJ ^4, lit. with nothing of know- 
ledge of soul, i. e. that the soul or mind should be destitute of 
knowledge. — '""^^I, fern. Inf. from 3HJ, 247. «• as a noun with 
penult tone, of Dec. XIII. 390. — rnto'Nb, 554. — Y**, he who has- 
teneth, Part. act. from V^ to urge forward, to hasten. — ^73") 9 
dual of bjjj Par. XXVII., penacuted, 100. &.— NtfffT, Part. act. 
as a verb, 527- Sense : c He who urges rashly forward with his 
feet, without considering how he is proceeding, NDin^ w \n ma k e 
a mis-step, i. e. will stumble, or, will err from the right way.' 

LVIII. Prov. xix, 5. TO, Dec. VII. g.— &1\$ , plur. of T$ 
Dec. VI., lit. « witness of falsehoods, i. e. a false witness, 440. — 
nj?2^ Fut. Niph.— rpgj, Fut. Hiph. from rn5>._S>M , Dec. IV. 
lit. he who breathes out lies, comp. Acts ix, o Se 'EavXoq 'in ifAitveay 
aireiXvjq kcju cpovov elq rov<; f/.<z$-/]Ta<; rov Kvotov. — ^rj^., Fut. Niph. 

LIX. Prov. xix, 9. 13^, 240. It is easy to see that this 
proverb is the same as that in No. LVII. The last word only 
differs ; but the sense which it conveys, is the same as that of sb 
tob^. . So, often in the book of Proverbs, the same maxim as to 
sense is repeated, with some slight difference of diction like to the 
one in question. 

LX. Prov. xix, 14. n?3, Dec. VI. o.—^Tl, Dec. I.— nbqi, 
const, of Dec. X., 554. Lit. are the heritage of parents, i. e. an 
inheritance given or bequeathed by them; ^ but, for this particle 



94 PART II. : 4 NOTES ON NOS. LX. — LXIII. 

often stands before an antithetic part of a sentence ; see Lex. — * 
<?— ]P . If the Jews had read the word 'TJ'T as we do, the point- 
ing would be iTjrP.E; but they read, and still read, ^^2 , £ , be- 
cause Aleph does not admit a Dagh. forte, 111. — nt#M ? irreg. see 
Lex.— Tl^gtpD, 3 for 5 , 131. Part. fern. Seghol. Hiph., from h^W, 
Par. XXI. Meaning : ' Dwelling-houses and wealth may be given 
to children by their parents ; a discreet wife is the special gift of 
heaven/ 

LXI. Prov. xix, 16. '^3 ? su ff. state of 2*?3 . Meaning : < He 
who obeys the divine commands, shall preserve his own soul or 
life.' There is a paronomasia here, ~)^t# in the first clause having 
the sense of obeying, observing ; in the second, the sense of pre~ 
serving, 571 • e. 

HfS, root nt2.—YO-H suff. plur. of TTH, Declension VI. a. 
Meaning: ( He who neglects, is indifferent to, his 'conduct. — f^SpJ, 
the vowel-points do not agree here with the Kethibh, i. e. the 
word written in the text, nDV, but with the Qeri, i. e. the word 
m^" 1 written in the margin at the bottom, 103, i. e. rfi£J with 
vowels, Fut. Kal of'mD. The Kethibh f\QV, should be read 
HKi-Vj Fut. Hoph., which means, ' he shall be put to death;' the 
sense not differing, in any important respect, from that of Fut. 
Kal, rfiEJ . And thus often, with the like readings, in the He- 
brew Bible. 

LXII. Prov. xix, 20. 37BIJ? , 235.— TT$9 , Dec. XI .—%P_, 183. 
—ID^ f Dec. II.— ? 9b? , penult tone, compos, accent, 93. No. 11. 
— Cpq^, 225.— ^jg^rj'^, n for n because of the Silluq, .148. a. 
Meaning : ' In time to come, for the future ;' or, f At the end of 
life.' The Chaldee translator has taken it in the latter sense, 
rendering it, TfS'' 1 ^ 1 '?^' ^ n thy end; so the LXX., eV ia-%drav a-ov ; 
Vulgate, in ?iovissimis tuis. But the former sense is preferable, 
as it embraces the latter, and much more besides. 

LXIII. Prov. xix, 21. JTttn, a dj. phir. fern, of ^, 323. Par. 
under Dec. VIII— rnSttfq^ , 87. a. plur. of Dec. XI. or XIII.— 
Sb, instead of ^, 89.— rkl, Dec. XI.— ^H [hi) 164. used for 
the sake of energy here, 467. — Q!, prj, Fut. Kal. of D^p, 3 pers. 
fern. Meaning : ' Many are the plans which the mind of man 



PART II. NOTES ON NOS. LXIII. — LXVII, 95 

devises/ (because his plans are often subject to disappointment) ; 
' but the counsel of the Lord always stands/ i. e. he always fully 
accomplishes every plan which he devises. Perhaps the meaning 
is : f However numerous the plans of men are/ viz. in opposition 
to the Lord, ' the counsels of the Lord shall stand/ i. e. be fully 
accomplished. 

LXIV. Prov. xx, 1. H., Part, with Tseri, from yrh, 270. a. 
5.—V1>Z, n art. 163.; VI, Dec. VI., tone on penult, although 
the accent is prcepositive, 95. and 93. No. 5. Verb of existence 
before it, 554. — nfth, p ar t. act. from Httn . — "Dt$, lit. intox- 
icating drink is an alarmer, i. e. excites alarm, makes or occasions 
commotion, disturbance. — ^2 (kol) for v3 ? 89. — ^P, Part, act.; 
lit. every one who staggers with it. — 121 H3J27,, sho-gheb-bo, 75. 
The natural tone-syllable in TVW is the ultimate ; but the tone is 
here thrown back, 101. d. — E?rP , 3 f or 3 } ]44. ; f or pointing in 
the first syllable, 225. 

LXV. Prov. xx, 6. 2H robh, for ZH, 89. ; lit. as to the great 
part of men, Nom. abs. 415. — E^N, each one will celebrate, ^"JiT.. 
— "HP?!, Ms own goodness, suff. state of ^H, Dec. VI. a. — 
CW^S, properly from V^^. Dec. L, but the sing, (by Syriasm) is 
written V^ti*, 119. d. 2. and seems to belong to Dec. III., while 
in reality it is of Dec. I. Lit. a man of faithfulnesses, i. e. a truly 
faithful man, 440. and 437. 3. 

LXVL Prov. xx, 9. IB** 1 , 240— VpSJ, 286. 1.— ^,No. V. 
— ^."ina 9 I am pure, from ^Hto } 181. Note 1. The tone is on 
the penult, although it is not marked here. — ^iHNlsnp , ft , 406. 
and 111. for Methegh, see 87. /. ; nmn ? Heteroclite, for nwfen 
or nt^n t 119. c. 3. But the const, state is nNtsn, as if the 
word belonged to Dec. II. 

LXVII. Prov. xx, 12. )))*, penult tone, Dec. VI. i.; dual in 
Par. XXVII. O. fern, gender, 320. b. 6— nVKW ' Part, fern., Par. 
XXL v Gutt. 141. with ace. Tiphhha anterius, 93. No. 5. comp, 
95. a. as the tone syllable here is the penult. — ))V , fern. 320. b. 6. 
Dec. VI. o.; dual in Par. XXVII. The accent marks the tone 
on the penult. — HSn f fem. Part, of n ^T, masc. Part. n ^">, fern. 
nHfr, Par. XXL nb ? 323. 5. comp. 301— D? T1WV , where the 



96 PART II. NOTES ON NOS. LXVII. LXX. 

first word having a conjunctive accent, the second omits Dag. lene 
in its i 80.-1- U7Vy$ } from the dual D?5$, in the suff. state, DrjV. 
being the suffix, 336. comp. 338. 

The nouns ]JM and V.V are in the case abs., 415. Lit. rendered; 
' As to the hearing ear, and as to the seeing eye, Jehova hath 
made even both of them.' 

LXVIII. Prov. xx, 13. Sng0 from rffttj, 240. ; also 87- a— 
n3G? ? Dec. XI., accent preepos. 95. a. while the tone is on the 
ultimate.—]?, Pe with Dag. lene, 79. 3.— -tt^Vl , Niph. Fut. from 
ttn;,243.&.— n|2?, I m p. 235.-^3?, dual suff. from V.V , accent 
on the penult, 100. j. in the note. — V^ip, Imp. 235. — Q^, for 
^rj? , because of the Silluq, 131. The last clause, lit. Open thine 
eyes, be satisfied with bread, i. e. be wakeful, vigilant, active, and 
thou shalt procure a competent supply of thy wants. The latter 
Imp. here, has a Fut. sense, 505. a. 

LXIX. Prov. xx, 20. bb,^ , Part. Piel from bbiJ.—Y^N, Par. 
XXIV. No. II., 309. a.-^m, Dec. VIII. d. from Q«, 130. c. a.— 
Tr?T., 230.-— Via, with suff.— P^^^, Dec. I., in the midst of. 
So the text should be read, viz. fltt^MS, and not (as in the com- 

,o 

mon editions) ]^\^5 , i- e. T^^SS > tne Q el 'i noting on the margin 
that the * in the first word is superfluous. The latter form is a 
Chaldee word, and is only a stale gloss of the passage, which does 
not seem to have been correctly understood by the Masorites. — 
Tftpn^ Dec. VI., the dot over the right tooth of the Shin is a 
Hholem for the preceding letter, as well as a diacritical point for 
the Shin, 62. 2. 

LXX. Prov. xxi, 1. Ni??, const, plur. Dec. VI. a. omits Dag. 
lene in a, see the ground of this in 81. I. e. g. — ^b, from ^/., 89. 
— "P, const, of TJ, Dec. II. a. The conj. 5 as, is to be understood 
before "Sft?, 561. c. Meaning: 'Jehova directs the hearts of 
men, as easily as he does the rivers of water.' — ^3 kol, from b3 ? 
89.— yErp, 225— =12^, Fut. Hiph. from nfc3, Par. XIX., with 
suff. epenthetic, 309. d. 3 sing, masc, comp. in Par. XXIII. Hiph. 
Fut. epenth. Lit. Unto all which he chooses, he inclines it, viz. 
the heart of man. The student will notice the frequency of the 
Maqqeph, in the whole sentence. 



PART II. NOTES ON NOS. LXXI. LXXIV. 97 

LXXI. Prov.xxi,17. IIDHO, Dec. L, iSorja tt^N, a mfln / 
poverty, i. e. a poor man, shall be ip^XV. is understood, 554.) the 
lover of mirth ; but the latter, however, is the Nom. before the 
verb of existence, when rightly translated, i. e. the meaning is : 
' A lover of mirth shall be a poor man.' — ],,1 , Dec. VI. o. — 
?9y"}, 5 152. c. 3. The second point over the tooth of the Shin, 
together with the accent on the right of the Vav, constitute the 
composite accent Rebhia Geresh, 93. No. 11. and mark the penult 
tone.— T^l, 224.; for Methegh, see 87- a. 

LXXII. Prov. xxi, 27. rnjf., Dec. VI. k. the accent Munahh 
marks the tone on the penult, 93. No. 21.— E^ttTi, plur. of Dec. 
IV. a. — n^Vl t Dec. XI. b. verb of existence implied before it, 
554. — ^ ^W, how much more, see Lex. under ^W. The Methegh 
under ^ is according to the rule in 87- I- the accent being thrown 
off from ^ by the Maqqeph, 89. and the tone being on the ulti- 
mate of na^._n^t, Dec. X.— *&$*%), Put. Hiph. of tfia, Par. 
XX. The Qamets under the praeform. Yodh is dropped, because 
the accent is thrown forward on account of the suffix ^2- f which 
is the epenth. form 3 sing, masc, 309. d. ; see in Par. XXII. Fut. 
Sentiment : ' The sacrifice of the wicked is not pleasing to God ; 
how much more must it be unpleasing, when he presents it nE>«T3, 
with a crafty intention, i. e. hypocritically, malo animo, with the 
intention of deceiving.' 

LXXIII. Prov. xxii, 2. T»#|, adj. used as a noun, 445. Dec. 
III.— 5 and, 152. c. 3.— EH, Part, of tt?n, Par. XIII., used as a 
noun of multitude ; declined as in Par. XXI. 13?. — ^^53 , with 
accent, instead of 'lttfjlSjD without accent, 146. For the sense of 
meeting together, i. e. of a reciprocal meeting, see in 182. b. 6. — 
nb3? ? const, state of the Part. Flfefr, Dec. IX., from r\WV , p ar . 
XVI. — E??, D- suff., Lamedh takes Dag. forte, because ^3 the 
ground-form belongs to Dec. VIII. e. comp. 129. c. b. Meaning : 
' The Lord has ordained, that men should consist of both rich and 
poor ; let both regard this as being arranged by his Providence, 
that so the rich may not despise the poor, nor the poor envy the 
rich.' 

LXXIV. Prov. xxii, 14. n^,fem. of p»?, Dec. VIII., see in 

o 



98 PART II. NOTES ON NOS. LXXV. LXXVI. 

323. Dec. VIII. P n —- -'?, const, of ng).— nVlt , Part. fern. plur. 
from -fit, Par. XXI. fo. — DTOJ, pass. Part, const, of D-W, in reg. 
as a noun, 532. 5.; ^) n>, : ETOT, ^ e object of the indignation of 
Jehova, he with whom Jehova is angry. See, for such a lati- 
tude of meaning in case of regimen and Gen., 424. — viQ^ 9 Fut. of 
*5J, Par. XI. The 1 is superfluous. It is read yip-pbl, because 
the Hholem is shortened before the Maqqeph, 89. The star over 
the word refers to a Note (usually printed in the margin oppo- 
site, in our common Hebrew bibles, but) put at the bottom of the 
page, in this Chrestomathy. The note, 1 "^n\ means, Vav is 
superfluous ; comp. 64. The vowel-points are written just as if 
the orthography were '?p.. — DB?> therein, adv. viz. into the deep 
ditch, mentioned in the first part of the sentence. 

LXXV. Prov. xxiv, 24. ""^^, 6 efadbv, he who saith, Part, ac- 
> 
tive. — n $^, with pause-accent Merka Mahpakh, 93. No. 3. 

Usually the accent above, is on a different letter from the one 
below ; which latter marks the tone-syllable, 95. b. But the 
length of the word here, does not permit this usage in regard to 
the position of the accents ; nflW for Tint* , 144. — *lTl^fi\ , Fut. 
Kal. of ^)"2J , with suff. in, on account of which the preceding i\, 
which would stand at the end of the verb, is omitted in the ortho- 
graphy, 65. ; and the Vav thus falling out, Qibbuts vicarious is 
employed in the room of 1, 41. — 0*^37, plur. of Dec. VIII. — 
VTOJl&'p, Fut. Kal of ^V\, w i t h suff. -in, and the preceding !| 
written plene, contrary to the usage in 'in^y.. Also the Pattahh 
under the V, in the Fut. of this verb, is restored and lengthened 
here, 146, although the accent is Merka, a Conjunctive, 149. b. — 
D^^, pi. of Dk*?, Dec. VIII. 

LXXVI. Ps. lxvii, 2, 3. ^SrT, yehhon-ne-nu, 66. b. Fut. Kal. 
from l?n ; Par. XII., with suff. ^-. The final Nun of the verb 
receives a Dag. forte because of accession, 258. The Hholem in 
the Fut. ]nj is shortened, because the accent is thrown forward, 
129. The Qamets under the preform. Yodh is dropped, for the 
same reason, 133. — ^3"nyi, 1 152. c. 5. for the dropping of Sheva 
under the Yodh that next follows, see 115. The verb is Fut. 
Piel, with suff. ! 0-. For the dropping of the final Tseri of the 



PART II. NOTES ON NOS. LXXVI.— LXXX. 99 

verb, see 312. 8.— ">NJ, Fat. apoc. Hiph. of nSw, 206. It agrees 
with VJ9 a noun plural, although the verb is singular, 489. — V3S, 
suff. state of 0^?Q. — ^JHN, compounded of ON with, on, and ^3-, 
see Par. in 408. HN with, and Note 5. Lit. Let his face shine 
on us, i. e. may he look propitiously upon us ! 

n ^?; *? 152. b. 2. ; nvi fem. Inf. of PIJ, with penult tone.— 
I?.")"? (for "^I?*"]?), because of the pause-accent, 148. a. — BVEl, pi. 
of vfc, Dec. I.— ^?^ : , with Silluq under the n, 148. a. 

LXXVII. Ps. cxix, 81. rirh? T , Kal. Prset. 3 fern, of nbs, 
agreeing with ^?3 ; f or Methegh, 66. in E. g .~ ^TO-V^b, b 
prep. ; *T suff. ; 3? with Methegh after Qamets, 66, under E. g. 
See also 87- c— ^5??, suff. state of Dec. VI. For TJ^? 1 ?, see 
Tfn.^EJrjb above.— V=ftlj! (for ^IT.), with Silluq on the penult, 
Piel of bfP, 232. b., Dag. being excluded from the XI, 111. and 
232. b. 

^bs, 3 plur. of n ^|, comp. 118. and Note 3. ^bs being put 
f or ^g._J^37, dual suff. of CT, Dec. VI.— ^j"™** 1 ?, with 
accent, instead of H without one, 148. a.— i»«b (for ^^2), 119. 
c. 1. Lit. whilst saying, whilst I say. — ^3ttn3.Fl^ Fut. Piel with 
suff., from EH3 ; the Tseri under the n is dropped, 312. 8. 

LXXVIII. Ps.xxxii,10. U^n 9 Dec. VIII., from 2n^-Vtfj% 
b, has the punctuation of the article, which is omitted, 152. a. 
Note. The accentuation is the composite Merka Mahpakh, 93. 
No. 3. A verb of existence is implied before this noun, 554. — 
ntohSn, n article, used as a pronoun, 412. Note 1. n with Pat- 
tahh furtive, 69.— nVPS, see under No. X.—^^), Poel of 
^9 > 262. with epenth. suff. 309. d. ; drops Tseri under the first 
Beth, 312. 8. 

LXXIX. Ps. xxxiii, 6. ^3, Niph. of HOT - for the vowels 
under the two first letters, see 224 seq. ; for Methegh, 87- a. — 
V53 , suff. state of H5 ,_J» , 89. DN^S , suff. state, Dec. IV. g. 
Sentiment : f By the command of Jehova were the heavens formed, 
and all the stars {host of them) by his mandate, {by the breath of 
his mouth,) viz. by what he uttered or spake.' 

LXXX. Ps. xxxiii, 12. ^.m, plur. const, of ->#}* Dec. VI. a. 
commonly used as an exclamation or interjection; lit. here, beati- 



100 PART II. NOTES ON NOS. LXXX. LXXXIV. 

tudines gentis istius ! or Salve, O gens ista ! or, Salus genti isti ! 
— ^H, with article, Dec. I., accent 95. a.— Vrft>N njrTpl^, 
whose God is Jehova, where *"W^3 qualifies the 1 suffix to DTpM f 
and both make one relative pronoun, 478. a. — a ?rj, pointing of 
the article, J 52. a. 4. comp. 142. a. Note. E^ ( an d D37), Dec. 
VIII.; before EOT must be supplied ^H, 562.— ~in2, the Norn, 
to it is n ?^% taken from the preceding wt%^\ the full form of 
this elliptical phrase would be, Tl)n) 12 nn2 -)#** DOT "T3^H , 
the composite relative, *^^^ : and IS (a pronoun with the prep. ^ 
which commonly follows the verb T!?, 506.) being omitted by 
an ellipsis frequent in poetry, and not very unfrequent in prose, 
553. d. — 1 ' ^7^- : > ^- f or an inheritance to him y i. e. to Je- 
hova, the Dat. lb to him being used instead of a suff. in the Geni- 
tive, 421. 

LXXXI. Ps. xxxiv, 8. njh, Part. act. with 1 omitted, 63.— 
"^T < S^SD 9 7 2**2D make a compound preposition, around, 
circum, 407. e. ; ^ (not f?) 115. ; T»NT S , suff. plur. of Mnj, ap- 
parently of Dec. V., but really of Dec. III., 358. 4.— D$&n^, 
Fut. Piel with suff., the Yodh praeform. omits the Dagh. which 
follows Vav conversive, 208. in E. g. Sentiment : * God protects 
the pious, and delivers them from danger.' 

LXXXII. Ps. xxxiv, 9. Wm, Imp. of D3tt?, 229 seq.-^>«% 
with accent prsspos. although the tone is on the ultimate, 95.; 
9 not 1, 152. c. 4. ; Wl Imp. of nifj, instead of ^% 118.— W&* 3 
No. LXXX. — ^5v^» w ^ tn article H', and with a composite accent 
over the two first letters, 93. No. 11. — HSTTOD!!., ye-h e seb-bo, 
Fut. Kal of n 9T, Methegh, 87- a.— 12 with Dagh. euphonic in 
the Beth, 75. a. 

LXXXIII. Ps. xxxiv, 19. aYllJ, adj. Dec. III., (from »T|J,) 
verb of existence implied, 534. — ^^tp3 ^ const, of Niph. Part, from 
"^Sty ? the final Qamets in this Part, being pure and mutable, 
2Vn^^ reg j meilj 532. b.—n$), 89. also 408. Note 4.—^^, 
const, pi. of «|5, 445.— rtpi\ Fut. Hiph. of V&, for Pattahh 
furtive, see 69. Sentiment : ' The truly humble, Jehova will 
aid ; and he will deliver them from danger.' 

LXXXIV. Ps. xxxvi, 6. CPtt^n^ where the art. is retained 



PART II. NOTES ON NOS. LXXXIV. LXXXIX. 101 

after the prep. 5, which is contrary to the more common usage; 
comp. 152. a. Note.— ^.PH, 148. a— D^ntp, horn \ir\W , Dec. 
VI. b. Sentiment : ' Thy mercy is exceedingly great, thy faith- 
fulness exceeds any bounds which we can measure ;' so the verse 
that follows leads us to interpret this passage. 

LXXXV. Ps. xxxvi, 7- 'T'lTrl^ Declen. XL, the Methegh 
marks Qamets, 66. e. g. ; for the accent, see 93. No. 22. — TTTH, 
plur. const, of "HHj Dec. VII. a. Mountains of God mean, 
c very lofty mountains/ 456. e, — D*inJ^ } comm. gender, fern, here ; 
nyi (from ^T 1 ) agrees with it. — njfTj is in the Vocative. — 
n^n^ with the accent Rebhia over the Mem, 93. No. 10. Dec. 
XL Sentiment : ' Thy righteousness is very great, thine up- 
rightness is boundless ; thy kindness extends to both man and 
beast.' 

LXXXVI. Ps. xxxvi, 8. "IjJJTTDj may-ya-qar, how precious ! 
75. a.—Lrnb^ Voc— "■»», * 152. c. 4. and 540.; m> const, pi. 
of a> ??, sing. "J5. — T??^, suff. dual of H?? , with comp. accent, 
and tone on the penult, 336. Par. c. — ?^?C£ , Fut. Kal. with ? 
parag., 211. a. 1.; also with original Yodh restored, and the pre- 
ceding vowel lengthened, 147- comp. 146. b. Lit. Under the 
shadow of thy wings, the sons of men find a refuge ; an image 
borrowed from the protection which fowls afford to their young. 

LXXXVII. Ps. xxxvii, 23. njiTja , by Jehova, an anomalously 
pointed word. The Jews read for it, "OTSp, with a Tseri under 
the Mem, as a compensation for Dag. forte omitted in the S, 112. 
comp. 406. The variation in the punctuation of njn^O, con- 
sists merely in putting a simple Sheva under the Yodh, which 
will not bear the composite one found under M, in the word 
>j"ttj9.— ^?^D, const, pi. Dec. II. — ^bi3 ? Polel of ^3, with 
composite accent, and with a restored and prolonged vowel under 
the first Nun, 146. a._Vgn.^, 225. 

LXXXVIII. Ps. xxxvii, 24. bsi, Fut. of bzi.-.blg\\ Fut. 
Hoph. of b-ltD, with pause-accent, 144. 1. — YTJ, TJ with suffix. 
Sentiment : ' Jehova will uphold and support the righteous, so 
that they shall not utterly fall.' 

LXXXIX. Ps. xli, 2. b>3£pD ? p art . Hiph. from b;?fr.-J?;-T, 



102 PART II. NOTES ON NOS. LXXXIX.— XCII. 

with pause-accent, from '?, Dec. VIII. — n ?l, Dec. X., the first 
Qamets being immutable. — ^np y^. , Fut. Piel with suffix ; the 
accent marks the penult tone, 100. j. Sentiment : ' Happy the 
man who regards, pays attention to ( /'StpE), the poor, i. e. re- 
lieves their wants and woes ; in the day of adversity Jehova will 
deliver him.' 

XC. Ps. xlvii, 2, 3. Mil, n 152. a. 2.— *)3, with Qamets 
because of Athnahh, 144. ; Kaph Raphe, 80.— ^S^n, with penult 
tone, 100. g. Hiph. Imp., from S^H in the sense of No. II. — 
P^?, proper adj., altus, the lofty or exalted one, Dec. I., a title 
of the Most High, (as we express it in English). ^"J" 1 ^ Niph. 
Part, from WJJ, is to be feared, 529.— -VVT| , Dec. III. h. 

XCI. Job xx, 4, 5. nfctoq, rj interrog. 152. d. used here in 
the sense of nonne ? so that, with the word which follows, one 
must translate, Dost thou not know this? — ^1^ with the accent 
prsepos., 95. a. but tone on the penult, 100. d. — ^E) f poetic form 
of IP preposition. — *TJ, eternity ; here, ancient times, days of old; 
the pause-accent does not prolong the vowel here, 149. — ^V? , 
Inf. Kal from O^ or D'ltP, used as a gerundial noun here ; "^P 
E^, lit. from the establishing, placing. — S /.V., prep., but with a 
form like a noun plur. const, of '¥ 3 407- b. 

nap., (not nvi) } 73. Note l.—Vn,^, 13 406. lit. from near 
by ; the meaning is : brief, short, of small duration or extent. — 
^n, Dec. V.— ^, prep., plur. form of TO, 407- b.—^ r for 
VT} } 144. 1. 

XCII. Job xxii, 12, 13. NvH, nonne? is not? interrog. l! . — 
^-±% 3 Dec. VI., with 77 final moveable, 84. The prep. ^ in, is 
understood before tt2& , 559. Meaning : e Is not God exalted 
above all?' — ™$1 , Kal Imp. of "^1- — Wikl , Dec. I. in the sing. 
—D^rDi^ , plur. of Dec. II., Methegh under Kaph, 87. e.—^ r , 
from n ?"5, with Siliuq. Meaning: 'Behold the summit, height, 
of the stars, for they are high/ 

^n*?*!}1 , yet thou say est, *) yet ; the tone of the whole word 
here, is on the ultimate, 101. a. — 3nj"HE f may-ya-dha, 75. a. 
lit. Hoiv doth God know ? the Prset. being used for the universal 
Present, 503. d.—^^T! , H interrog., 152. d. l._bg^, with 



PART II. NOTES OX NOS. XCII. XCIV. 103 

tone on the ultimate, 141. Note 2. ; it is one of the few words in 
Hebrew, whose root consists of more than three letters, and whose 
compound ingredients are obscure. — fiMSttyi, with 1 fulcrum merely, 
as the Hholem is pure, 64. Lit. Can he judge behind the dark- 
ness? i. e. ' Is God omniscient ? Are not some things concealed 
from him ?' 

XCIII. Job xxv, 4, 5. PH^*"*"^* 75. a. lit. How can a man 
be just with God 7 , i. e. in his view. — '^, properly the mighty 
one, a frequent appellation of God. The regular plur. is not ap- 
plied to the true God. — n^T*"*"^, ^ 152. c. 4.; Dagh. euphonic 
as above. "^% const. Part. pass. Kal, from T^Jj 531. — nt#H, 
Heteroclite, see Lexicon. 

I? prep., even to.—HT r , Dec. V.-_b^n^ Hiph. fut. from 
'H^ in its second sense, to shine, to be splendid, =' ?n. Mean- 
ing: ' Look even to the moon, and its splendour fails/ i. e. in the 
sight of God, the splendour of this heavenly body is, as it were, 
nothing; or, 'Its light is comparatively darkness.' — ^^H?*!? Me« 
thegh under Kaph, 87- e.—^l, from $12? verb $?, Kal Prset. 
3 plur— Y^TO, Beth Raphe, 80.; Y^S, dual surf, of T&. Lit. 
And as to the stars, they are not pure in his sight ; i. e. the light 
or splendour of the stars is not pure light in his view. In other 
words, ' Such is the perfectly pure and holy nature of God, that 
even the most pure and perfect of all created objects are, when 
compared with him, impure and imperfect.' 

^ ^|S, how much more, see Lex.; or rather, here, surely then. 
— t^" 13 ^, poet, appellation, for which CIS i s employed in prose, 
Dec. I. in sing., the plur. is irreg. and of Dec. VI. — HE"] } 554. — 
P™"??^ the same as DTfcJ or nfiag , 444. d. 

XCIV. Job xxiii, 8, 9. ^1D^ S with Tiphhha anterius, 95. as an 
adverb here, forwards. — M^rjjj , Methegh, 87- a, 1st. pers. sing. 
Fut. Kal, with smooth enunciation, 224.; used as Present, 504. b. ; 
the common Fut. here is from sr?J, see Lex. — S-^j su ff- ^- 
and TM, const. T*? before a suffix; here an adverb, taking an 
epenth. suffix like a verb, 405. Lit. And not he, i. e. he is not 
there, is not to be found.— ^, Methegh, 87. I. and 87. e.—V^, 
Merka, a conj. accent, here marks the final tone syllable, Fut. 



104 PART II. NOTES ON NOS. XCIV. XCV. 

of V%, Par. XIV., used for the Present, 504. b. — "nb 3 prep, b after 
the verb V***, 506. 

blfcfoi?, bi«E% or btffcip, Aleph in o^o, jmro^ (instead of 
b'Hpb, 118.), Dec. I., no plur., Ace. of place, 428. 2. Before 
VlNEtp, the verb flbrjtf is understood, 562— infe^J, to is 50, 62. 
1, nbV : (for nhtog, 64.), Inf. of Tib?, 280 seq., 283. 2. Note— 
Vtttft^j when he works or operates, 521. a.; lit. in /m acting, in 
agere ejus. — f riS ^ out of pause*, ^H^, 1st. pers. Fut. of Kal, apo- 
copate Segholate form, see on page 107, Par. of forms, Q Gutt. 
apoc. form. The full form would be ^.tD^j from HTn . Pattahh 
is employed in the Segholate form of the verb, because of the 
Gutturals, 283. Note 3. Lit. I can not see, viz. him; the Subj. 
mood being made by the Fut. tense, 203 seq. The pronoun 'lb, 
him, is implied after tnjtf, 562.; for ft, pron. with preposition, 
506.—^?!, 225— T^;, Ace. used adverbially, 428. 2.— ri$H$ 
Fut. 1st pers. from ™"J, with full form, as usual at the end of a 
sentence. The Seghol under W, instead of the short Hhireq 
which is found in the other persons, is occasioned by the Guttural 
N, 138. 

XCV. Job ix, 1—3. 751, 3 with Dag. forte after it, 208.; T*J, 
apoc. Fut. of n ?r?, 283. y. Par. letter #. ; the Guttural occasions 
the Pattahh, 283. Note 3. Like all Segholate forms, it takes a 
penult tone— ^^1, 1208.; ->»tf\ 240. Note. Par. VII., pe- 
nult tone, 101. b. — E3pN, ^dm-nam, 66.; for adverbial ending, 
see 402. a^^T, tone, 100. rf— ft, so, thus, 664— P3STHD, 
how can \jl man] be just, 75. a. — V^H!, 225. — ^i?, b prep., 152. 
b. 2.; ^"H, Inf. with b, 522. Meaning: f If man should choose 
to contend with God,'— ^??k Kal Fut - from n ??j with epenth. 
suffix; see in Par. XXIII. and 313.; comp. accent marking pe- 
nult tone— Tins, fem. of *r™, nrng f or nirrs, 107. 2— W, 

poet, for $9 prep. — *l5fi, 144. 1. Meaning : 'Man could not an- 
swer him,' (•12?1?|1, Fut. used as Subj. mood, 203.), ' as to one thing 
of a thousand, i. e. as to one of the thousand accusations which 



* Out of pause means, when no pause-accent is on a word; in pause means, when a 
word is furnished with a pause-accent. 



PART II. NOTES ON NOS. XCVI. XCVIII. 105 

God could make. General sentiment of the whole : ' In the sight 
of God, man is exceedingly sinful.' 

XCVI. Job xviii, 5, 6. 0? , surely. — "H^T- , in pause, verb in- 
trans., shall be quenched, shall go out. — PH**, from ^J, Fut. Kal, 
252. with Mappiq, i. e. moveable, 84. — ^4*p, const, form of Dec. 
HI.j^M, S uff. state of B*«, Dec. VIII.— "bn^ beo-h°lo 67. 
b. suff. sing, of 'H^, Dec. VI. k. One might expect a Pattahh 
under the n in the ground-form, but we find Seghol employed. — 
y^. 3 written both ^N? and "l?., 63.— T»b37, prep. b^ in the form 
of the suff. plural of a noun, 407- b. with a pronoun suffixed ; lit. 
above him, referring to the position of a lamp or torch, suspended 
from the ceiling of a room, or the summit of a tent, and elevated 
above the persons in it. Sentiment : ' The prosperity, or flourish- 
ing circumstances, of the wicked, shall speedily come to an end, 
and be succeeded by misery.' 

XCVII. Job xxvii, 8, 9. rnj^TTO, Dag. euphonic, 75. a. ; 
^3l?1a const, state of Dec. X., 1 moveable, 56. 1. — ^ , when. — 
^SJ?o in pause, lit. ivhen he [God] shall cut off, viz. the soul or 
life of the wicked.— *9 , when.— hip*., apoc. Fut. of rhw, 283. y. 
a. and Note 2. Meaning : When God shall take away his life. 

TTIjJ^Sn, 71 interrog., 152. d. The accent before it is prsepos., 
95. and the real tone is on the ultimate of the word ; the noun is 
of Dec. XI. d.—N'On, Par. XX. 3 fern., agreeing with nns._ 
"^by, in No. XCVI. Lit. Will God hear his cry, when distress 
shall come upon him ? 

XCVIII. Job xxxii, 8, 9. ?2g, with accent preepos., and tone 
on the ultimate, 95— H^ . Methegh, 87- m.— ^H, is, for the verb 
of existence, 469. — n»tt?3, const, of Dec. XI. c. — ^^ , prob. a noun 
with an old plur. ending, 325. b. b. from ^P , mighty, and so (like 
E^nbS) apluralis majestaticus. — Q^MjFufc Hiph.from \%'» n - 
is suffix, 309. under c. The Qamets under the JH falls away, be- 
cause the tone is moved forward by the suffix, 133. Meaning: 
' Truly there is a spirit in man ; and the inspiration of the Al- 
mighty has given him understanding ;' i. e. there is an intelligent 
spirit of divine origin, an inspiration of the Almighty, given to 
man. So, with Umbreit, would I construe this passage ; and not 

p 



106 PART II. NOTES ON NOS. XCVIII. — C. 

with Rosenmueller, who makes the two parts of the sentence 
antithetic ; e. g. ' although man has a rational soul, yet God only- 
gives him understanding/ Is not understanding given, on the 
part of heaven, when a rational spirit is given ? 

0^2n, major es natu, elders, comp. Gen. xxv, 23, where it is op- 
posed to ^V^ , junior ; here it is parallel with D ^i2T, old men. — 
•lESrP, in pause, 144. also rough enunciation, 225. — D^f^, H 
neither, because it follows sb in the preceding o-t/%o$, 558. Note. 
— -^^J, Par. XIV. — tofP^, rectitudinem, what is right. It is 
the young Elihu, who says this to Job and his friends. His mean- 
ing is, that ' he himself enjoys the inspiration of the Almighty ; 
but that the persons whom he addresses, are not to be taken for 
wise men, i. e. for men wiser than himself, because they are older 
than he.' In other words, he claims the right of teaching them, 
although his seniors ; and presumes to do this, on the ground of 
special divine illumination. 

XCIX. Job. xxxvi, 5, 6. ftj, i. e. ]n, 89.— T^J, with accent 
praepos., and tone on the ultimate, 95. — «?1, nor ; or it may be 
literally rendered, et non. — Djjp 1 ;, in pause. — *T*5?, adj. of Dec. 
I., in const, state before H3; or in the abs. state, if one construes 
thus, mighty as to strength of heart, which is the preferable 
method. ' Mighty as to strength of heart' means, who has great 
strength of mind, who (as we say) is magnanimous. In what this 
magnanimity consists, is pointed out in the following <tt/%o?. 

n*n), Fut. Piel from nTJ.—D^, phir. of ^J, Dec. VIII., 
vowel changes as in Dec. HI.-— V-P., Kal Fut. of ]nj, 254. 2. 
Meaning: 'God will not keep alive, i. e. God will destroy, the 
wicked, and vindicate the right of the oppressed;' and this, ' be- 
cause he is great in strength of mind,, i. e. because he is magnani- 
mous.' 

C. Job. xl, 3—5. T9£>, see in No. XCV— TIN s i gn of Ace— 
1»*1, see in No. XCV— Vffcg, Kal Preet. of ^b|J, tone on the 
penult, 100./. Note— 33^^ Hi P h - Fut - lst P ers - from ^^ , 
the Qamets under the S is dropped, because the tone is thrown 
forward by the suffix JTr:, which is for *f3-, 309. d. 2. — '•TJ, my 
hand.—SftPW, Praet. of D^b or D^p.-JtiD 1 ?, poetic form of ^ 



PART H. NOTES ON NO. C. 107 

prep., ^"TO ? , upon my mouth.-— ^. , Pe Raphe, 80. The suff. 
\ (Yodh pronoun) coalesces with the Yodh of ^3, const, form of 
Hi? f 336. Note 3. Meaning: f I impose silence upon myself/ 

J"l™ : , see in No. XC V.— *FT)Vl , Piel, with tone on the pe- 
nult, 100. d. although it is not marked, in this case. — *73?-§j from 
HD?, full form of Fut., comp. 283. y. S Gutt. letter /L— D"!^, 
dual, fern, of D?3^; pro b. Q^tp i s for DVD?^ (Gesenius says, 
for DIOJIp). I take the Dagh. in the Tav, (which is inserted 
contrary to the rule in 80.), to be a kind of compensative Daghesh, 
74. b. Note.— -^P'^, Hiph. Fut. of *)EJ'. Meaning: 'I have 
spoken once, viz. with haste or inconsideration ; yea again, or a 
second time, in like manner; but I will do so no more.' The 
whole expresses the deep sense of vileness and inconsideration, 
which Job entertained with respect to his past character and con- 
duct. 



PART III. 



NOTES AND EXPLANATIONS. 

When the student shall have completed the study of Part II., 
agreeably to the directions given in the introduction to the 
Notes on the same ; and shall also have reviewed the same in a 
proper manner ; he may be supposed to have acquired such a 
knowledge of the forms of Hebrew words, of the method of gram- 
matically analysing them which ought to be practised, of the 
manner of employing the grammar for this purpose, and of finding 
in it what he needs in order to obtain a complete view of the 
principles of any analysis, that the Notes may, in future, be less 
copious and particular than they have hitherto been. All this, I 
repeat it, may be now taken for granted, provided the student has 
reviewed Part II. in a proper manner. By this I do not mean, 
the going through with one solitary review, and this a hasty one 
too, (as is usually the fact); but I refer to a review, conducted 
on the principles which Jahn has laid down, in his Dissertation 
on the Study of the Oriental Languages ; a piece which, I would 
hope, will be attentively read by every one in our country, who 
intends making a serious effort to acquire a knowledge of the 
Hebrew tongue. I mean a review, which shall be repeated con- 
tinually along the way, when the student first goes over with 
Part II. ; and then again made entire, with respect to the wliol«* 
of Part II., after the^rs^ reading is completed. 

With the knowledge thus acquired, the student will come to 
the study of Part III., with some good measure of due prepara- 
tion. Let him not think the time and pains spent on Part II., to 
be in any degree lost, or expended in vain. Although he may 
seem to go slowly, yet he is, by such a method of study, laying 



PART III. METHOD OF STUDY. 109 

the foundation for rapid progress, at some future period of his 
efforts. Grammatical forms and analyses being once well mas- 
tered, the progress in the Hebrew language will probably be such 
as to exceed the sanguine expectations of most students. But 
unless they are mastered at the outset, there is great probability 
that they never will be at any future period. In most cases, such 
is undoubtedly the fact. And if the student, in his subsequent 
exegetical studies of the Old Testament, finds himself, at every 
turn, in a state of doubt or uncertainty as to the real grammatical 
construction and arrangement of any passage ; how is it possible, 
that he should ever be able to acquire a comfortable degree of 
assurance, that he is right in his conclusions with regard to the 
meaning of any difficult passage? Suppose he resolves to con- 
sult commentators, who have a more profound knowledge of 
grammatical and lexicographical matters than himself ; often such 
commentators disagree ; and then where shall he resort for satis- 
faction ? Or if they agree, they assign reasons for their opinion, 
of which his acquisitions do not enable him to judge; then how 
is he to obtain satisfaction? All this shews the importance of 
laying well the foundation of Hebrew study, and in such a way, 
that any superstructure can be built upon it, which the future 
may require ; as has been already said above. Indeed, if there 
be any object in expending time, and money, and labour, upon 
the study of Hebrew, that object must be, or ought to be, a truly 
valuable one. But of what value is a superficial knowledge of 
the language in question, which neither enables one to interpret 
skilfully himself, nor duly to appreciate the labours of others who 
have performed such an office ? 

I would hope, that these brief remarks on this important sub- 
ject are not out of place, at a time when the student is shaping 
his course for all his future life, in respect to the study of the 
Jewish Scriptures. " Drink deep, or taste not," is advice which 
may be urged as properly on the young philologist, as on the poet. 
Indeed, if there be any who have no taste for such studies, and 
no proper sense of the value of them, and who want nothing more 
than the name of having studied Hebrew, while they are too 



110 FART III. METHOD OF STUDY. 

indolent or too irresolute to make the acquisitions necessary to 
understand this language well, then let them keep away from our 
public Seminaries, where such study is required, and prepare in 
another way for the ministry, where their sloth and irresolution 
can be more creditably indulged. There can be but one per- 
suasion, in regard to this whole matter, among all men of sense. 
Either the acquisition of the Hebrew language is valuable, or it 
is not : if it is not, then choose a course of study which supersedes 
it ; if it is, then study it so as to get something valuable from it ; 
something more than the name of being a Hebrew scholar, a name 
which is not unfrequently bestowed on some, who would find it, 
in. most cases, beyond their power to distinguish a Qamets Hhateph 
from a Qamets. 

Let not the student, then, who is in earnest, deem one hour 
misspent, which is spent in giving him elementary knowledge 
that will make him radically acquainted with the nature of the 
language which he is studying. Let him patiently pursue the 
method of thorough analysis, to which I have attempted to intro- 
duce him in the preceding pages ; and then I can promise him a 
rich harvest in due time, for all his toil in thus sowing the seed. 
Those who will not cultivate the soil, nor duly sow the seed, must 
expect a harvest that will be light ; or at best, a crop of grain, the 
kernel of which is either shrivelled or blasted. 

The Notes, for the future, will, as intimated above, be fewer 
than heretofore, on account of the reasons stated at the com- 
mencement of these remarks. Still, they are intended to leave 
nothing of an analytical nature unexplained, which one may 
not now suppose the student able to find out, by his own ef- 
forts. 

The biblical accentuation, for a few of the first Nos., is but 
partially inserted. It is intended to be employed, only in case 
the larger pause-accents occur, or a word has the tone on the 
penult, or there is some special reason (which will be the subject 
of notice) for inserting it. 

After these Nos., which reach as far as the end of Gen. ii., the 
whole train of accents is introduced. The reasons for this will 



PART III. METHOD OF STUDY. Ill 

be stated^ when I come to the Notes on that part of the sequel, 
which commences with Gen. iii. 

I would fain hope, that the student will pursue the same 
thorough course of analysis, in regard to all which is to come, as 
he has been taught to do, in regard to Part II. In this way, the 
knowledge which lie may have already acquired will be put to 
the test. The instructer, also, should persevere in the same par- 
ticularity of demand upon the student, which the nature of the 
Notes above has led him to make. In this way, a multitude of 
difficulties, that must press upon the Hebrew student at any ad- 
vanced course of inaccurate study in the usual way, will be re- 
moved in limine, and gradually ; so that he will never be sensible 
of any loss of time, occasioned by efforts to overcome them. The 
knowledge necessary to remove them, will thus incorporate itself 
with all his linguistic acquisitions of the Hebrew, and become a 
component and necessary part of it. I repeat it, and I desire it to 
be distinctly remembered by every student of Hebrew, who uses 
this book, that it is much better to master all the difficulties, at 
an early period, (and a great saving of time also, if the whole 
course of study be taken into view), than it is to pass them over, 
and defer them to a future opportunity, which it is supposed will 
be more convenient. Like most procrastinated objects, this, in all 
probability, will never be obtained, where such a course is taken. 



NOTES ON PART III. 
No. I. 



(2)* n;rq ? 3 fern. Praet. from Tl^Tl, Methegh, 66, e. g.-» 
ATlH, tone on the penult, the first accent marking it, 95. b.; rtl, 
as the tone shews, 100. a. is a Segholate, employed instead of 
irjn j 120. b. ; Tav Raphe, 80.— ^nn. the same throughout, the 
kind of accent only excepted. — "H^n, hho-shekh, 62. 2. — N?^, 
from D^Q.—nSCn^ Piel Part, fern., Par. XXI. 

* The Nos. in parentheses denote the verses in the Hebrew text. 



114 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. I. 



Some have supposed that ^?, in v. 1, means only, to dispose, 
to arrange, to form, viz. out of materials already existing, to reduce 
to order. But v. 2 shews, that no mere arrangement or disposi- 
tion of matter can be intended by W*J2 ; for after the action im- 
plied by ^"J5 had been performed, the earth still remained in a 
chaotic state. That the original matter of the heavens was in a 
similar condition, is evident from vv. 6 — 8, and 14 — 19. All 
order and arrangement plainly seem to be considered, by the 
writer of Gen. i, as having been effected after the original act of 
creation. With the Apostle, therefore, we may safely believe, 
that " the worlds were formed by God, so that the things which 
are seen, were not made from those which do appear," Heb. xi, 
3, i. e. were not originally made out of matter already existing. 
The original act of creation, as understood by the sacred writers, 
appears plainly to have been, the calling of matter into being, the 
causing of it to exist ; and out of this, the heavens and the earth 
were afterwards formed, i. e. reduced to their present order and 
arrangement. Philosophy may speculate on this, and maintain, 
with Aristotle, the eternity of matter ; but philosophy can prove 
nothing on this subject, nor even render such speculations pro- 
bable, if revelation were out of the question. 

•irQ} ^nn, lit. emptiness and desolation, or, empty and void, 
two synonymous words, of nearly the same import ; and designed 
therefore to express intensity, 438. d. and Note ; so that the 
meaning here seems to be : ' The earth, in its original state, was 
altogether empty or void/ viz. devoid of the various productions 
which it afterwards was caused to exhibit. 

"H??^, etc. i. e. no light yet existed, to shine on this empty, 
desolate Einr^ . This last word seems to denote the abyss of cha- 
otic elements, out of which the world was formed ; probable root, 
C^n, to be confused, bewildered. — ETpN TVH, divine energy or 
efficacy; comp. icvevpa in Wahl's Lex. no. 6. b. a. etc. — f^CH^, 
hovered over, brooded over; lit. applied to fowls hovering over 
their young. It seems here to designate the power or energy of 
the Creator, which, as it were, brooding over the newly created 
world, imparted to its elements the power of communicating life 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. II. 113 

and energy to plants, animals, etc.; comp. Gen. i, 11. NttHf-l 
VTjrj, let the earth cause to spring forth ; and v. 12. V"?.*?7 ^^D, 
and the earth did bring forth, viz. plants, trees, etc. Comp. also 
Gen. i, 24 seq., where it is stated, that the earth produced animals 
of various kinds. To this vivifying influence, the ^?n"]^ of our 
text seems plainly to refer. 

E?ftn indicates the same thing here as EirTP) ; and so, on the 
other hand, Cinin i s frequently used for E?*?, see Lex. That 
the original chaotic mass, from which the earth in its present 
form was made, exhibited P^3 , water, as the predominant ele- 
ment, appears from Gen. i, 9. The assertion, that ^nv^ TVn 
brooded '0.5'^, over, on the face of, this element, borrows its 
costume from the action literally indicated by ngrjTO.. Mean- 
ing : ' Divine influence communicated a productive, vivifying 
power, to the original elements of the earth.' 

No. II. Gen. I, 3—5. 

(3) NT, a Segholate apoc. Fut. of nVT, 283. y. k. instead of 
"''1.^. or ''To J 20. b.; or instead of the nude apoc. form ''T ; comp. 
the Segholate forms of nouns, in 367. and Par. of Dec. VI. s. — w. 
This apoc. Fut. 3 pers. is used instead of the Imp., 201. Note. — 
^HjJ, with Vav conversive, but Dag. omitted in the Yodh, 73. 
Note 3. ; Methegh here, 87- g- 

This sentence presents one of the highest instances of moral 
sublimity, which can be any where found. Longinus has cited 
it as such, in his work on the Sublime. 

(4) W1.21, apoc. Fut. with Vav. conv., from nsn, 283. y. n. 
The form is what is called nude, i. e. apocopated without the ad- 
dition of any furtive vowel to make out a Segholate form ; like 
Wli T3*l, ^*L in the Par. 283. y. The full form would be 
fffcT]?!, apoc. M*5*5 (S in otio, 57- «•), so written instead of *f]?l, 
for reasons given in the last reference, and in 119. b. But the 
analogical form Wj?l, is changed to ^"7*1, because of the *") in the 
final syllable, 113.; past tense as to meaning, 208. and 504. d. 

^ s .!, 216. 4.— tf^nn, n with Pattahh, 152. a. 3. ; Tl with- 
out Methegh, comp. 87- g- 

Q 



114 PART III. NOTES ON NOS. II. III. 

(5) -nNb for ■fiHrr^, 152. «. Note.— DV "V^b, to ^e %fcf, 
6&z?/. After a verb of naming (^"JlJ), the Hebrews put the object 
addressed in the Dat. with b, and the name given in the Ace, 

and govern it by M^l? Tf^nb for ^nn^ ; 152. a. Note.— 

nVb } lay-la in pause, nb^b ut of pause; n is merely paragogic, 
and the original ground-form is by?, Dec. VI. — '"''TJ., see i n v - 3. 
— ~f™, for "rn« (the const, is TnH), for W, see 142. a. : for the 
use of in^ as an ordinal, see 396. 

"But could there be day and night, at this period, when no 
sun was created ? The heavenly luminaries were not formed, until 
the fourth day;" see vv. 14 — 19. 

The seeming difficulties involved in this, have led many recent 
critics to deny that the account of the creation, in Gen. i, is any 
thing more than a kind of philosophical speculation, adorned with 
a species of poetic costume. ' But here/ i. e. in v. 5. say they, 
f the writer has forgotten himself; for he has represented the 
first, second, and third days as having had a regular existence, 
before the heavenly luminaries were formed.' That the repre- 
sentation itself is such as they assert it to be, need not be denied. 
But that ' the writer forgot himself is not equally certain. In 
Gen. i, 3, 4. light and darkness are distinctly related to have had 
an existence, before the sun, moon, and stars were created. All 
that remains then, to render the fact probable that day and night 
existed at the same period, is, to suppose that the same Almighty 
Creator, who formed the light and the darkness, did cause succes- 
sive alternations of these, so as to make day and night, before the 
heavenly luminaries were called into being. Was not the same 
omnipotence which created the light, competent to effect such an 
alternation of it ? That it did not effect it, who is able to prove ? 
And until it is proved, we may acquiesce in the views of the sa- 
cred historian. 

No. III. Gen. I, 6—8. 

(6) TprijJ, ground-form "*J.V^, Dec. VI. n. — ^rPI, consists of 
the Fut. > n" , : , as above, joined with i conjunction, (not 1 conver- 
sive, which takes the vowel Pattahh, 208). The original points 



PART III. NOTES ON NOS. III. IV. 115 

would be thus, ^ni"], which is an impossible syllable, 42. comp. 
137. and also 152. c. 5. The reason why ^»T1 (not '''T.J.) is here 
used, is to connect this word, in construction, with ^.) in the 
preceding clause, and to show that both stand in the same pre- 
dicament as to meaning. The use of "''TJ. here, would give the 
sense of, and it was ; which the writer does not mean to say. 

Dlttb Dia )V3, of the same meaning as B^ T^ ^P- V*\ 
see in v. 4. W HPT )^ n'l«n ^2. So in Deut. xvii, 8.; comp. 
also in Gen. i, 7- This use of b after T5 is peculiar, and not ex- 
plained sufficiently by the Lexicons. Lit. By a separating (T5) 
of the waters, in respect to (7) the waters ; i. e. of the waters 
above the visible expanse of the heaven (^i?~J)> from those on, or 
in, the earth beneath ; comp. v. 7« 

(7) WV>X 283. y^Jy^ff), in v. 4.— b^p, compound of ?S and 
^, 407. f.—^rnb bvft, lit. /rom */ie afcwe (the upper part) 
of the expanse, or, the above in respect to the expanse. 

(8) O^tP ^iT^J , construction after a verb of calling, or 
naming ; see on v. 5. 

No. IV. Gen. I, 9—12. 

(9) •lljjo yiq-qa-vu, with the first *) moveable, 56. 1. Fut. 
Niph. o/ njij.— nN-nrn, "j as in TT1, v. 6.; n*nn, Fut. Niph. 
3 fern, sing., from n«n ; for O., comp. Ill, 112.— ™2*n, A£y. 
ydb-bd-shd, Dec. VI. fern., like the Greek ^ l^pa. 

Meaning : ' Let the waters which cover the whole earth ' 
(making it a DinJ 1 ]), ' be collected into an ocean, or oceans, so 
that the solid earth may appear.' 

(10) rnftQTlj u-Umiq-ve, from TV\p$ 3 Dec. IX., in const, state. 
— ^*"]*1 , see on v. 4. 

(11) &U?1% , Fut. apoc. Hiphil ; for Methegh, see 87. h. Comp. 
v. 2. with this, as to sentiment.— ^^V, in apposition with ^?[. — 
T1}K , Part. Hiphil.— ^ V?? , the tree of fruit, i. e. the fruit-tree. 
— *H5? n^^ ^o-sep-peri, 75. a. The accent is placed here on 
the first syllable in T1WV } because the word is immediately fol- 
lowed by a tone -syllable, "H^ being a monosyllable. — "O^y, VQ> 
Dec. I. — ^*]t "N#N, whose seed, 478. — 'in, [is~] in it, 554. 



116 PART III. NOTES ON NOS. IV. V. 

(12) NS'irn, Vav conversive, and apoc. Fut. Hiphil from N?J. 
—•inrab, -VT- suff. pronoun, see in Par. under 336.— ^PTT^, 
yo-sep-peri; 75. a. But here the accent is removed, by the Maq- 
qeph which follows, 89. making a difference between this and the 
instance in v. 11. above. 



No. V. Gen. I, 14—19. 

(14) **?!), sing. apoc. Fut. (see on v. 3. above), while HIS!? 
is plural; see Synt. 489. and Note. — rhwp , from "^NE, Dec. 
III. ; for the omission of Vav in both the final syllables, see 63. 
65— rim, S 137-; nn, const, of Dec. IIL—b^rf?, Inf. 
Hiph.j for form, see 216. 3. and comp. 152. a. Note. — ^T], 1 conj. 
giving the Prset. form a Fut. sense, 209. — 1HHS7, from FNA, and 
for riVYlH, 63. 65— n^y'iq, from T^a, Dec. II., Munahh 
on the I\Iem instead of a Methegh, 87- Note 3. comp. 87. a. — 
E^tP, Dec. XI. Meaning: f Let them be for signs which shall 
distinguish seasons, days, and years/ Lit. Let them be for signs, 
even for stated seasons, and for days and years. 

(15) Vm, see on v. 14.— rhlNab, ibid. The student will 
observe the diversity of orthography, in regard to the insertion 
or omission of the Quiescents ; see 63. 65. — D?btt?n , with a pause- 
accent of the second class, but Pattahh not prolonged, 149. 
—nw^, Inf. Hiph. of -viN, for the b, see 521. c; lit. for the 
causing of light. 

(16) Bto?3, supra v. 7— *>?.$, dual const, of Q^ , in const. 
state with iTl'M^n, 457. «— D^V^n, with the article, 414. 1 — 
"TlHJan-ny, Ace. after ^37*1 implied, and mentally brought along 
from the preceding clause; for "■>"" 1 ^, see 427- — J >?^?Pb, Dec. 
XIII. For the rule of the day, is a figurative expression, de- 
noting the powerful or predominating influence of the sun by day, 
So Pliny calls the sun, Cozli rector ; and Cicero, Omnium modera- 
tor ac dux.—^^il" n ^'], as above — f^n, the small, i. e. the 
smallest, or the smaller, 455. a. — nb^bn., with parag. •"*-, and 
tone on the penult, 100. i — PX^'^n, Methegh, 87. e. 

(17) 1W1, Fut. with 1 conversive, from Kl?, 254. 2.; lit. set 



PART III. NOTES ON NOS. V. VI. 117 

or put. — CrjS } nM s ign of Ace. combined with suff. pronoun D- ; 
see under 408. 

(18) ^V?"!, 1 C onj.; \ prep.; and bfcp, Inf. construct. Be- 
fore it, CilM ]i3*2 is implied; lit. Qawrf he set theni\for ruling. — 

B^a, for cvn^, 152. a. Note; lit. % <%.— nVjbn, f or nVbrp, 

ib. — ^-pJiT?, Inf. Hiph., where the contrary practice, viz. that 
of retaining H, is exhibited, 216. 3, — ^nn, act. ij, 152. a. 3. 

(19) HTJ>1, v . 4. above. 

No. VI. Gen. I, 20—22. 

(20) *anf\, 201. Note— Yl# *«?#!, a mode of con- 
struction exceedingly common in Hebrew, viz. that of joining a 
verb with its correlate noun, in order to designate intensity, cer- 
tainty, repetition, etc. V"~!^ here plainly means, the smaller water 
animals. — H*n 275?., of living or animated breath. As to the 
meaning of breath (for E7§?.), see Job xli, 13. an undoubted in- 
stance ; and nearly as clear is it, in Gen. i, 30. below. — n*n 9 
properly adj., from T?, Dec. VIII. Meaning: f Smaller animals 
which live and breathe;' or, e which have the breath of life.' I 
take Y~jU? to be in the const, state, before Hjn W$2 . 

fy\V) noun of multitude, no plural, Dec. I. — ^)5^, Poel of 
H??j 175. and 262. — M? "v^, Rosenmueller renders, versus, to- 
wards ; and he appeals to Ex. ix, 22.; x, 21.: Gen. xix, 28. for 
confirmation. The meaning thus given is : ' Let the fowl fly over 
the earth, toward the expanse of heaven ;' or, ' toward the firma- 
ment above.' On account of the word ¥*\F] here, it would seem 
necessary to acquiesce in this explanation. 

(21) Da^awn, Yodh omitted in the last syllable, 63.; lit. sea- 
monsters, the larger sea-animals. — H^nn tt7D3"v3 } every living 
being, or living creature, or living thing ; the two latter Hebrew 
words designating any thing which has animal or animated life. — 
n^nn, n article for pronoun here, 414. 2. b. Note; riC£7£h , 
Part. fern. Seghol., see in Par. XXI. — cna^tt^, suff. of plur. pron. 
Qrjr, see in 336. — *]??, lit. of wing, i. e. every winged fowl, 
440. a. 

(22) TT!^!, 1 Vav convers. without the Dagh. after it, 73, 



118 PART III. NOTES ON NOS. VI. VII. 

Note 3. ; TH^, with penult tone, 101. b. and Tseri shortened in 
the final syllable, 129. a.—flnfo, see on v. 17.— ibsb, for ^bsb, 
119. c. 1.— n-19, son, Imp. Kal of n^3, ran, for TH?, S|"»^1, 
118. and Note 3.— iwM, for E^rp^ ]52. a. Note, from a;, 
Dec. VIII. irreg. ; £*^ seems here to mean, the cavity, or gulf, 
in which the waters of the ocean repose. In the same sense it 
is plainly used, in Is. xi, 9. ; Hab. ii, 14. ; although the Lexicons 
neglect this sense. — ^3J* apoc. Fut. Kal, from n 5""J> ^83. y. 

No. VII. Gen. I, 24—31. 

(24) NSV1, apoc. Fut. Hiph., 3 pers. fern., from N2£ ; for Imp. 
use, see 201. Note. — H*n t£??p., generic, every living creature, 
animal or animated beings. — ^J^b , where the sufif. PT- is sing, 
because its antecedent is so ; but the meaning is plural, their, be- 
cause the antecedent is nomen multitudinis, 476. a. Note. — nttrp^ 
Dec. XL, in apposition with ?&%?., and governed in the same way; 
as are also the two nouns which follow. H^n^ here means, tame 
beasts, cattle; ^T?., reptiles; and V^^r^n , wild beasts. — ^TH, 
125. c. instead of -H^n reg. const, of n*n. This form is not un- 
usual in this noun; e. g. W '^p_ , "HP Sn^l, *& Hnjn, etc. 
But it is not common, in general. Its tone is on the ultimate, as 
we see in Ps. civ, 11.; but in the passage before us, Maqqeph 
takes away the accent, 89. — JWp^, as before. 

(25) niSlSTT, Methegh, 87. e. ' 

(26) ri&Vl, Fut. Kal 1st plur., form T1W¥ . Most of the older 
critics find an intimation in this plural, (as they believe), of a 
plurality of persons in the Godhead. But the evidence seems too 
doubtful, in this case, to be relied upon. The pluralis majesta- 
ticus, or pluralis excellentice, as it is called, in respect to QTlbg, 
^qHt?, E^t^Hp, etc. seems now to be generally conceded, 437. 2. 
That pronouns may be used, and are used, in a similar way, among 
the Oriental nations, seems to be somewhat certain from the fol- 
lowing examples ; viz. Ezra iv, 18. c The letter which ye have 
sent unto us (H3\<3? Chald.) ;' it is king Artaxerxes who says this. 
Dan. ii, 36, ' We will tell the interpretation of it j" it is Daniel 
who is speaking. So in 1 Mace, x, 19, 20. king Alexander says, 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. VII. 119 

5 AK'/}Koa[A€v — KaQea-TaKaiAzv. Iii 1 Mace, xi, 31, 33, 34. king De- 
metrius says, 'Eypccxpccpev — Yjy,av — iKplvcc/xev — icrraKcx-^ev, k. t. A. In 
1 Mace, xv, 9. king Antiochus says, KoaT^o-w^ev — $ofao-o/xei/. So 
in John iii, 11. Jesus says, o'ldapev — "ka\dv^ev—ku§dKa,^ev. In Mark 
iv, 30. Jesus says, 6[A,Giu<ro[Aev—Trapcc[3u\cdy.6v. In 1 John i, 4. this 
apostle says of himself, y^ap^v ; and Paul often employs the first 
person plural. Comp. with HOT3 above, Gen. iii, 22. 'Like one 
of us ; Gen. xi, 7- ' Let us go down, and let us confound ;' also 
Isaiah vi, 8. e Who will go for us.' The passages sometimes ad- 
duced, in Gen. xxix, 27- ; Num. xxii, 6. ; Cant, i, 4. ; 1 Kings 
xii, 9.; 2 Sam. xvi, 20.; xxiv, 14.; and Job xviii, 2, 3. may be 
all considered as communicative , i. e. as common to the speaker 
and his friends, and so do not fairly belong to the above illustra- 
tions ; although Rosenmueller has adduced the three last passages, 
in the latest edition of his Commentary on the Pentateuch, as evi- 
dence that the plural was used by an individual speaker, and ap- 
propriated to himself. 

It is clear, that this idiom is not common or frequent, in the Old 
Testament ; it is more common in the Apocrypha, and in the New 
Testament. In modern times, it is the well-known and general 
usage of royalty. It is singular, indeed, that kings should employ 
it for the sake of adding emphasis to their claims of honour, while 
a private individual, in particular one who addresses a public 
assembly, employs it to avoid the appearance of egotism, or of 
assuming too much ; a manifest abuse of its original design. 

Modern usage, however, can not help us to determine the usus 
loquendi of the Hebrews. So far as this is now discoverable, by 
the evidence before us respecting the use of the plur. number in 
the Old Testament, I feel constrained to agree with those critics, 
who resolve it, on the whole, into the pluralis excellentice . 

sOfc^E^with suff. !CL, from 0^ } Dec. VI. a. The plural 
! Ps is to be accounted for on the same ground with Htp^3 above. 
-Atf3Byp., suff. state of jPWD?, Dec. I., «- as before. 

Not a few recent critics have maintained, that the writer of 
Gen. i, believed God to be in reality of the same form with man, 
i. e. that the writer was an Anthropomorphite. But was Paul one 



120 PART III. NOTES ON NO. VII. 

of this sect,, because he says, in 1 Cor. xi, 7* that ' man is the 
image and glory of God ?' and this too, not in reference to his moral 
qualities, as in Eph. iv, 24. ; Col. iii, 10. Was Moses, (who, if not 
the author of the account of creation, yet at least was in all pro- 
bability the person who inserted it in the Pentateuch,) was he a 
believer in the real physical, human form of the Divinity ? This 
same Moses, who, in the second Commandment, has so absolutely 
and utterly prohibited all resemblances whatever of the Godhead, 
either to be made, or to be worshipped? What other motive, 
but a belief in the spirituality of God, could induce him to do 
thus ? In a word ; one may well ask, whether there is any more 
Anthropomorphism in Genesis, than in other parts of the Bible ; 
and a considerate, fair answer to this question, will enable us to 
judge of those opinions, which ascribe such childish views of the 
Supreme Being to the early ages of the world, and in a special 
manner to the early part of the Hebrew Scriptures. If God ever 
revealed himself, in any way, to the early progenitors of our race, 
it is at least essential to suppose, that his spiritual nature was 
one of the first things which was revealed and understood. How 
could the idea of a Creator and Governor of the Universe, consist 
with the idea of a Divinity limited by a physical form, and of 
course circumscribed in his operations? The early ages of the 
world were not so stupid as to be incapable of seeing this ; nor 
are the monuments left behind of their skill and capacity, such as 
to warrant us in taxing the people of God with the grossness of 
Anthropomorphism . 

In regard to the words 2?^ and i"W^ 9 they stand related in 
Hebrew, as imago and similitudo do in Latin. They are so nearly 
synonymous, that they are plainly employed here together, for 
the sake of intensity or emphasis, 438. d. Meaning : c God made 
man peculiarly in his image, i. e. in a manner altogether distinct 
from that of other created terrestrial beings.' That this has spe- 
cial respect to the intellectual, rational, and moral powers, with 
which man was endowed, and to the consequent pre-eminence or 
dominion over the lower creation which these gave him, seems to 
be obvious, when all the passages respecting God and man, in 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. VII. 121 

various parts of the Sacred Writings, are compared together. His 
pre-eminence is particularly referred to in what immediately fol- 
lows. 

^Tnyij "J not conversive, but only connecting the Imp. sense 
here, with the Imp. sense of nt£73^2 in the preceding clause ; 
see on W, ver. 6. above.— ^T , Fut. of rrn , 201. Note— 
rOTp SITJV. , the verb taking 3 prep, after it, 506. ; Beth Raphe, 
80.; ™7, from H^T, Declension XL, a Raphe, 81. 1— ^n, 
with prep. 'D. , for the same reason that F^l, takes it ; and so in 
™n^n (for n»n^n^ ? 152. a. Note,) and in by? (bis) in the 
latter part of the verse ; for all have ^"T. implied before them. 
— Ctfdnn, art. for pronoun, 414. 2. b. Note. 

The pre-eminence of man over all other terrestrial creatures, is 
clearly and strikingly expressed by this. 

(27) 07W"* v i use d generically here, as the plur. pron. CHS 9 
at the end of the verse, clearly shews. — ^7?^ , omitting /Tp^ 
here, which was joined with Cv^ in v. 26. Intensity of expres- 
sion, however, is here eifected, by a repetition of D.<^ itself, as 
follows in the sequel ; see 438. d. — HnW , him, see in 408. Par. 
of HW with Accusative. — nS|]D, Dec. XL The application of 
^5? an( l n ?!/-^ t0 D 7S > shews that this last word is here generic. 
— -Ens, see in 408. as above. 

(28) *ny : !, see on ver. 22.— Crib, 506— ^ r\%, see on 
ver. 22. — fJjfclPI, *P with Qibbuts vicarious, instead of •")!£, 41.; 
for the omission of the Vav, 65.; H , it, fern., viz. the earth. — ■ 
VTl, Imp. of ^71; followed by 5 prep, before the nouns which it 
governs, as in v. 26. 

(29) ^n?, for V^rD, 254. c. Note.— 3nV, Part. act. of 3nt . 
— V^n, art. H ; V^ Declen. VIL— SSTI^M , £k wAzcA, 478— 
73P"1S, tree-fruit, dendral fruit . — ^}^^ , lit. seeding seed, i. e. 
producing seed. Meaning : ' Every fruit tree, which has the 
power of propagating itself ;' or, ' every one which has the power 
of producing a regular crop.' — nbpN^ *Trp like the Latin, sit 
testimonio, sit decori, etc.; rnpN, Dec. XII. 

Because animals are not here mentioned, it has been main- 
tained by many, that animal food was not originally permitted 

R 



122 



PART III. NOTES ON NOS. VII. VIII. 



to man, before the flood. But see Gen. iv, 2. 4. Why was Abel 
a shepherd? See also Gen. vii, 2. where beasts clean and unclean 
are distinguished. Does not this probably refer to animals, al- 
lowed or forbidden to be eaten? Still, in Eden, our first parents 
probably did not eat flesh. 

(30) rvjn-b^, i. e . ^0?, from the preceding verse.— "I^. 
121 in which, as above. — if*n t#5?., animal or animated breath ; 
see on v. 20. — jTn^bsVlS ; i. e. ^H?, / have given ; pj£, grass, 
vegetation here of the herbaceous kind, as the word 2$¥. denotes, 
which is subjoined as explanatory. 

The fruit trees, therefore, seem to have been originally given 
to man, for his nutriment ; and the gramineous, herbaceous sub- 
stances appropriated to the animals. 

(31) T'SB rntt, 456. a. 

No. VIII. Gen. II, 1—3. 

(1) ^5:-> 1 conversive Vav, with Dagh. after it omitted, 73. 
Note 3. comp. 87. g> which shews that Methegh is usually inserted 
in such cases, although the omission of it is pretty frequent. — 
fc%), Pual Fut. of nV|.— DMn^-bsi., Rosenmueller, ' omnes co- 
piae celestes ac terrestres.' But elsewhere, w ??, in connection 
with E^E? , always refers to the stars ; and so I take it here ; as 
in Neh. ix, 6. 

(2) bl>^, 1 as before in v. 1.; hi), Fut. apoc. Piel, for nb^, 
286. 2. The Dagh. is not retained in the b, after apocope, be- 
cause b becomes a final letter, 72. — Vp^bp 3 suff. state of HSSb^ 
(for H^Nba 118. and Note 2.), Dec. XL/.— rtaife, is spoken 
more humano ; as indeed every thing which we say, or can say, 
of God, must, in a greater or less degree, be spoken more hu- 
mano, or avQywwoTtaQZi;. Meaning : ' At the end of six days, God 
ceased to create ;' or, c he refrained from creating ;' i. e. on the 
seventh day he rested. The Septuagint reading here, iv r$ ypepa 
t?j wry, and the Samaritan Pentateuch which agrees with it, 
are evidently the result of some transcriber's fears, lest working 
on the seventh day should be attributed to the Creator. But what 
just ground of fear is there, when the writer expressly affirms, 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. VIII. 123 

that God on the seventh day, had completed ( '5*5) his work; for 
that this is the sense of 'T., 504. c. is clear from ri3tp*1j etc., 
which follows. 

(3) Ti^l, see 208. e. g. Meaning : ' God declared this day to 
be worthy of peculiar distinction, honour, and observance.' So 
the sequel explains it; ^:7i2?l (208. e. g.), and set it apart, con- 
secrated it to a special and sacred use ; such is the meaning of 
EH|?; Greek, fyopi&iv.—lZ, on it, during it. — Tf)ttf3?b .... "l#g 
which he had created in respect to making ; i. e. which he had 
created and made ; or, which he had formed by assiduous opera- 
tion. Comp. Eccles. ii, 11. for a like expression. The phraseology 
is unusual ; but the meaning does not seem to be obscure. As a 
comment on the sense of T39?- an ^ ^-l?-- here, read Ex. xx, 
8—11. 



The efforts made by recent critics and geologists, to explain 
away the account here given of creation, or to explain it so as to 
accord with their respective theories, are well known to every 
critical reader. The ratio loci et temporis does not permit me to 
enter into a particular examination of them here. A few hints 
are all that I shall give. 

The account of the creation, in Gen. i, ii, has been represented 
as a song, a uvOoq, a philosophem, i. e. a philosophical speculation 
about the origin of the universe, and (more prevailingly) of late, 
among a certain class of critics, as a kind of semi-poetic [av9o<;, 
philosophic in its speculative origin, but adorned with popular 
tradition as to its various particulars. Even Rosenmueller, in 
the latest edition of his Commentary on the Pentateuch, more 
than intimates, that the cosmogony of Moses is to be interpreted 
on the like principles with that of Hesiod, (vol. i. p. 58.) ; that 
the division of the work of creation into a period of six days, and 
the declaration respecting the sanctifi cation of the seventh, was 
made by Moses only to give currency to his law respecting the 
Sabbath, p. 59. And in the sequel he declares his belief, that 
Moses borrowed his cosmogony from the Egyptians. 



124 PART III. NOTES ON NO. VIII. 

The difficulties alleged to lie in the way, by critics who belong 
to this class, are, that the writer of the cosmogony in Genesis 
believes the earth to be the centre of the universe, and that the 
sun, moon, and all the heavenly bodies are merely subservient 
to it ; that one day, and one only \j,he fourth], suffices to form 
all the myriads of suns and planetary worlds, while Jive days are 
occupied with the formation of the earth, (which shews the igno- 
rance of the writer in question respecting the real nature of the 
universe;) that the clouds and sky are represented as a solid ex- 
panse above us, holding one division of the waters in its bosom, 
Gen. i, 7- ; that days and nights are represented as having an ex- 
istence, before the heavenly bodies were created which occasion 
them ; that not only vegetables, but even animals, spring from the 
earth, Gen. i, 11, 12, 20, 24.; and, in a word, that the whole ac- 
count has a mythic air, a costume which tradition and speculation 
have evidently put upon it. All these and the like objections 
have been variously, often, earnestly, and copiously urged by 
critics ; while geologists have united in endeavouring to shew, in 
various ways, and by a great variety of theories and by appeal 
to phenomena, that the earth must have been several thousand 
years in forming ; or, at least, it must have been made out of the 
ruins of another world. Even Dathe has embraced this last con- 
jecture, and defends it in his translation and notes. 

If a satisfactory answer can be given to all these objections 
and difficulties, still it would take a volume to make it out. After 
all too, one may well conclude with the apostle in Heb. xi, 3. 
that ' faith' is necessary, in order to believe that the worlds were 
created, agreeably to the scriptural account. My own view of 
the Mosaic cosmogony I can state in a few words. If it does not 
agree with sound principles of interpreting Scripture, let it be 
rejected. 

I believe the account in Gen. i, to be an account of matters of 
fact, of real verities ; not a mere philosophical or poetical specu- 
lation or [/.vOoi; ; and that the record is authentic, and entitled to 
our full credit. That the Egyptian and Phoenician cosmogonies 
resemble it, is no objection to its credit. Common tradition, from 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. VIII. 125 

Noah downwards, propagated the original true account, with some 
additions, among heathen nations. How could it be otherwise ? 

But the costume of the narration is altogether anthropopathic, 
i. e. accommodated to the feelings, views, and methods of expres- 
sion, existing in the time of Moses. For example ; the Hebrews 
thought and spoke of the earth and of the heavenly bodies, accord- 
ing to their optical appearance. Agreeably to this, the heavens 
are an arch, solid, and retaining the waters above, Gen. i, 7- ; vii, 
11.; viii, 2.: Ps. civ, 3.; cxlviii, 4. Our author also represents 
the sun, and moon, and stars, just as they appear to a spectator 
from our planet, as made to subserve the purposes of light, and 
to cause the seasons ; and so far as he goes, he truly represents 
them. He also represents the earth as producing vegetables, vs. 
11, 12.; the waters as producing fowls and fish, vs. 20, 21.; the 
earth again as producing wild and tame animals and reptiles, vs. 
24, 25. ; the two latter cases being contrary to our present ex- 
perience, and, as it seems to me, the result of the peculiar produc- 
tive power communicated to the original elements, by the divine 
influence mentioned in Gen. i, 2. That the form of the narration, 
or rather, that the modus of the expressions employed in it, is 
evidently of optical origin, can hardly be doubted. But after all, 
what is the difference between the principle which led to this 
mode of narration, and that which leads us, with all our certain 
knowledge of the solar system, to speak every day, and always, 
of the l sun as rising and setting V Is there any illusion in this ? 
Any design to mislead? If not, then why might not the Hebrew 
speak of his expanse (^iT^), and of the windows of heaven, 
through which the rain descends, as well as we can say that ' the 
sun rises and sets V 

The Bible was not designed to teach the Hebrews astronomy or 
geology. Had it been given to them in the scientifical costume of 
the present day, it would have been a book utterly unintelligible. 
Moses made it intelligible; he designed it to be so. His object 
was to reveal, to the Jews, Jehova as the maker of all things, and 
the object of supreme reverence and adoration. This object he 
has accomplished ; not by astronomical and geological represen- 



126 PART III. NOTES ON NO. VIII. 

tations, but by popular ones. Is not this just as it should be ; and 
just as we might reasonably expect it to be? 

As to the relative importance, given by the Biblical account to 
our earth, we may say, at least, that it tallies well with the mission 
of God's own Son, to redeem our guilty race. Yet, after all, the 
account only decides, that on the fourth day the heavenly bodies 
were formed ; and not their relative importance. 

The objections of geologists will deserve more serious considera- 
tion, when any two respectable authors among them ever come to 
agree with each other, and when the earth shall have been pene- 
trated and examined, a little more than an eight thousandth part 
of its diameter ; for this has not yet been done. In regard to the 
theory of gradual formations, which makes some thousands of 
years necessary to be comprehended in each of the six days ; one 
might ask, how it can be proved, that all substances must have 
been formed in an incipient state merely ? Were only acorns 
made at first instead of oaks ? And was man an infant, when first 
from the hands of his Creator ? 

As to the views of our author, in respect to the length of the 
days and nights at the creation ; nothing can be plainer than that 
usual days and nights are meant. How could he say, that c the 
evening and the morning made them," if this be not true? And 
if it be not true, then how long was the seventh day or sabbath, 
which followed the other six days? Moses in the fourth com- 
mandment, has given us as a reason for the sabbatical institution, 
that God made all things in six days, and rested on the seventh. 
Did Moses suppose the seventh day, then, to have been a different 
kind of a day, as to length, from the other six ? Or did he mean, 
that after six days, each of several thousand years, a sabbath of 
equal length should be kept by the Jews ? If not. then our cos- 
mogony means of course to convey the idea of ordinary days, and 
no others. If indeed Moses does, after all, contradict geology, 
then be it so ; but to violate the laws of exegesis in order to ac- 
commodate a geological theory, (about which, moreover, no two 
considerable geologists are agreed,) is not acting in accordance with 
the precepts of Scriptural Hermeneutics. Who does not know, 



PART III. NOTES ON NOS. VIII. IX. 127 

too, that the latest and highest efforts of geologists,, are turning 
toward the confirmation of the Scripture account of the deluge ; 
and that some among the most distinguished of them, find no oc- 
casion to force the language of the sacred record, even in the pre- 
sent case, out of its common and obvious meaning ? I trust the 
time is coming, when all the lights of science will serve to render 
more intense, and more widely to diffuse, the light of revelation. 
May that cheering day be near ! 

It has often been alleged, that ' the whole of the cosmogony 
in question must evidently be a {*6Boq, or a philosophem, because 
the very nature of the case shews, that no man could have wit- 
nessed any part of the work of creation, inasmuch as man was 
made last of all.' But this allegation rests entirely upon the as- 
sumption, that no revelation to man, respecting the origin of all 
things, was ever made in any supernatural way ; an assumption 
not compatible with the benevolence of the Creator, the natural 
ignorance and error of man, and the duties which he owes to God 
as the Author of his spiritual being. 



No. IX. Gen. II, 7-— 25. 

(7) ">?^!, a form peculiar, from nSJ, Fut. "ISP'! with the tone 
not retracted, i. e. without Vav conversive, (in almost every case, 
the Fut. with final Tseri is of such a form as *W?., or ""^., 244. 
a.) This verb has also a Fut. like that of Class III. verbs, ^ , 
251. viz. 1ST. As an intrans. verb signifying to be distressed, 
it has other forms of the Future, viz. ""I??., and ""^?.1 (which is 
analogical, 244. a.) — "153? } Ace. of material, as grammarians call 
it, i. e. the Ace. designating the materials out of which a thing is 
made, used in a kind of adverbial way, 428. e. 

'"^'J^n, Dec. XI. That this name gave occasion to the ap- 
pellation E""ftJ 3 seems quite probable, both from the nature of the 
case as here represented, and also as represented in Gen. iii, 19. 
The etymology, which derives E"TW from 0"TN red, because ori- 
ental men are of a reddish hue, is too fanciful to be entitled to 
much credit, Lit. [Vith, by means of] dust from the earth, i. e. 



128 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. IX. 



with terrestrial dust. — n??^ from nS3, Fut. Pattahh, 235.— 
V%**, dual suff. of E??^; lit. breathed into his nostrils the breath 
of life. Meaning : ' Endowed him with living or animated 
breath.' The language is clearly a.vOpuitQ'ita.Oas ; I mean, it is oc- 
casioned by the action of breathing among men. — H *H E75? : , lit. 
for a living or animated being ; a periphrasis often employed by 
the Hebrews, in connection with the verb of existence, when it 
signifies he became, it became. 

(8) *fc£, from 37T2D, Fut. 235.— D^nb« rrtTTj, a n appellation 
of God, never employed in Gen. i,, but uniformly used in Gen. ii., 
and nearly so in Gen. iii. A like distinction obtains, in many 
other parts of the book of Genesis. From this it has been 
argued, by late critics, that this book is made up of records earlier 
than the time in which the author of the Pentateuch lived, and 
composed by different persons ; a supposition which has some ex- 
ternal evidence in the book of Genesis to favour it. On the sup- 
position that these ancient records were introduced by Moses him- 
self, the authenticity of the book remains untouched by this criti- 
cal opinion. 

15, Dec. VIII. The etymology would naturally lead to the 
idea of an enclosed place, (]?| protegere ;) but this is not neces- 
sarily attached to the idea of 1? . — ,1^, here prop, name; comp. 
2 K. xix, 12. ; Is. xxxvii, 12.; Ezek. xxvii, 23, (where it is pointed 
)1.V. , however, but this only determines the views of the Rabbin- 
ical Punctators) ; in all which places it is mentioned along with 
Haran (VJT), a town of Mesopotamia, Gen. xi, 31, 32. : xii, 5. ; 
xxv, 43. ; and therefore Eden was probably at no great distance 
from Haran. See also Amos i, 5, which probably refers to an 
Eden in Syria. That Eden means a country or tract of land here, 
is evident from Gen. iv, 16. The word is used figuratively, in al- 
lusion to the garden here described, in Is. Ii, 3.; Ezek. xxviii, 13.: 
xxxi, 9. ; Joel ii, 3. ; in the three former cases it is accompanied 
by the parallel or epexegetical phrase, * garden of the Lord.' 

^•v^j °f the eastern country, (72 prep, often makes a peri- 
phrasis of the Gen.), or toward the east, eastward, at the east, 
Gen. xii, 8 bis; so P^§^? northward, Judg. vii, 1. — Et£]£, apoc. 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. IX. 129 

Fut. Hiph. of n*\W, with tone retracted and vowel shortened, 270. 
c. 3. comp. 208. Note 2. 

(9) m?»l, apoc. Fut. Hiph. with Gutt., 236.— ^H?, Part. 
Niph.; for pointing, see 225. — nM"]^b "TEH?., pleasant to the 
sight. — '?*?£?, Dec. II. — D^nn ¥"¥], in the same construction 
with the preceding W , and governed by nD5^ implied. Mean- 
ing: ' The tree which preserves life;' or, ' The tree of which he 
that eateth shall live, and not die;' comp. Gen. iii, 22. 

3HJ miD TO^TH Y¥ , the tree of knowing good and evil. 
^^n, fern. Inf. noun, used as a verbal from 3HJ. The meaning 
has been greatly contested. Rosenmueller contends that the 
meaning here is the same, as when applied to infants, in order to 
designate their entire ignorance ; and he refers to Deut. i, 39. ; 
Is. vii, 16. ; Jonah iv, 11. The two last case's, however, are quite 
different as to the manner of expression ; and there remains only 
one, viz. Deut. i, 39, to compare with our phrase. But that the 
meaning is the same in the latter instance, as in the former, ap- 
pears to be contradicted by all the context preceding and succeed- 
ing, as well as by the nature of the case. Was man, made in the 
image of God, at first as ignorant as an infant ? How then did 
he preserve himself? Or how could he understand his moral rela- 
tions to his Creator ; and how be guilty for not obeying a com- 
mand, the nature of which he was incapable of understanding ? 
Must we suppose the writer of our history to be so weak, as to 
put all these things together ? 

Then what crime could there be in attaining such a knowledge, 
as would enable one nicely to distinguish between moral good and 
evil? Has it not always been,, and must it not always be, a virtue 
in the intelligent and moral creatures of God to do this ? 

There remains then but one rational supposition, in regard to 
the meaning of our phrase. This is, that by the knowledge of 
good and evil is meant, ' a knowledge of the difference or distinc- 
tion between happiness and misery,' (as good and evil very com- 
monly signify in the Scriptures, e. g. Is. iii, 10, 11. et al. ssepe) ; 
i. e. man, by eating the forbidden fruit, came to know the differ- 
ence between happiness and misery ;' or, ' the eating of the fruit 

s 



130 PART III. NOTES ON NO. IX. 

which was prohibited, occasioned him to know, by unhappy ex- 
perience, the difference between a state of happiness and one of 
misery.' This explanation plainly accords with the nature of the 
whole transaction, and with what ensued upon eating the fruit of 
the tree in question. The name, then, considered in this point 
of view, is quite intelligible and significant ; is it so in any other? 

The words of the tempter (Gen. iii, 5), whose object it was to 
deceive, can not be justly alleged against this interpretation ; nor 
do the words of Jehova, in Gen. iii, 22, make against it, for they 
are evidently of the nature of solemn irony, with allusion to the 
deception of the tempter, as recorded in Gen. iii, 5. 

(10) NS\ issued, 527. b.—V.^, i. e. from some part of the 
region called Eden. — niptpn^ Inf. Hiph. with H praefix re- 
tained, 216. 3. It is plain, that the river flowed through the 
garden where our first parents were placed ; and this, before its 
stream was disparted; i. e. one stream only watered Paradise. — 
E^^tf, and thence, which may refer either to 1?, or to the region 
in which it was, viz. )*!}V. . Rosenmueller refers it to II, (Alter - 
thumskunde, i, 192.); but it is equally agreeable to usage in this 
case, to refer it to I'lV. ; and some may prefer this here. — "C^. , 
Fut. Niph., used as the Prseter by virtue of the Vav before the 
preceding word, connected with it and with the preceding ^^ > ; 
comp. 503. Note l.—TOS^, 459._D , 'E?*n > sources, heads, 
here river-heads or sources ; comp. v. 13, where TJ5 is substi- 
tuted for wtin . 

(11) 1FMT1, 465.— f^S), the Phasis, as Rosenmueller and 
others suppose, a river of Colchis, running into the east end of the 
Black sea. Taking off the endings — is and "p., we have the same 
radicals (E7Q) in both words. Xenophon, however, in his Ana- 
basis, iv, 6, mentions a Phasis with which he met, farther south, 
and which must be, as it would seem, either the present Kur 
(Cyrus), or the Aras or Araxes. I regard the former as the more 
probable; because the Araxes seems to be the Gihon, mentioned in 
v. 13. The Kur takes its rise, if we may credit the best maps, in 
the northern part of Armenia, and running first northward, and 
then eastward, either passes through or grazes upon, the ancient 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. IX. 131 

Colchis, or Havilah. It finally unites with the Araxes, and both 
empty into the south-western part of the Caspian lake. 

^3^n^ n art. for pronoun, 414. 2. b. Note. This word is usually 
construed as meaning, to encompass, to flow round on the margin 
of; but it plainly signifies, also, to pass through, to wind one's 
way through, as Is. xxiii, 16; 1 Sam. vii, 16, clearly shew. This 
sense of the word may be applied either to the Kur, or to the 
northern Phasis, both of which pass through Havilah, i. e. the 
country of Colchis ; or it may be applied to the Kur, which also 
grazes upon, encompasses, a part of Havilah or Colchis. — lYpirjn, 
prob. Colchis ; which was rich in gold ; e. g. Jason went thither 
after the golden fleece, i. e. gold caught in fleeces, gold separated 
from the waters of the Phasis by means of them. Colchis, no 
doubt, like all the early countries of nomads and predatory hordes, 
was not a definitely bounded country. It lies at the east end of 
the Black sea.— DttTltttej, where, 478. b. 

(12) Wnn (for N'Trn, see 165. b. /.), the same is, 469.— 
^?^^n, BbeWiov, bdellium, a gum used as incense for burning, 
and of an aromatic smell. — EH^, prob. the onyx. So Rosenm. i, 
209. Alterth. 

(13) prpa, not improbably the Araxes or Aras ; which the 
Persians still call, O w /' t^^r^ > Gihon el Ras. — ^^H, en- 
compasses, or ivinds its way through; see on v. 11. Which of 
these senses it bears here, must depend on the situation of a?!)3 , 
in respect to the river in question. — Efa3, Cush or Kush. 



But where is Cush ? ' In the narrower sense/ says Gesenius, 
f it means Ethiopia, i. e. the southern part of Arabia, or Ethiopia 
in Africa, which was a colony of the former; as the language 
shews.' But Ethiopia, in the widest sense, both Gesenius and 
Rosenmueller represent as equivalent to Southern Country, Torrid 
Zone, i. e. the region inhabited by people of colour ; and both 
avow that there is an entire want of geographical accuracy in the 
Scriptural account of the local situation of Paradise. 

' How could Gihon,' (the Oxus, as Rosenmueller and others sup- 



132 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. IX. 



pose, which running from the remote eastern country, empties 
itself into the south-eastern part of the Caspian lake), ' how 
could this stream encompass the South-Land, or Ethiopia, or 
Southern Arabia V 

Fully to discuss these difficult problems of ancient geography, 
here, would be out of place. But as affirmations of this nature, 
on the part of such acute, learned, and distinguished critics as Ge- 
senius and Rosenmueller, have a strong tendency to undermine 
the belief of the young enquirer, in the accuracy of the sacred 
historians, I shall suggest a few reasons, very briefly, why one 
may still believe, with the older critics, that there was a Cush 
Oriental, as well as a Cush Southern. — 

I. The very general custom in all ages, early and late, of naming 
places after distinguished persons will be allowed.* Now Cush 
was the eldest son of Ham, (Gen. x, 1. ; 1 Chron. i, 8.) ; and the 
father of Nimrod, the founder of the Babylonian empire, and of its 
great cities ; the founder also of Nineveh, Rehoboth, Calah, and 
Resen, in Assyria; see Gen. x, 8 — 12. In v. 11, the rendering 
should be, (as it is in the margin of our English bibles), He £Nim- 
rod] ivent out of that land [Viz. Babylon], into Assyria, ""I^M, 
Aec. adverbial of place, 428. a. So Rosenmueller, in Alterth. 
Th. ii, p. 94. The father of such a distinguished founder of em- 
pires and cities, which were the wonder of all succeeding ages, 
must himself have been entitled to distinction in this respect ; not 
to mention, that he was a grandson of Noah. Had he no region 
or place in the East, named after him by such a son as Nimrod? 

II. Among the people, whom the king of Assyria transported 
to the land of Israel, after he had conquered the ten tribes, and 
carried them away to Halah, Habor, the river Gozan, and the 
cities of the Medes, (i. e. to the northern part of Assyria and to 
Media,) is one named ^O ^t^N, men of Cutli, 2 Kings xvii, 30.; 
also written nrV12 ,, in 2 Kings xvii, 24. These are, in both places, 
mentioned in connection with Babylonians, '5? ^?^ who ac- 
companied them. The idol which they worshipped, is named '?"]?, 

* Rosenmueller says, that most of the names in Gen. x. are names of countries, as well 
as of persons. Alterth. ii, p. 94. 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. IX. 133 

2 Kings xvii, 30. ; plainly an oriental name, (not a Shemitish one,) 
as appears in the proper names of the princes of Babylon, Nergal- 
Sharezer, Jer. xxxix, 3, 13. (also in Neriglissor, who slew Evilme- 
rodach and mounted the throne of Babylon). iTD'"'^^ , the 
Cuthites, then, were an oriental people. Now rVi3 and afaa 
may evidently be nothing more than the Aramaean and Hebrew 
forms of the same word ; inasmuch as the Hebrew V? not unfre- 
quently is lisped, i. e. is pronounced n in the Aramaean. For ex- 
ample, the Hebrew "fit^N, Assyria, by the Syrians and Chaldeans 
was called >V1N; by the Arabians, ,j\ Atur ; and hence, by the 
Greeks and Romans, Aturia. 

That the Cuthites or Cushites, transplanted from the east, were 
the most considerable of all the colonies which the king of Assy- 
ria placed in Samaria, is evident from the fact, that they gave 
name afterwards to the whole people of Samaria ; for the Jews, 
ever since, have called the Samaritans Cuthites, CiH'lS or C^j"13 . 
There were, then, oriental Cuthites or Cushites. 

III. Moses Choronensis, a native of Armenia, and who, in the 
fifth century, wrote the history of that country, still extant, in 
his Geography appended to this work by the Whistons, includes 
all the country east of the Tigris, from the Caspian lake down to 
the Persian gulf, under the name of Cush. Media he calls, 
Chushi-Capcoch ; Elymais, Chushi-Chorasan ; Persia, Chushi- 
Nemroz, and under Elymais he reckons a province named Chu- 
sastan, p. 363. As there is no ground to dispute either the know- 
ledge or the veracity of this historian, in respect to such a subject; 
and as this testimony reaches very far back, and shews the Avide 
prevalence of the oriental generic name Cush, among the ancients 
who were natives of the east ; so is it plain, that an oriental Cush 
is not merely ideal. 

IV. Chusistan, i. e. Cush country, is still the name of a pro- 
vince, on the east of the Tigris and of ancient Babylonia; although 
the Arabians appear to have changed the original orthography of 
the word. 

V. The author of our history has referred to countries and 
places certainly known, as serving to confirm his account, and to 



134 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. IX. 



put his readers in possession of definite views respecting the situa- 
tion of Eden. Would he venture to mix fable with truth, in a 
thing of this nature, so easily contradicted by any oriental tra- 
veller ? Did he not know to what he referred ? Did not the ori- 
ginal ancestors of the Jews spring from the East? Did not Jacob 
live there many years? Could it be a mere conjecture with him, 
(and with his descendants,) whether there was a Cush in that 
region ? 

VI. After a lapse of more than 3000 years, can the present 
names of places or rivers be adduced, in order to confute the ac- 
count of Moses ? 

VII. The acknowledged geographical accuracy (in the popular 
sense) of the Scriptures in general, makes very much against the 
supposition of Gesenius, Rosenmueller, and many others, that our 
author has here committed great mistakes, in his account of Para- 
dise, and that the whole is a mere pvQoq. Is it the manner of 
those who write y.vQoi, to describe locality in the way here prac- 
tised ? 

I will only add, that understanding Cush of Cushi-Capcoch, 
i. e. the northern part of the region between the Caspian lake 
and the Persian gulf; and supposing the Gihon to be the Araxesj 
then does this river encompass Cush. There need be no pvBoq sup- 
posed here. 



(14) ^H, the Tigris. The H is prob. prefixed to make the 
quadriliteral, as in nb*nq, bmq, D^St^n, etc. In Aramaean, 
Digla, and Diglath ; in Arab. Diglaih, in the Pehlvi, Zedschera. 
— nD7j7, eastward, in the eastern part of or before, which how- 
ever is equivalent to the other meanings. 

1 But how could the writer say thus ? Assyria lies beyond the 
Tigris, which makes its western border, not its eastern one.' To 
which Rosenmueller, as often in other parts of this description of 
the local situation of Paradise, answers, that ' this description re- 
sults manifestly from the ignorance of our author, in respect to the 
geography of the places named.' The same has been affirmed by 
many other late critics. 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. IX. 135 

But is not Assyria, as a province, to be distinguished from As- 
syria as a kingdom ? Passing over the extravagant and contradic- 
tory accounts of Herodotus and Ctesias, in regard to the early 
history of this monarchy, so much may be inferred from them and 
from the Scriptures, that Assyria did, very early, attain great 
political eminence, and push far and wide its conquests. Was 
not Nimrod of a character to do this ? In Moses' time, we find 
Balaam adverting to the conquests of this powerful monarchy, 
Num. xxiv, 22. In David's time, they are reckoned among his 
enemies, and ranked with neighbouring nations, Ps. lxxxiv, 9. Of 
course they must then have been in possession of Syria ; or at 
least, of a part of it._ 

Was not the Tigris, then, on the east, or in the eastern part 
of Assyria viewed as a kingdom ? And will not this view com- 
pare with that which Balaam takes, in Num. xxiv, 22.? Indeed, 
Rosenmueller concedes the above facts, in Alterth. ii, 103 seq. ; 
what need then of f/,v6o<; here ? 

Moreover, the limits which he so confidently puts to Assyria 
as a province, are far from being certain, when applied to the 
time of Moses. Diodorus Siculus places Nineveh on the Euphra- 
tes, as Ctesias (from whom he drew) had done before him ; and 
even the acute and learned Mannert, places it on the west of the 
Tigris. Is it so certain, then, that Moses knew not what he was 
saying, when he said that ' the Tigris runneth "WN ^1P, on 
the east of Assyria V How difficult to convict one of geographical 
error, who wrote more than 3000 years ago ! 

J T}?, the Euphrates, which being nearer, and better known, 
than any of the rivers before named, is not described by a parti- 
cular reference to country, as in the other cases. 

(15) nj9n, Fut. of n*pb._. b inn^^ Fut. Hiph. from rn;, 251. 

Yodh between the last two radicals is dropped, 6b. ; *in H verbal 
suff. with penult tone, 309.—^, Beth Raphe, 80.— ^^f? , Inf. 
with suff. n. ; see in Par. XXII., and comp. 312. 4 — iTJ?fi??!, 
ibid. 

It may be noted, here, that it was obviously the design of the 
Creator, that man should be active, and should labour, even in 



136 PART III. NOTES ON NO. IX. 

the paradisaical state. Labour itself is not a part of the curse 
which followed the apostacy ; but labouring with toil and sorrow, 
and labouring to cultivate ground which is comparatively barren, 
is a part of the curse. Gen. iii, 17 — 19. 



From the view given above, of the rivers which issued from 
Eden, (which in its general features resembles that given by Re- 
land and Calmet,) it appears, that there is no necessity of sup- 
posing the description of the locality of Eden to be a mere ^vBoq, 
as most of the recent German critics have done. Rosenmueller 
says, " From the description given in Gen. ii, to endeavour to 
make out the locality of Paradise, idem esse videtur, atque Virgilii 
de Elysio phantasmata (iEneid. vi, 637 seq.) ad veritatem revo- 
care ;" Comm. in Gen. ii, 10. Yet it is a fact, that four great 
rivers do take their rise in the region of Armenia, viz. the Kur, 
the Araxes, the Euphrates, and the Tigris. It is a fact, that the 
sources of all four, at present, are in the neighbourhood of each 
other, in the middle region of Armenia, and at no great distance 
from Ararat. There seems, then, to be no important difficulty in 
the way of admitting, that the countries, on which they are said 
by our author to graze, or through which they wind their way, are 
countries correctly designated, according to the geography of the 
day. Indeed, the very nature of the appeal, on the part of the 
writer, to the productions of the country, e. g. to the gold and 
bdellium and onyx of Havilah, of itself shews, that he felt himself 
secure against the imputation of fiction. Only one important cir- 
cumstance remains. This is, that the four rivers just named, do 
not, at present, flow from one source, but are some thirty or forty 
miles apart. This, no doubt, must be admitted, as things now are. 
But if the history of the deluge be not also a ^vBoq, (and I am 
aware that the critics in question believe it to be so, yet geology 
is proceeding now to overthrow their position,) then is it certain 
that no very important objection to the accuracy of our author 
can be drawn from this. That important changes must have 
been made by the deluge, in the face of the earth, in the courses 
of rivers, and in the plainness or unevenness of the surface of 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. IX. 137 

every country, needs not to be demonstrated. Moses does not say, 
that at the time when he was writing, the four rivers which he 
names were flowing from one source ; he merely avers, that ori- 
ginally they did so. The possibility of this, considering the pre- 
sent proximity of these rivers, and the changes that a deluge 
must have made, cannot well be denied. The probability rests 
mainly on the credit of the writer. Those who believe that he 
was divinely guided, may safely believe that he has given us 
something different from a fable, (like that respecting the garden 
of the Hesperides,) in his account of Paradise. They may be- 
lieve that there was a grand river-source in the Armenian coun- 
try, (the ancient Eden,) from which issued a stream, on whose 
banks the garden of Eden was situated; and that after this stream 
had wound its way through the garden, it became disparted, and 
running in different directions, gave rise to four large rivers. 
Where so much is known to be true, both in respect to the exis- 
tence of such rivers, and (I believe I may add) in regard to the 
countries named, we may, all things considered, believe the rest on 
the credibility of the writer of our account, without being justly 
liable to the imputation of any inordinate credulity. 



(16) !2£V, vd-yetsav, 1 without Daghesh after it, 208. in e. g. ; 
ITtj apoc. Fut. Piel, Dag. omitted in Vav, because it comes to be 
a final letter, 72. comp. also 286. 2.— lb«b, 119. c. \.-A\n, art. 
412. a.— b^«n hbN, Inf. abs. with a finite tense, 514. b. c. 

(17) \TW, * 152. c. 4.; $ 112._3n;, 1 152. c. 3. For the 
whole phrase, see on v. 9. above. — vDWI f Fut. with Pattahh 
here, in the verse preceding it has a Tseri ; see Par. VII. — *"^ft, 
i. e. ^H ]E? 7Q, the first Nun is assimilated with Mem, the second 
causes the n of the pronoun to be assimilated with it ; see in 309. 
d. and comp. 407. Note, also 407- f^-TPIOin n\12 3 Inf. abs. with 
finite tense of the same verb, 514. b. 

No. X. Gen. II, 18—25. 

(18) Vtt 1 ? .... nib «b, lit. not good [is] the being of the 



138 PART III. NOTES ON NO. X. 

man, in his separation, i. e. by himself, in his solitude. — T^tJ 3 Inf. 
const, of »"Pn 3 as a noun in reg. with ^7^5*7 which follows. — 1^5? j 
lit. in his separation, with b prep, and *T? noun of Dec. VIII., but 
united they are used as a prep., 407- c. — 'ivTTtp^, tfe-V e sel-lo, 
with Dagh. euphonic or conjunctive, 75. a. 1 pers. Fut. Kal from 
nOT.—Y^, S uff. form of TM, Sept. /car 5 aSro'v, and in v. 20, 
they render the same word, 'o^oioq avr<p ; rightly as to the sense, 
which is, according to that which is the counterpart to him, or 
according to that which corresponds to him. The fanciful (not to 
say shameful) comment, put on this word by Schultens, and after 
him by Rosenmueller and others, but rejected by Gesenius, may 
be seen in Rosenm. Coram, in loc. and in several of the Lexicons. 

(19) " 1 ?*1, apoc. Fut. Kal, almost the only one which has a 
penult Hhireq and an ultimate Tseri, which becomes Seghol here 
because the accent is retracted, 129. a. comp. 244. b. ; used 
as Pluperfect here, had formed.— rt^\fn rvrrba TO'WrrfQ 9 
comp. the sentiment with Gen. i, 24, 25. — D?^n *Vtirb3 n«} , 
i. e. God formed, Tl)n) 1$£ . If the clause n»Wp$ j s also 
implied here, there would seem to be a discrepancy between this 
and Gen. i, 20, 21.-^3^ apoc. Fut. Hiph. Par. XX^-JTHPJ 1 ?, 
for the seeing, in order to see, from HST. — N"Jf?*VTO, 75. a. — Vb, 
Dat. of the thing called ; see on ^N 1 ? in No. II. v. 5.— TVp B$M, 
in apposition with **ib, which is here anticipative, 474. second 
clause. The prep. ? is implied before nyi ^53. — '^V? , suff. 
state of D#, Dec. VII. 

(20) bob, Dat. after WjKl, as above.— N?», one did not find, 
there was not found, 500. — "^J?? "%&, see on v. 18. 



What is here stated implies, of course, the full persuasion of 
the writer, that language or speech belonged to man at the first, 
as an attribute of his being. It did not arise merely from the 
mutual intercourse of human beings ; for Adam is here repre- 
sented as having given names to animals, before the creation of 
Eve. Indeed, I am not able to see why it is not as probable, that 
the gift of language was one with which the Creator originally en- 



PART IIT. NOTES ON NO. X. 139 

dowed the progenitors of the human race, as that he endowed 
them with understanding and reason. Articulate speech is as 
much a peculiar characteristic of human nature, in its maturity, 
as either of these attributes. And that the first pair were not 
created infants, needs no proof but a consideration of the nature 
of the case. We might as well suppose, that the first oaks were 
only acorns when created; that all the first vegetables were only 
seeds ; and that all these grew up to maturity afterwards. If so, 
how in the mean time did man and animals get their sustenance ? 
Or how did our infant parents, and the young of animals, provide 
for themselves this sustenance, if any were to be had ? 

The idea, so often repeated by some late philosophers and 
critics, that our first parents were formed with merely the powers 
of speaking articulate language, which they improved and ex- 
tended by first imitating noises made by the brute creation, is 
nothing less than maintaining, that the Creator, who made man 
in his own image, left him in a state less finished than he did the 
brutes ; and that he consulted, or provided for, neither his wants 
nor his dignity. Believe this whoever will ; for myself I must 
believe, that man, recent from the hands of his Creator, and with 
the image of the Eternal enstamped upon him, was more perfect 
than any of his degenerate posterity have ever been, in all those 
powers which make our nature superior to that of the lower crea- 
tion around us. 



(21) v2^, apoc. Fut. Hiph. of '?J, used here in the genuine 
causative sense of this conjugation, 185. b. 1. comp. also 206. Note 
l._ntt^n 3 Dec. XL— f^l, for vowels, see 244. b. ; for the 
efifect of the pause-accent, 1 44. I. ; for the tone on the final syl- 
lable, see 101. b. Note 2. c. — n i^, with tone on the ultimate, 
see 101. b. under e. g., the penult here not being a simple syllable, 
i. e. not ending in a vowel. 

nnx for nnrix :) f em . of i™, 107. 2.— vn^s, Dec. V. i. ; 

here the fem. form of the plur. is used, 327. 2. — ""i-P^l, tone on 
the ultimate, 101. b. under e. g. — nai-jnJDj compounded of J TKD, 
a prep, like a noun of Dec. VI., 407. Note, also 407- a. 



140 PART III. NOTES ON NO. X. 

(22) 79*1, 283. y .^naW?, comp. 511. Note, and 512.— 
™^1, 1 208. under e. g. ; "1 instead of J, 133.; 5 for *0, 63.; 
H- verbal suffix, 309. column c. 

(23) D37Sn, hcec vicis, this time, now, the art. 1 makes it de- 
finitely to relate to the time or occasion then extant ; Ace. of 
time, 428. 2. and c— ^3?D, plural suff. state of D^.— ?lf«, 
fern, of ft?^, by contracting the long vowel of the masculine 
form ; others take it for HtMN ? f e m. of E73N . So the old Latins, 
vir, a man; vi'ra, a woman. — ^rjlj : <, Pual 3 fem. Praet. , instead of 
nnj?b ? 51. Note; for Methegh, 82. g. but here the P does not 
necessarily exclude the Dagh. forte, it is only an arbitrary ex- 
clusion, to which the principles of a necessary one are extended, 
so far as Methegh is concerned. — ilS-T with Dagh. conjunctive, 
75. 

(24) mtjv ya-Vztbh, short 0. 89.— Y>qH, Par. XXIV. No. 
II.— ^N, suff. state of 0«, Dec. VIIL, 130. c. a.— piT|, with a 
Fut. sense, because 1 connects it to the preceding ^J??2 which 
has such a sense, 209— ifltjfr^., 506. Dec. XIII. c-.-^TJj; with 
a Fut. sense, 209. — n ??^, Dat. after ^ri in the sense of be- 
come ; which is the usual construction. 

(25) arP?.$, dual suff. of D^# ._ D^n3? , plur. of dVi*, 
Dec. VIII., vowels as in Dec. III. The Shureq here remains in 
a mixed syllable, 31. Note 3. The usual method of orthography 
would be, E^T 1 ??. For the shortening of the *1 in the ground- 
form here, into !|, see 127- Exc. 1.; 346. 3.; 270. ft. 1.; 352. 3. 
The asterisk is designed to refer to the note at the bottom of the 
page ; which is a Masoretic remark, and lit. translated means, 
Daghesh after Shureq, The design is, to note this as a singu- 
larity; or, at least, as an usage which is not frequent. — ^'^'^'T., 
Hithpolel of tt?*12l, of the class final Hholem, 270. under a. 1.; it 
has Fut. Pattahh in Hithpolel, viz. H^ar)': ; for the effect of the 
pause-accent here, see 146. 



This whole account of naming the animals, and of the forma- 
tion of woman, is regarded by Rosenmueller, Gesenius, and many 
other interpreters, as a mere [AvBoq; pleasantly devised, indeed, 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. X. 141 

and ingenious as to the execution, as some of them concede. But 
if there be a God, who created the world, made man in his own 
image, and endowed him with the gift of speech, it was not un- 
worthy of him to call that gift into exercise. If that God made 
a ' help meet ' for solitary man, there is nothing unbecoming with 
respect to his dignity and wisdom, in the supposition that he did 
form woman from man as here related, in order to constitute an 
indissoluble tie of endearing connnexion between the sexes in this 
way, and for this very purpose. The question, whether he could 
not have inspired the sexes with the same feelings, in some other 
way, may be sufficiently answered, by asking, How will the critics 
in question prove to us, that divine wisdom could not, and did 
not, choose this way of doing it ? And until this be shewn, we 
may venture to give credit to our author; especially as our Sa- 
viour and his Apostles so expressly recognize the real verity of 
the narration in question; see Matt, xix, 5, 6.; Mark x, 5—9.; 
1 Cor. vi, 16.; Eph. v, 3L; 1 Cor. xi, 8, 9.; 1 Tim. ii, 13. The 
question, ' whether one of the ribs of men is now found lacking,' 
(which has been scoffingly asked, in order to refute the narration 
above,) is hardly entitled to a serious answer. Does a man now, 
who breaks or loses a rib, beget children who are lacking as to one 
of theirs ? If not, why should Adam's male descendants partake 
of a mere physical peculiarity of their progenitor ? 

The primeval state of man, without clothing, and without 
shame, serves to shew, that his Creator had adapted the tempera- 
ture of the region, in which he placed him, to a condition in 
which the fewest wants possible would be experienced. The la- 
bour necessary to procure clothing, was to be dispensed with. 
Integrity and innocence too are designated by these traits. No 
guilty passions arose in the breast of the first happy pair. Sin 
only gives a sense of shame ; and as they had not yet sinned, 
they found nothing to excite a blush. Even Plato, without the 
light of revelation, formed in his own mind a picture of the primi- 
tive state of man, more rational and becoming than some of our 
modern philosophical critics have portrayed. It is thus he de- 
scribes it ; ©eo<j eveptv ccvtovi;, ocvrot; iiria-rarSi/j KaQaireg vvv avBpwnoi, 



142 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. XI. 



Xfiov %v Oeiorepov, aXXa yevq ipacvKorepd avruv vopevova-i. Yvpvo) Se koc) 
aa-TguKQi OvgavXovvreq rcc noWcc ii/epovro. (In Politico). 

No. XI. Gen. Ill, 1—7- 

The student will observe, that in the sequel, the full train of 
accents is introduced. This is not done with a design to lead him, 
as yet, to the study of the accents, in respect to their consecution 
or train, i. e. the manner in which they follow one another, or 
stand mutually related or connected. This can be done better 
at a future period, and when the means of doing it shall be 
afforded to the student.* The particular reason why all the 
accents are here admitted, is, that the student may now become 
accustomed to read with them ; and that he may become ac- 
quainted with the manner in which they are all employed, in order 
to mark tone-syllables; with the various ways in which they af- 
fect the quantity of the vowels, and their restoration where they 
would by the principles of common analogy be dropped ; with 
the influence they exert over the insertion or omission of Dagh. 
lene in the Aspirates ; and also with the power which they exert 
in changing the place of the tone-syllable, in a multitude of words. 
These are sufficient reasons, founded in the grammatical pheno- 
mena of the language as it is now presented to us, why the stu- 
dent ought not to be, and must not be, ignorant of the influence 
exercised by the accents over the forms and tone of words. 

Besides these, there is another reason which is not destitute 
of weight. The accents, as conjunctive and disjunctive, serve, (at 
least they often do, and in the estimation of most older critics 
they always do), to shew what words are to be considered as in- 
timately connected in regard to relation and meaning, and what 
are to be more or less disjoined ; a help, which in some doubtful 
cases is very grateful to the critic, and to which the most enlight- 

* The second edition of my Hebrew Grammar exhibits the consecution of the accents 
here referred to, both in poetry and prose, in the Appendix. In the third edition it was 
omitted, in order to save the room it would occupy; but particularly, because professor 
Gibbs expects to insert it in his Lexicon Formarum. 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. XI. 143 

ened interpreters of the present day do not fail occasionally to 
resort. With this use of the accents, however, the student need 
not trouble himself, for the present ; and when he comes to obtain 
a knowledge of it, it may be done with very little trouble, and 
without going deeply into the study of the whole consecution of 
the accents, i. e. of their various relations, positions, and depen- 
dencies. 

In the sequel, I shall remark on the accents, only when they 
in some way affect the vowels, the Aspirates, or the tone-syllable, 
or when, from their position as prcepositive or postpositive, they 
might naturally mislead the beginner, as to the proper place of 
the tone of any word. For the rest, I take it for granted, that 
the student will here acquaint himself with the names and forms 
of the first and second class of disjunctives, (if he has not already 
done it) ; as this will cost him but a few minutes labour each day, 
for a small number of days ; and that he will afterwards go on, 
gradually to make himself acquainted with the whole number, in 
the like manner. In this way, the time spent on this object will 
never be distinctly recognized; and the student will find sufficient 
profit and satisfaction, to repay him amply for his labour. 



(1) ^n2rT ? the serpent. The effort of Dr. Clarke to prove 
that ^TJ? here means an ape or monkey, is not only opposed to 
the usus loquendi of the Hebrews, but the thing is in itself ut- 
terly improbable; for when or where has the ape been regarded 
as ' cunning above all the beasts of the field V The serpent, how- 
ever, is the known emblem of sagacity, in Egypt, and through the 
eastern world. 



But was this a literal serpent, or only a symbolical one? Did 
the writer attribute to a mere animal serpent all which the sequel 
discloses; or did he suppose the tempter to be an evil demon, 
whom he represents as in the shape of a serpent ? The latter, as 
I must believe; for (1) This accords with the commonly received 
traditions and language of the East. E. g. the Zend-Avesta of 



144 PART III. NOTES ON NO. XI. 

Zoroaster attributes the first seduction of men to evil, to Ahriman, 
the prince of evil genii, under the shape of a serpent ; Zend- 
Avesta, Vol. i, p. 25. ; iii, 84 seq. edit. Kleuker. The Jewish 
tradition is, that Sammael, the principal evil demon, first seduced 
Eve, and led her to sin; see Eisenmenger, Entdecktes Juden- 
thum, i, p. 822. (2) There is satisfactory evidence, that the New 
Testament writers believed in the same thing. E. g. Rev. xii, 9, 

the devil, or Satan, is called, b dpa-KUV b fxeycci;, b otpig b apypfioq — b irXoo- 

voov TTjv olxovpevqv o\yv and again, in Rev. xx, 2, the same appella- 
tions are repeated. See also 2 Cor. xi, 3. ; John viii, 44, where 
the Saviour expressly recognizes the temptation of our first pa- 
rents to sin, as the work of the devil ; so in 1 John iii, 8. See 
also Wisd. ii, 24, where is the same sentiment. (3) The nature 
of the case is sufficient to shew that the writer did not intend a 
mere literal serpent. Did the author really believe, that literal 
serpents could speak, and form plans for seducing to the commis- 
sion of moral evil ? If not, (and who will venture to charge him 
with such ignorance ?) then must we suppose, that, like the writer 
of the Apocalypse, he has represented the devil under the image 
or form of a serpent; see Rev. xii, 9. : xx, 2. ; comp. 2 Cor. xi, 3. 
That a part of the representation which follows, seems to be ap- 
plicable only to a literal serpent, is merely the consequence of the 
writer's carrying on, through the whole narration, a uniform con- 
sistency in the mode of representation, which he had adopted at 
the beginning. See on v. 15, below. 

On the question, Whether the actual form of a serpent presented 
itself to the ocular vision of Eve? most persons would perhaps 
decide readily in favour of the affirmative ; nor would I venture 
to gainsay the correctness of such a belief, for who can disprove 
it? Yet it is no more necessary to the essential verity of the 
narration and transaction in question, to suppose that there was 
an actual physical form presented to view, than it is in the case 
of our Saviour's temptation, as related by the Evangelists, to sup- 
pose that there was a physical appearance of Satan, and audible 
words (audible with the outward ear), addressed to him. If Jesus 
was * tempted in all points as we are,' a physical appearance of 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. XI. 145 

the devil can hardly be supposed to have been one of the means 
of temptation. 

On the supposition that our first parents were tempted by an 
evil spirit, (and if Christ and his Apostles are to be credited, this 
must have been the case,) then we may either suppose that the 
tempter assumed the actual form of a serpent, and accosted the 
mind or eye of Eve, by mounting the tree which bore the for- 
bidden fruit, and eating this fruit, and thus affording probable 
evidence that it might be eaten with impunity, and therefore 
tempting our first mother to follow his example ; or we may sup- 
pose the whole to be a figurative method of describing a real fact, 
viz. the fact that Eve was tempted by an evil spirit, and did yield 
to the temptation. Either of these may be adopted, salvajide et 
salva ecclesia ; for the Scriptures are full of examples, in which 
the like principles of exegesis are generally admitted. 

Of the two methods here proposed, the former is more easy 
and obvious, at first view ; the second is the most consonant with 
the nature of the tempter. The objection to the first is, that to 
suppose the devil in reality to have assumed the visible form of a 
serpent, would be attributing a miraculous power to him, (which 
none possess but God, or those whom God commissions for pur- 
poses of good) — a miraculous power, employed here for the most 
fatal of all purposes. The -econd method is relieved of this dif- 
ficulty. Nor would the boldly figurative costume of the whole, 
thus construed, be any more objection to the reality of the essen- 
tial facts in this case, than the acknowledged figurative costume 
of the 18th Psalm, is an objection to the reality of the facts on 
which the representation is grounded ; or than the plainly figura- 
tive manner of describing the Saviour's temptation, which the 
Evangelists have adopted, is an objection to the reality of his 
temptation. Is not God every where figuratively spoken of; and 
yet, is there not reality in the descriptions ? 

As to the conversation here, between the serpent and the 
woman, it may be viewed like that between the Saviour and the 
tempter, i. e. as mental, not with audible words addressed to the 
external ear. Does it need any proof, that the Scriptures are 

u 



146 PART III. NOTES ON NO. XI. 

full of the like examples? So in Greek, ffifu signifies both to 
think and to speak. Of the whole narration it may be said, that 
if we adopt the second mode of interpretation proposed above, 
we have only to suppose, (what is so obvious, and so consonant 
with the best laws of rhetoric,) that the writer has gone through 
his whole piece, in a manner accordant with the beginning of it. 
All that concerns the serpent is consistently stated, as though it 
had respect to a visible serpent. The meaning, however, as in a 
multitude of the like cases, is tropical. 



nVT, became, as Storr and others render it. But I prefer the 
common version. — EW"1?', cunning, sly, insidious, Part. adj. Dec. 
III. — ;2<9, 454. 1. a . — ^ *!*?, lit. even that, or verily that, i. e. 
f is it so that ? is it truly so that V etc. The sign of the interroga- 
tive, U 3 is omitted here, as often elsewhere, 557- — *^5*J, the ge- 
nuine sense of the Praeterite, has said, 503. a. — ^*?*?, of every, 
i. e. ' is any one tree prohibited?' ¥$ , collective, of the trees. 

(3) V5?rj, sing, here, of the tree.—^^, Methegh, 87- I e.; 
const, form of IJjq, Dec. VI.— ^tffl, Methegh, 87- c— fflJP, 
see *$S1Q in No. IX. v. 17.— ^n, Tav Raphe, 80.— "12, Dagh. 
lene, 79- 3.— -)&, Dagh. lene, 73. 3, as Athnahh precedes. — F«"l^ 3 
instead of JVFIH^ , 65. and 41.; ] paragogic, 211. a. 1. The tone 
also is shifted from the penult (100. g.) to the ultimate, by the 
pause-accent and the ending *fi 3 100. /. 

(5) 3H\ 527. a+-B$£fi mi Inf. with suff. used as Gerund, see 
in Par. XXII. 2 masc, plural, for the short vowel (Qamets Hha- 
teph), see 129. a. — VIjXp'j, Niph. Preet., made Fut. as to the 
sense by 1 prefixed, 209. and 503. e. Note 2. Here the words, 
which indicate a future sense, are ^5 •?« E*'^, a time yet to 
come.— 03^37, suff. dual of 0^37.— E/T^qj , Preet. as Fut., 209; 
Methegh, 87- d.—^l), plural Part, in const, state, 531.; Me- 
thegh, 87- c. 

Observe, that the tempter does not here say, simply, ' ye shall 
know good and evil ;' but, ' ye shall, like the Elohim, know good 
and evil ;' a different meaning I apprehend, from that of the first 
form of expression. Our first parents, from communing with God, 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. XII. 147 

must have known something of the superior knowledge and hap- 
piness of the Elohim ; and this might naturally become an object 
of desire. But to ' know good and evil/ in the sense explained 
in No. IX. v. 17, was of course no allurement to eat the forbidden 
fruit. Insidious, truly, was the suggestion here, Q^nbws^ (for 
DVfth©, 119. c. 1.) 

(6) NQM1, Vav conversive; *T!fl, apoc. Fut. Kal of Hfcn, 
283. y. letter b. — njbjj.Fl ; a pleasant thing, an object of desire, 
Dec. X.— ran?, Part. Niph. 225.; Fut. in -dus, 529. ->3 tyrf? , 
Inf. Hiph., retaining the n, 216. 3 — njWT), 3 fern. Fut. of n^S, 
with 1 conversive. — ^5^1, for final Pattahh, see 145. — Ifl^, 
Fut. of 10?, 3 fern, with 1 conversive.— ^BP , 408. 5. 

(7) nan^l, 3 fern. plur. Fut. Niph., with Vav.— Wljl, Kal 
Fut. of 3HJ, 244. a.; for Methegh, 87. c.—^^V, Dec. VIII., 
plur. of E"^, Hholem goes into Qibbuts when the syllable is 
shortened, 129. ?. b.; the Yodh in the ultimate is omitted in the 
writing, 65. — EH, they were, 469. — !""??, const, state of "2V , 
Dec. IX.— H^q, Dec. X.; for omission of the two Vavs (JTrvtirj), 
see 65. 

The sentiment plainly is, that after they had eaten the for- 
bidden fruit, they were filled with a sense of shame. It is not 
improbable, so far as can be gathered from the narration here, 
that they had been stimulated by the fruit to excessive sensual 
gratification; the consequence of which was, the sense of shame 
here attributed to them. 



No. XII. Gen. Ill, 8—19. 

(8) Vlp, either voice, or noise, viz. of approach, which they 
heard either with the outward ear, (and this is certainly a possi- 
ble case) ; or with the inward one, which seems as probable, and 
perhaps more so. The reality of the divine summons and sen- 
tence, does not depend on the particular manner in which God 
manifested himself, or communicated them. — "^H/IP, sing, num- 
ber, agreeing with 'TJ'T, or, if it be preferred, with D^nbw^ 437. 
2—122, for HH^, 152 - «• Note.— n^ 1 ?, during the breeze or 



148 PART III. NOTES ON NO. XII. 

wind, i. e. towards evening, when the wind rises in the warm ori- 
ental countries. — d*H, prob. of the same day in which they had 
transgressed. — WSHj"]^^ ]87- c.l.j also 493. b. Meaning; ' They 
withdrew from the expected approach of Jehova ;' or, ' they en- 
deavoured, through fear, to secrete themselves, because they were 
conscious of guilt/ 

(9) ^SJ*!?, compound of ^, which shortened becomes ^, (like 
Tseri final in nouns of Dec. V.); H3- is a verbal suffix with epen- 
thetic ] (see under 309. d.) ; ^ is varied like Dec. VIII. ; and 
for adverbs with verbal suffixes, see 405. ; the H2 i s tJ w it n n 
paragogic, 309. a. 2d pers. sing. masc. 

(10) n^j?, Methegh, 87- c— «7»MJ 3 1st pers. sing. Fut. Kal, 
from N'T, 244. b.; for final Qamets, see 277« c. The ultimate 
retains the tone here, notwithstanding the Vav prefixed, 101. b. 
Note 2. a. The Vav in this case has a Qamets, because S re- 
jects the Dagh. forte, 112.; Methegh after J, 87- e. — ^^V. , Dec. 
VIII.— ^W, 469— «5n»J, 5 as in Wj^MJ above; «^TJM, Fut. 
Niph. with Dagh. forte excluded from 71, 111.; the sense is re- 
flexive, like «5nil1 Hithp. in v. 8. above, 182. b. 3. comp. 187- c. 1. 

(11) T3n, Praet. Hiph. of TO, 252. seq— nqjjj, in pause, 144. 
— V^Tl, O is the interrogative, like the Latin ne ? — TH^, Piel. 
of TTYS 3 with suffix, 286. 1. — *FnpT> m9 adv. here, compounded of 
HvS 3 nothing, nothingness, { prep., and ^ paragogic. — ^9^? > 
t\ a khol, short O. 89. Inf. of ^2N. Lit. respecting the nothing of 
the eating of it, i. e. respecting the not eating of it, the omitting 
to eat of it. ;2« is the Gen. after ^Fypi?, which is constructed 
as a noun here, 520. — ^i?^> i n pause, 144. 

(12) nrbn^ f or ^O?, 254. c. Note. The n is paragogic, 
211. a. 2.—>!E®, prep. TfcV {. q. UV } but it is employed only 
with the suffix N. — Win, hi, 165. f; it is emphatic here, 467- — 
>b-nDn? T , 75._b5SJ, I, see on v. 10.; bjfa for bONH, 241. a. 1. 

(13)' nafrft, for nt^n 1 ?, 152. a. Note.— ntfrm, 75.— n^y , 

sec. pers. fern. — ^N^n, Hiph. of ^J 3 with sufF. ^-. 

(14) CPp 1 ?^, followed by Pesiq, 93. No. 20.— TTOJ, Part, pas- 
sive.— ^2^5, Q comparative. — *F?H4, suff. state of pn^ Dec. III. 
— TJ^n, 244. a.—^), const, of D^J.-JspJjn, suff.stateof D«n. 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. XII. 149 

(J5) ny«; for TV$£, 118.; followed by Pesiq, 93. No. 20.— 
iTttta, Fut. Kal of rvipF, 274. 2.— TO 8 ^., Fut. Kal of PpaJ, the 
Qamets under "* being dropped,, 133.; lit. bruise, crush thee, vStfn 
as to the head, Ace. of manner, 428. f. — ^2?^^ > strike, smite, 
Tav Daghesh'd, 79. 3.; with epenth. suffix, 309. d.\ Qamets 
dropped under Tav, 133. — ^7?, as to the heel, 428./. Dec. V. 



' But how can the tempter here be imagined to be an evil 
spirit ? What is going upon his belly ? Who are his seed ? And 
how is the seed of the woman to bruise his head ? Or he to strike 
the heel of her seed?' Questions which have been repeatedly 
asked, with a seeming assurance that no satisfactory answer can 
be given, by those who believe that the writer means, in this nar- 
ration, to describe the machinations of an evil spirit. 

To these questions, we may answer, (1) That the figurative 
language respecting the serpent, is merely carried through in con- 
sistency with itself ; (and this is in accordance with the demands 
made by the common rules of rhetoric, in respect to the meta- 
phorical language). (2) The seed of the serpent, or the children 
of the devil, was a common expression among the Jews, to desig- 
nate those who were like him in the temper of their minds ; John 
viii, 44.; 1 John iii, 8, 10.; Matt, xiii, 38.; Acts xiii, 10. In this 
case, the enmity between those who resemble the tempter in cha- 
racter, and those who aio of an opposite disposition, appears to be 
designated. But (3) If by the seed of the woman be here meant, 
' Him who was born of a woman, and made under the law' (Gal. 
iv, 4.), then does the whole passage acquire an emphatic meaning, 
which it is easy to understand. This is, ' That there should be 
enmity between the prince of darkness with all who resemble him, 
and the Messiah ; and perhaps, also, that the latter should oppose 
and crush the former, while all which the former could achieve, 
would amount only to what may be compared with the crushing 
of a serpent's head on one part, and receiving a wound from it in 
the heel, on the other. — But as the New Testament writers have 
no where expressly given this interpretation to the passage in 
question, and we are not directly authorized to make such an in- 



150 PART III. NOTES ON NO. XII. 

terpretation of it ; I must, on the whole, acquiesce in the general 
idea, here designated by the particular imagery that is employed. 
I would deduce from the whole, 7 the sentiment, that the serpent 
or evil spirit, instead of gaining a complete victory over our first 
parents, (as he designed to do,) should experience disappointment, 
and be himself crushed as it were with mortal wounds, (see Rom. 
xvi, 20.); while he should inflict only less deadly or fatal ones, 
on those whom he maligns. The manner in which this was to be 
accomplished, does not seem to be definitely pointed out by the 
words in question. 

As to the expressions, going upon his belly, and eating dust, 
what are these but a tropical manner of designating the humilia- 
tion of the tempter ? A humiliation yet to be more generally and 
completely manifested, than it ever has hitherto been. 



H^n, Inf. abs. sui generis, 287- 2.; 514. a.-— TO^B, with 
fern, suff., Dec. III. e. and 352. 1.— - ^U, Dec. I., as the Tseri is 
impure ; for the idiom, see 569. — ^1?^) , 244. a. — "TO^, with fern, 
suff*., E^N, vir, man, husband. — TWIJWn* rendered by the Lex- 
icons, desire, sexual passion or affection ; but how does this agree 
with the sequel ? The Sept. (Alexandrine) renders it avacrrpcxpri, 
conversio, viz. attitude of obedience, comp. Ps. cxxiii, 2. ; and Aben 
Ezra explains it by "HO^tf^, thy obedience ; which accords well 
with the context, and may be easily derived from ptfQ$, to run 
about after any thing, which is characteristic of a state of subjec- 
tion. As to the meaning, sexual desire, how is this possible in 
Gen. iv, 7* where is it said of Abel, (or of sin), that f his (its) de- 
sire, *in|jsitt?rj, should be unto Cain?'— ^W., 89. 

(17) f^y^V? > tone on the penult, but accent (Zarqa) on the ul- 
timate, because it is postpositive, 93. No. 13.; also 95. a. — ^lt^N, 
with tone on the penult, which changes the Sheva that would re- 
gularly be under the D (see in Dec. XIII. c.) into a Seghol, 148. 
a, (without a penult tone the word would be read, TJJ^S) ; but 
the accent, Segholta, is on the ultimate, because it is postpositive, 
93. No. 8. The student may see for himself, in the frequent in- 
stances of this nature, how uncertain a guide the accents would be, 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. XII. 151 

in finding the real tone of many words; comp. 95. — ^T' , ri >1 ?l!| ^W&, 
Qn regard to~| which, 428. 3, / gave thee commandment. Of the 
two accents (it is the same accent repeated) here, on the verb, 
the former marks the penult tone, 95. b. — ^Mv ; 119. c. 1. — 
*HP, see in No. XL v. 3-JTjn*}, fern, of T-fttJ, 323. in Par. 
No. III. — Tp.-'Q^S f compound of 3 prep., "H^Q5 prop, a noun, but 
used as a prep., 407. «•; ^T" sun °* with pause-accent (Zaqeph Ga- 
dhol, 93. No. 7-) on the penult, which turns the regular Sheva into 
Seghol, 148. a. — nab^wn f Fut. Kal 2 pers. sing., with H3- epenth. 
suffix, 309. d. The composite Sheva (instead of Sheva simple) 
under the Kaph, is not a very usual thing ; still it is nothing very 
uncommon, 51.—^., plur. const, of D^J'.— ?p».n, Milel, 100. j. 
remark in small type. 

(18) V*1p , the thorn, generic here. — ^T"H , Dec. I., the thistle, 
lit. a luxuriant weed, from ""HIJ , to grow luxuriantly ; generic 
here, like yip. — ^/ r in pause, for *]? out of pause, 408. col. y; 
T? is the Dat. here ' of the person or thing for which any thing 
is, or is done/ etc. — £} f^l, with tone on the ultimate, because of 
the Vav prefixed, 101. a.—TiyWil OfoV , the herb of the field, 
i. e. fruits and vegetables. No mention is here made of flesh ; 
and from this, most critics have supposed that the writer means to 
intimate, that the eating of flesh was not yet allowed to man. 

(19) f"l37jr 9 from H37T } Dec. X., because the Tseri penult is im- 
mutable. In Talmudic Hebrew, it is written n ?\*, which shews 
the true form of the word; whose root is 37^. — *P§W, 95. b. — ■ 
bOWi^] 9 with penult tone, because the word precedes a tone-sylla- 
ble, 101. dr-Wf**, Inf. with suff. 521.~n3^» J see in No. XI. 
v. 3.-— nnj^b i n pause, Pual Prater.— 2-ltPn , Fut. of verb nnttf. 



The curse here pronounced on man, involves the idea, that 
henceforth the earth was to become much less fruitful than be- 
fore, and also that it was to produce such shrubs and weeds, as 
would much retard his labour for sustenance, and render it more 
painful and difficult. ' The sweat of his brow,' by which his bread 
was to be procured, indicates strenuous labour and exertion. 

So far as all these things were painful, and occasioned incon- 



152 PART III. NOTES ON NO. XIII. 

venience and disappointment, I consider them as much a part of 
the penalty, (^riDifp STYV2 3 Gen.ii, 17-)' as ' tne returning to dust/ 
which is mentioned in the last part of v. 14. Why these should 
so often be separated from each other, as they have been by 
many critics and divines, it is difficult to see. They stand con- 
nected so obviously, that I cannot persuade myself, that they do 
not make one totality. If so, then i"HE or riJE does not mean 
merely the dissolution of our physical bodies, but every kind of 
pain, sorrow, and inconvenience. That such may be the mean- 
ing of the word here, the common usage of the Old and New 
Testament clearly shews. 

No. XIII. Gen. VI, 5—8. 

(5) HTp, see in No. II. v. 4— n^j, f em . of rn.—TOn, f em . 
Dec. X., first Qamets immutable, because it is a Daghesh'd long 
vowel, the root being ^"?, masc. noun, 3H, fem. ^^J instead of 
n?n, 32. and 58.— T$&, for TJVVi> 152 - a - Note.— "1$, 
with double accent, 95. 6. — rbt^rpQ, const, plur. of nnttfqtt, 
Dec. XI. — 13 7 , from 3v. — 3H pl t only evil ; 3H may be taken 
as a noun here, or as an adj. agreeing with "l?!!, the sense being 
the same in either case. — DVn"v3 5 lit. every day ; but the He- 
brews expressed the idea of semper, per omne vitce tempus, oXvjv 
tvjv yifxeoav, by the use of this phrase. In English we may say, 
continually , without intermission, always. 

(6) BOj}*1, Niph. Fut., with accent retracted and final Tseri 
shortened, 101. b. and 129. a.—TltV, Pluperf. 503. b.— T$&, as 
in v. 5. — HJ£5rj*3, Hith. Fut., the tone is not retracted here, be- 
cause the penult syllable is not simple, 101. b. in e. g. God is 
here spoken of in a manner altogether av6paitoica6Sq. But this is 
nothing strange ; for the same thing may be said of very many ex- 
pressions, in all parts of the Old Testament and of the New. 

(7) nr\m } Fut. Kal 1 pers. sing, of HTO; pS not m , be- 
cause of the Guttural «, comp. in 138— ^^3, 95. b.—^W), 
407. /• — d 7^j i- e - n l*i ?^> 406. from man, viz. ' beginning 
from man or with man, I will destroy nan^"f^ f unto beast, unto 
reptile,' etc., i. e. destruction shall extend from man unto beast, 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. XIV. 153 

etc. — Q?£!^n, -[ n p ause . — \npn2, Piel, with Dagh. Hhireq under 
the 3, 232. b.—nn^V. t with Yodh omitted after the n, 21 ]. b. 
and 63. 

No. XIV. Gen. VI, 13—22. 

(13) ri?., Dec. VII., const, state.— ^S 1 ?, suff. of 0^9, used as 
a prep. here. Meaning : ' I have determined that all flesh shall 
come to an end, be destroyed.' — V?.*$rf and OttH both in the Ace. 
governed by ™*?J?, 511. also 509. in e. g. — BSTpP.*?*?, by them, 
the original sense of N??? being lost, and the compound word be- 
coming a mere preposition. — ^'7, with Dagh. forte omitted in 
the first D, 73. Note 3. from nan ; it takes a verbal suffix, 410. 
Note, comp. 313.— DiTntpa, p ar t. Hiph. with suff. D-, used as a 
Fut. in -rus, 529. — ■H^, on or in; so this prep, clearly means in 
1 Kings ix, 25. ; Ps. Ixvii, 2 (comp. Ps. xxxi, 17-) ; 1 Sam. vii, 16. 
c On or in a place, where something is done or happens/ is a sense 
which Gesenius assigns to it in his Lexicon. If, however, VH*? 
be taken here for what it contains, viz. animals, vegetation, etc., 
then there will be no need of this peculiar sense of ^^, but 
JTrjtpa may be understood before it, and we may translate, / will 
destroy them, £and I will destroy] the earth. So the Seventy, 
Onkelos, Aben Ezra, and others ; but the Syriac Version has 

9 ^ b- 

f^?J ^^», on the earth. 

(14) r\WV : , Imp. Kal.— TQJ-1, const, of Dec. X., with penult 
vowel immutable, as it involves an implied Quiescent ; which ap- 
pears in the Chaldee form, KTYCPrij and also in the Arabic. — 
^V, const, plur. of Y¥ . — ""^, a anal; keyopevov, prob. (from its 
similarity to ">5^ > pitch, tar, and from the nature of the case 
here), turpentine-tree, pitch-tree ; perhaps a species of the fir, or 
of the cedar. — ^3j7, nidos, small cells, habitacula divisa, like the 
nestling places for doves, in which each of the animals was to be 
included. It is the Ace. of manner here, 428. 2. — JTJSS'J, Fut. 
sense 209.— nrfa, 408. HN Ace— V s ™, 52 with Daghesh'd Hhi- 
req, 58.-^3, for *1?3ra, 152. a. Note. 

(15) nrjM — rrn , and this ps] what thou shalt make it, i. e. and 
thus shalt thou make it.— tt?btt7, const, state, 457- a.— nhHE, 461. 



154 PART III. NOTES ON NO. XIV. 

— HSM, sing. 461. — ?nK before it njrjj shall be, is implied, 554. 

__n^« Q^&q,459.— nam, suff. of nrp._-na« D>tt;btt7,459. 

—WnaSp, guff, state of rift^p, Dec. X. 

(16) *"T!^, light, opening for the light, window; probably a 
generic noun here. Some translate it covering ; but without the 
support of the usas loquendi. — nh/Jlb^ for rQttrp, — nftS" /^, 
to, even to, unto, a cubit ; i. e. a cubit in dimension shalt thou 
make it. But the expression is very obscure, and this may not be 
the meaning. If it is not, however, I am ignorant of it. — H2 vO-H , 
Piel, Fut. 2d pers., from n ^, with epenth. suffix, 309. d. ; the 
suff. is fern., which indicates, of course, that ""1H2, to which it 
relates, is of the fern, or comm. gender, 321. — nb^lbb^, Dagh. 
omitted in b, 73. Note 3.; lit. in respect to height, or on, in, the 
upper part, viz. of the ark ; for the word is susceptible of either 
sense. Which was the one designed by the writer, it would be 
difficult indeed now to determine. Schultens and Rosenmueller 
suppose, that "in2£ means the deck or covering of the ark (like 

the Arabic As dorsum), and that direction is here given to ele- 
vate this deck one cubit in the middle part, in order that it might 
easily throw off the water which would fall upon it. But how 
this can be drawn from the expressions in our text, I am not 
aware. — HH^ , and a door ; which renders more probable the 
exegesis given to "1H2 above. — »TJ&, from *T?, Dec. VIII. c. All 
the forms of it with increase at the end, take short Hhireq under 
the Tsadhe, instead of the Pattahh in the ground-form ; see 376. 
2.—^&n } Fut. Kal from ^ , 274, 2.—&nr\F\, for D^W^ 
63. ; Dec. VIII., comp. 325. e- g. 2. ; lit. lower, i. e. the lower tier 
of apartments. — E*?^, form the same as in E^.H^, lit. second, i. e. 
the second or middle tier of apartments. — E^tpvtp, Dec. I. from 
iCPvt^ but not, like the others, doubling its last letter in the 
plural: comp. 325. e. g. 2.— T\mr\, rj- suff. 309. c; see also 313. 

(17) ^L 2 152. c. 1. ; for the expression of the pronoun here, 
see 527, a. — ^n ; see on v. 13. above. — ^^3, Hith. Part, in 
Par. XX.— HQUh, Inf. Piel, 522.— ^"V^ i n which, 478. a. 
— 2?J?V in pause, with regular medial 1 ; see in 271. b. 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. XV. 155 

(18) VPBtn, for VT^i?D, see 65.; Fut. sense, 209. being 
connected to preceding verbs or participles with a Fut. sense. — 
Tins:, in pause, 408. HN Ace— rjKp, Par. XX., Fut. sense, 209. 

(19) ^nrjl, <7 article, having Qamets here before H, contrary to 
the usual custom, see 152. a. 3. — ^^J, cause to go in, intro- 
duce.— n^qrf?, f or n'vqnb, 63. Inf. Hiph. of n;n, lit, for the 

preserving of life. — ^»"TJ f Methegh, 87. d. 

(20) VfWTJQ, £ prep.; n art. 152. a. 2.— Vmsb, -in. su ff. 
336. 6. — ^T/^, prep. bN in the form of a noun plural, 407. h. 
i. e. with a suffix attached to it, such as nouns plural receive, viz. 
*Ps . — TWIpJ? , see in v. 19. written plene here. 

(21) np_, Imp. of n.nb.—bpSJ., Methegh, 87, e.\ lit. wAzcfc 
should be eaten, 504. i.~ &$&&], Fut. sense, 209.— n;m, the 
same.— Cnb^ 408. ^.— nb^S^ Dat. after rpn to become, which 
is the usual construction. 

(22) ton, apoc. Fut. Kal, 283. y.— nby J3, 50 <£d he, a re- 
petition of the preceding assertion, which increases the intensity of 
it, (comp. 438. d.) ; it being as much as to say, c Noah did exactly 
according to all which God had commanded him.' 

No. XV. Gen. VII, 7—24. 

(7) ^^ , from, from before, compounded of Q^S and V$ . 

(8) XQ, of, out of, a partitive prep, signifying a part or portion 
of— rnin^n, art. 414. l^-ng% ^W with verbal suff. T12-, 
which suff., with the preceding *7WQ 478. makes the relative 
which, while T^ makes the negative verb, is not. — H^l^n, with 
Soph Pasuq after it, 93. No. 1. ; wrongly here, as the sentence 
plainly is not completed ; comp. 96. 

(10) nV^wb^ const, state of TIV^W } 457- a. ; lit. after a hep- 
tade of days.— >*& , * that; ^, const, of D"!^ . 

(11) rxWQ WW n3^?a, lit. in the year of six hundred, 461. ; 

natf, const, of ra^DecXL-n;^ i. e. naa^, 559.— \»rf?, *? 

as sign of the Gen., 421.6.; i. e. the years which had respect to 
the life of Noah, which were computed by Noah's age, comp. 421. 
Note.— tt^ns , for U^hnS •— ^H ? i. e . in November ; for be- 
fore the Israelites left Egypt, they began their year with October, 



156 PART III. NOTES ON NO. XV. 

called Tisri.— WnMQ?5, see in Par. XXVIII., B. No. 17. ; 
also see 458. — ^7f -; for W^flTlb ■ used as a Gen. here, see on 
\ s .n <, in v. 11. above. — HJH DVS^ oe £Ae wry same day, m s a 
for DVn^._n'^a, const, fern, form, plur. of ^», Dec. II. 
The plur. is as those of Dec. XL; see 327- 2.— riankj, plur. of 

Dec. x.— arw&a, 146. 

(12) 0^2"iW,459. 

(13) E ??j, self-same, lit. foyze, substance, body ; applied to 
things, not to persons, 475. 2. J. — n$btp, const, state, 457- a. 

(14) ^5?"^?, lit. of every wing, or, every winged creature, in 
apposition with "H-^ . — na^in"bs } into the ark. 

(15) nrotp a^tp, 438. 6.— 'la-n^, 478. a. 

(16) '1137a, *T3?a prep., behind, after, 506. 

(17) Wtpn, for ^t^l, 73. Note 3. Fut. Kal of Nb3._rnni, 
vat-ta-rom, 208. Note 2. Fut. Kal of EEH .— bl?£ , 407-/. 

(18) Tlbni, 208. Note 2. Fut. fern, from Tjb;. 

(19) "fa*? ^ , 456. a.— -IBa^ , Pual Fut. of nD3 ; 1 without 
Dagh. after it, 208. in e. g._ Dnnrj, instead of 0^, 142. a. 
_D^rrb3 nni-H n^, i. e . over all the earth. 

That the writer here means to express the idea of universality , 
is clear. The evidences of this fact are now multiplying, in con- 
sequence of the progress of geological science. A multitude of 
phenomena are found to exist, which can be accounted for in no 
way, so probably and so easily, as by the supposition of a deluge, 
such as is here declared to have existed. 

The student, who is desirous of pursuing the very interesting 
subject here introduced, may find notices of tradition among 
heathen nations respecting the flood, in Josephus, Antiqq. I. cap. 
4. edit. Colon.; Eusebius, Prsep. Evangelica. IX. 12.; Ovidii Me- 
tamorph. I. 270 seq. ; Grotius, de Veritate I. § 16. not.; Stilling- 
fleet, Origg. Sac. III. 14. § 8. ; also in Faber's Horse Mosaicee, 
and Bryant's Mythology. Those who wish to see the subject geo- 
logically treated, are referred to Buckland's Reliquiae Diluvianse, 
and the works there cited. 

(20) H^« n*nfc ttfttq , 460.— nby^Q , with tone on the 
penult, (the same in No. XIV. v. 16.) ; the H- therefore is local, 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. XV, 157 

100. i. and the ground-form is '??£ , an apoc. form of nJ^E ._- 
^551, see in v. 19. 

(21) 3715»1, Vav regular, 271. 6.-^2 for ^"4, H^n^n 
for HEn^n^ n*rn for njnn-l, 152. a. Note. For the use of 
the article here, see 412. b. ; and so for the words which follow. 

(22) VBM5 . . • "l#« a in wtoe wosfrzfc, 478.— D^n TVH nBtjft, 
lit. £Ae breath of the spirit of life, i. e. life by animated breathing. 
— v3Q, ft (]£), belonging to, consisting of, viz. all belonging to 
the animals living upon dry land. — nrnn^I (for n.^nnrj^ Dec. 
XI. The Qamets under n is immutable, as the form is a substi- 
tute for n ?VL 58. For Seghol under 2, see 142. a. — VIQ, 
with final Tseri, from rfitt, 270. a. 1. Par. XIII. 

(23) nZ2?l, (as the form is) belongs to apoc. Fut. Niph., for 
nrTB>l, from HTO • TVSR because of the Guttural U, 113. instead 
of ns?1 the regular apoc. form independently of the Guttural, 
285. 3.— D-pjn-bs-rttJ, Norn, case, 427. Note 2. For the omis- 
sion of Dag. after the art. H, in Ep^n, see 152. a. 5. — The better 
text of the above phrase, reads nE*1, without Dagh. forte in 12 , 
apoc. Fut. Kal; and adopting this, 'TJ'T, or v^an will be 
the Norn, implied, and 0p^n"73"nS w iH be in the Ace. go- 
verned by nX2*1. This is the preferable method of explaining 
the phrase. 

nJ3n2r"T37 CJMO, lit. /row man to beast, i. e. including both 
man and beast; and so of the rest which follow. — Wl, Fut. 
Niph.— .">^?1, penult tone, Fut. Niph. 101. b.~ rn$2 , for 
n^rinS 3 Beth with Dagh. lene, 79. 3. 

(24) "n«Z?, const, of T1W2 , Dec. XI., 461. 



The objection made against the possibility of a deluge which 
would cover the highest mountains, and be universal, is, that 
' there is not sufficient provision in the constitution of the atmo- 
sphere, or of the world, for such an occurrence ; as such a quan- 
tity of water could in no way be generated.' The answer is, that 
though natural causes may not account for such an occurrence, 
the God who made the world, could deluge it with the waters of 



158 PART III. NOTES ON NO. XVI. 

the ocean. Accordingly, in v. 1 1 . above, it is said, that e the 
fountains of the DIH^j 9 the great deep, the ocean, were opened 
P^l?^?],' as well as ' the windows of heaven ;' i. e. the ocean 
overflowed, while the rain descended in vast quantities. That 
the occurrence, after all, was of a miraculous nature, I should not 
wish to deny. And considering it in this point of view, it is easy 
to see, that the cause can never be shewn to be inadequate to pro- 
duce the effect. We may believe the truth of the narration, on 
the authority of Moses, and because the globe now exhibits striking 
proofs that an event like the one in question has happened. Who 
will shew us valid reasons for disbelieving the whole account, or 
for explaining it as a mere pv8o<; ? 

No. XVI. Gen. VIII, 1—20. 

(1) "1S5--> a P 0C - Fut - Hiphil. — nn t wind, the literal and pri- 
mary sense of the word.— ^D^ ? Fut. Kal of ^5$ . 

(2) flbjTO, No. XV. v. 11. 

(3) SQ^Jl, Fut. Kal of ^\W; for $, see 41.— VSD, from on, 
from off, 407. /.—^Eh "Sf^rj, Inf. abs., 514. c. ; continually 
receding, viz. into the UM1P] . — ^PH^ } 225.— H^ftE , Dagh. 
omitted in P, 73. Note. 3. ; nEj? const, of TV$%, Dec. IX.— nsp, 
in No. XV. v. 24. 

(4) n^l, 3 fern. apoc. Fut. of PP12 , 270. 3. Fut. apoc— 
WIHZ, for tt?inn^.— m, 458.— ^hb, Gen. 421. b.—^ri } 
const, plur. of "''I, used in the same sense as the sing, number, 
437. 3. — ^7"^ , Ararat, which still bears the same name. 

' The tradition that the ark of Noah lodged here, when the 
waters of the flood subsided, is confirmed/ (says Rosenmueller in 
his Alterth. i, 257-) , "by the most weighty testimony of antiquity, 
and is one of the oldest which has reached us.' The Persians in 
the neighbourhood call it Kuhi Nuach, mountain of Noah. It is 
one of the loftiest mountains in all the eastern world, rising from 
a plain in Armenia, not far from Erivan its capital, and elevating 
its summit above the region of snow to that of eternal ice, which 
glitters fearfully under the burning sun of summer. The magni- 
tude of the peak is constantly increasing, in consequence of the 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. XVI. 159 

continual accession of ice. No one has ever ascended it ; and its 
steepness, with the ice upon its summit, renders ascent impos- 
sible. 

The fact that the ark of Noah rested here, favours the con- 
clusion which was made above, that the original location of man 
was in the region of Armenia. 

(5) "torn Tflbn, Inf. abs., 514. c^Tfe??, on the tenth, 
viz. month.— -TTO, 551. Nate-.— "WE, Niph. of 'nwn. 

(6) Vi?£j after the close. — flvllj probably the same as ^H2 in 
No. XIV. v. 16.— Tib?, Pluperf. 503. b.~- n'ltth S'Vi; MS»1, and 
it went forth, going and returning, 514. c. i. e. it continued to go 
out and return, until etc.— ngb^ fern. Inf. of B?5J, 247. b. 

(8) n2VnTIS ? use of riS with the Ace. and article, 427. 
Note 1. For the article H, in this case, see 412. Note 2. — VlMO, 
lit. from with, 407- /.-^*™"f?, 522.-— ^H, n interrog.; Aft, 
Prset. Kalofbb,^. 

(9) J " f ^$ , 3 pers. fern., for Methegh, see 66. in e. g., also 87. 
c— m3H 5 Dec. III. — ^Bfcp, vdt-td-shobh, short 0. apoc. Fut. 
fern, of 2ftW } with tone retracted and final syllable shortened, 208. 
Note 2. — rjDiJ^j Fut. of nj7? 3 with Vav conversive, and with 
suff. n- , 309. c. For the form rtj9> , see in 312. 5. 

(10) 'tfjl, apoc. Fut. Hiph. of b-in, with tone retracted, and 
final vowel shortened, 208. Note 2.— TO^tf, 457- a.— D^TO, 
irreg. plur. of TI^., which has a Pattahh Daghesh'd, 58. and 
therefore immutable. The plur. D^nH. must therefore derive 
its form from nnN.-J^h, apoc. Fut. Hiph. of *]&, with tone 
retracted and vowel shortened, 208. Note 2.— nbd P\Q^ ? lit. arcd 
Ae added to send, i. e. he sent again, 533. 

(11) riST?, at the season, so f before a noun indicating time 
often signifies. — "7.V., const, of •"•??, Dec. IX. — T^, fresh, re- 
cent, verdant. — ^i7, see on v. 8. 

(12) bni»l, peculiar Fut. Niph. of ^n;, 247. e.l. ^a? nspj, 
533. 

(13) nnN (for riTO^, 107- 2.), fern, agreeing with n3ttf implied. 
The whole phrase is thus, In the first Eyear] and the six hundredth 
year. — mN!S"tt?U!?, 461. viz. of the life of Noah; comp. Gen. vii, 



160 PART III. NOTES ON NO. XVI. 

H.__ flHfcri (for flti^Vn 118.), on the first, i. e. month.— ^™^ , 
on the first, i. e. day, 551. Note. — "">9J1, Fut. apoc. Hiph. of n^D ; 
for Pattahh under D, see 270. c. 3. Fut. apoc. with Guttural. — 
nDpftTlfcV ns without the article expressed, seemingly contrary 
to 427- Note ]. a.; but not in reality so, for the article is here 
implied, see 413. 2. — ^"!^, see on Gen. i, 3. — N?*?, const, plur. 
used for singular, because it has no sing. form. 

(14) D"HJ93p nyritps , 460. 

(16) H3, Imp. of «?;, 244. 

(17) *fl37S for ^"Wra ; and so of the nouns that follow. — 
btfin, n as a pronoun, 412. Note 1.— HSin, Imp. Hiph. of HSR, 
247. g. 2. The reference (*) is to a Masoretic reading at the 
bottom of the page, viz. HS^n ? [ m e S^n ; instead of the usual 
N§in. — ^"Jlgl., made Fut. by 1 after an Imperative, 209. and 
then this Fut. has the sense of an Imperative, 201. Note; so also, 

ns^i 9 scrr] , which follow. 

(19) HlprtWfrfr, suff. plur. of nrT|^p, Dec. XI. g. 

(20) W3, apoc. Fut. of HD2, 283. 7 ._ HS^ Dec. VII. d.— 

b?»i, 283. y . g.—rfrv (rftVw 65.) plur. of nVw .— natsa, for 
remarra. 



That the whole narration respecting the deluge has been re- 
garded, and is still considered, by many critics, as a story which 
is partly [j.v6o<; and partly fact, need scarcely be said, after the 
details which have been exhibited above, respecting opinions re- 
lative to the creation of the world, and the original condition of 
man. That a partial inundation, probably an extensive one, over 
some one of the widely extended plains of the East, very anciently 
took place, is generally conceded. The extent which our author 
assigns to it, is regarded as a fictitious supplement to the story 
made by tradition, or as resulting from the mistaken views of the 
writer himself. That difficulties can be easily suggested, relative 
to an occurrence of this nature, no one will deny ; but that the 
event was impossible, or even improbable, (considering the evi- 
dence of it afforded by the present condition of our globe), cannot 
in any way be made out. 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. XVII. 161 

As to all the questions which can be raised, relative to the form 
of the ark, the possibility of immuring in it all the various kinds 
of animals which wafer would destroy, and of supporting them 
there for so long a time ; it is plain that they must be matters 
of speculation merely. In regard to the beasts going into the 
ark, it is evident, that the whole occurrence is regarded by our 
author as a miraculous one ; and admitting the truth of this, there 
is an adequate reason or cause for all the occurrences which took 
place. The vast quantities of relics, belonging to animals of the 
tropical regions, which are now found in high northern latitudes, 
shew that some mighty engine of destruction, like that of the 
deluge, must have some time been in operation ; and the removal 
to so great a distance, of animals that are indigenous to the south- 
ern climate, shews that the agent must have been a water-flood. 
We may, therefore, believe the account of Moses; at least we 
may do it, until something more probable, and better authen- 
ticated, shall be substituted for it. And this is not an event 
which is likely to happen. 

No. XVII. Gen. XI, 1—9. 

(1) ""f?^, lit. lip, but here signifying language ; as in Is. xix, 
18. ; xxxiii, 19. ; Zepli. iii, 9. ; Ps. lxxxi, 6. — ^Q^., (instead of 
nnS) ; the pause accent changes the Pattahh under n into Qa- 
mets, 144. and then this occasions the preceding Pattahh to be- 
come Seghol, 142. «.— n'H™, p l ur< f intf (THS), and used as 
plur. merely for the sake of agreement with a plur. noun which it 
qualifies. 

The sentiment here plainly is, that all the earth (or all the 
land) spoke one and the same language. The repetition of the 
idea, by adding D'Hny D >— }^ : * : T ? j s designed to express as much as 
to say, ' exactly the same language/ 438. d. and Note. Vitringa 
and others construe P^pS •"*?*?* as meaning 'unity of purpose or 
design;' but Perizonius, in his Origines Babylonicce, cap. ix., has 
sufficiently refuted all such interpretations. 

(2) D3H?», Inf. of SD3, with suff. p., see in Par. XXII.; 
when they removed, 521. a. — ETJfrP, either eastward, or from the 

Y 



162 PART |H, NOTES ON NO. XVII. 

east. The word may mean either ; and there is nothing in the 
context, which will certainly determine. Ararat in Armenia, 
where the ark lodged, lies north of the country of Babylon ; but 
as the original settlers of the eastern countries were wandering 
shepherds (nomads), it is impossible to say which way the great 
body of them had travelled, before they came to the plains of 
Shinar. — (137 j?2, Dec. XII., properly a valley, intervale ; but also, 
a low plain, as in Syriac and Arabic. — tttp*.!, with accent on 
the penult, 101. d. from rtt$J. 

(3) ^nSH"?^ E^N, lit. man to his companions, i. e. each to the 
other, or, to one another ; ^HJH f plur. suff. of 3H } for 'ff'Pjri f 
336. Note 4. 1. The Tseri of the ground-form is immutable. — 
Hlin 3 Imp. parag. of ^HJ , with accent (Yethibh) on the penult, 
but tone on the ultimate, 100. h, the accent being praepositive. 
The Imp. without parag. H- is ^H . It is used as a kind of inter- 
jection here, like age, agedum. — ^D^P?, 1 pers. plur. Fut. Kal of 
15^» wn:n n " paragogic, 205. — D^S?, fern, gender, with a fern, 
singular, »^?57 , 322. The two words together must be rendered, 
Let us make brick ; a literal translation in Latin would be, Lateri- 

ficemus lateres. — ns~]t^3, Fut. parag. as above. — nsntpb^ Dec. X., 
the Tseri being impure, lit. to a brand, or with a burning, i. e. 
f Let us burn them thoroughly.' — ?5^<j the asterisk refers to a 
note at the bottom, fS V^P> i. e. Qamets with Zaqeph, marking 
the effect of this accent in prolonging the Seghol in the word ]5*?j 
144. comp. J 49. — ""TCJ^SIj where the first accent, Munahh, stands 
in the place of a Methegh, 87- Note 3. The bitumen, which is 
designated by this word, is common in all the plain of the Eu- 
phrates, and floats on the surface of standing water, in small 
ponds, marshes, etc. It makes a mortar, which in time becomes 
harder than the brick itself, and seems to be imperishable. — 

-)»rfb 9 for "ift'nnb . 

(4) n.353, 1. plur. Fut. Kal.— ^b, Dagh. in Lamedh, 75. a.— 
nrafn, Beth Raphe, 80. Meaning: e Whose top shall be ex- 
ceedingly elevated.' — ^3b - nK737D ? the like forms as in ^bTFJD!) . 
■ — V 1 ®?* 1 pers. plur. Fut. Kal of V'*^ , lest we scatter ourselves, 
or be scattered, 181. Note 2. 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. XVII. 163 

(5) T}?.1 , from Tj; , 208. Note 2.— nVnb , 63— *?2 , with 
tone on the ultimate as a verb ; but ^J would be a prep, and a 
pronoun, signifying wzM. us. In such cases, the accents not un- 
frequently answer a good purpose. 

(6) cb^b, bb with suff. c-._cbnn ; p- suff. pronoun; bnn, 

Inf. Hi ph. of bbn ; regularly it would be b nn, but the final Tseri 
is shortened on account of the tone being thrown forward upon the 
suffix, 129. a, while the n retains Pattahh, contrary to analogy, 
which would make the form to be Dvnp[; see 133. a. As to the 
Daghesh in b, see 258. — TntP3?b cbnn nn, and this is their 
commencing to operate, or the commencing of their operation. — 
c n£ ^^V"', there shall not be cut off from them, i. e. one 
shall not hinder, 500. Note 2.— ">$*3 bb all which. Both phrases 
together mean : ' They will not be restrained as to all which/ etc. 
— »£, from nm, 266. 

(7) n T13j parag. Fut. 1 pers. plur. of "HJ. For the use of 
the plural number, see on Gen. i, 26, above. — H b^J, the like form 
from bb3^ 266. — '""lEtp, plainly meaning, language. — ^nSTl^ see 
on v. 3. above. 

(8) V?J1, apoc. Fut. Hiph. of V^ with retracted tone.— 

rtpb , 63. 

(9) bilS, for tone, see 141. Note 2. The word is probably a 
contraction from bsb^ confusion, or to confound. — E^jpEn, Hiph. 
Prset. of V^j with suff. &-; for the dropping of Tseri under the 
n, see 133. a. 



It has been a very general opinion in times past, that the ori- 
gin of diverse languages among men is to be found in this occur- 
rence. But facts seem strongly to militate against this, as a prin- 
cipal cause. From the earliest times, down to the present hour, 
hither Asia has almost all spoken a language which is radically 
the same. Wherever Abraham travelled, he understood the lan- 
guage of the people with whom he met. We may then with 
great probability suppose, that the confusion here mentioned was 
but temporary in its effects, continuing only until the purpose for 
which it was designed had been accomplished, viz. the scattering 



164 PART III. NOTES ON NO. XVII. 

abroad, so as to people different countries, those who intended to 
cluster in one great city. It was thus, that Providence made pro- 
vision for the peopling of extensive regions; and the design of 
counteracting this, appears to have been the criminality of the 
men who purposed to build Babel. Their pride and ambition 
also, in endeavouring to acquire fame P^) , were offensive in the 
sight of heaven. Still, as the punishment in this case is compa- 
ratively light, their sin does not seem to be treated as of a very 
heinous character. 

That the diversity of languages, among the whole race of man, 
can not be charged upon the building of Babel as its direct cause, 
would hardly seem to require proof. Still, as the occurrences 
on this occasion, gave rise to the separation of men from each 
other ; and this eventually became the indirect occasion of great 
diversity in language ; it is not without some reason, that this di- 
versity is attributed to the building of Babel. The diversity of 
language, as it now exists, is one of the most difficult problems for 
the philosopher or the divine to solve. No satisfactory theory, 
in all respects developing an adequate and probable cause, has yet, 
so far as I know, been proposed by any writer, who has speculated 
on the subject of language. 

The gift or faculty of speech, may be regarded as natural to 
man ; as much a part of his nature as intelligence and reason. 
The power of forming sounds, is, from its very nature, almost 
boundless in extent and variety. Hence the very different sounds 
which are adopted as the medium of communication between men. 
Accident, climate, even the physical power of enunciation, with 
the passions and affections, all have an influence on the sounds, 
which are employed as signs of ideas or of feelings. Of course, 
the modification of these is subjeet, as experience shews, to per- 
petual change. Let a colony go out from a savage tribe, and re- 
main entirely separate for several centuries, and the language of 
each will be scarcely intelligible to the other. Still, even exam- 
ples like these do not account for such radical differences as exist, 
for example, between the Chinese and the Shemitish languages; 
or between the latter and the Scythian or Tartar tongues. A 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. XVIII. 105 

part of this great problem, therefore, still remains without any 
satisfactory solution. 

No. XVIII. Gen. XII, 1—4. 

(1) rf?, Imp. of Tfbj, reg. rf?. , but before Maqqeph, Tjb ? 89— 
*l$il?.j lit. go for thyself, i.e. go; for the form of expression, see 
545. The idiom is frequent in the Shemitish languages. In a 
similar manner, we say in English, ' Away with yourself.' — TfSp.N^ 
thy country. — ^ftTV^SQ ,froin thy native place, put elliptically for 
n*nVlB VT)«, thy native land.—Y^ri'^, to the ZawdU-JN-JN, 
Jr. epenth. suffix, 309. d.; nkflM, Fut. Hiph. of HN^ which loses 
its final syllable and vowel, when it takes a suffix, 313. - 

(2) T^?B1, Methegh, 87. b.; for vowels, 226— v ^, 507- b. 
— ?t^T3nNl, 129. a— nb^l, with parag. PT-, 205— Tg^, 148. 
a. — T.rj,J, Imp. in form, Fut. Kal in sense, thou shalt be; for 
Methegh, 87- d. ; for the use of the Imp. as Future, 505. b. 2. 

(3) T?T?£?, lit. thy blessers, Part. Piel, suff. plural.— ■*F^ll», 
him who curseth thee, i. e. every one, or any one, who curseth 
thee, the sing, being used generically ; Part. Piel of 'd\l' t as to 
tone and penult vowel, 129. «— ikM, Fut. Kal of n'nfcj^b-ffin, 
Niph. Prset., 209. 

(4) ^rH, Piel, 214. 1. — 1? etc., lit. the son of five years and 
of seventy years ; the usual method in which the Hebrew de- 
scribes the age of any person. — inN?£j, Inf. fern, of ^?J, with 
suffix, nNS for n$S, 119. c . 3. also 521.— HT^ > f rom Haran, a 
town in Mesopotamia. 

There is a chronological difficulty respecting the departure of 
Abraham from Haran, to which it may be proper to advert. In 
Gen. xii, 26, it is said that Terah begat Abraham, at the age of 
70; in Gen. xii, 4, that Abraham left Haran, at the age of 75; 
which added together make the age of Terah then to be 145. 
But in Gen. xii, 32, Terah is said to have lived 205 years ; yet 
Stephen, Acts vii, 4, says, that ' Terah was dead when Abraham 
left Haran.' As the Hebrew text now stands, this emigration of 
Abraham happened 60 years before the death of Terah. 



166 PART III. NOTES ON NO. XVIII. 

The Samaritan Codex, however, reads 145, in Gen. xii, 32, 
which exactly agrees with the account of Stephen, and also of 
Philo Judaeus, who says, reXevT^crai/roq Se avrijj rov nargoi; sKeia-e .... 
peravicrtocTou, i. e. Abraham left Haran, when his father was dead ; 
De Migrat. Abram. p. 463. 

The difficulty, can be solved, only by supposing that the Sama- 
ritan Codex has preserved the correct reading, (which seems to 
be confirmed by the authority of Stephen and of Philo,) and that 
there is an error in the Hebrew of Gen. xii, 32. ; or, that Stephen 
merely adopts the mode of reckoning, in regard to the departure 
of Abraham from Haran, which was customary among the Jews 
of that day. See Kuinoel on Acts vii, 4. The effort of Jarchi and 
others to solve the difficulty, by alleging that Gen. xii, 32, refers 
only to the moral death of Terah, because he was an idolater, 
hardly deserves a serious notice. Was he not morally dead, as an 
idolater, long before the departure of Abraham ? 

In regard to the nature of the promise here made to Abraham, 
it is only general. In v. 2, there is an assurance of a numerous 
offspring, c I will make of thee a great nation ;' of much pros- 
perity, e I will bless thee ;' and of great renown among the na- 
tions, ' I will make thy name great, and thou shalt be a blessing/ 
i. e. a subject of praise or of blessing. In v. 3, is an assurance, 
that the friends of the posterity of Abraham shall be regarded 
with approbation, and their enemies with dislike, c I will bless 
them who bless thee, and curse him who curseth thee.' There is 
a further and general assurance, that in Abraham, (including of 
course his descendants), all nations should be blessed. I under- 
stand this as a prophetic intimation, in very general terms, re- 
specting the Messiah, "who was the son of David, the son of 
Abraham." In what respect have the descendants of Abraham 
been a blessing to all nations, or can they be, unless in the one 
which this interpretation supposes ? Comp. the sentiment of Paul, 
in Gal. iii, 14 — 18. Whether Abraham understood the nature or 
extent of this promise, when it was first made, may be questioned. 
But it cannot be shewn that he did not ; and perhaps not fully, 
that he did. Yet the fact, that he left his native country, in con- 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. XIX. 167 

sequence of this call from heaven, shews that he had a strong ex- 
pectation of future blessings of some kind or other. 

No. XIX. Gen. XV, 1—6. 

(1) n ™, accent Pesiq, preceded by Munahh, 93. No. 20— 
D v l-J'7'r j matters, affairs, transactions. — "^^ 469. — 1?.*J, Dec. 
VIII. h. with impure Qamets. — *tf~> , m pause 408. <. — nS"|(] ; 
403. d. 

(2) 'tfry, 437. 2.—lQrrm, 75. a.; )m, 89— ^3N1 : , )f or , 
since. — "H/PH, 527- a. — P*?^?, a ava% "ke^o^evov, prob. it means 

possession, and is derived from the obsolete ptt? E> == Cjlw^ , to pos- 
sess. £o« q/* possession means, possessor, 444. 6?. ; and here, pos- 
sessor of my house, in other words, wiy AezV. — N^n, is ^/iis, 469. — 
p!P9 , T=pSp9T?, 1 Chron. xviii, 5, 6.; see 107- 1. c. The pecu- 
liar word PV?Q, in the first clause, appears evidently to have been 
selected, in order to make a paranomasia with pttfl51! in the latter 
clause. This last word here means, a Damascener, one belonging 
to Damascus. 

(3) nrin^ with n parag., 254. c. Note.— t»nS\ Fut. in -rus, 
529. 

(4) *T^% 244. 0.; for Qamets, 130. a.— n#S, Ae wAo.— 
T», suff. plur. of CPytt, with Tseri impure.— ^g^l , 148. a. 

(5) n^nn, with art. and n local— &$n, Imp. Hiph. of IMfl, 
89— n^b^n, with n local, tone on penult, 100. ».— b^Vl, 
Hoph. of bs;, 186— *T3J% 148. a. 

(6) imn), for r»«n 3 63— D;n>n ? see Part II. No. X— 

?B#TO, n- suff. 309. c— Sh, 75. a. 



For a commentary on this passage, see Rom. iv, throughout. 
In the second promise here made to Abraham, only a numerous 
offspring is included. But was this mere natural offspring; or 
were they ' children of faith,' who were promised ? — See the 
opinion of Paul on this subject, Rom. iv, 11 seq. ; particularly 
Gal. iii, 7- 9. 14—18. 29.; Rom. ix, 6—8.; Gal. iv, 28, 29. 



168 PART III. NOTES ON NOS. XIX. XX. 

Whether Abraham had a clear apprehension of the spiritual mean- 
ing of the promise in question, must have depended on his state 
of knowledge, and on his state of mind at the time when the pro- 
mise was made ; and with neither of these are we definitely ac- 
quainted. That he, however, either in regard to the promise 
made here, or on some other occasion, was inspired with a cer- 
tain expectation of a future Messiah, appears from John viii, 
56. comp. Luke x, 24. In regard to f?ntj in v. 5, see Gal. iii, 
16. 

No. XX. Gen. XVII, 1—8. 

(1) njy" U>Vtfifirm, see in No. XVIII. v. 4. and 459.— VWn 
D'flttJ, 457.— «™, apoc. Fut. Niph. of TlXn, f u ll form n$p, 
58. and 285. 3. ; lit. shewed himself, 182. b. 3.—^, Almighty ; 
perhaps pluralis maj est aliens, 325. b, b. and 437- 2. — "*3Er? *nWin, 
in other places f"IM with is used after the verb "H v?n j "in , when em- 
ployed in the same sense as here ; comp, Gen. v, 22. ; 1 Sam. xxv, 
15. ; Ps. xxxv, 14. It also has ^0^, in the same sense, Deut. 
viii, 19. ; xi, 28. ; xiii, 4. ; 1 Kings xiv, 8. et al. All these mean, 
' To live on friendly terms with God ; as it were to converse 
familiarly with him ; Deum ceu ducem sectari ; to act agreeably 
to his precepts.' So the sequel explains it ; O^n iT-H J , esto in~ 
teger, be upright, comp. Gen. vi, 9, E^-H denotes freedom from 
blemish, from any charge of moral corruption or wickedness. For 
Imp. Tin^j see 87- d. as to the Methegh; and for .1, see 152. 
c.6. 

(2) H3^W 3 Vav simply conjunction, the Fut. form here re- 
taining the Fut. sense; n?-^, Fut. 1 pers. of K3J 3 with parag. 
H-, 205— ^.v^, 148. ar-rteQ, 456. a. 

(3) b3?^fromb23. 

(4) ^ as to me, Norn. abs. 415.— n".TT), 209. and 503. c. 
Note 2— 2Kb, 507. b.— ttffi fttaq, comp. Gal. iii, 7—9. 14—18. 
29. ; iv, 29. ; Rom. ix, 6—8. ; Rom. iv. 

(5) N^ijo 500. a.— E~R*i, ^ pater and Q*"} excelsus, i. e. ex- 
alted father, 317.— ^T?^ eitli er compounded of ?& father, D"J 
exalted (omitting the last letter), and V^X] multitude (omitting 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. XX. 169 

the ending yu) 3 and so meaning, exalted father of a multitude ; 

or else of 2^, and Enn, of the same meaning as the Arabic " ^ 

great multitude. The first method of composition agrees best with 
the explanation subjoined by the writer. 

(6) vyTSrn, 209. Hiph. of me.— Dtfft, 507. b. 

(7) 'nbfpqi, 65.-^1^^, 148. a.— *\T)X> comp ? Gal. iii, 16— 

cnh'-T 1 ?, 65— nvrf^ 87. rf. and 152. c. 6— et^n*?, 507. b. 

(8) T^™, 209— TSP, suff. of "WIO, Dec. III., 63. and 41. 

— "|372^ \n k S, i n apposition with the preceding V"7!^. — ^Wjl, 
209— bvibHb/507. &. 



In regard to the promises here made, it is evident that they are 
of a temporal as well as of a spiritual nature. That they com- 
prehend spiritual blessings, may be seen by consulting the pas- 
sages referred to in the remarks subjoined to No. XIX. v. 6. 
That temporal blessings are also included, must be acknowledged 
by every one who attentively considers v. 8. above. The greatest 
difficulty arises from Gal. iii, 16. The word 3HT, in v. 7, above, 
seems to mean, e the whole posterity of Abraham.' That this, 
however, is the necessary meaning of it, cannot be shewn. Cer- 
tainly Paul did not consider it so, when he wrote Rom. ix, 6 — 8. 
No line of distinction -is drawn in the promises to Abraham, be- 
tween spiritual and temporal blessings. We are left to gather 
this, from the nature of the case, and from the reasonings of Paul. 
There is nothing at all incongruous in the supposition, that bless- 
ings of both kinds were promised. Nay, it is, of course, what one 
would naturally expect; and it is what is found in many other 
parts of the Scriptures. And that Abraham himself apprehended 
the import of these promises to be spiritual in part, seems plain 
from the assurance of the Saviour, in John viii, 56. Comp. also, 
Heb. xi, 8—10, 13—16. 



170 PART III. NOTES ON NO. XXI. 



No. XXI. Gen. XXII, 1—19. 

" (1) ^h Methegh 87- ^.-D^n, see on No. XIX. v. 1.— 
DTpfcjjn, the use of the article in this way, before this noun, is 
not common, but still it is allowed by the laws of the language, 
411. — i"N??, tried j put to trial. To tempt, in the sense of solicit- 
ing to sin, cannot be predicated of God ; see James i, 13, 14. — 
*l$n, 410. Note. 

(2) *m, Dec. VII. irreg— }2, const. ??, sufF. ?2._ Tprp.; 
suff. of Dec. Ill— TV^ 1 ?, see on No. XVIII. v. l.~nnbn, 
Moriah, the hill at Jerusalem, on which the temple was after- 
wards built. —anbsrn, Hiph. imp. of ribv, with suff., 313— 
nb^^ 63. — 11?** , const, form, which shews that the true ground- 
form is "THS^inW^ 58. but it is written "T™ by the rule in 
142. a.—n^Tin, 142. fl.--lOS, 241. a. 1. 

(3) a3$n, 206. Note 1.— "ljjaa, for ^71^ 3 152. a. 1. and 
Note. — tt?nr3*J., for the first Methegh, see 87- e. ; for the second, 
87. a.— ^E5^, Dagh. omitted, 208. in e. g. ; final Pattahh, 236— 
^5? , const, plur. of YT, Dec. VII. — OJJJlj vay-ya-qom, short 0. 
270. 3 Fut. apoc. and 208. Note 2— ?fe 208. Note 2.— -i»N, 
/mc? named to him ; or, /mo? commanded him. The latter sense is 
the predominant one in the Arabic ; in Hebrew, it is principally 
limited to the later books. — E^rp^n, the student will note the 
repetition of the article before the name of God. 

(4) Nt»*^, then lifted up, 1 then.—^1, see on Gen. i, 4— 
phnn ? 63. 

(5) *Q&, Imp. of at??;.— .Dgb, 545— n^, 244. a.—rtz-iy, 
lit. unto there, i. e. thither, yonder. — njqntp^ Fut. Hith. 1st 

plur. of n™, 187. h. 1— nn-Wj, 205. 

(6) D^jl, apoc. Fut. Kal of n>b, 274. 2—^, see v. 2. above. 
— ^H!, in form as a noun of Dec. VI. with suff. plur., for ^"JH!, 
as it is sometimes written ; used adverbially, 403. b. ; lit. the 
union of them, or they together ; comp. 428. 2. 

(7) VQN, Par. XXIV. No. II— ^H, with epenth. suffix, 
410. Note.— Htp, Dec. IX., const, rib. 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. XXI. 171 

(8) ftTtijft;, 75. a.; for Methegh, 87- h. comp. I. 

(9) Dhpan" Ace. 428. a.— ">»*}, in v. 4. above. —B^bkjfl , 
again with the article. — J5?l, 283. y. — ofc^, see in v. 6. above. 

— byaa, 407./.— 0^^,'for Q^rj 1 ?. 

(10) t5ntpb ? 522. 

(11) TTN^a, const, of Dec. II. 

(12) bWrbM, 101. c. and in e. g. nb._N^, const, of K^J, 
Part, form of Wn>, 202. Note 1. and 531. — ^b^ \f or . 

(13) M-J»l, see on Gen. i, 4.— b*H, Dec. VI.— inM, foAiwd, 
adv. here. — WJfc??, Niph. Part. — ^5?; Dec. I-> Qamets being im- 
pure. — VyifE? , suff. dual of 1TJIJ . — nnw a ire ^e room o/ wrejs. 

(14) D#, 87- ro.— ^$3 for "»#J IP&^ropterea, on this ac- 
count, therefore, comp. 559. — ^^.,it is said, 500. a. — O^n^ 
now, at present, still. — f"ffc£3.1, Fut. Niph. Meaning: e It is said, 
even to the present time. In the mount of the Lord shall it be pro- 
vided.' That is, when straits and dangers occur, men are wont to 
say, f In the mount of the Lord it shall be provided;' i. e. God 
will take care or provide, as he did with respect to Abraham, in an- 
cient days, when about to slay his son in the mount of the Lord. 

(15) fT^fl?, a second time, used adverbially. 

(16) D«? 3 const, form of Part. EHN3, from OK3, 41. and 531.; 
Lit. that which is spoken of Jehova, i. e. declaration of Jehova, 
or, Jehova saith. — "^^j VS1, because that. 

(17) fpiaM ?n?, 514. «.— na-jM nzyi, ibid.— n?p, up, 

shore.— Nhy\, 244. b. Note 1. 

(18) Mlftrjrr!, 187- e. 3.— tffc, pZerae, from ^. — n|73?, aS a 
prep. 407. «•— ^N, 507. «• 

(19) nt^l, from 'mtf ._ mojjjl, 41— 1,», Dec. VI. z.— S#!l 
from^;. 

Compare with this account of Abraham, what is said of him in 
respect to the transaction here described, in Rom. iv, 16 — 22. ; 
Heb. xi, 17 — 19. ; James ii, 20 — 23. It is, indeed, a most signal 
example of the strength of Abraham's faith ; one which is seldom 
equalled, I believe, under the Christain dispensation. In respect 
to the views of Eichhorn and others, who maintain that Abraham 



172 PART III. NOTES ON NOS. XXI. XXII. 

dreamed of his obligation to offer up his son, and superstitiously 
proceeded to the performance of this supposed duty; it is suf- 
ficient to ask, What is there in the character of Abraham,, which 
will justify taking such a liberty with it, as to maintain that he 
was not raised above the superstitions of the merest savages ; or 
who can shew, that he understood nothing of the nature of dreams? 
And then, whence the approbation of God, of Christ, and of the 
holy Apostles, bestowed on a horrible act of mere superstition ? 
For horrible it was, if superstition only dictated it. This is a 
nodus, to solve which, something more than witty conjectures and 
brilliant declamation is needed. 



No. XXII. Gen. XXXV, 9—15. 

(9) ^Tffl 3 see on No. XX. v. 1. — T)37, again, a second time ; 
for the first appearance, see Gen. xxviii, 12 seq. — 1^5, Inf. with 
prep. ^ , and suff. "\ 

(10) T137 , still, any longer. — 2p?j£ , i. e. supplanter. But 
Moses himself, and other writers of the Old Testament, every 
where make frequent use of the appellation Jacob, after this. 
What then can be the meaning of the declaration before us ? The 
Jewish commentators are not agreed on this point. Aben Ezra 
and others say, ' Jacob was not any longer to be the exclusive 
name; Israel also was to be employed/ But Jarchi, (nearer to 
the true meaning, as it seems to me,) i You shall no more be called 
Jacob in the original sense of that word (supplanter), but Israel, 
which is a name of nobler import.' — ^TJfp}, from n^Jtp to contend 
or struggle with, and vW God. For the explanation of the name, 
see Gen. xxxii, 24 seq. Another explanation is equally consistent 
with etymology, viz. from ^"J^ 7 , in its second sense, to reign, to 
be a prince, and vN God. The latter seems to be adopted, in 
Gen. xxxii, 28. The whole, as repeated here, appears to be a 
confirmation of what is said in Gen. xxxii, 28. etc. — *Jfe*P> 148. a. 

(11) ^V? , see on Gen. xvii, 1. — HHS?, Imp., be fruitful, i. e. 
thou shalt be fruitful, etc. 505. — D^3 ^Hfp ^12, a nation, yea, 
an assemblage of nations, i. e. the twelve tribes, each of which 



PART III. NOTES ON NOS. XXII. XXIII. 173 

might, in the language of the day, be called "na — ;T^P , suff. ;Tr: 
for *P-, 309. d. and 407- Note. 

(12) rinm, na- S uff. 309. d. ; Fut. of ]OD._Tjnqs ? 407. b. 

— ^¥!! 3 283. 7. — ^^?P, lit. from above, i. e. God, or the symbol 
of the divine presence, ascended above him, or rose upwards to- 
wards heaven—"^, i. e. ">#$*, 559. in ivhich.—^., 214. 1. 

(14) 2£n, Fut. Hiph. of 2S3, 206. Note 1.— - "N?*3 as above— 
n^D, const, state, as Dec. XI. /.—]?«, 144.-^15^., Fut. Hiph. 
of "?3, 206. Note 1— \&*1, 251. 

(15) Cttf -1#N, w / ie re, 478. 6.— bNTIva, Aowse o/ Gotf, 

for Methegh, 87- m. 

No. XXIII. Ex. II, 1—15. 

(2) -in™, 283. y.—l^m, 244. «. 247. c — • WJJ-fi, 283. y. b. 
from nsn._s.in, 469— P^rtJI nribtf, 457. 

(3) Sa^n, Inf. Hiph., with Dagh. acuting in 2, 77- c. It 
has a penult tone, although the accent (Segholta) is on the ulti- 
mate, 95. a. — n|7ri1 1 procured, obtained, or caused to be fetched. 
— n^n, const, of Dec. I., the Tseri being immutable, an ark, a 
little boat or hollow vessel. — n*p3rjni, with fern. pron. suffix. — 

n»rm, f or iKnr\^—n^ } 144.' Dec. XIII. fem— dtpxry, 274. 

2 — n'«^n, 152. a. 5. 

(4) ^Bnpl, Fut. Hithp., form sm generis, for aSVjni, the 
Tseri under the first JH stands instead of the mixed syllable HXH • 
the second D assumes the pointing of the Yodh which follows 
(comp. 118.), and the Yodh then drops out, 118. Note 3. For 
Pattahh in the final syllable, see 218. 1.; lit. stationed herself, 
placed herself, 187- c. 1. — VinfcJ, from T"1M ? anomalous, as Dec. 
III. in regard to the penult vowel. — n3rj? 3 an unusual fem. Inf. 

form, for ra^nbsrnn, 75. a. 

(5) Ttf!!, from TV.^-Tftv?}, 522— iNVT, as in ver. 3— 
ii^n, for riM^H, 63— WTO£, a maiden of hers, Dec. X— 
nnjjrn, n- it, viz. the ark, 312. 5. 

(6) njln, Part. n^.—^V^, belonging to the children, one 
of the children, from **(£.. 



174 PART III. NOTES ON NO. XXIII. 

(7) TftWTI, H interrog., 152. «?. 3.— V^ITi, 209. accent on 
the penult, 101. a. 2. — *W\ t fern. Dativus commodi, as the gram- 
marians say.-— nj?a ,, ^ J Part. fern. Hiph., from P5!}, 248. and Note, 
one that suckles, gives suck, a nurse. — H^^n, 319. b. — P? S J3, 
Hiph. Fut. of P?; , 63. and 250.—^ Dat. commodi. 

(8) > ^?/., 148. a. out of pause ^< s fern, of Imp. ^7., from 

(9) ^TSTT, fern, of Imp. Hiph., from M?J, which in this case 
is treated as ^ Class II., 248 seq., cause to go, conduct away. — 
^"fp.^D, Imp. fern, with the suff. ^-, the fern, ending of the 
verb (\) falling away in order to receive the suffix ; comp. 313. 
— *2, Dat. commodi.— TD?p, with suff. fern.— ^np^l, p"W 
comes from p12 = p3^ ; the Qamets under n being dropped on 
account of the suffix, 133. 

(10) *in«3J^, 133.— )^h, 507. b.— n^», J»f om , if of Hebrew 
etymology, means extracter, deliverer, which seems to characterise 
Pharaoh's daughter, rather than the child. The giving of names 
in this way, was very common in the East. If the word is from 
the Egyptian Mo, water; and Ousche, to save; then it means, 
one saved from the water. The former etymology agrees best 
with the context ; the latter with the persons who are actors.— 
Ifcfctal, for she said.—^ywi?, j. e . VTB7D, 211. b. and 63. ; 
for the dropping of Qamets under ft, see 133. ; for suff. in, 309. 
a. comp. 307. a. 

(11) Vns, for VTVA, 142. a. from nM, irreg. plur. D^nM, with 
Pattahh impure. Two forms are mixed throughout, in this word ; 
the one with Qamets pure, as nM, ^nS } the other a Daghesh'd 
form, as Q^M, YTjjSj, (but also T!^, D^n^—D/ib:^ Dec. 
XII., from nb^D ; for 2, see 506. also 507- a.— *HTO , 316. c. 
Note 1— njtt, Part. Hiph. of rD3, p ar . XIX. Hiph.— ^37, 
see T^E above. — YTWB, ft (]ft), q/, belonging to, one of. 

(12) ]??1, 283. 7.— T^, as a const, state of 1?« , nothing of, 
none of, no. — "?J*lj apoc. Fut. Hiph. of ^??, see in Par. XIX. — ■ 

Vina , for Vinna . 

(13) 0^53?, 325. e. g. 2.— n^a , Part. Niph. of n^3 ; for 
meaning, see 182. b. 6. — n^b (Milel) ; before Gutturals, nftb 



PART III. NOTES ON NOS. XXIII. XXIV. 175 

(Milra) is the more usual form; both have the same meaning. — 

n$n, Fut. Hiph. of nia.—STJp, 148. b. 

(14) ^W, Prater Kal of WW, with suffix.— E?^?, 507- b.— 
'-iW 3 prince, lit. for a man, a prince, i. e. a princely man, or sim- 
ply,, a prince. — ^ynnyijT » ^at thou wilt kill me ; H interrog. ; 
*? before the Inf.; ^.H, Inf.* with surf., 306. the verbal suff. 
here denoting the object of the verb, i. e. the killing of me. — njnN 
Ts?^j dost thou say? In English, the force of the interrog. H 
falls on these words ; in Hebrew it is prefixed to the whole phrase. 
— ""^^H , the matter, the affair, viz. of killing the Egyptian. — 
]J*]fc? , a country in Arabia Petrsea, lying south-east of Palestine. 

The student will find it useful to read the account of Moses 
in Josephus, where he will see what Jewish tradition has handed 
down concerning him ; or at least, what the fancy of the writer 
himself has added. 

No. XXIV. Ex. Ill, 1—6. 

(1) flfcrn*}, Ace, 527. and 531.; flte for ?'«?, 118.— feflh, 

Dec. VII. — *">nN, the hinder part, i. e. the remote part. — "iSlSin^ 
of the pasture-ground, of the uncultivated country, desert, which 
is the pasture-ground of the nomads of Arabia; Ace. 428. a. — 
H^pn^ with H- local, 100. i. Horeb is a peak of the Sinai 
ridge ; some say it is east, and some Avest, of the proper Sinai. 
The two mountains are not far distant. — "^"JM, shewed himself, 
182. b. 3. 

(2) 'TJ'T ^T*2^?, Jehova as manifesting himself to Moses, Je- 
hova as exhibited by symbol; see Ex. iv, 11.; iii, 4. 6. 15, 16.; 
iv, 5.; and comp. with Acts vii, 30 — 32, — T12G}T} 9 bush, thorn- 
hush.—hS!*, for b2^, 215. 2. 

(3) rnDK, 41. and 205. 

(5) btt?,'l mp . of bttfc.— ttftp-nO'lM, 440. a^-WBT, 469. 

(6) ~U3Q11, Milra, 101. b. in e. g.—tfl^TO, ft 507. c; tt^n, 
Inf. Hiph. of ^^3. — 7H,, z^on, fo, towards. 

* By mistake this form is omitted in the Inf. forms of Par. XXII. 



176 PART III. NOTES ON NO. XXV. 

No. XXV. Ex. V% 2—11. 

(2) "10*5*1 .... "^Tl, the one with tone retracted, the other 
not, 101. b. e. g. The verb "l^H designates the idea,, that some 
communication was made ; the verb "lEN has reference to the 
words of that communication, and is followed by a recital of them. 
So often, elsewhere. 



Whether words audible to the outward ear, were addressed to 
Moses on this occasion, and often at other times, is not an im- 
portant inquiry ; neither can we answer it with any absolute cer- 
tainty. Jehova can speak as well to the soul, as to the outward 
ear ; and there is no need of an audible sound, in order that he 
may cause the soul to listen. On the other hand, he can speak 
audibly too ; for he certainly is not limited in his method of com- 
munication. That he did speak so, at mount Sinai, seems to be 
signified in Ex. xix, compared with Heb. xii, 19. But that this was 
usually the method of communication, when he spake to Moses 
and other prophets, is by no means certain. It is altogether un- 
necessary to suppose it. Communications made directly to the 
soul by him, without the use of the common external means which 
men employ in their communications with each other, are surely 
as real, and as authoritative, as any that could be made in a dif- 
ferent way. 



(3) HH8}, Niph. of nsn, 182. b. 3.— ^ hm 9 i. e . by the 
name of God Almighty, ^V? '& D ^^, as the next words that 
follow shew; lit. in El Shaddai, i. e. as an almighty God. See 
in Gen. xvii, 1. ; xxviii, 3.; xxxv, 11.; xliii, 14.; xlviii, 3.; xlix, 
25. 

(4) ^Etp, i. e. ^tp^, and by my name, 22 being implied from 
the preceding '&$, as there c ^ was impliedly taken from this 
place ; comp. 562. for the principle there stated applies, for sub- 
stance, to prose as well as poetry, in a great variety of ways. — 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. XXV. 177 

\n:pTlD sb, / did not make myself known, 182. 6. 3. Niphal of 
3HJ. But in what sense can this be said? That the name Jehova 
was often employed in communications to the patriarchs, is plain ■ 
see, for one example only, Gen. xv, 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 18. The mean- 
ing then must be, that as performing what the name Jehova sig- 
nifies, he had not revealed himself to the fathers of the Jewish 
nation. As God omnipotent, he had declared and shewn himself; 
e. g. by causing the birth of Isaac, of Joseph, and Benjamin, and 
by signal deliverances afforded to the patriarchs. But as a God of 
constancy and immutability, (which the name '~ f 5'T implies, for it 
is o av, 6 \v, kou 6 ipx r '^vot;,) in fulfilling his promises respecting 
the land of Canaan, he had not hitherto shewn himself to the 
patriarchs, inasmuch as the possession of the promised land had 
been long deferred. The assertion therefore in v. 2. '"" T J'T ^., 
implies, that now he was about to exhibit himself, as fulfilling all 
his promises made in former times. — V]tt3pn 3 63. — VyHj^, see in 
Gen. xvii, 1 seq. ; xxvi, 2 seq. ; xxxv, 9 seq. — ^D^, 4 prep. 152. 
b. 2.; -Tin i s peculiar, for first we have OJIJ, Inf. of 10?, 252. 
b. and 254. c. Note ; then, nJ-J for HM, 107- 2.-1^ , 144.— 
Oijrap?, plur. suff. of T«9, 437. 3.—nk . . . -Hjte, 478. a. 

(5) >3*{, 467.— Cn^ ■ • • n $$, whom, 478. a.—Z^nyn, Part. 
Hiph., enslaved, caused to perform the work of slaves. 

(6) nb^O } Dec. XII., the burdensome task.— ^SHI , Hiph. 
of bsa.— nmhyp„ 9 from their state of slavery.— ■<"nt^ Part, 
pass. fern, of ntJ3 ; see in Par. XXI. nb._ C^S^n-% from &m, 
and with \_greaf\ judgments, i. e. distinguished chastisement or 
evil to be inflicted on the Egyptians. 

(8) ^;*n^ V?NtB3 3 lit. I have lifted up my hand, i. e. I have 
sworn ; avOpmrovaBfiq, for men, when they swear, lift up the hand 
toward heaven; comp. Deut. xxxii, 40. ; Dan. xii, *].; Rev. x, 5, 
6. — F^Sl, see v. 4. above. — •"*?"*: "^t?, i- e. I will surely perform 
my promises, I will shew myself immutable. 

(10) n-1") ""^jvp, on account of\_their~\ impatience of mind, lit. 
shortness of mind ; so, in English, ' he is short/ for ' he is impa- 
tient,' or ' fretted.' 

(11) nbw>) } for nWV!, 115, The Vav here is not a Vav con- 

a a 



178 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. XXVI. 



versive; for then it would be pointed nbtt?^, 208. e. g. ; lit. And 
he shall send away, or, that he may send away. 

No. XXVI. Ex. XII, 18—33. 

(18) ?&&n?, i. e. flttfrnn ttJ^jha, in Mc/wf mow*/*, comp. 
551.; ttHn is here implied from the sequel, comp. 562. — ^3?? 
for nn^n^.—ii^^, 63. Dec. X.—^npv, after it DV is implied, 
459. and 551. Note. 

(19) HV^W f 457. a. — ^Wtp, leaven, with which bread is raised 
or fermented. — 05^3^ ■> bebhot-te-khem, irreg. plur. of T21 , 
coming (as it would seem) from nnSi or ni-2. For the Met,hegh, 
see 66. Note. — ngSjntt, Dec. XIII., that which is leavened, 
leavened br e ad. —T\rn^\ ,209.—^ [£ , const, of rTO. Dec. XI. 
— V^ST '"^^R^ *^5 3 ^t. iw £/*e stranger, and in the native of 
the land, i. e. both the stranger and the native. 

(20) Sb "b?, no, none.—^jtin, 146. 

(21) ! D#9* lay hold upon, seize ; for Methegh, 87- h. ; for D 
Raphe, 81. 1.— ^np, Imp. of npb ._npgn , ^e Paschal lamb. 

(22) -n^jy, & bundle, bunch. — ^SS , iw £we basin ; for this con- 
troverted word, and for the sense here given, comp. Zech. xii, 2. ; 
Jer. lii, 19. ; 1 Kings vii, 50. — bN DJ-p&arn, awe? ye shall put on, 
506.— -Q^n V$, of the blood, some of the blood. 

(23) HK-n , 209.— npD.1 9 ibid.-AW. *&>") 9 and he will not 
permit. 

(24) t?, Dat. commodi. 

(26) D?b,421.a. 

(27) Win, 469.— ">#j, because.— 13^5, see Inf. in Par. XXII. 
— ip»3, Fut. Kal of "njj, 261.— Tffjfitftl, Fut. Hithpalel from 
njq^ or 7int3 9 292. also 187. b. 1. 

(28) ^y 1?, exactness or sedulousness of action, is denoted by 
this repetition. 

(29) ^H, from ^33. — "Qtprj^ the captive, or the prisoner. — 
""HSn n"05, lit. in the house of the pit, or in the place of the pit, 
viz. in the deepest part of the dungeon, which was a low cellar, 
or pit. Meaning of the whole : ' From the highest to the lowest, 



PART III. NOTES ON NOS. XXVI. XXVII. 179 

without distinction.' The sequel shews, that this was extended 
to the tame animals also. 

(30) no, Part. Par. XIII., comp. 202. Note 1. 

(31) ^5f, Dagh. conj. in Tsadhe, 75. a. The asterisk here 
points to a note at the bottom, which is, Tsadhe with Daghesh ; 
thus marking the unusual appearance of it after a Shureq, as here; 
see in 75. e. g. — T^P, from TJIJ-I .— E2 . . . . D|, both .... and 
also.—nin^, Inf. Piel with suffix, 521. 

(32) tt^J in pause, ^l out of pause, 146. 

(33) Pinty!!, Fut. Kal 3 fern., agreeing with nil^a JE^jrt, 
which is fern, and takes a sing, verb, 485. or 487. The name of 
the country is here used instead of the inhabitants, i. e. a meto- 
nymy here occurs, by which the place is put for what is contained 
in it. 

No. XXVII. Ex. XX. 1—17. 

(1) "^"Jjlj spake, but whether audibly to the outward ear, or 
only to the inward one, is not here said. The noise of the thun- 
der and of the trumpet, on this occasion, was plainly audible to 
all with the outward ear; see Ex. xix, 16, 19.; xx, 18. But 
from Heb. xii, 19, it appears that audible words were spoken, 
i. e. proclaimed with a sound loud like that of a trumpet. The 
probability then is, that the ten commandments were thus audibly 
and awfully proclaimed, in the hearing of all Israel. 

(2) D^l^ f^SlKlj lit. from the -place of servants or slaves, i. e. 
from a state of slavish bondage. This verse contains a prefatory 
declaration, setting forth the character and claims of him, who 
gives the commandments which follow. The commandments pro- 
perly begin with v. 3. 

(3) E^IC!^ E^rp^, which may be rendered, any other God, as 
a pluralis excellentice, 437- 2.; or it may be rendered in the plural, 
as designating the many gods of the heathen. The first method 
of construing it, makes the command most significant ; for then it 
forbids any other god or gods. — "O^ '??, either before me, or be- 
sides me. The former is followed by the Vulgate, coram me, by 
Rosenmueller, and others ; the latter by the Sept., ttXtjj/ i[xov, and 



180 PART III. NOTES ON NO. XXVII. 

by many critics. The usus loquendi will support either; e. g. 'V, 
coram, Ex. xxvii, 21. ; Lev. xxvi, 1. ; '¥ , tckfyi, except. Gen. xxxi, 
50. ; Ps. xvi, 2. Coram me means, (as God was present in the 
camp of the Israelites), in my sight, in my presence ; i. e. he would 
suffer no rival god to prefer any claims. The phrase besides me, 
needs no explanation ; and (with the Sept.) I prefer this sense. 

(4) iTOE^rvDI 7P5, graven image, nor any likeness, viz. of 
God ; for images of other things were not prohibited, as appears 
plainly from directions respecting the architecture of the tabernacle 
and temple. — " 1 ^^ : , i. e. ">t£N na-IE.^, a likeness of any thing 
which, etc. 

(5) mqnt^ri, Hithpaielof Tinw.—nnzyrjijo-dbh-dhem^ovh. 

in the same sense as Kal; which is quite unusual. — ^?l2, jealous, 
i. e. he will not bear with any rival gods; as v. 3. indicates. — 
IfiP 3 visiting means punishing when "p37 follows. — E*02 _ v37 ? 506. 
_ WW 1 ?, Part. plur. suff. of ^.-D^W, C^W?, i. e. CTnto, 
generations, which is understood here. But how does this consist 
with Ezek. xviii, 20. ; Deut. xxiv, 16. ; 2 Kings xiv, 6. ; 2 Chron. 
xxv, 4. ; Jer. xxxi, 29, 30. ; in all which places it is affirmed, that 
the son shall not die for the iniquity of his father ? Onkelos felt 
the difficulty, and adds, in his version, ' when the children con- 
tinue to sin after the example of their parents/ 

In whatever way the difficulty may be met, it is clear that our 
text agrees with many others in the Scriptures ; e. g. Ex. xxxiv, 
7- ; Lev. xxvi, 39. ; Num. xiv, 18. ; and also with examples of the 
execution of such a threatening, e. g. 2 Sam. xii, 14. ; 1 Kings xiii, 
34. ; xiv, 10. 17. ; 1 Sam. ii, 33. ; Josh, vii, 24, 25, and a multi- 
tude of other cases. 

I understand the text simply to threaten severe punishment, for 
the crime in question. In the east, when any man commits an 
offence against the government with which it is specially dis- 
pleased, he and all his direct descendants, even to the remotest 
branch, (and oftentimes all his near relatives,) are destroyed to- 
gether. Such is the common practice, over all western Asia, even 
to the present day. The meaning of our text then is, that the 
man, who makes idol-gods, shall be punished with a severe punish- 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. XXVII. 181 

ment, (like that of utter excision in cases of high treason) ; for 
here is treason against the Majesty of heaven. More than this 
need not be dravra from the text; and more than this I do not 
apprehend it was designed to convey. But in this, there is no 
contradiction to Ezek. xviii, 20, and other texts like it. It is in- 
terpreting by the letter, and not by the spirit and object of the 
text, which creates all the difficulty in question. 

(6) T*n ^9^* doing kindness, performing that which is mer- 
ciful; the Part, nipi? here governs the Ace. after it. — E^C^Kb, 
viz. DTWT, to thousands of generations. Meaning : ' Although 
punishment in the case of idolatry will be severe, (like that in 
cases of treason under the government of kings ;) yet my mercy 
shall be exceedingly greater than the measure of my severity. 
While the one extends, (so to describe it,) to the third or fourth 
generation only, the other, (to describe it in like manner), extends 
to the thousandth.'— ^"J^P, mits-vo-thdy , the Vav being move- 
able here, and its vowel being placed over it, for convenience' sake 
in the printing; from •"1T?D 3 where the mobility of the Vav is 
sufficiently manifest. 

(7) &WF) S7^ thou shalt not utter, pronounce, viz. EtDTIS^ the 
name of Jehova, etc. Exactly in such a sense, is NCW used be- 
fore the Ace, in Ex. xxiii, 1. and in Ps. xv, 3. — ^1^7, for NWIT?, 
to that which is false ; M"]E7 is of the Seghol. class of nouns, see 
363. 4. That it means falsehood here, seems clear. The usus 
loquendi in this sense, is above exception; see v. 16. below, where 
we have "Ijjl? ^V. , false witness, or testimony, but which same 
thing is called W1.E? 7-? 3 in repeating this command in Deut. v, 20.; 
in both places the Seventy rightly translate paorvoia xj/ei^. So 
Ex. xxiii, 1, M")K7 IV, false witness; see also, Ps. xii, 3.; xii, 7-; 
Job xxxi, 5. ; Hos. x, 4. ; xii, 11.; Ps. xxiv, 4. ; Is. i, 13. The usual 
expression in Hebrew for in vain, is C ?H, or '?H or pn 'H? . 
Instances, however, in which W}B? is used in a sense like this, 
occur in the later Hebrew writers ; e. g. Mai. iii, 14.; Jer. ii, 30.; 
iv, 30. ; vi, 29. But in the case before us, this meaning would 
not give the best sense ; for it would be, ' Thou shalt not utter 
the name of Jehova, without some profit,' or, ' for any useless 



182 PART III. NOTES ON NO. XXVII. 

purpose.' By a sufficient metaphrasis, this may, indeed,, be made 
somewhat significant; but the evident meaning of the Hebrew 
seems to be, Thou shalt not utter the name of Jehova, in respect 
to a falsehood, i. e. thou shalt not take a false oath., thou shalt not 
call God as a witness to that which is not true. So the Seventy ; 
and so Rosenmueller and Gesenius. Comp. Matt, v, 33 — 37. ; 
James v, 12. 

'~ r (X? > : "', (Piel), will not acquit, will not regard as innocent, 
183. b. 2. But here is what rhetoricians and grammarians call 
"kiTorvis, i. e. a figure of speech,, by which the negative form of an 
expression is used., where an affirmative meaning is designed to be 
conveyed; for here the meaning is, f The Lord will punish.' So 
John i, 20., cvk fyvfaaro, the same in sense as w/xoAoyvjo-e in the 
other part of the verse ; and so, often elsewhere. 

(8) TPJ, Inf. abs. used as Imper. here. The reason of this 
usage seems to be, that this form, in such cases, was understood 
to be elliptical, and to imply a finite verb ; e. g. in this ease the 
full expression would be, ! H?V : 3 TO|, ye shall surely remember, 
517- — ^?^n, the Sabbath, i. e. the day of rest, the seventh day, 
Gen. ii, 2. For the precept and the spirit of it, comp. Deut. v, 
12 — 15. ; Ex. xxxi, 13 — 17- ; xxxv, 1 — 3. ; Lev. xxiii, 2, 3. ; Ex. 
xxiii, 12.; xxxiv, 21.; Lev. xix, 3. ; Neh. x, 31.; xiii, 15 — 22. 



It has been strongly contended by some, that the Sabbath was 
first given to the Israelites in the wilderness ; as no mention is 
made of it in any part of the histories of the patriarchs; Ne- 
hemiah (ix, 14.) seems to say, that the Sabbath was first disclosed 
to the Jews, and to them only; and as Moses seems to declare, 
that the Sabbath was instituted in commemoration of the deliver- 
ance of the Israelites from their Egyptian bondage, Deut. v, 15. 

On the other hand it is alleged, that Ex. xvi, 22, 23, plainly 
implies, that the Sabbath was kept before the legislation at Sinai ; 
and that the silence of the patriarchal histories respecting the ob- 
servance of the Sabbath, decides nothing ; since from the fact that 
a thing is not described, we cannot deduce the conclusion that it 
did not exist, save only in some very special cases. 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. XXVII. 183 

For a full exhibition of the arguments employed by both par- 
ties, see Ikenius, Diss, de Instt. etc. Mosaic® Legis, § XI. ; and 
also his Diss. Philol. Theol. II, p. 25 seq. On the other side, 
see Selden, De Jure, etc. L. III. c. 16. ; Spencer, De Leg. Heb. 
etc. L. I. c. 5. § 10. In particular, Eichhorn, Urgeschichte, Th. 
I. s. 234 seq. edit. Gabler, and Paley's Moral Philosophy, chap, on 
the Sabbath. 

For myself, as I find a plain reference to the weekly division of 
time, in the antediluvian history ; as no limits either in respect to 
the period of beginning, or in regard to extent, can be assigned to 
this ; as the Sabbath, in Ex. xvi, 22, 23, is plainly spoken of as a 
thing already well known; as the passage, in Neh. ix, 14, does 
not necessarily mean any more, than that God had published the 
law of the Sabbath at Sinai, with renewed, awful, and peculiar 
sanctions ; as Deut. v, 15, does not necessarily mean, that the Sab- 
bath was instituted in commemoration of the deliverance from 
Egypt, but only declares, that the observance of it was specially 
enjoined on the Israelites, because they were God's redeemed and 
chosen people, and that they were to make the Sabbath a day of 
peculiar recognition of their deliverance from bondage ; as true re- 
ligion cannot exist in the world without some day to be specially 
devoted to its services, because the nature of man is such, that a 
religious memento of this kind is altogether necessary for him ; I 
cannot help believing, that the Sabbath began with the creation 
of the world, and is to end only with its destruction. Even then, 
indeed, it is not to end, but to be renewed, and celebrated for ever 
in the courts above, where is the true and blessed ' rest (<ra/3/3a- 
ria-^oq) which remaineth for the people of God.' 

I do not hold the Sabbath to be binding on Christians, merely 
because it is enjoined by one of the ten commandments ; but be- 
cause the necessity of it is found in the very nature of man, and 
of the relations which he sustains, and of the worship which he 
owes, to his Creator. And as these are the same in every age of 
the world, so the obligations resulting from them must be the 
same, and the law of the Sabbath, under every form of religion, 
must substantially remain. 



184 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. XXVII. 



(10) rnn s 7 3 for Jehova, i. e. sacred to him, consecrated to 
him, set apart for his worship. — ^T?^, ^ nor, because it follows 
^ ' in the preceding clause, 558. Note. — TlrH, nor thy stranger, 
i. e. any foreigner. Rosenmueller thinks this applies only to fo- 
reigners who were slaves ; but there is no probability that other 
foreigners would be permitted to violate the Sabbath; see Neh. 
xiii, 15 — 22. — Tp^ytpS, i n fay gates, i. e. thy cities, by metonymy 
of a conspicuous part for the whole, (as threshhold for house) ; see 
Deut. xii, 15, 18, 21. 

(11) O^EJ r\t^W 9 in six days, 428. c; not in six thousand years, 
as geologists tell us, for then the seventh day, which follows, must 
of course make up a thousand more. — n ?J], 270. 3. Fut. apoc. Gutt. 
— T]5 etc., a most evident allusion to Gen. ii, 3. In Deut. v, 
where the fourth command is repeated, this 11th verse is omitted, 
and v. 15. there is substituted in its room, which has reference 
to liberation from Egyptian bondage ; one among the multiplied 
proofs, that unessential circumstances may be varied, while the 
substance remains the same. The substance was, to keep the day 
holy to the Lord ; it might be a day, in which the creation should 
be specially commemorated, or deliverance from the bondage of 
Egypt, or both ; and yet be kept as the Sabbath of the Lord. 

(12) *T21?, honour, i. e. reverence and obey; or, support, main- 
tain, which is a doubtful sense, although one that the correspond- 
ing Greek upoi clearly has, e. g. in 1 Tim. v, 3, 17- — "P^^l , 
Fut. Hiph. as Kal, 185. b. 2. ; for ? parag., see 211. a. 1. and 100. 
k. — nJS'TSn 737 etc., a reason for honouring parents, which was 
appropriate only to those who were to possess the promised land 
of Canaan. While the obligation of the commandment is per- 
petual, because the reasons on which it rests are always the same, 
the form of the command itself is clearly of a local, and there- 
fore of a temporary nature. When we are able to discern well 
the difference between costume and person ; between scaffolding 
and the building around which it stands ; then may we construe 
all passages of this nature, in the Old Testament, in a manner at 
once consistent and satisfactory. 

(13) n^nn Sb, comp. Matt, v, 21—25. 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. XXVII. 185 

(14) *$$& $\ comp. Matt, v, 27—30. 

(16) nj^O, utter.— ^ ^, in Deut. v, 11, &$ 1$., false 
testimony, i. e. thou shalt not slander. 

(17) ""TEnn,, eagerly desire, covet. — *tf$P , 148. b. ; in this case, 
however, the Seghol occasioned by the accent, is a variation from 
the usual principle, as the original comp. Sheva here is Hhateph 
Qamets; see in v. 16. — ^1, and ^JJj? at the end of verse, are 
pointed in the same way, although the accents are different. 



The old custom of deducing every duty, either toward God or 
toward man, from these ten commandments, is unsatisfactory and 
inexpedient. Unsatisfactory, because one must strain them be- 
yond measure in order to make them comprise every duty, and 
therefore do violence to the laws of exegesis ; inexpedient, because 
if these ten commands embrace all duty, then is the rest of the 
Pentateuch, which comprises statutes that are a rule of duty, 
either more or less superflous, and might well be spared. 

The argument, that these commands are perpetual because they 
were engraven in stone, will not weigh much with any one who 
knows, that all important laws of ancient times were engraven 
on stone or metal, in order that they might be both a public 
and a lasting monument of what the legislative power required. 
The perpetuity of obligation, in respect to these commands, is 
what we ought fully to believe ; but we may believe it, because 
these commands are founded in the immutable relations and af- 
fections of human nature, which are the same in ever} T age ; and 
not because they were engraven on stone, or given to the Jews at 
Sinai. Other laws were given there, which we do not profess to 
obey, and which we are not obliged to obey; cessante ratione, 
cessat ipsa lex ; and equally true is it, manente ratione, manet 
ipsa lex. We are, and always must be, bound to those laws of 
piety and morality, which are founded in our very nature, and not 
on what is local and temporary. 

It is plain, from the bare inspection of the ten commandments, 
that they comprised, and were designed to comprise, only the 
leading and most important maxims of piety and morality. To 

Bb 



186 PART III. NOTES ON NOS. XXVII. XXVIII. 

deduce more from them than this, is to force on them a construc- 
tion which they will not fairly bear. 

It may be proper to note here, that in several verses of No. 
XXVII., there is a double train of accents, in our common He- 
brew bibles ; so also in Deut. v., where the ten commandments 
are repeated. The reason of this appears to be, that when the 
decalogue was read in course, (in the annual reading of the Scrip- 
tures) , it was read as fifteen verses, and the accents were adjusted 
accordingly. But at the feast of Pentecost, when the giving of 
the law was celebrated, the decalogue was then read as ten por- 
tions, and the accents adjusted accordingly. In some of these, 
there is a concurrence with the first division, and then there is 
only a single train of accents ; the rest are furnished, in the com- 
mon editions of our Hebrew bibles, with a double one. This I 
have not adopted here ; but have separated the train which agrees 
with the common division of verses, from the other, in order not 
to embarrass the beginner with such perplexities. It is a difficult 
task, indeed, to make this separation ; but I trust the present 
train of accents will be found to be analogous. On the subject 
of the double accentuation here, see Abicht, De Accentibus Heb. 
c. VII. 

No. XXVIII. Ex. XXXIV, 4—8, 28. 

(4) r\rh, 63. and 41. 

(5) TT!>, from TV.—]^ f or }}3nj% 142. a. and 152. a. 
Note. — ^*!p\ E£^ ^*Ji?*], he worshipped Jehova, he prayed to 
him and praised him. 

(6) 1>3B - v37j before him, so v37 in this connexion usually signi- 
fies. — ^|?*lj proclaimed, uttered aloud. — ^H*?, const, of "^H^ 
Dec. V., 423. 

(7) nWfcrr; VW& f)V, I e . every kind of offence; for these 
three words are nearly synonymous in Hebrew, 438. Note. — HfW 
^WFl ^ ' 3 Inf. abs. with a finite verb, 514. b. — "T|7.S etc., see above, 
in No. XXVII. v. 5. 

(8) ~Tp s l, from THJ<— VWJt^l, a poc. Fut. Hithp. ; see in 120. 
b. and in 292. 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. XXIX. 187 

(28) iTH^n , of the covenant, or racher here, arrangement, 
ordinance. That the word f"^*"^, is used to designate ordinance 
or arrangement, (haOvJKvj as the Seventy render it), as well as com- 
pact or agreement, is clear from the application of it here to the 
decalogue. 

No. XXIX. Lev. X, 1—3. 

(1) Tl^ Dagli. omitted in P, 73. Note 3.— -VVjrjD, Dec. X. 
ID?, in them, fern., referring to JTU-MHP3 implied. — ^ /? , on it, 
viz. the fire, E?N being comm. gender, and here treated as femi- 
nine. — J~HT W& } strange fire, i. e. fire not consecrated, fire not 
taken from the altar. 

(2) E?^ N^Tjl!, and there went out fire, i. e. lightning; for this 
is called the fire of God; see Job i, 16. It is obvious here, that 
the kind of punishment was adapted to the species of crime which 
they had committed. 

(3) MH, this is, 469.— ^175, const, plur. of ^VljJ, by those 
who are near to me, i. e. who approach my presence. — ttnjJN^ / 
will be treated with reverence. — ^^l, from EE^T 261. 



In v. 10. which follows, is a command to Aaron and his sons, 
that they should ' drink neither wine nor strong drink when they 
were to go into the tabernacle of the congregation, lest they 
should die there/ viz. as Nadab and Abihu had just done. The 
connexion of the whole would seem to shew, pretty plainly, that 
these offenders were under the influence of intoxicating liquor, 
when they offered strange fire before the Lord. It would be well 
for all who minister in the sanctuary of the Lord, to observe the 
prescription here given to Aaron and his sons ; that they may not 
offer ''strange fire" before God, which may devour both them and 
the people of their charge. 



188 PART III. NOTES ON NO. XXX. 



No. XXX. Num. VI, 22—27- 

(23) "^N, saying, or thus shall ye say, Inf. abs., 517- The 
whole phrase filled out would be thus, *n*?rin TlEN n3 ? thus 
shall ye say . 

(24) Tp~Qo use( i as I m P- °f 3d person, 201. Note; and so of 
the other verbs which follow.— *T2-W ^ 14 & a. Meaning : ' May 
Jehova make thee happy and prosperous ; and may he keep thee 
from evil.' 

(25) "^J, apoc. Fut. Hiph. of 11N; may Jehova make his face 
to shine upon you, means, May he look cheerfully or propitiously 
upon you ! Or, (as we say in English,) May e his countenance 
light up with smiles' upon you ! — JFJjyh *H instead of V], 137« and 
115.; Jr., epenth. suffix, 309. d.; verb from ]?n, Fut. Kal ]n;, 
which assumes the form ]JT , : , because the tone is thrown forward 
by the suffix, 133. a. and J 29. a. In regard to the Dagh. forte in 
the 3, see 258. 

(26) NE?*! etc., may Jehova lift up his face upon you, i. e. let 
him look on you with a face elevated, and betokening friendship 
and approbation ; and not with a face cast down, a fallen counte- 
nance, betokening disapprobation and regret. So we say, in Eng- 
lish, ' to look with an open face ;' which is used to denote either 
cheerfulness, or a sense of approbation. — EEP*|, Kal Fut. of D^, 
274. 2.; the 1 is merely conjunctive here, and not conversive. 
Hence the different mode of pointing it.— O >^, prosperity of 
every kind, elpvjvrjv. 

(27) ^^H, 209.; lit. and let them put my name over the chil- 
dren of Israel, i. e. when they make supplication for them, or 
bless them, let them add my name, viz. the name of Jehova ; 
which, being connected with their requests, shall render these ac- 
ceptable or prevalent, when made in behalf of the people. So it 

follows, °P!^ ^«n. 

The name of Jehova is thrice repeated, in this solemn bene- 
diction. From this some have argued, that the doctrine of the 
Trinity was intended to be taught here, although somewhat veiled. 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. XXXI. 189 

Repetitions however of this sort denote intensity according to the 
asus loquendi of the Hebrews ; e. g. (( O earth, earth, earth, hear 
the word of the Lord !' Jer. xxii, 29. From this we should not 
argue the triplex nature of the earth. Arguments of this kind, 
even if they have their foundation in what is real, are rather too 
tenuous to be of much use in polemic theology. 

No. XXXI. Num. XVI, 23—35. 

(24) ^?U, Imp. Niph. of nby^ take yourselves away. — S'OBE, 
from around. — f?tf^7, in respect to the dwelling or tent ; i. e. 
retreat from the neighbourhood of Korah, Dathan, and Abiram. 

(26) ^2 y hortantis, a mark of the optative mood, a sign of urging. 
— h^n, from before, from by.— *®%B , from ra.—bSS, 507- a. 
— *SDJ% Fut. Niph. of nDD._ an&arrbDSj, by all their punish- 
ment ; for nNtsn (=nSI|n^ 118.) signifies punishment, i. e. the 
effects of sin, as well as sin itself. Meaning : ( Lest ye be con- 
sumed in the same fearful manner as they.' 

(27) M??, standing, Part. Niph. of ^.—Tin^ f 428. &.— 
E31-?, their little children, in distinction from ' the youth of ma- 
turer years,' which the preceding 0«T?.5 denotes here. 

(28) V®1®, 211. a. 1.—^, that'.—^rbti?, Par. XXII.— 
^2 bp S v -,, 3 } for they are not of myself, lit. from my heart or 
mind, 475. 2. c. Meaning : ' They are not of my own choice or 
impulse/ 

(29) nbM .... DS, if according to the dying of all men, these 
shall die, i. e. if these men die a natural death, like others. — 
JTr^Spi etc., and the punishment of other men be inflicted on them; 
[[then] Jehova hath not sent me. 

(30) But if Jehova create a new creation, (see on Gen. xi, 3.), 
i. e. make a new thing, perform something new. — nbNtp, with 
H- local, into Sheol, into the grave or under-world. — Df-J^T^ 209. 
— JSM^Pielof VSJ. 

(31) iribp;?, 521. b.— 2J2?rn, that the earth opened itself, 
separated itself, Niph. Fut., 182. b. 3. 

(32) EfT-HS, plur. sufF. of f^2, irregular, and actually derived 

from nrns or ria. 



190 PART III. NOTES ON NO. XXXI. 

(33) nV«$, as in v. 30. above.— 0^1, Piel Fut, apoc. of 
HD3 , Dagh. forte omitted in the D, 72. and 286. 2.— ETpby , 506. 
-,1fHBn5, from ^yj. 

(34) PipO^^P, prop, a noun, used here as a preposition, 
407- b. — Evp J. ^03, y?ec? a£ ^ezr en/, viz. of terror and distress. 
— s npf5, viz. the men of Israel said. — ^327^^i\t , for Qamets under 
b, see 312. 5. 

(35) m,Jire, i. e. lightning.— ^ , 461 .— ^i?*? , Part. 
Hipli. in const, state, the offerers of, those who -presented incense. 
In respect to the two hundred and fifty men here, who offered in- 
cense, see in vs. 2, 6, 7j> 16 — 18. of this chapter. 



The narration, contained in the preceding extract, has met 
with peculiar treatment from some of the critics of the new 
school in Germany- One class have suggested, that Moses pro- 
bably caused the tents of the rebels to be undermined; and as he 
knew at what hour of the day the mine would be sprung, so he 
could predict when the rebels would be swallowed up in the 
earth. 

Eichhorn is somewhat more expert, in his explanation. He 
attempts to shew, that Moses ordered the rebels to be buried 
alive, with all that appertained to them. As to ' the two hundred 
and fifty men, consumed by fire,' he thinks that ' they were first 
slain, and then their bodies consumed by fire;' and this, by the 
orders of Moses. 

To argue against conjectures of such a nature, would be operose 
agere nihil. It is not possible for any one who reads the narration 
above, really to suppose that the writer did not regard the event 
in question as miraculous. Now the object of an interpreter 
is, to explain the meaning of the author whom he interprets. 
The question, Whether such an event as that related above is 
possible, or credible? may be raised by critics, or sceptics, and 
may be answered by them in the negative; but those, who be- 
lieve that the Creator of the world has it at all times entirely 
under his control, and that the authors of the sacred volume 
are worthy of full credit, will not be anxious to explain away the 



PART III. NOTES ON NOS. XXXII. XXXIII. 191 

obvious meaning of the Scriptures, nor to free themselves from 
the obligation to believe in occurrences of a supernatural kind. 
To wonder or to scoff at this (so named) credulity, is not difficult; 
but to argue it down, with grounds of reasoning that will abide 
the test of careful, extensive, and sober investigation, is quite a 
different task. 

No. XXXII. Num. XX, 7—11. 

(8) n^n^ the staff or rod, viz. that with which he had per- 
formed miracles before; see Ex. xvii, 5. and comp. v. 10. below. 
— Y^&,8uff. plur. ofO?». 

(9) sinjS, 313. 

(10) E^^H, ye rebels, Part, of n*1ft. — f^n, n e ex, num. ex, 
D interrogative. — ^^12, must we bring forth, 504. i. — ^5^, Dat. 
commodi. 

(11) ET}% apoc. Fut. of EPh, in Hiphil.—tfUl, apoc. Fut. 
Hiph. of rOD, see Par. XIX.— ^HB^ from n^a, 336. Note 4. 
— D^S, two times, twice, Dual of nVB.—n^n*), nude apoc. 
form rf'nryf, Fut. Kal, 183. y. 

From Ps. cvi, 33, and Deut. xxxii, 49 — 52, it appears that 
Moses sinned on this occasion ; but the nature of his offence is not 
particularly specified in either passage. In the Psalm it is said, 
that 'he spake unadvisedly with his lips;' in Deut. loc. cit., that 
'he did not sanctify the Lord in the midst of the children of 
Israel.' — But by Num. xx, 12, it appears that Moses and Aaron 
themselves indulged a spirit of unbelief, on this occasion. It 
was for this, that they were excluded from the promised land. 
Well may we conclude, that an unbelieving spirit is offensive to 
God. 

No. XXXIII. Deut. VI, 4—9, 13, 17, 18. 

(5) "TH^ , one, in opposition to the polytheism of all the Gen- 
tile nations. The metaphysical nature of the Godhead is clearly 
not the particular object of assertion here. — ^-?3< and Tftt7Q2, a 
repetition of words nearly synonymous here, for the sake of in- 
tensity, 438. d. and Note.— ^^P, Dec. VI. y. 



192 PART III. NOTES ON NOS. XXXIII. XXXIV. 

(6) ^P, Part. Piel, 313— by, in, on, before, for the same 
sense will be conveyed in either way, i. e. ' constantly remember/ 

(7) E^?^"], and ye shall inculcate, reg. Piel in a verb 2727, 
262— fTOW, Inf. fern, with sufF., from ntfj, Dec. XIII. g.— 
^rph^\id. from IT 1 ?;.— ^1^?^, Inf. suff. from n^.—^p^l, 
id. from Dip, in pause. 

(8) m&* v? 9 for a token, for a remembrancer. — nbtot^b, front- 
pieces, frontlets. From this precept, in later times, the Jews de- 
duced the obligations of wearing phylacteries ; which they greatly 
abused to superstitious purposes. 

(17) VHQ0F\ -n»ttf, 514. a.— nSTO, mits-voth, from nj^p. 

(18) ^P-Cpi^ i. e. 'he bound himself by an oath uttered to thy 
fathers, that he would give this land to you.' 

No. XXXIV. Deut. XXXIV, 1—8. 

(1) ri:rp£, const, plur. of ^^V., Dec. XI.— "D?, a mountain 
on the east side of the Jordan, probably not far from the northern 
part of the Dead sea, and the summit (W&1) of a ridge, on the 
northern part of Moab, called Pisgah, naps. — t£N*"), in appo- 
sition with "O?. — \3?"v37, before, in the face of, i. e. on the east. 
— inS"]^ Hiph. Fut. of nH"J, made him to see, shewed him.—' 
*73?7?n , the region on the east side of the Jordan, which the two 
and a half tribes possessed. 

(2) ^rarbs ntfj, i. e. ''brjspa V^«; for so runs the next 
clause, E?]?*? Y"?.*!?. The countries mentioned in this verse, lie 
on the west side of the Jordan, and reach to the Mediterranean, 
for a considerable extent from north to south. The distinctive 
portions of tribes, which are here named, shew that the narration 
now in question was composed, or at least revised, after the di- 
vision of Palestine among the tribes. — JTirjNn E*n^ the sea be- 
hind, i. e. the Mediterranean. To a Hebrew, who reckoned with 
his face toward the rising sun, the east was before, the west be- 
hind, the south the right, and the north the left. 

(3) 35§n, the south, here, the south part of Palestine. — "ISSn, 
lit. the circle, viz. the bow or circle of land made by the windings 



PART III. NOTES ON NOS. XXXIV. XXXV. 193 

of the Jordan. — Vl^ nyp2, the plain, or rather, intervale of 
Jericho, the city of palm-trees, (so called from the great number 
of these which grew in its neighbourhood). — "">¥^ a town near the 
southern extremity of the Dead sea. * 

(4) "HBH, concerning which, 428. 3.— I^MIil, for the Seghol 
under J"7, and the Hhireq under N, (instead of the usual 'tfTETjn), 
see 287- 1.; lit. I have caused thee to see, viz. the lands above 
mentioned. — ™f?, H local, 100. i. 

(5) ^'V, lit. according to the mouth, i. e. according to the 
word or declaration; mouth being taken for what it utters. Comp 
Deut. xxxii, 49 — 52. 

(6) "Taj}*}, and one buried, or he [\Jehova] buried; for the 
Nom. is not expressed in this case, and we are left to make it out 
from the context. The latter seems to me to be the mind of the 
writer. One would not expect an impersonal verb here. — ^?, in a 
valley, (a Wady, as the Arabians call a ravine, with banks more or 
less steep, and either narrow, or of some considerable width). — b^ft, 
before, i. e. on the east, or over against, i. e. not far from, in view 
of. — "TB$? n\2 , the name of a mountain, probably one of the sum- 
mits of the Pisgah ridge. — W**\ 3nj Sv^ which seems plainly to 
indicate, that it was Jehova who buried Moses, and not any one of 
the friends of the prophet. How could such an one forget the 
place of his burial ? 

(7) Vi»3, Inf. with suffix, 521. a.—nnq:?, fern, of nrj3._ 
nnb^ his vigour, active power. — ^J 7 ]*!, from C ^^J, 261. 

No. XXXV. Josh. Ill, 9— 17- 

(9) WZ , go-shu, a peculiar form of the Imp. of 273J , not noted 
in the Lexicons or Grammar; draw nigh, approach. — H2n hither. 

(10) tfrfc BW»n, Hiph. Inf. and Fut. of Bhj, 514. b.; the 
Inf. is written defective for B^nin , 63. ; he will surely dispossess, 
drive out. 

(11) r?Nrnb3 rh« n^ri J"h** 3 four successive words all 
in regimen or const, state. 

(12) D? 1 ?, Dak commodi.—V^., 458,-^™, 438. b. 

c c 



194 PART III. NOTES ON NOS. XXXV. XXXVI. 

(13) n'12^ Inf. const., 521. b., comp. 525. for the relation of 
rnS3 to rm? ; and for the form of the latter, see 270. a. 2.— 
^W, 531.— ^a, const, of □:».— ^P^, 226. ; Vav not conver- 
sive here. — ^^^ ^3, owe Ae«p, Ace. of manner. Meaning: f The 
waters, instead of flowing on as usual, shall accumulate and form 
a rising mass or heap.' 

(14) vb^ } 521. a.— .nrpbnNB, from brrw. 

(15) M'liM, 521.6.— nSp5,*Dec. IX. const.— b? ^, is full 
above, overflows. — YtfTni, Dec. XI. from '"Qt- — ^% const, plur. 
of DV . 

(16) ^$3**1, 226.— PHP?!, as an adverb, 403. d. ; far, remote 
from. — "T^P very. — D'JNS, f° r which, in the margin, we have 
^^,from Adam, a town or city, as the context shews. If the 
reading O'JNS i s retained, then we must render the whole phrase, 
very far in respect to Adam. — ^E>, at the side. — D'H^H'], viz. 
E?E, |j;he waters] which came down, i. e. towards the Dead lake, 
otherwise called (as here) Sea of the Plain, or Salt sea. — *!&& 
VTJJ53, were entirely cut off, 533. — "TJP.j opposite to, over against. 

(17) nznTIZ, 142. «.— ]?n, form of Hiph. Inf. of )«, used 
as an adverb here, 403. d. ; firmly, safely. 



It is quite impossible here, to explain away the meaning of 
the writer in respect to this miraculous interposition. The 15th 
and 16th verses are so specific and definite as to their meaning, 
that to allege that the Jordan was forded by the Israelites, at a 
time when the waters were very low, is quite impossible; i. e. it 
is impossible to shew that the writer means to convey this idea. 
There is no alternative here, but either to believe in a miraculous 
interposition of God, or to abandon all confidence in the correct- 
ness of the sacred historian. 

No. XXXVI. Josh. X, 12—14. 

(12) nn, for r\l%, 107. 2.; from jro, and Inf. fern, in the 
const, state, 520. b. ; the subject of the verb i"M*3 follows it in the 
Gen., 525. — NP#7* ^* ^ n the eyes of, i. e. in the sight of, before. 



PART III. NOTES ON NOS. XXXVI. XXXVII. 195 

— QYT, Imp. of EE^, with Vav fulcrum, 64. ; comp. 264. 3. where 
are examples of the Fut. with the like form. — Hl^l, and thou 
moon, Voc. case, Dll is implied after it. 

(13) DW, 261.— "rb?, i. e. IK? , the final vowel being pro- 
longed by the accent Rebhia upon it, 144. 149. — Opl, Fut. Kal of 
Ep_2 , took vengeance upon. — "?Hj not question-wise, nonne ; but 
for TIPXl , ecce, lo. So the Seventy frequently render ^D, viz. 
by Ifov ; and in the Samaritan and Rabbinic, this is the predo- 
minant sense of the word; also in Arabic, ^^ means ecce. — '¥ , 

in. — "^J, of Jasher, i. e. of the upright; a book of national songs 
or narratives so called, probably because it contained narratives 
respecting men of an upright character; comp. 2 Sam. i, 18. — 
D^ftWTl ^0^ in the midst of the heavens, i. e. at the meridian. 
It was about noon, therefore, when this occurrence took place. — 
V^ N ', did not hasten, i. e. did not move rapidly as he usually 
does ; for his movement is described as rapid by the sacred wri- 
ters, e. g. Ps. xix, 6. ; Ecc. i, 5. It is difficult to say, however, 
whether the expression V^ "? be not Ai-nm^ here, so that the 
meaning is simply, 'it stood still.' — D^JJ DT*?, about a whole 
day, 428. c. 

(14) WT171 CVS nVT rfV), and there was not like unto that 
day, i. e. there has been no day like that, either before or since. — 
rnrP. 5^^ in respect to Jehova's hearkening, etc. 525. Comp. 
523. in view of which we may render here, when Jehova hearkened 
to.—ZTpl, 182. 6— b*T)^ Dat. commodi. 

No. XXXVII. Judg. IV, 13—24. 

(13) ^rDo 461. — <V"??j prob. a word of foreign origin; for 
form, see 141. Note 2. — HgnrjB etc., i. e. from the northern ex- 
tremity of Galilee, down to the river of Kishon, which runs in the 
valley north of Tabor, and springs from this mountain. 

(14) ^t"?* P ut him into thy power, or under thy control. — 
Vb?, ecce, as in No. XXXVI. v. 13.— S?J, goeth forth, in- 
cluding the Fut. also, 503. d. 2. 

(15) Erj^!, vciy-ya-lwm, short O, Fut. with Vav, from C^n, 



196 PART III. NOTES ON NOS. XXXVII. XXXVIII. 

208. Note 2. — ^™J- 9 generic, cavalry. — ^1, by the edge of the 
sword.— D3J1, ap oc. Fut. Kal of 0*0, 270. a. 3. 

(16) np.rj^n, the infantry, if we may employ the present tech- 
nical language of military men, in order to translate the word. 

(17) ti"bw i a state of amity. 

(18) n^npb, for form, see 118. Note 2.— TTVto , 270. a. 4. 
Imp. parag. The asterisk here, and again on the same word in 
the sequel, points to a Masoretic note at the bottom, which is, 
e Milra,' L e. the tone is on the ultimate, 99. Note; see in 100. 
i. under e» g. — ""'PJl, Hiph. Fut. apoc, 270. c. 3. Fut. apoc. with 
Gutt. — nbnkn, with n local, and in the Ace, 428. a. — ^nSOJ^, 
Fut. Piel of nDS.—rD^t^!^ with a mattress, with a small piece 
of carpeting, such as was used on couches. 

(19) ^??$n, Imp. fem. Hiph. of Tlpti .— VTO2 , from N&?, 
see 278. and 63.— Y1&, for 'tflKj, 118. 

(20) *TE??, Imp. masc. form, although addressed to Jael, 490. 
—riHB, 428. b.— ?jb«t?fo, from ^W^; for the dropping of the 
Qamets, see 133. — *%*$, and he shall say, 209. 

(21) ^n\, const, of "V!?J, Dec. V. — t3Nv2 ^ with secrecy, privily, 
— DT?3, Niph. 182. b. 4'.— 13?*i, arcd Ae szm£ ^om)k lifeless, 
fainted, Fut. apoc. of ?yi37, with Pattahh under the Guttural 37. 
— riKJJl, with final vowel long, 144. also 180. 6. 

(22) 'tf^pjf?, 278. 2.; for form, 118. Note 2.—^ Imp. of 
■tjbV— JlfjWV, Fut. Hiph. of nNTT, with epenth. suffix, 309. d.— 

aJgap nns, 527. «. 

(23) 375PH1, ^^5 c?ic? [[God] subdue or humble. 

(24) "n^bn .... "Si^ls 514. c. denoting continuance ; while 
nt ?l?1 denotes the kind of action, viz. was heavy or oppressive. — 

vrn:?n,52l. 

No. XXXVIII. Judg. XVI, 23—31. 

(23) raP^a, 226.— nmb^, awd /or rejoicing.—}??}^ s i ng ., 
437. 2. 

(24) Sn'S, Aim, i. e. Sampson. — S'HrjEJ nW"), arce? him who de~ 
stroyed. — ^ /?brj^ an d him who multiplied our slain. 



PART HI. NOTES ON NO. XXXVIII. 197 

(25) SltS*^ j the vowels are made to fit the Qeri at the bottom 
of the page, Slta? . — E2 7 n'ltD^ } when their heart grew merry, 
521. b. — D^D^n, the pointing is adapted to the Qeri at the 
bottom of the page, Part. pass, of ^?N._pn2^ Piel. Fut., that 
he might make sport. 

(26) nrpan, station me, Imp. parag. Hiph. of H3J, 251. — 
^^Lp, (with points adapted to the Qeri), Hiph. Fut. with suf- 
fix,, from tttej Yodh omitted before the last radical, 63.; Qamets 

dropped under n, 133.— -0^^? ->#S, n which, 478.— 

VOJ, Niph. is built.— )?&&), that I mag lean. 

(27) f\ww$ p'^ntpi, 525.' 521. 

(28) ^i\, Imp. Par. XXII.— OTjbgJJ, 412. d.— nEp3K/|, 
Niph. Fut. paragogic. — ^DWQ, on account of the two; the asterisk 
refers to a note, which denotes that the n here is Raphe, con- 
trary to the usual form of this word. — D^tp^E, Q;hat I may be 
avenged] in respect to the Philistines. 

(29) fiS«!> stooped down towards, the sense requires, took 
hold of. 

(30) ^3 rtWJj let me die, 475. 2. a.— V>h1, Par. XIX., he 
laid out, he put forth. 

(31) ^™, for Vn« ? 142. a.— mtyl, Dagh. omitted in the 

Sin, 73. Note 3.; Fut. of «bj.— .)^ T5, between . . . and 

between ; the Hebrews repeated the particle in such a case, while 
we use it only once, and that before the first noun, e. g. here be- 
tween Zorah and Eshtaol. — ^?^, ruled over, governed, directed. 
The office of judge in the East, is invariably connected with that 
of magistracy in other respects. All kings are judges ; and all 
judges besides them, are executive officers under them of some 
kind or other. Hence, in the Scriptures, the word to judge often 
means, in a figurative sense, to have a predominance among, to 
have a superiority over, etc. 



If any one should question the possibility of three thousand 
people being upon the roof of the temple in question, he may be 
referred to the accounts of the temples at Thebes in Upper Egypt, 
which have been given by all recent travellers ; accounts which, 



198 PART III. NOTES ON NO. XXXVIII. 

while they come to us authenticated in such a manner as to admit 
of no doubt in regard to their verity and correctness, at the same 
time present things apparently incredible, and contrary to all the 
philosophizing of most speculative and theoretical historians. The 
ruins of ancient Greece and Rome, so far as vastness and extent 
are concerned, dwindle into insignificance when compared with 
the astonishing remains of early architecture at Thebes. What 
is most confounding of all to that philosophizing, in which his- 
torians of a sceptical cast are continually prone to indulge, is, 
that these mighty ruins are, beyond all doubt, the relics of archi- 
tecture designed and executed in ages, when, as some popular 
writers admonish us to believe, men were not yet weaned from 
contending with the beasts of the forest for their lairs and for 
their acorns, nor but very little elevated above them. The ruins 
at Thebes, present evidences of control over physical, mechanical 
power ; of skill in architecture on a scale of surprising magnitude ; 
and of art in mixing and laying on colours, that are fresh as if 
painted but yesterday, after having been laid on for more than 
thirty centuries; which confound and put to shame all that the 
arts and sciences, and the experience of three thousand years, have 
since been able to accomplish. So much for the rudeness, and 
barbarity, and ignorance, of the primitive ages. The Philistines, 
the near neighbours of the Egyptians, and their hearty coadjutors 
in polytheism, might well have, and doubtless had, large temples 
as well as they ; large enough to aiford room for three thousand, 
and some of them not improbably for many more, to stand upon 
the roof. 

As to the strength of Sampson, in tearing away pillars on 
which such an enormous weight rested ; those who disbelieve any 
thing which is miraculous, will of course regard the whole as fxvBoi;; 
those who admit the reality of miracles, will doubtless be ready 
to believe, that there was some supernatural aid afforded him, 
in the case under consideration. A heavy blow was inflicted on 
polytheism, by the event in question, and on its votaries who 
were the enemies of God's chosen people. 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. XXXIX. 199 

No. XXXIX. 1 Sam. Ill, 1—14. 

(1) rntpp, Part. Piel, 231.— TJ??, lit. spread abroad, i. e. 
common, usual. 

(2) irSI, dual suff. of ^TV.; the asterisk refers to another 
orthography (plene) in the Qeri ; see 336. Note 5. Anomalies, 1. 

^nn, Hiph. of bbq._rvrD, Piel. Inf. of nns, com p. 232. 

Z>. but the form] of the Inf. mood is not stated there ; to be dim, 
to fail. 

(3) "1?., also "1^., 63.— D^, ?io£ ?/<?*; as to the form, 403. 6. 

(5) fSl, from V-n, 270. a. 3. Fw*. apoc— ^H , Daghesh 
omitted in the first 2, 73. Note 3. ; comp. at the end of v. 4. — l\ a 
75. a. — ^y0 ^\W } lie down again, 533. — ^}$, in pause. 

(6) ^l"flD^), Hiph. apoc. Fut. of *\&, 63. and 208. 
Note 2. 

(7) 3HJ D ^? , /md rco* yet known. 

(8) J?*!, apoc. Fut. Kal of V*, 274. 2. 

(9) Tfb, l m p. of ^;.— "1«, spea&, Imp. Piel. 

(10) Q^Q2;"Q^5? , as once and again, as repeatedly before. 

(11) nwv' "QbN, 527. and 529.— ny%OT , fem. plur. Fut. Hiph. 
ofbb ? . ' 

(12) nvO*> ^tyn, Inf. abs., although not the usual form as 
to the latter verb, 514. c. ; lit. beginning and finishing, i. e. tho- 
roughly executing the whole. 

(13) a^V?p_E?, Dagh. omitted in the first b, 73. Note 3.— Dnb, 
545.— nrp, Piel.— pa., 506. 

(14) DN, if, but in an oath (as here) it means not. The reason 
is, that the phrase is elliptical. Fully written out it would run 
thus, If I do thus and so, may God do this or that to me I See 
the formula in full, 2 Sam. iii, 35.; 1 Sam. xxv, 22. In such 
cases, the meaning of course is, ' I surely will not do this or that.' 
— ngSnrDW, shall not be expiated, 187- c. 3. 



200 PART III. NOTES ON NO. XL. 

No. XL. 1 Sam. XVII, 38—51. 

(38) 1TJK}, su ff. plural of Dec. VIII.., from *Ttt , raiment, cup- 
parel—ini), put, placed.— -fVntf , 511. 

(39) bM^i Hiph. apoc. Fat. of b»J, 63.— ™#?, ^?b Inf. of 
*F?J. — nD2"Sv ^3 ? 5m^ Ae had not put them to trial, he had not 

proved them. — E^P^l, Hiph. Fut. with suffix, from "Vlb, reg. form 
^PJ, here written defective, 63. and the Qamets dropped under 
the Yodh, 133. 

(40) HbflB-, from bgD, Dec. VII., Dagh. omitted in p, 73. 
Note 3. — E'O?^ ^Ij^rij lit. smooth ones of stones, i. e. smooth 
stones, 423.-— ^h, const, plur. of p&n, 4i.__D^Hn, root 

(41) 33$ 7jbn,514. c. 

(42) ^n.p?!, from n}2.— n??>, const, of H^, Dec IX.; lit. 
with something beautiful, i. e. with beauty. 

(43) «?, Part, of N*i3, 527.— Hhbpaa, Dagh. omitted in P, 
73. Note 3. 

(44) 71Db : (5jb), parag. Imp. of Tfb;. 

(45) rforffDj, const, plur. of nyjSJB, Dec. XI.— J^D, Piel 
of ^l"]rj . The asterisk refers to a Masoretic note, which is, that 
' Soph Pasuq (Silluq) is placed on the vowel Pattahh ;' which is 
rather unusual, inasmuch as it generally prolongs it. 

(46) T-n^rn, Hiph. of ro3, 63.— VThpm (Vflroprji), 63. 

from "fiD. — "^j?, corpse, collective here, corpses. — '^*J^7, who 
belongs to Israel, or, who is on Israel's side. 

(48) HD^zan, toward the camp, viz. the camp of the Philis- 
tines ; Ace. of place, 428. a. 

(49) TO, from HJJ. 

(50) WJEl, Hiph. Fut. of /TIB, 63. 

(51) sinonb^, Polelpf FWn. — Qn^i their champion, hero. 
— SD3JV, Fut. Kal of M, 63. and 41. 



SELECT PASSAGES OF HEBREW POETRY. 



The poetry of the Hebrews lias characteristics which are pecu- 
liar, and which widely distinguish it, in some respects, from the 
poetry of the western world. So far as any one has yet been able 
to discover, the Hebrews had no knowledge of what we call quan- 
tity, or syllabic measure as employed in the construction of poetic 
verses. Many attempts have been made, since the revival of 
Hebrew study in Europe, to discover something of the Grecian 
and Roman measure in the poetry of the Scriptures ; but none 
have met with the desired success. Men of different nations, 
of extensive learning, and of great enthusiasm for Hebrew study, 
have made these fruitless attempts. It has indeed been affirmed 
by Jerome and others in ancient times, and by critics of no small 
reputation in modern times, that the poetry of the Old Testament 
displays all the rich variety of Greek and Latin measure ; and 
that one may find there the heroics and lyrics of the West, not 
only in respect to spirit, but even in regard to form. 

Every attempt however to discover them, has failed to produce 
any general conviction of their real existence, in the minds of 
those who are acquainted with oriental studies ; and it is now a 
matter of almost universal accord, that the characteristics which 
distinguish Hebrew poetry, are principally the following : viz. 
(1) A kind of rhythmical conformation of a-vly<H or distichs. (2) A 
parallelism of the same in regard to sentiment. (3) A figurative, 
ornate, parabolic style. (4) A diction in some respects peculiar. 

In regard to the first of these characteristics, the measure of 
syllables, i. e. their length or brevity as it regards what is called 
quantity, is not concerned ; at least it is not, as has been already 
said above, discoverable by us. The terms rhythmical conforma- 
tion, here employed, are designed only to mark a conformation 
in general, as to the respective length of lines and the number of 

D d 



202 PART III. REMARKS ON HEBREW POETRY. 

syllables, in two corresponding g-t/%o; or distichs. This is the 
most general of all the distinguishing features of Hebrew poetry. 
The exactness does not, indeed, correspond with that observed in 
English rhyme. But still, it is so general, and so considerable, 
as to force the observation of it upon every reader, who has any 
powers of discernment. 

The second characteristic, viz. parallelism, applies to the cor- 
respondence of sentiment. This sentiment may be either the same, 
(or the same with only a slight variation in the diction, or the 
thought, or in both,) and then the distich consists of two parallel 
passages, in the usual sense of the word parallel, as well as in a 
poetic sense ; or the sentiment in one o-t/^o? may be an antithesis 
to that which is contained in the other, the antithetic correspond- 
ence being plainly a matter of design and calculation ; or lastly, 
there may be nothing more than a correspondence in the length 
of the a-rtxoi, and a general sameness of design, without either 
a synonymous or antithetic sense in the members of the distich. 
To produce examples of all these would be very easy j but it 
would be out of place here. I refer the reader, for ample satis- 
faction in respect to this whole subject, and that he may acquire a 
right and adequate understanding of it, to Bishop Lowtli's cele- 
brated and admirable Lectures on Hebrew Poetry, in particular 
Lect. XVIII — XX.; or (to what in some respects is still more 
satisfactory) to his Preface to the Translation of Isaiah. He 
may also consult De Wette, Comment'dr iiber den Psalmen, Ein- 
leit. § 7- ; Vogel, de Dialecto Poetico ; Meyer, Hermeneutik des 
Alt. Testaments ; and other writers, who have composed introduc- 
tions to the Hebrew Scriptures. 

In regard to the third characteristic of Hebrew poetry, it is 
common, in some respects, to the poetry of all languages. A dic- 
tion figurative, elevated, remote from the vulgar one, and abound- 
ing in comparisons, is almost of course the characteristic of all 
poetry, which exhibits any striking display either of feeling or 
of imagination. But the Hebrew poetry, (which is in a peculiar 
sense the offspring of feeling,) abounds to an uncommon degree in 
these characteristics. 



PART III. REMARKS ON HEBREW POETRY. 203 

The peculiar diction of Hebrew poetry is displayed in the 
choice of words ; in the meaning assigned to them ; and in the 
forms which it gives them. 

(a) The choice of words. Thus tt^2S. instead of a 7^> man * 
n™ instead of W'lSl, to come; nba instead of ?£(%> word; 0$? 
instead of "^^ , former time ; D'lni^ instead of D^, water. 

{b) The meaning of words. E. g. *">^N strong for God; "T'SN 
strong for bull; tT£*V. the only, the darling, for life; *\QV Jo- 
seph, for the nation of Israel, etc. 

(c) The forms of words. E. g. FnbM instead of E^nbw, God; 
nin instead of »Tn, to be; P^?5 instead of E^27, nations; 
rtOBp instead of D^ft z/ears; nfe} instead of D^J, c%s ; "W 
instead of IP , from ; "JT^FJ! instead of -"ST?!!, / ie w i// ^o. 

(d) In poetry, several grammatical forms are peculiar. E. g. 
paragogic FT- is suffixed to nouns in the absolute state ; "*- and \ 
are suffixed to nouns in regimen ; "lE- suffix is used instead of 
D- fAem, £/*eir; ^\ and ^Hl- instead of Y»- his ; ^- fern, in- 
stead of "JT?r £/ii?ze ; ]\ and "*- plur. instead of E\ . 

In other respects too, poetic usage gives peculiar liberty. The 
conjugations Piel and Hithpael are sometimes used intransitively ; 
the apocopated future stands for the common future ; the parti- 
ciple is often used for the verb ; and anomalies in respect to con- 
cord, ellipsis, etc., are more frequent than in prose. 

The design of this brief sketch, is principally to awaken in the 
student a desire to make himself acquainted with this deeply in- 
teresting subject, and to direct him where he should go to attain 
the requisite knowledge in question. To pursue the topic here, 
would be premature and out of place. Nor is it necessary, since 
the student can hardly fail to procure at least some of the au- 
thors, who have been mentioned above as treating of the subject 
before us. 

It may be proper here to note, that in making the division of 
Hebrew o-t/%o; or parallelisms, I have not been always guided by 
the train of accents put upon them. In general, these are an ade- 
quate guide and may be trusted. But they always need a watch- 
ful eye over them ; and, not unfrequently, a departure from them 



204 PART III. NOTES ON NO. XLI. 

is absolutely necessary, in order to preserve the best sense of the 
passage. Where this is necessary, or at least where I have judged 
it to be so, I have not scrupled at all to make such departure. 
It is now a position which needs no longer to be formally esta- 
blished, that the accents are not of ancient and obligatory authority. 
The palpable (not to say gross) mistakes, into which the Accen- 
tuators have sometimes fallen, is a sufficient ground why we should 
be allowed, when exigency demands, to depart from the path 
which they have marked out. I have done so ; but I have done 
it only when I thought it quite necessary, or at least important, 
to do it, in order not to injure the poetry, or the meaning of the 
author. The student, who gains even a slight acquaintance with 
the accents, and with their nature as signs of pause, and as con- 
junctive as well as disjunctive, will be able at once to judge of 
all the departures which I have made ; and to decide in some 
good measure, as to the expediency of them. It must be obvious, 
that the determining of the respective length of em%ai, must some- 
times be a matter of taste, and feeling, and judgment, rather than 
the following of any technical rules. Hence different persons 
may not always agree. I can only say, that I have made no di- 
vision contrary to the accents, without considering the subject and 
examining before I decided. 



No. XLI. Psalm CL. 

j 

If we may suppose, (what at least is very probable,) that the 
first and last o-ti%o$ of this Psalm was sung by the whole united 
temple-choir ; and that the rest was sung responsively , by parts of 
the same; it is easy to see, that the effect must have been ex- 
ceedingly great, upon those who were present at its recital, as 
well as upon the singers themselves. That the choir of voices 
was accompanied by a variety of instruments, is sufficiently evi- 
dent from the matter of the Psalm itself. 

(1) *V?E, Piel, Dagh. omitted in the first b, 73. Note 3. The 
accent is here put on the penult, because a tone-syllable imme- 
diately follows the word, 101. d. In the last line of the Psalm, 



PART III. NOTES ON NOS. XLI. XLII. 205 

the student will see that Maqqeph and Methegh are employed, 
instead of a tonic accent as here. The real tone of the word is 
on the ultimate. — The Dag. forte is omitted in all the succeeding 
derivates of 'irj, f° r tne same reason as above; and they are all 
in Piel Imperative. 

^J, Yah, Jehova, an apocopate form of ^J"^ . — ^J is another 
also, which is common in proper names, and from which PTJ seems 
to be directly derived. — tEHf?^, in his sanctuary, i. e. ye who 
worship in his sanctuary or temple. — 1*5J 5P|Y"}5 , in the firma- 
ment of his glory or might. I prefer the former. Meaning : 
' Praise Jehova ye who worship in his glorious firmament/ i. e. 
ye angels in the world above. — "W, Dec. VIIL, from T37. 

(2) VrhX2$3L t on account of his mighty deeds. — • 2*!^ ^'~>3 , 
lit. according to the abundance of his greatness, i. e. in a manner 
that corresponds with his exceeding greatness, 438. d. and Note. 

(3) 27)20^, lit. stroke. In English we say, blast. — ^5-j prob. 
harp. — 1123 , prob. lyre. 

(4) F\h, small-drum. — vlflft ? the solemn dance, a measured 
step accompanying the music, and as it were beating the time for 
it. — E^?P, on the strings, i. e. stringed instruments. — S|37 , com- 
monly written ^J^, comp. 31. Note 4. ; bag-pipe, bassoo?i ? The 
translation of it by organ, seems to be incorrect. 

(5) VKW ^fm, (37&g in pause), lit. with cymbals of sound, 
i. e. with sounding cymbals, 440. a. — rTCWVJ, of joyful noise or 
sound. A slight variation here makes the difference between this 
and the preceding <tt/%oj. 

(6) n^tp?n ? ]it. breath, i. e. every creature which breathes, 
all which has life. — 'vJO-Hj fem. because of its agreement with 

t t : 

No. XLII. Psalm CXXXIV. 

The title to this Psalm, (and to the others which follow), I 
have printed in small type, in order to distinguish it from the 
body of the Psalm. That this has not long ago been done, has 
been occasioned by following the Masoretic rules of arrangement, 
by which the title is not only confounded with the Psalm itself, 



206 PARI* III. NOTES ON NO. XLIT. 

as to the enumeration of the verses, but actually made a regular 
part of it, even in the train of the accents. As this is surely not 
' distinguishing things that differ/ I have ventured to throw the 
title into a line by itself, to omit the accentuation upon it, and to 
distinguish it from the body of the Psalm, by the mode of print- 
ing it. 

^ v l^??^'! ^P , (in the title), means, either ' pilgrim-song,' i. e. 
song sung when going up, ascending, to Jerusalem, as at the 
yearly feasts, etc., (which explanation will fit several of the fifteen 
Psalms with this title); or, c gradation-song, degree-song,' i. e. a 
song in which one distich gradually advances upon the other, or is 
built partly upon it, by repeating some of its words or thoughts, 
(which explanation fits many o-ri%oi, but not all, of the Psalms 
bearing the title in question.) 

Such are the usual explanations. But may not some light be 
thrown on this word, by referring to the poetry of the Syrians ? 

One of the eight species which they distingush, is J^v^,^m, 
gradus, scalce, of the same signification as ny?Jti • The name in 
Syriac appears to refer to a particular species of metre ; see Ober- 
leitner's Chrestom. Syr. p. 287- But what the metre is, in the 
Psalms entitled fll v37E , (if indeed this title refers to metre,) we 
have not the means of determining. 

(1) n.2n, see ! i. e. attend, hortatory in its sense, in this place. 
« — ^*l§j Imp. Piel, bless, i. e. praise, laud. — > "!!^, here means, 
those employed in the temple-service, as the next a"ti%oq shews. — 
Q^*T£53?n, n who, 412. Note 1.; lit. standing, which is the atti- 
tude of those who are in waiting or attendance, and alert in per- 
forming service. — njn < JTT , 2l J the temple. — iTiT^y}?, plur. masc. of 

'V2 3 322.; by night, Jit. during the nights. Meaning : ' Ye Le- 
vites, ministering in the temple, and keeping the night-watches 
there, praise the Lord !' 

(2) ^Ntp, Imp. of NtSO.— ttJTFp, toward the sanctuary, 428. a., 
i. e. the most holy place where God dwelt ; for toward this the 
worshipper always turned, when he offered up his supplications, 
which is expressed here by f lifting up the hands/ 



PART III. NOTES ON NOS. XLII XLIV. 207 

(3) ^P^, 201. Note.— *M&,fiom Zion, where God dwelt 
in his sanctuary ; in other words, f May the God who dwells in 
Zion bless thee !' — TlW'y , Part, in const, state, 531. The dot over 
the middle tooth of the Shin is part of the Rebhia Geresh, 95. 
No. 11, which is placed on this word. — V"7!^5 D "^?^ which, in 
the usual method of speaking, are the same as to tzSIv, i. e. the 
universe. 

No. XLIII. Psalm CXVII. 

(1) D^M, fern. plur. of HSM, 322. 

(2) -1^, he has magnified.— njjHJ. , for ™?«, 107- 2. ; fidelity, 
faithfulness, viz. in keeping his promises. — ^""^ ■'?> plainly a 
general chorus to the Psalm. 

The whole Psalm is evidently one adapted to be sung at the 
commencement, or at the close, of worship. 

No. XLIV. Psalm CXIII. 

(1) DttrHN, the name, a periphrasis for Jehova himself. Thus, 
" The name of the God of Jacob defend thee,' i. e. the God of 
Jacob, etc. ; and so very often throughout the Scriptures. 

(2) Tp, 120. b. and 201. Note.— *r£«?, Part. Pual. 

(3) "WQp, Dec. III. departure, going down. — vvn^ Part. 
Pual, laudandum. 

(4) D"}, Part. Kal of DT"). — 1T^3, his splendour, excellency, 
majesty. 

(5) 'inm:?, see Part II. No. X.— VPS^n, Hiph. Part, with 
Yodh parag., 211. a. 4.— H?!gb, in pause, Inf. of 2W* ; lit. in re- 
spect to his dwelling. Both words together, ' Who maketh high 
[the place Q*p^] of his habitation,' i. e. dwells in heaven. 

(6) ^BtpEH, Part. Hiph., 211. a. 4. who condescends, who 
stoops down. — D^t&Sj upon the heavens, etc. 

(7) ^17*?, Part. Hiph., 211. a. 4, the final Yodh (which draws 
down the tone) causing the Tseri under D to fall away, 133. — 
a^:, 504. b. 



208 PART III. NOTES ON NOS. XLIV. XLV. 

(8) , qN0Hn 1 ?, Inf. Hiph. with Yodh parag., 211. a. 4. 

(9) W&to', Part. Hiph. 211. a. 4.— njttj, Seghol fern, of 
"'ij?- The whole phrase, f Who maketh the barren woman to 
dwell in the house/ is an euphemism to express the idea of causing 
fecundity; which the next c-t/%o$ clearly shews. To those who 
are acquainted with the peculiar views of the orientals on this 
subject, it will appear nothing strange that this is reckoned as a 
distinguished blessing. Comp. Gen. xv, 2. ; xvi, 1 seq. ; xxx, 1 
seq. ; Luke i, 25. 

No. XLV. Psalm CHI. 

T"7 *? (title), v auctoris, as the critics say, i. e. 7 indicating the 
author; a common method of expressing authorship. 

(1) ^93, ^ m y sou l • Thus could the Hebrew address him- 
self; and thus we imitate him in English. In like manner, Pindar 
addresses himself by cpi'Kov ?rop, cor amicum. — "^5"Jl?j suff. plur. 
of ^7.1?., the meaning is, e my soul, myself,' or, f all my powers 
and faculties.' — OtP , governed by ^75 implied. — IEH't c ^ ? 
440. a. 

(2) VTlft^ Dec. I., his kindnesses, beneficence. 

(3) ^3^ 3 suff. fern. sing, of V® } the fern. suff. "Hr. taking a 
parag. Yodh, (a poetic form). — ^(ft'D*!!! , ^)t t , in pause, for 
*%, 236. c. fern. suff. plural. 

(4) "*3}£r?j suff. plur. of the same form as the preceding. — 
vrit^n, Part. Piel, Dagh. omitted in a, 152. a. 5.; ^- fern, 
suff. referring to B$53- — ™7, Ace. 511. — D^q^ ? ib., used only 
in the plural, and of a peculiar form. 

(5) dSfa, with good of every kind adapted to produce happi- 
ness.— "jIVH?, from ''75, Dec. VI., suffix as in 336. b. ; a doubtful 
word, but probably meaning here senectus, advanced age, as the 

Chaldee has translated it. The Arabic £&, yed, means seculum. 

—tt^nrV}, 3 fern. sing, in Fut. Hith., with "O^ 3 *? for its Nom v 
495. b. This noun has the fern. suff. 'P?- in pause, for ^?-, 
336. in c. and comes from the plur. Q^^TO? ; lit. thy youth is re- 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. XLV. 209 

newed like that of the eagle. Some translate thus; thou renewest 
thy youth like the eagle. If this be the intention of the author, 
one would expect ^P^n/J^, as tTC?. is addressed, which is usually 
feminine. But as E?«v is also masc. occasionally, there can be no 
valid objection to this mode of interpretation. — " J ^?? , viz. as the 
eagle renews her pinions, and thus puts on the appearance of 
youth ; the actual renewing of her age is, of course, out of ques- 
tion. The object of comparison is adverted to by the writer, in 
the same light in which it is commonly viewed and spoken of. 
The meaning after all may be simply, that a vigorous and healthy 
old age shall be enjoyed, like that of the eagle. 

(6) TlbV } lit. the doer of, const. Part., 531.— rhpl'S, justice. — 
^t^Ii D S D Jehova, 554. i. e. Jehova executes justice. — CtoBtjHM, 
and judgment, equity. 

(7) TT^, Fiit. as past time, 504. c. 2. 

(8) DPim, with Daghesh'd Pattahh, 58.— TT>^, const, of Ti«, 
Dec. V., constructed like Participials. — C?!^, dual, indignation. 
Whole phrase ; protracted of indignation, i. e. long suffering, slow 
to anger. — "rprj"^,, abounding as to kindness, 428. 3. 

(9) a^J, Fut. Kal of n^.__-vr^ Fut. Kal of "TO, with 1 
fulcrum, 64. The phrase is here elliptical, H^ being implied after 
"^l, i. e. he will not always retain his displeasure. 

(10) ^S^q?, S uff. plur. of ^n, Dec. VI— »b, Dat. in- 
commodi here. 

(11) n^5 3 Dec. III., from •"!!—*, lit. according to the height. 
— ^^"1"^, towards those who fear him, '3? having here quite a 
different sense from what it has in the preceding a-ri%o<;. 

(12) prrnlSj 521. b. like to the removing, i. e. remoteness. — 
p H n*in etc., i. e. he has separated our sins very far from us ; 
which means, ' he has fully and freely forgiven them/ 

(13) &rr$ 3 521. b. Inf. Piel.— hi f towards.— OTJ1 , Piel Pree- 
ter, 232. b. 

(14) ^T)?"!, suff. state of "^.l. our frame, i. e. of what mate- 
rials we are made; as the sequel advertises us. — "^|, i. e. "!*C| 
"12 j^ 517.; he surely remembers, he recognises well. 

(15) tZ?12^ ;J 415. as to man. — T^ng, as the grass, i. e. short- 

is e 



210 PART III. NOTES ON NOS. XLV. XLVI. 

lived, soon withering away. — V"^J 1? , so he blooms, Fut. Kal of 

(16) ha, 75. a. also 606.— ^W, 405.-^3!, Fut. Hiph. of 
">32, with epenth. suffix, 309. d. 

(17) " li '^rj"T^?"l ^ kindness, beneficence, a sense which this word 
frequently has ; and so liKouoo-vvq, in the New Testament. 

(18) ^&tih m9 with 'injTT? implied before it, taken from the 
preceding <tt/%o?. — Erptt737b 3 to do them, i. e. to obey them. 

(20) Hb "02$, ?/e mighty of strength. — 5 ybtpv, who hearken 
to, 523. 5. 

(21) WT^gP, Part. Piel.— %'2, const, plur. Part., 531. 

(22) njn> - ns >t^?3 ^Tlj?, ending with the same words which 
stand at the beginning ; and which probably were sung as a gene- 
ral chorus. 



It is difficult to conceive of any thing more delightful than this 
hymn of gratitude and praise to God, for all his bounty, his com- 
passion, and his kindness. He who can read it, without entering 
into the feelings and views of the writer by sympathies kindred 
with his, may well suspect that all is not right within him, and 
that his heart is yet estranged from God. 



No. XLVI. Psalm C. 

nililv, (title), of praise. This appellation is probably taken 
from the first o-ri%oq in v. 4. 

(1) TO^nn, Hiph. Imp. of ^""1, shout, make a joyful noise. 

(3) TO?, Imp. of 2H;.— NVT, is, even he is, 469.— N-1PT, 467- 
— ^Dtt?3^ 313. — ^HJN "?"], i. e. we did not £make ourselves]- So 
with the Sept., the Accentuators, our English version, and most 
critics, I interpret this expression. But Rosenmueller and others 
read ib for Mb, and translate, he made us for himself, throwing 
^rTO into the next trr(%oq.— 'l&9 , i. e. 'l®? ^ 3r ™, from the pre- 
ceding <nl%o<;, 562. ; we are his people, because he made us, and 
we did not create ourselves. 



PART III. NOTES ON NOS. XLVII. XLVIII. . 211 

(4) H-JiTT^ with song, i. e. songs. 

(5) VTMBNj his faithfulness, fidelity in keeping his promises. 

No. XLVII. Psalm XCIII. 

(1) "*7^? > 149. reigns, is king.—^^}., Dec. L, with majesty, 
511. 1E?55 being the other Ace. here, which is implied after t^5^. 
Meaning : ' He is all-surrounded with majesty or glory, he is ex- 
ceedingly majestic or glorious.' — ^?7> ni tne second <7t/%o$, im- 
plies a repetition of fWS, 552. thus marking intensity by repeti- 
tion. — "l-Wr^n IV 3 he girdeth himself with strength, as before in 
the case of rfiN?J._ f\3F! 9 3d fern. Fut. of Niphal, from ^13, and 
agreeing with ^5-F 1 , which is fern, and has immutable vowels ; 
the world is made firm. — tolftri f id. from IMD. 

(2) I^Q, lit. from then, i. e. from ancient times, of old; for it 
is parallel with DJirtt * n tne next ^ ne « 

(3) n*nn^ t floods, a figurative term, designating an over- 
whelming multitude of threatening enemies. The repetition in 
the next line, denotes intensity. 

(4) f"^'PP, in comparison with the roaring, 454. The ad- 
jective which precedes this comparison, *"> V 7W, follows below. — 
CH^N, i. e. with £> implied, pn comparison with] the mighty 
xoaves of the sea, Jehova in his lofty place is mighty. Mean- 
ing : ' God in heaven is mightier than all my strong and numerous 
enemies.' After DT^M , D ^ is implied. 

(5) *P£pS, thy testimonies, i. e. thy promises, assurances. — 
ttQ^J, 226.— njM3, Pilel of HWD, 292.— WJ^., before which 
ti?irn;S3 i s implied, 562. For Dagh. in p, see 75. a.—- JfjW? 
^^,for a length of days, i. e. for a long time, for ever. 

No. XLVIII. Psalm LXV. 

n^5^>r, (title), to the overseer, i. e. the chief chorister, or 
leader in the music ; to him who has the direction or oversight ; 

comp. 2 Chron. ii, 2, 18. ; xxxiv, 12.— In "TO0 "™T$, (so also 

in Psalms 67, 68, 87, and "TttW T»# in Psalms 41, 66, 83, 108.), 
one of the words is supposed by Rosenmueller, Gesenius, and 



212 PART III. NOTES ON NO. XLVIII. 

others, to be pleonastic ; as in the phrases ^^a DT^^Tl } sapientia 
intellig entice ; bvttTTP, prceda spolii ; rniFlH PfiJ} \ 3 statutum 
legis ; Q*H^5? ^V. , servus servorum. But with this explanation 
I do not feel satisfied. I should much rather believe that *Wp has 
reference either to the kind of poetry of which the Psalm is com- 
posed, or to the kind of music in which it was to be sung, or to 
something which was concerned with the manner of its recital. 

(2) »~Pp 1 tJ7 , lit. to thee is quiet expectation, i. e. to thee I look 
in quietude, confiding in the aid which thou wilt afford. — '"^'J, 
i. q. njjyffi, 41. a noun with the ending HJ- which is equivalent to 
n\ or rH-. — n 'bn F) } {, e. F]bTlF) ^77, from the preceding phrase. 
— "JV^S^ i. e. who dwellest in Zion. — ""03, viz. the vow made in 
the day of calamity, and to be paid after deliverance from it. 

(3) yft&, thou who hearest.—Tl$ } from 1? , unto, 407- b. 
— " lC ??, flesh, noun collective here, for men, and so it takes a verb 
plural. 

(4) ri313? ^27 , iniquities, the word ^^f7 signifying matters 
of, and matters of iniquity means iniquities. The form of ex- 
pression is pleonastic. — "^P ^*?^> ar e stronger than I, 454:. Note. 
— SD^ttJSp, as to our transgressions, 415. and 416. b. — D135p?^l, 
thou dost cover them, i. e. thou dost forgive them. 

(5) nrpn nips, i. e . nn^ n#friH uar\ t happy they whom 

thou wilt choose, or, happy the people whom thou choosest, q. d. 
happy they who are, like Israel, thy chosen people. For the 
ellipsis of "TOVj , see 553./.— \S$\ ^DPfP, [whom] thou makest 
to approach nigh [to thee], that they may dwell, etc. ; i. e. whom 
thou admittest to worship in thy temple, where thou dwellest, and 
who thus enjoy near approach to thee, q. d. are treated as confi- 
dential or beloved friends. The forms of expression are elliptical ; 
out of poetry we might expect, "P^V! DrrjjTTp. — T7.^Q, i.e. the 
temple. — nj5^, 205. — ^^^, with the happiness, or, with the 
enjoyments. — ^V-^H ^7P, before which H11DS is to be repeated, 
562. [with the enjoyments] of thy holy temple ; E?7P in this case, 
making the adjective, 440. b. 

(6) mS'T!3, i. e. terrible to the enemies of God's people. — 
p7^, in justice, viz. to the heathen. — ?p23?P, dost thou respond 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. XLVIII. 213 

to us, viz. to our prayers ; or, by deeds which strike terror into 
our enemies, dost thou, in justice, answer our supplications. — - 
nB^O, the object of the trust or confidence. — \1^I2, const, plur. 
of l^fr, one of the very few nouns which permit a furtive vowel 
before 1 at the end of a word; see 120. b.—W) V"5?"M^l2, the 
extremities of the earth and sea, means, the most distant parts of 
the world, or, all the world. — D^rn, from P*^"), agreeing with 
E^p implied, 562. ; in English we may say, even the most dis- 
tant, viz. extremities. 

(7) jv?», Part. Hiph. of ^3.— ^b^ , by his power; for the 
change of person here, see 565. a. — ^P?3, he [[God] is girded, 
Niph. Participle. 

(8) 0^9, Part. Hiph., who stilleth, composeth.—V&U? , Dec. 
III., the noise, the tumult. — D^ES? 1*^01, even ^ e tumult of 
the nations ; an epexegesis of the preceding expressions. 

(9) rfl^jj, (nVl2p63.), Dec. XII. ; from HJ!ff7._-?^nhS«D, 
for P see 506. ; thy miraculous deeds, or, thy wonderful exhibi- 
tions. — "lpa > ^^, lit. egressus inant, the outgoings of the morn- 
ing, here put for the oriental regions. — ^"?.?^ an d of the evening; 
but here is Zeugma, as the critics call it, ^SID ( tne appropriate 
name for the setting of the sun at evening) being here implied, 
568.— r?7D, reg. Fut. Hiph. from 73"J, 263. Rem. 2. 

(10) npj?B7.Fn, Polel of p*\W, with suffix.— H2n 9 7 nuch, abund- 
antly, as an adverb here. — E^n '$ *7$. t the river of God, either 
the river which God provides, or, a great river, 456. e. — "7^ 3 is 
full of. — H^p-H ]5~^ f when thou hast thus made provision for 
it, viz. by watering the earth abundantly. 

(1 1) njjn f I take as the Inf. abs. of Piel, and standing for H-n 
TTl'^, 517- thou dost copiously irrigate, dost cause abundantly to 
drink. — f"IJ13 3 Inf. Piel of the same construction as »"Pn. — rnVT^, 
plur. with Yodh omitted, 336. Note 5. 1.— D^^na, with the 
drops, viz. of rain, naipDJ 1 ), Polel of 2*123. 

(12) ftlteV, thou crownest, i. e. thou adornest. — ^TO^Sto PB$ , 
lit. the year of thy goodness, i. e. the year in which thy good- 
ness has been displayed, 424. — *P/?|?7Efi etc., and wherever thou 
goest, there are exuberant fruits of thy bounty. 



214 PART III. NOTES ON NOS. XLVIII. XLIX. 

(13) n*1M?, Dec. XI., from nN3, the pastures of the desert 
distil l$n. (implied). — '*$), and with joy do the hills gird them- 



(14) O v ?|) , from *")?, Dec. II. d.; the pastures are clothed with 
flocks, i. e. greatly abound in them. — ^?, with grain; also written 
"IS.— TOSJYliT., Hithpolel of 3W1, ffoy s/iowf; Fut. as present, 
504. b. ; and so of ^tf} (Fut. Kal. of T*#), which follows. 

No. XLIX. Psalm XL VI. 

rrip N?^V, of the sons of Korah, i. e. ^ auctoris. Who these 
persons were, is not altogether certain. The probability is, that 
they were the descendants of Korah, who perished in the rebel- 
lion, Numb, xvi, 1 seq. It is certain that all his children did not 
perish with him, Numb, xxvi, 11. It is certain also, that some of 
their descendants were among those who presided over the taber- 
nacle music ; see 1 Chron. vi, 22. comp. vs. 31 — 33, where it ap- 
pears that Heman was one of these overseers. In 1 Chron ix, 19, 
we find Shallum, a descendant of Korah, mentioned as one of the 
overseers of the tabernacle, and it appears that he belonged to 
a family called Korahites. These last are mentioned also, in 
1 Chron. xxvi, 1, and 2 Chron. xx, 19, as being among those who 
were engaged in religious music. Heman (mentioned above) 
seems to have been quite a distinguished person, in the time of 
Solomon, 1 Kings iv, 31. From all this, it would appear that 
there were men of eminence among the Korahites, in the time of 
David and Solomon, and the probability is, therefore, that the 
Psalms inscribed rnp ^?, belong to them as authors. These 
are Psalms 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 84, 85, 87, 88. In style, 
they differ very sensibly from the compositions of David ; and 
they are some of the most exquisite of all the lyric compositions 
which the book of Psalms contains. The title was probably affixed 
by some editor of a later age ; who knew only the general report 
that the Psalms in question belonged to the sons of Korah, and 
could obtain nothing certain, as to the individuals who were their 
respective authors. — ma •J?, plur. only; found also in 1 Chron. 
xv, 20. Gesenius, ' a key in music ;' Rosenmueller, c a musical 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. XLIX. 215 

instrument/ The former seems more probable; comp. 1 Chron. 
xv, 20. with v. 21. Does not ri^Qv^ mean treble in v. 20. in 
distinction from iT^EE?, bass, in v. 21. ? If rnftbs? be elliptical, 
for rnft?2? 'P, the voice of maidens, it may very naturally de- 
signate the treble. 

(2) ^2^?, Dat. commodi. — 1^1, our means of strength, i. e. our 
defender. — HVIXj}, from n ^?, Dec. I., because the first Qamets 
is immutable. — TJT??, Dec. XII. — NSEja, Part. Niph. masc, agree- 
ing with n "Jt^ fern., by a constructio ad sensum, see also, 490. ; 
inveniendus, ad manus, promptus, at hand, of easy resort; W2E3 
may be construed, also, as having ^JT f° r ^ ts subject. 

(3) Y"™ "I^T?, Hiph. Inf. of n^ft; therefore we will not fear, 
in respect to a change of the earth, or, when the earth changes, 
i. e. should the earth change, and sea become dry land, and dry 
land sea; "si fractus illabatur orbis." — E*H<7 tQIB^ and should 
the mountains quake in the midst of the seas, i. e. should the 
deepest foundations of the world be convulsed with earthquakes. 

(4) ^^HJ ^rjjj let £the waters] roar tumultuously , the first 
verb (from n *?n) being rendered adverbially, 533. ' Should the 
mountains shake injWSj^ with the swelling thereof V 'viz. of the sea. 

Thus far the figurative language employed by the writer, de- 
scribes the commotions and threatening troubles of the times in 
which he wrote. He proceeds to open a more cheering prospect ; 
not that of angry and overwhelming waves, but that of fields wa- 
tered by copious streams, which gladden the country where they 
flow. 

(5) ""TJ?, Qhere is] a river or stream. — 1 S J $*?, means the chan- 
nels or rivulets deduced from it, (in the oriental manner,) and di- 
rected as convenience may demand. — E^O '£? ^¥ , lit. the city of 
God, viz. Jerusalem ; but the whole is figuratively said. — EHp 
^tfP, the holy dwelling place, 440. b. — nyjj??, in the midst 
of her, viz. of the city. — *1j"J3 *"^57, at the approach of the 
morning, lit. at the turning towards, i. e. very early, in good 
season, opportunely. 

What was before figuratively portrayed, is now more literally 
described. 



216 PART III. NOTES ON NOS. XLIX. L. 

(7) I'lp^ 70?, he uttered with his voice, where some com- 
plement in the Ace. after ]H? seems to be necessary, viz. QV'H } 
thunder, or some like word; comp. 1 Sam. vii, 10.; Ps. xviii, 14. 
— V^^J ^EJJ, the earth melted ; an exceedingly vivid description 
of the powerful effects of Jehova's mere word of rebuke. 

(8) n'lNS^ njnv Jehova of hosts, i. e. God of the hosts of 
heaven. 

(9) to 1 ?, Imp. of tyb;. — nSbSTO, const, pi. of nb3H?$, Dec. 
XI.— Dttn^S, w^o made, caused.— rmXD , from TOttf.— Vl^a, 
viz. in our land. 

(10) But now, how different the scene ! rPStptt t he maketh to 
cease, etc. — H!£p ^V , even to the remotest parts of. — Y-ift, he 
cutteth off, viz. the sharp or wounding point ; or, he cutteth in 
sunder. — i"TlvJ3?, the chariots of war. 

(11) ISnn, Hiph. Imp., addressed to the enemies of God's peo- 
ple ; cease your vain efforts. — ^"p, Imp. of 3HJ, an d know, that I 
have the sovereign control of all. — m " 1 ^, from DT") , 181. Note 2. 
— ^7? j P r ob. interlude, viz. with instrumental music; so the Se- 
venty, htdypaXfAa^ an instrumental chorus; perhaps from WvD or b ?D, 
to lift up, to elevate, viz. the instruments of music, in this case. 

No. L. Psalm XXIX. 

(1) Ev^ ^^, ye sons of the mighty, or, ye sons of the gods, 
an honorary title of nobles and princes; comp. Ps. lxxxix, 7- Some 
understand it of angels, in both places. Sept. vlohq k§iwv, the sons 
of rams, i. e. lambs ; and so all the ancient versions, with Houbi- 
gant, making E^bN the plural of ')& ; a most singular example of 
failure in taste to perceive the beauty and meaning of poetry.— 
ton etc., ascribe to Jehova glory and power. 

(2) 123tp "Tto^ 9 the glory due to his name, i. e. to him, 424. — 
^TFP ^THO^ , in sacred ornament, with holy splendour, viz. 
dressed in sacred, splendid attire, becoming those who approach 
the presence of the Majesty of heaven; see 440. a. 

(3) n yrj blp 3 here means thunder ; as the sequel plainly 
shews. — D^n '¥ j above the waters, viz. the waters which are in 
the firmament, the waters in the clouds ; comp. Gen. i, 7- — bN, 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. L. 217 

TOSH, the glorious God, 440. a. ' Jehova is above the mighty- 
waters/ expresses his supremacy, or his omnipotent control. 

(4) HSS^ lit. with strength, i. e. strong, powerful, 442. — 
~ 1 '7'7?^ lit- with majesty, i. e. majestic, 442. 

(5) D > T > 5^ *">5^, describes the effects of the lightning, in rend- 
ing the lofty trees on the mountains of Lebanon. — pXWH, from 
1^4 to be white, and so, White-mountain. 

(6) OTiTJ-j he maketh them to leap, i. e. the mountains ; refer- 
ring to the rocking of them under the awful reverberations of the 
thunder. — ^^, poetic form for ?. — 1^"]^, the Sidonian name of 
mount Hermon, (see Deut. iii, 9.), which the poet here employs 
as a diction somewhat more ornate, perhaps, than the common ap- 
pellation. — E^S"]""!^, the young buffalo, or, the young wild ox. 

(7) rhnqb nsh, divideth the flames of fire, I refer to the 
scattered lightning, which so frequently appears in a thunder 
storm. Rosenmueller seems to think that it means, ' the thunder- 
bolts striking fire/ 

(8) b^lT, Hiph. Fut. as Present, from Vin, 504. b.— B^TjJ, 
Cadesh, the desert through which the Israelites passed, on their 
way to the promised land. 

(9) nftjM,from-nb}M.— nSbjM bbhn^ maketh the hinds to 
bring forth. It is said, that parturition is exceedingly difficult 
among this species of animals ; and hence the effect of the thun- 
der is represented as being very great, by this description. The 
simple meaning is, that the terror occasioned by the thunder, pro- 
duces the effect in question, which is often a well known conse- 
quence of terror; see 1 Sam. iv, 19. — rmisp. H^Dy, ^ ^ a V s oare 
the forests ; which marks the effects of lightning on the trees, as it 
strips them of their bark and foliage, or scorches both so as to de- 
stroy all power of vegetation. — ib^n^, and in his palace, which 
appears to be the original meaning of the word ; temple is a se- 
condary meaning. In Ps. xi, 4. and xviii, 7- the word seems clearly 
to be used for palace in heaven ; which recent commentators sup- 
pose to be here meant. — "i'S ? every one, all of the E^b$ \3S, v . 1. 
the suffix i- being pronomen multitudinis, as in Jer. vi, 13. ; Ps. 
liii, 4.; Is. xv, 3. (written HbS), and often elsewhere. — ^P^, de~ 

Pf 



218 PART III. NOTES ON NO. L. 

dares, speaks forth, celebrates. — ^123, i. e. WD3, his glory, 
viz. tlie glory of God. So De Wette ; but Rosenmueller quite di- 
versely, thus ; c In his heavenly temple, throughout the universe 
0'?), the voice of Jehova speaks his glory ;' i. e. the thunder 
proclaims the divine glory in heaven above, and throughout all 
the universe below ; an expression, which, if correct, is at least 
a aval heyopevov of the Scriptures. 

I must differ from both of these commentators. In vs. 1, 2. 
princes and nobles, (so I understand it,) are called on to praise 
God, on account of his power and glory ; to praise him in their 
sacred, splendid attire, H7tJpVT1 , 7n2j J i. e. garments such as those 
put on, who worshipped in the temple or tabernacle, in Jehova's 
immediate presence. Then, after recounting the ensigns of Je- 
hova's power and glory, in wielding the thunder and directing 
the lightning, the poet resumes his exhortation ; let every one in 
his palace (temple) celebrate his glory ; the same idea as in the 
first part of the Psalm, except that here is a little amplification, 
1v3 instead of O^N ***&• In this way, the sentiment is natural 
and easy, and is consentaneous throughout. The simple meaning 
is ; ' Ye who worship in his temple, princes and people, cele- 
brate the glory of him, who wields the thunder and lightning of 
heaven.' 

(10) ^JPJ, sits enthroned, comp. Ps. ii, 4.; ix, o.; lv, 20. et al. — 
b^S^b^ on the flood; comp. Ps. ix, 5. ND^b J*}3l$J, thou art seated 
on the throne, a clear case of similar usage ; comp. also V signify- 
ing in, with regard to state or condition, as Is. i, 5. ; Ps. lxix, 22. ; 
xlv, 15. By '^ft here, I understand (with Gesenius and De 
Wette) the ocean or flood above the clouds or firmament; see Gen. 
i, 6, 7« Meaning ; ' Jehova, who wields the thunder, also directs, 
controls the flood of water, which the thunder-cloud bears in its 
bosom.' Rosenmueller : ' Jehova who controlled the flood of Noah, 
still directs, and always will control, the tempests of the skies.' — 
^^1 etc., Jehova will sit enthroned as king for ever. 

(11) IV , lit. strength, metaph. protection, strong hold, i. e. pro- 
tector, the abstract being put for the concrete. — Dl/t^S, with 
safety, with a peaceful state. 






PART III. NOTES ON NO. LI. 219 

No. LI. Psalm XXIII. 

(1 ) ^¥1, Part, of n ?"J, my shepherd. David, who was in early 
life a shepherd's boy, and who probably retained, ever afterwards, 
a vivid remembrance of his former condition, here uses the charm- 
ing imagery which is borrowed from pastoral life, to designate the 
tender care that God had exercised over him, and the kind pro- 
vision which had been made for all his wants. Comp. John x, 
11—14.; Is. xl, 11. 

(2) «#•[ rnN?3, in pastures of tender herbage.— ^T^T., he 
maketh me to lie down, lit. applied to quadrupeds only ; but the 
connection here demands a verb of this nature, because the object 
of it here is the flock or the sheep. The whole denotes, repose, 
quietude, a state of safety. — JTllTD^ ^ . waters of stillness, still 
waters, in distinction from rapid torrents, where there might be 
hazard in watering the sheep. — ^/.D?*!, 'H«J means, to lead out, 
as a shepherd does his flock, in order to water them. 

(3) ^S^E?"! ^?2 3 he restores my life, i. e. he invigorates, re- 
animates me, when weary and fainting, viz. from being exposed to 
the heat and drought of summer ; for the pastoral imagery is still 
continued.— WE, Hiph. Fut. of nn^—pTf^^ ) lit. in the 
paths of rectitude, i. e. in the right paths, 440. so that I may not 
wander from the fold, or fall into danger. — 1Etp )V^l,for his 
name's sake ; fully expressed in Ps. lxxix, 9. 1j§*p TD3 "E3T"^, 
on account of the glory of thy name, which in the next hemistich 
is expressed by *T£$ 1V^ . So 1 Kings viii, 41. The word OW 
is often used in the sense of glory , fame , honour, reputation. De 
Wette however interprets thus : ' Because thou art named Je- 
hova/ The sense is well, but the usus loquendi can hardly be vin- 
dicated. 

(4) Tjbw, Fut. of tjb;_Wfl, const, of m, Dec. VI., 363. 4. 
— J"0.^V? = ^y? '?, shadow of death, death-shade, i. e. darkness 
such as exists in the tomb, total and frightful. Meaning: 'Though 
I may be placed in circumstances apparently most hopeless and 
distressing.' — 3H, 149. — ^fp^ 7 , thy rod, here the shepherd's crook, 
by which he guides, restrains, and controls his sheep. — "^I-^^^p^?, 



220 PART III. NOTES ON NOS. LI. LII. 

thy staff, the same as the preceding ^3?? '> save that here the use 
of it as a staff is indicated, there the use of it as a crook. No 
translation can well express the delicacy of the original. — ^EJQ-"-* 
Fut. Piel, 41. and 63. give me comfort or support, or, cheer me; 
i. e. the idea that God will be his guide and support, cheers him 
when in the deepest, darkest valley of affliction. 

(5) ^Y\ t for me, 475. 2. b. — ^1^ TJJ, in presence of mine 
enemies ; i. e. such is the provision thou hast made for my peaceful 
and happy support, that I can sit down and feast, in the presence 
of my enemies, without any fear of disturbance. — Ffi'®! , lit. thou 
hast made fat, i. e. thou hast anointed my head with oil; an ex- 
pression borrowed from the oriental custom of copiously bedewing 
the head with perfumed oil, on festive occasions, see Matt, xxvi, 
7- ; Ps. xlv, 8. (7) . ; Eccles. ix, 7, 8.; Amos vi, 6. — n ^P:' ubertas, 
abundance, overflowing, from HVJ . The idea is that of a plen- 
teous banquet, in which the cups are filled to overflowing. 

(6) Vnnar], l n f. with suff. from :?#}, 247- a.—TVp\ JTQ e tc, 
i. e. I shall be permitted, in circumstances of quiet and plenty, to 
worship before my God, all my days. How earnestly David de- 
sired the privilege of worshipping in God's house, is sufficiently 
testified by many psalms, which shew the very high value that 
he put upon this privilege. 



No. LII. Psalm XXIV. 

If we suppose this Psalm to have been composed, and sung, at 
the time when the ark of the covenant was brought up to Zion 
by David, (2 Sam. vi, 1 seq. ; 1 Chron. xv, 1 seq.) ; or on the oc- 
casion of the temple being dedicated by Solomon ; and that it was 
sung responsively by priests and people, (as bishop Lowth conjec- 
tures, Lect. xix.) ; the beauty and force of it cannot fail to be per- 
ceived and felt by the reader. If the inscription is to be trusted, 
David was the author of the Psalm. This may have been the 
case, even if it was first sung at the dedication of the temple ; for 
David, who had prepared ample materials for this building, may 
have prepared a song also for the occasion of its dedication. 



PART II r. NOTES ON NO. -LIT. 221 

(1) PTN17X?, the fulness of it, viz. of the earth, i. e. whatever 
it contains, all that is on it or in it. — '5*3, a poetic appellation, 
clearly a synonyme here of V^*?. — ^5 *^&\ 432. a. 

(2) ^791 Q ^- -> ne founded it upon the seas, i. e. he (Je- 
hova) built the earth upon the seas. Such is the Scriptural re- 
presentation of this subject. See Ps. xviii, 16. (15.), where it is 
said, ' The channels of the waters (the sea) were presented to 
view,' and the parallel hemistich responds, 'The foundations of the 
earth were disclosed;' i. e. the channels of the great deep are the 
foundations of the earth. So Ps. cxxxvi, 6. e To him who spread 
out the earth upon p3?) the waters.' Comp. Prov. viii, 29.; 2 Pet. 
iii, 5, 6. Thus were the Hebrews accustomed to think and speak, 
respecting the construction of the earth. That it is not philoso- 
phically correct, i. e. that water does not constitute the interior part 
of our globe, cannot well be shewn, perhaps not even rendered 
probable. But if it could be, there would be no more objection, 
surely, to the sacred writers' speaking of this subject more homi- 
num, than there is to their saying, that ' the sun rises and sets,' or 
to our daily affirming the same thing. Nothing can be more mani- 
fest, than that the Scriptures were not given to teach astronomy, 
geology, or any of the physical sciences ; and, consequently, when- 
ever any thing connected with these is the subject of affirmation, 
the common popular modes of expression are every where em- 
ployed by them. So, even after all our knowledge of the New- 
tonian principles of astronomy, and our universal assent to their 
correctness, we still continue to speak of the sun, as rising and 
setting ; and who is deceived or misled by this ? We ask for the 
sacred writers only the same liberty of employing language, of 
which all other writers avail themselves; and when this is granted, 
the case needs no further explanation. 

n^lS'J, Polel of "pS, the accent falling on the penult Sheva, 
and making a Seghol of it, 148. a., occasions the vowel, that would 
otherwise be written under the first 2, to be dropped, i. e. instead 
of ^P?"^., we have the present form. The sentiment of this o-t/%o$ 
is altogether parallel with that of the one which precedes it ; 
TpfJ? being here employed as a synonyme with Q S E?!. 



222 PART III. NOTES ON NO. LII. 

(3) But who can presume to approach the presence of this 
great and glorious God ? Who shall draw nigh to him, and wor- 
ship acceptably before him? — njnyin2^ the mount of Jehova, 
i. e. Zion where the ark of the covenant rested, and where God 
dwelt. — "^"[lJ D PP21, lit. in the place of his holiness, i. e. in his 
holy place, 440. in his sanctuary. 

(40) D?5? ^, lit. the clean of hands, "|?3 const, of T??, like 
the Latin, integer vitce scelerisque purus. Adjectives are often 
employed in this manner, 423. — ^2- ""^j an d pure of heart, is 
the same construction. Both are figurative expressions, denoting 
innocence of heart, and blameless external deportment. — NtM"Mv 
ItpM H^lpVj a locus vexatus, as the critics say. Stange, and after 
him De Wette and Rosenmueller, make it the same as Ex. xx, J, 
W\\f2 n*VT nti-n% Sbn «b, making l&m to mean not merely 
him, i. e. Jehova, but also the name of Jehova ; a forced con- 
struction, which can not well be supported by any example. 
What can 1E7?3 .... ^?, to utter .... him mean? Much more 
easy and natural does it seem to me, to interpret it thus ; Who 
has not sivorn to a falsehood intentionally , i. e. 1U7EJ95, 559. So 
the Syriac, G"L_a^ulZ5, cum animo suo ; and the Chaldee nearly 
so, in damnum animce suce. In rendering ^E?} sworn, the verb is 
taken elliptically , as a constructio prcegnans ; and surely if we 
consult Ex. xx, 7- and Deut. v, 1]. there is no difficulty in this. 
^^P\ EtPVlS is implied ; but then this is accordant with frequent 
usage of the like nature, in regard to NtM ; while the construction 
of the critics above named, is foreign to all usage. Sentiment : 
' Who has not intentionally called on God to witness that which 
is false.' So the <ni%oq which follows explains it, ' Who has not 
taken an oath to a falsehood.' 

(5) ^E??, he shall receive, not without a design of paronomasia 
here. He who W^M Mv, has not sworn to a falsehood, *^?, shall 
receive, etc. The paronomasia appears sufficiently evident, al- 
though I do not find it noticed by the critics. See 571. d. — 
njTT? 5 ! , favour ', kindness. 

(6) ntj this, viz. such is the generation etc.; i. e. such are the 
acceptable worshippers of him who created the world, and to 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. LI I. 223 

whom it belongs. — "VR, genus, race, class. — ^^H"^, not without 
paronomasia again with the preceding word,, 571. a. or d. — T P??, 
lit. thy face, i. e. thee, 475. 2. b. — Those who seek thee ^PV^l, 
are Jacob, i. e. true Jacobites, or Israelites. So Rosenmueller and 
De Wette. I prefer the elliptical construction, ^PV.l for ^HPh? 
-^P5-, as it is expressed in Ps. xx, 2. ; xlvi, 8, 12. 

(7) y&Vp etc., may be construed thus : 'Be ye more elevated, 
so as to make a more spacious way for the entrance of the glori- 
ous king/ (so De Wette, Lowth, and many others) ; or, c Be ye 
elevated, be ye built lofty and magnificent, in a manner worthy of 
the residence of the King of kings/ (so Rosenmueller) . Whoever 
examines the architecture of the eastern palaces and temples, and 
sees what boundless expense was laid out upon their lofty and 
magnificent porticos, will probably feel, that the second mode of 
interpretation is the most significant. If David wrote this Psalm, 
in anticipation of the building of the temple, the words thus un- 
derstood would be full of meaning. Whoever wishes to understand 
them in their extent, let him survey the plates which present us 
with views of the Egyptian temples at Thebes and other places. 
Our text so interpreted means thus : c Raise high the porch of the 
royal palace ; make it worthy of the king of heaven and earth.' 
Comp. what is said on the appellation, Sublime Porte, in Part. II. 
No. XLVIII. — Q*py ^nrjSlj permanent, eternal doors, in contra- 
distinction, (it is natural to suppose,) from the mutable and move- 
able tabernacle, which had never obtained a permanent station; 
comp. 2 Sam. vii, 7, 8. ; 1 Kings viii, 13. — WDJl, that [the glo- 
rious king^j may enter. 

(8) 'T'P'P, interrog., who this? i. e. who is this? The gates 
seem to be represented here, as asking, with astonishment, Who 
is the glorious king, that is about to enter? To which the poet 
replies, "T^l ^-S? ^Vp*\ •> Jehova strong and mighty, i. e. Jehova 
potentissimus, 438. d. and Note. — ^^H?^, mighty in battle, 
which epithet refers, no doubt, to the many signal deliverances 
from their enemies, and victories over them, which Jehova had 
wrought for the children of Israel. 

If we suppose our Psalm to have been sung, when the ark of 



224 PART III. NOTES ON NOS. LIT. LIU. 

the covenant was introduced into the temple, in which was Je- 
hova's throne, and where he dwelt, we may see an appropriate 
reason why the portals of the temple are required to be lofty 
and magnificent. Jehova was, indeed, in a peculiar sense, to 
enter the temple. The ark itself seems to have borne the name 
of him who sat enthroned upon it, (see 2 Sam. vi, 2. comp. Num. 
x, 35, 36.); so that there was a double propriety in the expres- 
sion, that Jehova was to enter the temple gates, when the ark 
came in. 

(9) The call for a lofty porch, worthy of Jehova's place of re- 
sidence, is repeated, in order to make the deeper impression ; 
•W etc. 

(10) The question and answer also are repeated, for a like 
reason. In the answer, we now have nifcO^ ^J^lo instead of 
-n^l t^-TS? njiTj as before ; the idea being substantially the same 
in both cases. — W5Q fcWl, he, viz. Jehova, and none other, is the 
king of y lory. 

It is not improbable, that this Psalm, (and also many others,) 
was sung responsively by the temple choir; in which case the 
dialogue form of it would be strikingly represented. On the sub- 
ject of such responsive singing, see Lowth, Lectures on Hebrew 
Poetry, Lect. XIX. ; and for the present Psalm, comp. Lect. 
XXVII. 

No. LIII. Psalm XIX. 

The inscription assigns this Psalm to David ; nor is there any 
good reason to suppose that this assignation is not well-grounded. 
God, as revealed in the book of nature, is the subject of vs. 2 — 7- ; 
God, as exhibited by the purity and excellence of his revealed 
precepts, is the subject of vs. 8 — 15. 

Rosenmueller (1st edit.), De Wette, and Stuhlmann, suppose 
this Psalm to be a compound of two different ones, because of the 
two subjects which it presents, and the difference of parallelisms 
between the first and second part. But in the recent edition of 
Rosenmueller's Commentary, he says, et olim in hanc incidimus 
conjecturam Quae tamen parallelismi diversitas qualis sit, 



PART III. NOTES ON NOS. LIU. 225 

non indicavit vir doctissimus, (De Wette). Sed missam jam /ad- 
mits istam conjecturam, ut minime necessariam." May the can- 
dour so ingenuously displayed here, be extended to many other 
" conjectures/' which this able critic still defends ! 

(2) D^tpn t the heavens, i. e. the heavenly bodies, by their mo- 
tions, splendour, and utility, declare the power and glory of their 
Maker. — S^fTjn, the firmament, i. e. the expanse above us, in 
which all the heavenly bodies appear to be placed, and to move ; 
see on Gen. i, 7.— T*B, Hiph. Part, of TO.^T; nbVK, the 
work of his hands, i. e. the work performed by him, hands being 
used only as a symbol of operative power. Meaning : ' The ex- 
panse of heaven exhibits evidence of divine, creative power and 
glory.' 

(3) Divj DVj day unto day, i. e. one day unto another. — 
y^l, Hiph. Fut. of y^l, proclaims, utters, 504. b. — * 1 ?^, speech, 
declaration. — 'TIT., Piel Fut. of ^JH, used as a general Pre- 
sent, 504. b. — ^^J, knowledge. Meaning: ' One day proclaims 
as it were to another the power and glory of the Creator ; one 
night shews to another knowledge respecting him ; and thus the 
celebration of his praise is continued through all successive time, 
without intermission. ' The idea is exceedingly beautiful, and the 
personification of day and night, successively handing down to 
each other the declaration of the divine power and glory, is worthy 
of the pen of David. ' It is wise to give all nature a tongue, when 
God is to be praised.' 

(4) "pM etc., lit. there is no word, no speech, their voice is not 
heard, i. e. the heavens and the firmament, day and night, (which 
declare the glory of God), do not indeed utter articulate speech, 
or pronounce words ; they have no voice which addresses the out- 
ward ear. 

(5) D 3lL i- e. V., Dec. VIII., with suffix; sound, Sept. <j>6ly- 
yoq ; Symmachus, ?%o?; but the Chaldee has H-HE^ extension, 
which Rosenmueller follows, because the usual meaning of 1(2 is 
line, measuring-line. But how does this parallelize with the fol- 
lowing DH /?a, their words? — DfTbE, Dec. X., from nbp 9 Nom. 
to ^5J, implied. Meaning : ' Although the natural world has 

Gg 



226 PART III. NOTES ON NO. LIU. 

no articulate, audible voice, yet it every where proclaims the 
power and glory of the Creator.' Before '?5, at the beginning 
of this verse, ?) tamen, attamen, seems to be implied, 561. a. — 
^?^r etc., De Wette renders, where the tabernacle of the sun 
is stationed ; certainly with great liberty in respect to the original 
Hebrew. I find here the beginning of a new strophe, and there- 
fore clear indications that a new verse should commence here. 
The writer, having spoken of the heavens at large, now proceeds 
to select the most magnificent object in them, and to present it. 
The course of thought is : ' The heavens declare the glory of God, 
etc. In them hath he placed a dwelling Qtabernacle] for the sun ; 
which, above all the rest, makes such a declaration.' So the se- 
quel shews. 

(6) S^iTj etc., and he is like a bridegroom going forth from 
his bridal chamber, i. e. the sun comes forth, all splendid and 
glorious, like the bridegroom in his richest attire, adorned with 
splendid jewels, and gold-embroidered garments. To apprehend 
the force and beauty of this image, one must be conversant with 
the nuptial dresses of the east, which are magnificent almost be- 
yond description. — tt^EJJ etc., (Fut. Kal), he exults, like a mighty 
man, to run the race ; another image to portray the sun, drawn 
from a different source. One characteristic of heroes, greatly ad- 
mired by all the ancients, was, swiftness in the race. This touch 
characterises the motion of the sun in his daily course ; as the fol- 
lowing verse shews. 

(7) *"f«!?^> Dagh. omitted in P, 73. Note 3. ; from [jme] ex- 
tremity. — Ernsp, plur. of n5?(7 # , the extremities of them, viz. 
of the heavens ; describing the apparent circuits of the sun. — 
iriEns } from his warmth, i. e. from his warming and cheering 
influence. 

Having thus set forth the testimony which nature gives, and 
in particular which the sun her most splendid work gives, to the 
power and glory of its Creator, the Psalmist now comes, (which 
is very natural for every mind deeply imbued with piety like his,) 
to the contemplation of God as revealed in the Scriptures. 

(8) n 'j n 1 ^T^ 1 , the law of Jehova, i. e. the Scriptures.-— 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. LIII. 227 

^?? -""^^P, (Part. fern. Hiph.) reviving or refreshing the life or 
soul ; the expression, no doubt, is figurative here, and means, ' to re- 
fresh or quicken the soul in a moral sense.' " Converting" is not 
agreeable to the usus loquendi. — HDDSD^ true, free from all error. 
— ^-Ojl, 148. a., the simple, i. e. the inexpert, the uninstructed. 

(9) The same sentiment, or nearly the same, repeated in dif- 
ferent words. — D'HtE'), right, i. e. not erroneous or deceptive. — 
fTJ?, pure, clear, having no obscurity, and so — ^T^, enlighten- 
ing the eyes ; all in a moral sense. 

(10) nirTj riS*^ piety, reverence for Jehova. — iTTini?, pure, 
free from spot or blemish. — ^4 TT^?.^, permanent, lasting, uni- 
form, not being now one thing, and then another, like human in- 
stitutions or observances. — TJH^ ^P7S* cure- altogether right, i. e. 
are all accordant with each other, correct and true in union or 
unitedly. 

(11) D^H^nP.n, Part. plur. Niph., the article is used as a pro- 
noun, 412. Note 1. referring to D^StpD. — TSE, than pure gold, 
differing therefore from the common ^T\\. — E^D-I^ ■'"'rP, lit. than 
the distillation of the honey comb, i. e. than the honey which flows 
from the comb; before jW| ?P, Dec. XIII., P compar. is implied. 
Both of the images here are intensive ; the first being taken from 
one of the strongest passions of our nature, viz. the love of riches ; 
the second, from one of the most delicious of all substances in 
respect to taste. 

(12) The operation or good effect of these ' statutes/ is next 
described. — Q|, moreover, also, i. e. besides being very precious, 
thy precepts are of an illuminating nature. Obedience to them 
also is crowned with great reward; — D*nptt?2j, in the keeping of 
them, Inf. with suff. etc. 521. and Par. XXIL— IT}, 144. 

(13) riWOtp etc., who can comprehend his errors? i. e. who 
can remember and reckon up their extent and their aggravations ? 
— HYIFIpilQ, from hidden [errors"], i. e. from those which escape 
my notice or recollection. — ^j?.?, cleanse me, make me pure, i. e. 
forgive me in respect to such offences. 

(14) Not only so, but interpose, and e keep back thy servant 
from arrogant offences/ CH-JO, i. e. from offences knowingly and 



228 PART III. NOTES ON NOS. LIU. LIV. 

presumptuously committed. — D CT^> m pause, for O/TN, see 264. 
3. Fut. with Pattahh. — ^Ti?.?"! etc., then shall I be free from 
much transgression. 

(15) ffcrj 1 ?, 507- b.—y\^\, 475. 2. ft^-^S, my rock, i. e. 
my defence, my defender. — V^^"], and my vindicator or re- 
deemer, i. e. either, who liberatest or redeemest me from the 
power and penalty of my sins, (referring to the context) ; or, who 
hast delivered me in times of trouble and danger. 

A truly beautiful Psalm, scarcely excelled by any in the whole 
compass of the Hebrew lyric poetry, in regard to those qualities 
which please and delight a pious reader. May every one who 
studies it, and who can look with rapture on the evidence of the 
power and glory of God, which the book of nature discloses, be 
able to turn with still higher satisfaction to the brighter evidences 
of these and other attributes of the Divinity, which are exhibited 
by the holy Scriptures ! 

No. LIV. Psalm XV. 

It seems probable, that this Psalm was composed by David, 
when he brought the ark up from the house of Obed Edom, and 
placed it in the tabernacle on mount Zion, 2 Sam. vi. 

(1) "1SQJ and ?2)*po lit. who shall dwell, sojourn, i. e. who shall 
be an acceptable, habitual worshipper there ? The answer fol- 
lows. 

(2) llvin^ walketh, i. e. conducteth, demeaneth himself. — "^""H, 
and speaketh, the Part, only (in Kal) having such a signification. 
Piel is the usual conjugation, which has such a meaning. — ^$$, 
for J" 1 ?.?^, 107- 2. — "D^Y^ with his heart, i. e. who sincerely, 
heartily, speaks truth. 

(3) 'T], lit. runs about, metaph. goes about slandering. — '37, 
with, used sometimes before a noun signifying the instrument, in 
the same manner as Z.—^nvi^, f or 'WTJn 1 ?, 336. Note 5. 1.; 
lit. his associates. — NE73, utters. — ^"Ift, suff. of SYIJJ. 

(4) DS^D, Part. Niph.— n^j, "j but.—^rf?, Hipk Inf. of OTl, 
(and not for VTO^p, as some have taken it) ; lit. to do evil. Ro- 



PART III. NOTES ON NOS. LIV. LV. 229 

senmueller and De Wette, malum facer -e, in the moral sense. But 
how will this consist with what precedes and follows ? Therefore 
I construe ^*]H < , to do that which is disagreeable, unpleasing. 
So 3n and <"T3n a re often taken, specially before EPD^. Most 
evidently the writer could not design to represent the man as ac- 
ceptable to God, who is sworn to do moral evil, and perseveres in 
it. Ad sensum the word is rendered, in our English version, to 
his own hurt. — *1$J=' ! T , $J, 63. from "TIE. — tepj etc., his money 
he does not loan on usury, or with usury ; for this was forbidden 
among the Hebrews, see Ex. xxii, 25. ; Lev. xxv, 36, 37- — TntE^ 
etc., he takes not a bribe, etc., i. e. as a judge he will not be bribed 
to condemn the innocent. — toVSI, Fut. Niph., shall not be moved, 
i. e. he may always dwell in thy tabernacle ; or, he shall never be 
in danger. The Part. nttt^ is here in the const, state, before the 
pron. "?&, comp. 432. h. 

No. LV. Psalm I. 

(1) t^NH v^tfta, beatitudines illius viri!— ^271 fc$b, walks 
not } i. e. is not conversant with, is not familiar with, does not 
demean himself agreeably to. — ^JJ?, in pause, standeth not, i. e. 
does not await the company of sinners, does not associate with 
them. — StplbM etc., and does not sit in the seat of scorners, 
indicates a still more intimate familiarity with the wicked than 
the preceding <rr/%o$. — E^7, those who make a mock at religion 
and virtue. The repetition of the same idea, (the same with a 
slight variation), in the three different <tti%oi, means ; ' Who 
does not in any way whatever unite with, or act like, the 
wicked.' 

(2) DM ^ 3 but if, i. e. ' happiness to the man who does not 
walk,' etc. but if in the law of the Lord, etc., £thenj| happiness 
to him ! — VYTin^, and on his law will he meditate, etc. — DOT* 
*TJ;i?'], % day and by night, i. e. continually, habitually. 

(3) '^t't1 j f or he shall be. — ^7?, channels, canals, rivulets, 
with allusion to the method in which trees are made to nourish in 
the East, by means of being watered by little canals. — V1375, from 



230 PART III. NOTES ON NO. LV. 

f"l3? 3 Dec. VIII., in its season, in due time, when one expects it, 
thus subjecting the owner to no disappointment. — via"! f from 
'5J, with Vav fulcrum in the ultimate, 64. — ^31 etc., either, e*Z£ 
which it [the tree] may produce shall come to maturity ; or, all 
which he undertakes shall prosper. Usage will support either 
interpretation. In order to avoid tautology, I prefer the latter ; 
as do Rosenmueller and De Wette. The former is followed by 
the Chaldee, Faber, Knapp, and others. 

(4) ]?'N ;, not so, i. e. it shall not go thus prosperously with the 
wicked.— ON ^ , but.—Sf'tt = "W&1% , but [he shall be] like 
the chaff. — ^n^ Fut. Kal of HI?, with epenthetic suffix; for 
% "i^«,see478. 

(5) ^K?t " ', shall not stand, shall not abide, i. e. shall not 
continue to hold their place, or to keep in it. — to5>tt?K>2, in judg- 
ment, i. e. when [God] judges ; which may relate either to this 
world, or to the next, or to both. The proposition is general. — 
□^t|rp, "J nor, 558. Note. — n*T372, i. e . sinners [shall not stand] 
with or in the assembly of the righteous, they shall not be asso- 
ciated with them, nor partake of their rewards. 

(6) ?T)\ (like the Greek jivS<tku), approves, is pleased with, 
regards with favour; comp. in Ps. cxliv, 3.; Amos iii, 2.; Nah. 
i, 7- — ^Tvva manner °f l{f e > the course pursued, viz. course of con- 
duct. — "QN^ but the way which the wicked pursue, leads to 
destruction, perishes. So De Wette, "Fiihrt zum Verderben." 
The way itself (an abstract thing) cannot be said literally to 
perish ; but the counsel, designs, and efforts of the wicked, (which 
constitute their way, i. e. manner of life) , may well be said to be 
frustrated, ("QN.H); and this seems to be the meaning of the 
writer here. Comp. Matt, vii, 13, 14. ' Broad is the way which 
leadeth to destruction,' etc. 



The general sentiment and nature of this Psalm probably oc- 
casioned its being placed at the head of the whole collection, 
when it was completed. There are no internal marks, which 
decide either as to the time or the author of the composition. 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. LVI. 231 

But with great propriety does it occupy its present place ; and it 
may be justly said to contain an epitome of all the Psalms which 
follow. 

No. LVI. Psalm LXXXIV. 

n\FI3n" ,37 , on the Gittith, prob. a musical instrument, named 
either from Gath, where it may have been invented, or particu- 
larly used ; or else from ^? a wine-press, because it was an in- 
strument used in the vintage-music. — rTnp"\337, see above, No. 
XLIX. 

(2) n'lTT., fem. pi. of T7J, agreeing with T-O^^, which, 
though plural, is used for the tabernacle ; so occasionally else- 
where, e. g. Ps. xlvi, 5.; cxxxii, 5. 

(3) n5pp3, 182. b. 4. — nrv?g 5 pines, pines away after. — N 2T? 
"HKE^lj my heart and my flesh, i. e. I, or rather, all of me, 475.2. 
c. d.—Vp_) , cry out, reg. Piel of ??"}, 262. 

(4) "fiS^ sparrow. — ?P, i. e. IP ™^g. — ^ , Dat. commodi. 
— ^Prpn^p f thine altars, not literally, for on such a place, con- 
stantly frequented by worshippers and blazing with fires, the 
swallows would not build their nests. The meaning is, place of 
the altars, in near connection with the altars, i. e. on parts of the 
temple, the roof, etc. Or the passage may be understood in an- 
other way, viz. with N27?H implied ; \Jet me find~\ thine altars, 
Jehova, my 'T?, etc. So Rosenmueller ; but I prefer the first 
method. Vs. 2, 3. shew that the writer was excluded from the 
privilege of frequenting God's house ; v. 4. that this privilege was 
granted even to sparrows ; the conclusion is not stated. But the 
<TiwTzri<nq is sufficiently intelligible and forcible ; viz. ' Wilt thou 
grant to sparrows a privilege denied to me V How much the 
writer prized this privilege, he proceeds to tell. 

(5) Blessed, etc.— ^^H^ Dagh. omitted in the first b, 73. 
Note 3. Meaning : e So happy are they, who enjoy the privilege 
of continually frequenting thy temple, that they are constantly 
lifting up to thee the voice of praise/ 

(6) ft-ft, i. e. iVtfc ^m, whose glory, 553. d.— ?)?, in 
pause — nibpJi? etc., i. e. f in whose hearts are the ways, viz. the 



232 PART III. NOTES ON NO. LVI. 

ways which lead to Jerusalem, where the temple is, and where 
the pleasure of worship can be enjoyed. Before nibpp one must 
understand ^tpt? , as also in the preceding clause. — E^? :^ > ^ n 
whose hearts, a plur. pronoun suffix,, but meaning the same as the 
sing, one in ib, where the pronoun is generic. Sentiment: ' Happy 
those who glory in thee, and who cherish an affectionate regard for 
the ways which lead to thy presence.' 

(7) The writer now turns his view to those, who are (as it 
were) in the act of travelling in the ways mentioned, in order to 
visit Jerusalem. Such is the nature and object of their journey, 
and of their hopes, that no misfortunes by the way will render 
them unhappy. Apparent evils will be converted into blessings. 
— ^^ etc., should they pass through the valley of Baca, i. e. of 
tears or weeping. Baca is the proper name of a place ; but here 
it is figuratively put, for calamitous circumstances. The tears 
shed in this barren, desolate valley, will become fountains of 
water, to quench thirst, and afford grateful refreshment. — X$Q 
VTWtjyj they will make it p. e. Baca, tear-valley] a fountain. 
That is, be there troubles and wants ever so many, God will re- 
lieve the one, and provide for the other. Yea, he will abundantly 
provide ; Ell etc., yea, with blessings the early rain shall cover 
pt], viz. the valley. That is, ' those who travel through Baca, 
shall find this dry unfruitful valley full of springs, and clothed 
with verdure by timely rains ;' a delightful image of the kindness 
vouchsafed to those, ' in whose hearts the ways of Zion are.' 

(8) b?rrb^ v^nD^ i. e . with strength continually increasing as 
they proceed ; " crescit eundo." — n ^ , Fut. Niph., i. e. p^N 
each] shall exhibit himself, make his appearance in Zion ; none 
shall stop short in the journey, before it is completed and his 
wishes are attained. 

(9) nytfcjn .... nvnw, i mp . pa rag. 207. 

(10) ^I^T^P, of thine anointed one, i. e. of David whom thou 
hast anointed to be king. — **?.? before ; this word may be rendered 
face, or person ; but in sense it is expletive. 

(11) ^gVlpn, Hiph. of *)QD; standing upon the threshhold. 
— n^lTO rather than dwelling. 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. LVII. 233 

(12) )K], grace, favour. — TDJI* an d abundance, i. e. abundant 
favour, 440. For such a sense of ""f^?, see Ps. xlix, 17- ; Is. x, 
3. ; lxvi, ]2. et al. — O^^L? D> -? 1 ?' n {> to those who live in an 
upright manner, who behave themselves with integrity. 

No. LVII. Psalm XC. 

The title attributes this Psalm to Moses ; nor is there any 
thing in the contents of it, which would render it improbable that 
he was the author. If we suppose that it was written by him, 
near the close of life, and after a great part of the adults, who 
came out of Egypt with him, had fallen in the wilderness, in con- 
sequence of having incurred the divine displeasure, we shall see 
a force and beauty in the language which are peculiar, and well 
become the pen to which they are attributed. 

(1) P^, dwelling-place, but here in a secondary sense, refuge. 
— ^4?, Dat. commodi, for us, i. e. for men such as we are ; for so 
the extent of the following words direct us to construe this, inas- 
much as ""^"TJ Tn§ cannot be said of any one generation, and 
therefore not of that merely which was contemporary with Moses. 

(2) ^Tvjj in pause, 146. lit. were begotten, or were born. So 
the creation of the mountains is sometimes expressed ; see a simi- 
lar expression respecting the dew, in Job xxxviii, 28, 29.; and 
also respecting Wisdom, Prov. viii, 24, 25. — ^?"ini5!, or thou hadst 
brought forth, viz. formed, created ; a figurative mode of expres- 
sion, of the same nature as the birth of the mountains above. — 

'30"! V~!^, the earth and the habitable world. When conjoined, 
as here, ^M means, orbis habitabilis, olKovfAevq, and so it is often 
taken for the inhabitants of a land. But in many cases, there is 
no difference between V"T3^ and ^3ft ; — ^ ^3*$> thou art God, 
i. e. always the same, always God ; there is no change, no failure, 
incident to thee. 

(3) But how different is man ! Thou turnest him N3T"737 ? lit. 
until he is crushed, i. e. until he becomes dust, or to dust. ?0?\W , 
return, i. e. to dust; comp. Gen. iii, 19. 

(4) Exceedingly diverse from this is the condition of the ever- 

Hh 



234 PART III. NOTES ON NO. LVII. 

lasting God ; who is not affected by any succession or length of 
time; — ^ etc., but with him, or before him, a thousand years, etc. 
— 7"ft3J")M D*)" 1 ^ like the day of yesterday, like yesterday. — ^ 
^V-l, when it is past ; a vivid image, descriptive of faint impres- 
sions on our minds, which is proverbial in the mouth of even the 
multitude.— nn^tp«1 :; i. e . nn^tpW^ ^ being brought from 
the preceding a-rt^oq, 562. — nT>bs^ during the night. The ques- 
tion has been disputed, whether the Old Testament makes men- 
tion of only three watches ; or (like the New Testament, Mark 
xiii, 35.) has four. The former is altogether the most probable ; 
see Judg. vii, 19. The object of this comparison is like that of 
the preceding one, viz. to represent as it were the nothingness of 
a thousand years, in respect to the eternity of God. Rosenmueller 
construes this verse differently, and (as it seems to me) with a loss 
of the antithesis which the poet designed to present. 

(5) OnttHT^ lit. thou dost overwhelm them, i. e. thou dost 
sweep away them [men], as with a flood. — Tfp ^V? 9 a sleep are 
they, i. e. they vanish, or pass away, like sleep, or as a dream. — 
*PO. they shoot up, spring up, like grass in the morning, i. e. like 
grass when the dews of night have refreshed it. 

(6) V^t* ^ut. Kal of Y^, [which] is blooming in the morn- 
ing. — *V?rj1j (in pause), and shoots up. At evening ^^^?, one 
cuts it down, 500. — ^5^1, and it withers; a beautiful image of 
the brevity of human life, often repeated by the sacred writers. 

(7) ^b^S , for we are consumed, 181 . Note 2. 

(8) frttf, Prset. Kal 2 person, from JT$, and put for *?*#, 
293.—^$^ 41. and 63. suff. of &bv , pass. Part, of nbv ; lit. 
our hidden thing, i. e. our secret sin. — T?? *">^*f?, in thy light, 
i. e. in full light, thou hast fully disclosed our secret sins. 

(9) ?\2% } turn, revolve, pass away or vanish, because of thine 
indignation. — Our years ^^-P, come to an end. — *^^, as, poet. 
f or 2 , — n^.rj f a sigh, a murmur, or a thought ; another very vivid 
image of the brevity of human life. 

(10) ^ni2tp ^), as to the days of our years, Nom. abs., 415. 
— BrjS_, lit. in them are seventy years. — m-1^2 EN*), and if by 
reason of strength, i. e. robustness of body, there be eighty years. 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. LVII. 235 

— DSrH"!, from 2Tfl f yet is their pride, i. e. that in which men 
boast. — 1)&, sorrow, wretchedness. — t}, from t*fi, [[their pride] 
passes aivay. — W*rj } swiftly. — nsysn, Fut. P ara g« 1 plur. of PfiV ; 
and we fly away ; another image of the rapid decline of our days. 

(11) ■?'!P ,, " ,, ^ etc., who knoweth the power of thine anger, in 
reference to the destruction of human life, when the divine dis- 
pleasure is incurred. — ^7"?? f^ft":-"?^ and according to thy 
fear, i. e. in such a manner as becomes due reverence toward 
thee, [[who acknowledged, ?"!T*' V ?B7|, thine indignation ? Mean- 
ing : ' Who knows the extent to which the power of thine anger 
may punish; and who acknowledges, with becoming reverence, 
thine awful indignation ? ' In this simple way of interpreting, 
this difficult verse becomes quite plain. 

(12) V1M1 ]3, 50 make us to know, teach us. — J"na^7 , to com- 
pute, number ; i. e. make us so to reckon upon the brevity of hu- 
man life. — ^5J1i Fut. Kal of fete, that we may acquire. — 2^7 
^pn, lit. a heart of wisdom, i. e. a wise understanding, 440. 

(13) nasi©, Imp. parag., turn, viz. from thy wrath. — V}tt - "T37, 
how long ? A <riuitv)<rif standing for, c How long wilt thou delay 
to have compassion?' 

(14) ^iJSQ, lit. in the morning, i. e. soon, early, speedily. — 
"^^, during alL 

(15) n*\72>^2 } according to the days, i. e. make us glad, for as 
long a time as thou hast afflicted us. — FPDX& 9 i. e. i"T13tp3, like 

rto? , 559. 

(16) ff^p, Fut. Niph. of nWl-^Spb^, thy works, viz. of 
deliverance, aid; Mom. to n *fJ~, 489. But other copies make 
*F^t?tj sm g- — ^HiP-I-j an d thy 9l or y> *• e - tne glory of thy be- 
nignity ; comp. Ex. xxxiii, 18, 19. 

(17) C V 3 , kindness. — «D^!JJ HOTE, the work of our hands, i. e. 
(if we refer this to the times of Moses), our undertaking, viz. to 
reach the promised land.— ^J?^ , Imp. parag. of Polel, render 
stable, secure.—^?.!? , to us, for us ; the sense of ^37 no t unfre- 
quently agrees with that of '*!? and < . 

The wish above expressed is repeated in the final clause, in 
accordance with the earnestness of the writer's feelings. 



236 PART III. NOTES ON NO. LVIII. 

The whole Psalm is acknowledged, by all critics of taste, to be 
one of the most beautiful of all the elegiac compositions which the 
Scriptures exhibit. Who can read it, especially in a season of af- 
fliction, without feeling its power and admiring its excellence ? 

No. LVIII. Pbov. XXIII, 29—35. 

(29) "HN, Soy, woe ; also the interjection ! which is an ex- 
pression of woe. — ^^, sorrow, a paronomasiac form here, for the 
sake of consonance with ^W, 571. a. — E^VJP, from P^, Dec. 
III. in the singular; the plur. has Vav moveable, as if from a 
sing. IJIP. — n^, complaint, complaining. — D^SS?, wounds. — 
EJH, without reason, gratuitously, i. e. without being engaged in 
honourable warfare, without fighting against the enemies of his 
country. The ignoble cause of a drunkard's wounds is, by impli- 
cation, set in antithesis to the noble source of the patriot-warrior's 
wounds. — fWvpn, dulness of eyes, an exceedingly characteristic 
stroke of the appearance of the drunkard, after his intoxication. 
The dull, heavy, (as we say) glassy, appearance of the eye, is 
an obvious and well known trait of intemperance. In the text of 
Hooght, the first b of this word has a Munahh over it, which is 
omitted here because it is an error. 

(30) Now follows the answer to the above questions. — D^PTM^]?, 
to those who delay, to those who tarry long, etc., is woe, etc. — 
l^n '*? , over the wine, or at the wine. Before Q^n^Pl? and 
D^SSv (to those who go, from N122), the words woe, sorrow, etc., 
are obviously implied ; i. e. to such persons as delay, etc. all the 
woes enumerated belong. — ^pHv ("1 fulcrum, 64.), lit. to seek 
out, to investigate, which means here, to taste, to make trial of. 
It seems like an ironical expression, borrowed from the language 
which drunkards employ, when they represent themselves as tast- 
ing, proving wine ; a soft expression in their mouth, to describe 
the excessive drinking of it. — "*T9^?, mingled wine, i. e. wine 
mingled with drugs of an intoxicating nature, wine in which 
such drugs were steeped. 

(31) MTJW-bM^ Fut. apoc. Kal of n*n ; f or tone, see 101. c. ; 
thou must not look, 504, i. — ^3 , when. — DWO^., (in pause), when 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. LVIII. 237 

it looks red; which is the distinguishing trait of wine that is 
approved by the people of the East. E. g. Olearius (Travels) 
states, that the Armenians colour their white wines with log- wood, 
or saffron, in order to make them red. — )£)) ^ etc., lit. when it 
shall present its eye in the cup, i. e. when it shall sparkle (as 
we say) when it shall foam with the gas which is in it, and have 
a lively, sparkling taste. The Hebrew expression has great vi- 
vacitv. — E^^M sfiWE , it goes Qdown] smoothly ; which is 
characteristic of the best of soft wine. — O^E^P^ me ans, directly, 
straightly, i. e. without any impediment, smoothly or easily. 

(32) WHrjN etc., its latter end, the sequel of it, is like a ser- 
pent's bite.—^^, Fut. Kal of ^3, i n pause.— Vh%l, Hiph. 
from B^S, which means to separate, to divide. But the Syriac 
Aphel (Hiphil) of this verb u.*;2ij, means punxit. Hence we 
may render here, stings, wounds. This description of the conse- 
quences of intoxication is exceedingly vivid. I know not how it 
could be made more so. 

(33) '"T 1 " 1 ?, Part. fern, of "l^T, strange women, i. e. prostitutes; 
one of the natural and usual consequences of intemperate drinking. 
— 1^?*!, et animus tuus, i. e. thou thyself, 475. 2. c. — H'DSrjJn, 
perverse things ; another natural consequence of the same beastly 
vice. 

(34) ^5^? , like one who lays himself down, i. e. in order to 
obtain sleep. — 2?^ ip-r.), in the midst, lit. in the heart. — ^5H, 
prob. mast. By the first image, the reeling of the drunkard is 
designated ; by the last, both his reeling and his extreme danger 
are characterised with a powerful hand. 

(35) ^Sf], Hiph. of n ??, they have stricken me, [[shall he 
say]; for "1$^ is here implied, 555.— VTbn b^ > [ ye t] I felt 
not the pain, i. e. they have stricken me when I was insensible to 
the wounds, and could make no efforts to escape them. — 'WEPrj',, 
they have thrust at me, "'■fi^TJ '^ , [[when] / knew it not. 

So much for complaint, on account *of the beating and wounds 
which the drunkard had received in his broils. But all this does 
not wean him from his cups. No sooner has he finished the com- 
plaints, which his pain at first occasions Rafter he has awaked from 



238 PART III. NOTES ON NOS. LVIII. LIX. 

intoxicated sleep, than he again thirsts for the fatal cup, and asks ; 
— Y"" 1 !?^ ^HQ , when shall I rouse up? an exquisite stroke deline- 
ating the inertness, lassitude, and drowsiness, which are not yet 
shaken off, and under which he is now impatient, because they 
keep him from his cups. — *TP^ i. e . fpDlN VIE, when shall I 
add? when shall I again? 533-.-J 1S#|ff8 , Piel Fut., Dagh. 
omitted in p, 73. Note 3. ; — ^3- epenth. suffix, referring to VI 
wine. — *TO yet more ; i. e. the first enquiry of the person, who 
awakes from his intoxicated state, indicates an impatience to re- 
peat his draughts. What can be more to the life than this? 

No. LIX. Job IV, 12—21. 

(12) > ?^1, now to me. — ^?^ : , (in pause), was a matter secretly 
brought or disclosed. And mine ear received VQV? , a whisper, 
respecting it or of it ; i. e. it was whispered, q. d. secretly com- 
municated to me. A preparation by the speaker for the narration 
which follows, and well adapted to excite attention. 

(13) In the thoughts iTttVJJJRjSj [[which arose] from the visions 
of the night, i. e. in a dream, or nocturnal vision ; as the following 
<tt/%o$ shews. — bb£5, 520. and 521. a. 

(14) "Wjl?, came upon me, N^JJ in a like sense with TJl?> 279. 
— 3m., lit. the multitude, here put for bb, all. 

(15) nrn, for a spirit. The hair of my flesh "lSD-F], was 
stiff with horror ; a most vivid image of fear and alarm. 

(16) i£3p_, viz. rpn._ mss, Hiph. of ^Jv— Wl$,, its 

countenance. — nyiEJ^ a form, image only, was before my eyes; 
i. e. he could not, on account of terror, look on it steadily enough 
to recognise what its features were; he only saw an indistinct 
form ; all graphically expressive of terror and astonishment. — - 
vlpj 77^/2^ lit. silence and a voice, i. e. a low voice, a whisper, 
569. ; finely adapted to increase the awe and solemnity of the 
whole. 

(17) ( Shall mortal man be more just than God V — EN ? ne, in- 
terrogative. ' Shall man 05| in pause for ""^f!) be purer than 
his Maker?' 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. LIX, 239 

(18) V7!237?j i n his servants, i. e. those who are more imme- 
diately employed by him in heaven, as the following <nt%o<; shews. 
— And to his angels he attributes n^nplj folly, error, i. e. com- 
pared with his own infinite perfection. 

(19) *]*$, how much less ; so Rosenmueller and Gesenius, sup- 
posing it to stand for ^3 *)&?.. The sense is good; but we may 
come to the same idea with a less violent ellipsis, or at least, by 
one which is every where practised in poetry; i. e. by simply 
carrying forward V-QQ1 **' from the preceding verse, we have a 
plain idea, viz. *)**, 'surely then, [he will not confide in] those 
who dwell in houses of clay,' etc.; see 562. — *&%, irreg. const, 
plural of f"l12l . Houses of clay is a vivid image of the frail and 
perishable nature of human bodies. There seems to be a refer- 
ence in this also, to Gen. ii, 7- ; iiij, 19. ; but it is not absolutely 
necessary to suppose this. — D 7^ • • • • "^ ~ > whose foundation 
is in the dust ; an additional evidence of great frailty and of a pe- 
rishable nature. — DW^T., lit. they crush them, viz. men who 
dwell in houses of clay, etc. But the verb has an indefinite Nom., 
and is here employed in a passive sense, i. e. they are crushed 
before the moth; an additional, most vivid image of the frailty 
of man ; see 500. Note 2. Rosenmueller and Gesenius construe 
EP3r ,, ?J?7, as the moth, sicut tinea, and appeal to 1 Sam. i, 16, as 
a confirmation of this meaning. But as this is a very doubtful 
sense of ^$1 ; and as the Hebrews familiarly say, f are smitten, 
scattered, crushed, dispirited, etc., \2Er3, before an enemy;' I 
understand the phrase in a like sense here. ' Men are crushed 
before the moth ;' i. e. the moth, insignificant and harmless as it 
appears to be, has power to crush them ; a more vivid image than 
the other, while the usus loquendi is equally well preserved. 

(20) ^"3?f *" 1 l2^j from morning to evening, i. e. in a day, in 
one day, in a very short space of time. — ^^ISJ'j Hoph. Fut. of 
flD?, 261. in e. g., and 146. — CTEft? ^ <*£Q , without any one con- 
sidering. — 0^£ is a Hiph. Part, of END, and is a constructio 
prazgnans, implying 2>7. , animum, after it; and *5Q C- ^ means, 
to consider. The meaning is, suddenly, i. e. before any one has 
time to consider or to think. In the same manner, the Hebrews 



240 PART III. NOTES ON NOS. LIX. LX. 

use 3HJ S7 ? one knows not, for suddenly, unexpectedly. The 
whole verse is exceedingly animated. 

(21) "VQ, ecce, lo. — D^ D 1 J T' Ht. ^eir excellence |~ which is] 
in them; but the pron. ES i s redundant, 544. — 37®?, Niph. of 
^P?, lit. is torn away, viz. by violence, an intensive description 
of the sudden and violent manner in which human glory and fan- 
cied excellence perish, or are wrested from the possessor. — Nv] 
HMn^, lit. but not with wisdom, i. e. men die before they have 
made any great advances in knowledge and understanding ; an- 
other trait which strongly indicates their frail, perishable, imper- 
fect state. 

The implication of the whole is this : ' How can man, so frail, 
so short-lived, so ignorant, and so erring, presume to be righteous 
before God, or to plead his merits there !' The whole picture is 
drawn with a master-hand, in colours so vivid and so skilfully laid 
on, that he must be destitute of all taste for painting of this na- 
ture, who is not deeply penetrated with a sense of its beauty and 
excellence. 

No. LX. 2 Sam. XII, 1—7- 

The student will find an account of the occasion which gave 
rise to this beautiful parable, in the history of David's conduct, 
chap. xi. and in the context which follows the parable itself. 

(1) Mtf, 457. a.— n™, for nnx, 142. a. and 144.— B&n, 
plene, for Eh , Part, of tt?n, 270. 5. 

(2) r\?nn, 403. d. 

(3) ^V?!, where ^"J is written in the usual form of the Part, 
in verbs 127. — ^T^, nothing at all. — EN *»3, except. — n?BJ?, 
fern, of 7toJJ. — TJJTOl, Fut. Piel of nyi, with suff. n-.._.VlB», 
of his morsel, viz. of bread, from -H?, Dec. VIII. c. — nritpri^ 
did it drink, Imperf., (as also the preceding v^NW), 504. c. So 

also, nstpn which follows.— nns, na f or n?s, 107. 2. 

(4) W?T3 , lit. way, journeying, here for traveller, i. e. ellip- 
tically for W?J1. ®^., 548. b. — vKHTpl, and he spared, i. e. he was 
sparing, he refrained. — .JTltt73?7, to dress, to provide. — ^H, who 
had come, 412. Note 1. 






PART Iir. NOTES ON NOS. LX. LXI. 241 

(5) ")TO, apoc. Fut. of nnn. — n'W *n, lit. aZire is Jehova, 
i. e. as Jehova liveth, — as surely as Jehova liveth ; an oath of the 
highest nature. — njZJ']5 ^3 , it is certain as Jehova lives, that a 
son of death, i. e. condemned to death, shall the man be, who has 
done this, 444. d. 

(7) E^Sn nrnS, thou art the man; i. e. Thou art the man who 
hast done this, viz. who hast acted in a manner which corresponds 
with the conduct of the rich man in this parable, and which may- 
be justly compared to it ; thou art the man, who hast wronged 
and oppressed the poor, and taken from him that which was very 
dear to him and which was rightfully his ; thou, by thine own 
declaration, art the man, who is worthy of death for the crimes 
which he has committed. 

It may be seen here, that according to the laws of interpreting 
parables, one principal point is the aim of the speaker, viz. to illus- 
trate the oppression and wrong which David had done to Uriah ; 
while all the other circumstances of the parable are added, merely 
for the sake of verisimilitude and concinnity. 



No. LXI. Judg. IX, 6— 20. 

(6) * 7??21, possessors, inhabitants. — P'N UV , by the ilex, near 
the ilex.— 2BB, Part. Hoph. of 5S3, planted. 

(7) *1*!3, with an indef. Norn., 500. a. 

(8) O 1 ?^ ^Tibn, 514. rf.— nO^B, mdl-kha, the points are 
adapted to the Qeri rOvD, which is the Imp. paragogic; for such 
a form, see 212. 5. 

(9) ^Y^tFvj *v interrog., 152. d. 2. which, however, supposes 
that the following n is pointed with Qamets. And this should be 
the case ; for no analogy explains the Hhateph Qamets here, and 
the word should be written either M^irjiJ, r ^Vlt^. — "l^y 
^j by which, through me. — DTT^N •*n^5 > : , they honour God, 
i. e. God is honoured, etc., 500. Note 2. which seems to refer to 
the oil used in consecration, as in Ex. xxx, 24, or to the oil which 
was mingled with cakes presented in sacrifice, as in Lev. xiv, 10, 
12, 21, 27, etc.; and to the perfumed oils used on the head, and 

i i 



242 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. LXI. 



parts of the dress, etc., in the East. — "^V V^b } to wave over the 
trees, i. e. to reign over them ; which is here designated, very ap- 
propriately to the nature of the king, by waving over them. 

(12) ^7?, Imp. fern, of ^b^ ._£]«, pronoun fern., see 165. e. 
— ^"1^?, the points are adapted to the Qeri, viz. ^^, fern. Imp., 
see in 212. 5. 

(13) ^^nn^ as before in v. 11.— D^Vg mb'QTl, which 
gladdens Elohim ; Dag. omitted in ft, 152. a. 5. The reference 
here is to the use which was made of wine, in the libations, 
etc. which were presented to the Deity, and to the common use 
of it by men — ^3v, as before. 

(14) T^n, the buckthorn, or bramble.—- rf?Q , 89. 

(15) D^ntpft E-Tf]^ ye will anoint me, i. e. constitute or make 
me king, which was done by the ceremony of anointing ; 527. a. — 
^T^, 507. b.-J\Dr\, Imp. of nDn ._^b?^ } from ^2, Dec. VIII. 

The explanation of this parable or fable immediately follows 
v. 15. The general object cannot be mistaken. Of courtesy and 
from gratitude, if not of right, one of Gideon's lawful heirs should, 
in the view of Jotham, have been chosen for a leader in Israel, 
seeing that Gideon had wrought so many and such signal deliver- 
ances for them. But the men of Shechem had slain his seventy 
sons, (all of the legitimate ones except Jotham,) in one day. By 
the symbol of the olive and the vine, two of the most useful of all 
the fruit-trees which grow in Palestine, Jotham reminds the men 
of Shechem, that the nobler branches of his family, (although they 
ought to have been chosen as leaders in Israel,) might despise the 
thought of ruling over such men as the Shechemites. The bram- 
ble represents Abimelech ; a truly sarcastic image. The olive and 
the vine could speak of waving over the trees ; but as to the little 
stinted buck-thorn or bramble, which grows only in a barren de- 
sert, how could this wave over them ? And then the irony con^ 
tained in the invitation given by it to the trees, to come and seek 
refuge in its shadow — the ilex and the lofty cedars of Lebanon 
seeking refuge in the shadow of a stinted bramble-bush ! — what 
could be more severe upon Abimelech ? Finally, as the bramble 
assumes to itself airs of haughtiness, when it is invited to be king, 



PART III. NOTES ON NOS. LXI. LXII. 243 

and threatens vengeance to the cedars of Lebanon, in case they 
refuse to pay due homage to this importance ; so Jotham warns 
the Shechemites, that Abimelech, vile and insignificant as he was, 
might be expected to revenge all the slights which he would re- 
ceive from them, after a little while, and that mutual jealousies 
and contentions would destroy them both. 

The whole apologue is not more beautiful for the simplicity 
of its language and structure, than for the eloquence and severity 
of the appeal which it makes to the Shechemites, and the bold- 
ness of the man who dared thus to address the murderers of all 
his father's house. 

No. LXII. Isaiah V, 1—7- 

(1) S3 rrWM, let me sing now, Kal Fut. parag., from ~^XD . — 
" , T , T J <, either, respecting my beloved, or, [a song^J of my beloved, 
taking iTTE? from the next stanza, 562. ^Tl*'? may also be ren- 
dered, friend. The prophet means to represent the case of a 

friend of his, who had a vineyard, and who dealt with it as the 
sequel shews. — T^fi^ before this H^tpM is implied, 562, — 'H'TO 
( == ^' , TJ), friend. — "i^H^?, respecting his vineyard. — 17)Pr|, on 
a mountain-top, or, the summit of a hill ; probably the southern 
aspect of a hill is here meant, a place best adapted of all for the 
production of choice grapes. In Arabic, "HP means hill or moun- 
tain-summit ; and so the Swiss call their mountain-summits, 
Shreckhorn, Wetterhorn, iEerhorn, etc., i. e. Terror-horn, Storm- 
horn, etc. — ]£>lj!jr]S , lit. the son of oil, i. e. fat, rich; comp. 
444. d. 

(2) VTj7|37 ,| : , he dug it up. — And he planted it with the P7P, 
a noble species of vine; at the present day, in a like sense we 
could say, c with the Madeira-vine.' — 'IpP , a tower, viz. for 
the residence of the keeper, and for defence against predatory 
ravages. And he hewed out a wine-vat pp.?..) therein, '13. — ^.1, 
Piel Fut. of rnjj, 286. 2.-~rhtt??b,/ or the production.-— D^^ 
sour, worthless grapes; which after planting the P"?.^, he could 
not well expect. After Q^N^ the word Q^?337 1 grapes, is im- 
plied. 



244 PART III. NOTES ON NO. LXII. 

Here, as it seems to me, the parable properly ends ; as appears 
from the direct address to Jerusalem and Judah, in the following 
verse. It is God who speaks, in this direct address, and continues 
the figurative style, used in the parable itself, the interpretation 
of which could be attended with no difficulty, in regard to those 
who were addressed. 

(3) )2tE?V and ttPfc^ each sing, generic. Judge now between me 
and my vineyard, i. e. judge of the case in respect to me who am 
your God, and yourselves who are my people. 

(4) nito5VTO,75.a.; wkatcanbedone,523.d.—Sz ^TWV tfV], 
lit. and I have not done in respect to it, i. e. which I have not 
done for it. — V^Rft etc., why then, etc., i. e. why, when I had a 
right to expect obedience and affection, have Israel rebelled, and 
rendered me evil for good ? 

(5) nsnflK, Hiph. Fut. of VT r , I will shew—Tib?, acturus 
sum, 529.— r\UH t Hiph. Inf. abs. of "T1D, elliptical for ^DS ^DT\ > 
I will surely remove, 517* — " 1 ??? f Hyjlj Ht.j an d ^ shall be for 
burning, i. e. it shall be consumed, 523. d. — ^^?, is the Inf. of 
Piel.— \ns, Inf. abs. elliptical for ?->?« V" 1 ?, / will surely 
break down, 517* — < m '"t'tI; 50*J. b. and it shall be trodden down. 

(6) m~}^, lit. I will make it an end, i. e. I will make an end of 
it. More probably the true reading here is nfja, wasting, deso- 
lation ; comp. in Is. vii, 19. — "O^. «3, it shall not be dug with 
the mattock, hoed, or, it shall not be weeded, cleaned. — '"^•£1, 
and there shall grow up. — ^?*j, and unto. — T'Ei^nE, lit. from 
raining, i. e. that they shall not rain, 521 . Note. 

Meaning of vs. 5, 6.: e Because I have done every thing for 
Israel which could be done, by way of favour and blessing, and 
they have been altogether ungrateful and disobedient, therefore 
I will give them over to severe punishment, to wasting and de- 
struction.' 

(7) The person speaking is now changed, and the prophet 
himself directly addresses his countrymen, adding a summary ex- 
planation of the whole, in a single sentence. The vineyard of 
Jehova are the men of Israel, and the men of Judah, the plant 
in which he delighted, VSfttP^E? f lit. of his delights. And he 



PART III. NOTES ON NOS. LXII. LXIII, 245 

looked for justice, but behold, murder ; for equity, but lol the 
cry Qof the oppressed]. A most striking portrait of the character 
and conduct of the Jews. The student will not overlook the pa- 
ronomasia here; He looked for ttStpft, and behold I HS^ft ; for 
HjTJ!^ and lo ! n fJ?^f , 570. b. In this figure Isaiah greatly 
abounds, so that it may be regarded as one of the usual charac- 
teristics of his writing. 

In interpreting this parable, Gesenius makes it to end with 
v. 6. ; and in regard to H-)^ D^OT '?2\, he remarks, that e the 
writer has fallen out of his fiction here/ inasmuch as the owner of 
the vineyard is a man merely, and cannot command the clouds. 
Eichhorn also, feeling the like difficulty, has rendered T^^ ■> D 7 
beschwbren, to conjure, to exorcise ! — a liberty sufficiently large. 
But on the ground above stated, viz. that the parable properly 
ends with v. 4. (which seems to be plain from the change in the 
language, for would the prophet's friend, in his song, address the 
men of Judah and Jerusalem?) there is no need of charging Isaiah 
with having forgotten himself in writing — a charge to which he is 
as little exposed as any author whom I could name ; nor of intro- 
ducing an exorcist into the scene. Did the vine-dressers of Judea,, 
(who had so much occasion for timely rains, and for the want of 
which they often suffered much,) seriously believe, that they could 
exorcise the clouds, and make them pour down the rain, or refrain 
from pouring it down ? If not, how can the verisimilitude of the 
parable be kept up by representing the vine-dresser as declaring, 
that he would exorcise the clouds, so that they should not rain ? 
Where is there any parallel to this ? 

The whole parable, and the application of it, is exceedingly 
striking and beautiful. The moral impression is of a high and 
awful nature, and leaves the mind deeply affected with the guilt 
of ingratitude and disobedience, on the part of those who are con- 
tinually receiving unnumbered blessings from heaven. 

No. LXIII. Psalm LXXX, 9—20. 

This exquisite composition is ascribed, in the title, to Asaph. 
But whether it was the Asaph so noted in the time of David for 



246 PART III. NOTES ON NO. LXIII. 

his skill in music, and probably in song, (1 Chron. xv, 19.), there 
is nothing which can certainly determine. Some have assigned 
this Psalm to a period as late as the time of the Maccabees; others 
to the time of Jehoshaphat ; and some to that of Joram ; all with- 
out any definite and satisfactory reasons. On the contrary, v. 3. 
seems evidently to refer to a state of things in Palestine, antece- 
dent to the division of the ten tribes ; nay, one might almost sus- 
pect, antecedent to the time in which the tribe of Benjamin was 
nearly destroyed, Judg. xx, 41 seq. ; for the reference in the 
Psalm appears to be to those tribes which were, at the time of 
writing it, of conspicuous military significance and power. On 
the whole, however, one may assign it to the Asaph who was 
contemporary with David ; and the occasion of it seems to have 
been, some reverse in war which David had suffered, and the con- 
sequent destruction of some part of his kingdom. 

The ardent intercession which the writer makes for his suffering 
people, in the first part of the Psalm, is crowned by the allegory 
or parable which concludes the piece, and which is one of the most 
exquisite of all this species of composition that can any where be 
found. 

(9) 3PE.H , hast thou removed, hast thou transplanted, for so 
the nature of the image requires it to be rendered. — Thou didst 
drive out the heathen [the Canaanites], n3>?t|Pn, Fut. Kal of 
y&2 } with suffix; and didst plant it, viz. the vine, i. e. Israel. 

(10) fjP??, thou didst make room, thou didst remove, viz. 
whatever stood in its way. — ti?1?^^)l, and cause to take root. — 
TV«$r\X5 s slw-ra-she-ha, 68. 

(11) *©?, kos-su, with Qamets Hhateph ; see in Par. I. Pual. 
— nb? [by] the shade of it, the Abl. of instrument.— ^^tl, 
and [by] the shoots of it [were] the cedars of God [covered] ; 
•133 is implied after these last nouns, and is adduced from the pre- 
ceding o-t/%o?, 562. Cedars of God, lofty cedars, 465. e. Rosen- 
mueller and De Wette understand this comparison to mean only, 
' like the cedars.' 

(12) rjTJ^i?, its branches, luxuriant shoots that were to be 
pruned off, as the etymology of the word shews. — DJ, i. e. the 



PART III. NOTES ON NO. LXIII. 247 

Mediterranean Sea, the western boundary of Palestine. — "ina } i. e . 
the Euphrates, the eastern boundary of Palestine ; see Gen. xv, 
18.— n^rpj^V, i. e . it sent forth its branches, n?WF) from the 
preceding <rTt%oq. 

The imagery, thus far, presents a lively representation of the 
flourishing state of the Hebrews, after they had been transplanted 
from Egypt to Palestine. Xext comes the reverse of this pros- 
perous condition ; the imagery being still kept up. 

(13) n v Y$S J why hast thou broken down its hedges, and thus 
exposed it to be devoured? as follows — So that all who pass by 
the way tVH& 3 crop it off, devour it; from '"fj*!}. 

(14) n|J)tr!3*, Fut. Pilel, from the pluriliteral W]3., 300.— 
"*???» out of the forest, or, belonging to the forest. — ^IV? ^T"], 
and the wild beast, lit. the moving creature, of the field ; from 
¥», to move about.— n?2T. , Fut. Kal of HPT. 

(15) Thus far the wasted, desolate condition of the country; 
or, at least, of that part of it which is the subject of complaint. 
And now follows supplication in its behalf. — 2^27, return, turn 
back, viz. from thine anger. — ^4rH, from ^?2. 

(16) >^?51, and protect pt] ; so Gesenius and LXX. Rosen- 
mueller and others, plantain, plant; but with a less certain ety- 
mology. It is Imp. parag. of ??3 . — Protect what thou hast 
planted with thine own right hand. The parallel <nlyj>q explains 
the figure. — pT^Hj i. e. ]3T '5? n ?51, yea, protect the son, viz. 
Israel, often called a son, see Hos. xi, 1. — Tfb nffiSES, whom 
thou hast established for thyself, i. e. to whom thou hast given a 
settled abode in the promised land, and that they may be a people 
devoted to thee. 

(17) n ?3*P' Part. pass. fern, of *H?p ; burned in the fire is the 
vine, etc. The writer, from the strength of his feelings, again 
returns to complain of the desolation which had been made. — 
nn-ID^ , Part. pass, of HD3 ; cut off, cut ? ^.— T?? fTTOB, lit. 
at the rebuke of thy countenance, which may be retained; or we 
may render simply, at thy rebuke, 475. 2. b. — ^J?^\ in pause, 
i. e. the vines perish, or, the Israelites, the C^22 referred to in the 
preceding verse, perish. 



248 PART III. NOTES ON NO. LXIII. 

(18) Let thy hand be tt^N v3? 3 over the man, i. e. let it pro- 
tect him. — W^l ®^> lit- tne ma n of thy right hand, i.e. Israel 
whom thy right hand has planted and established; comp. 424. for 
the latitude of the signification of the Gen. case. — 15 'P etc., as 
in the preceding verse. 

(19) The writer pleads that this supplication may be answered, 
because distresses have not come upon them in consequence of 
apostacy from the worship of the true God ; We have not turned 
back from thee. — 'O'OTJ^, Piel of »TTJ, lit. restore us to life, i. e. 
rescue us from our distressing condition, in which our very life 
is endangered. — ^H^^,for by thy name are we called; another 
motive why they should experience the interposition of God's pro- 
tecting hand. 

(20) Jehova ! £God of] the armies of heaven, ^5^0 > bring 
us back, viz. from our calamitous state, restore us, viz. to our 
former condition. — ^PJ? "^J, Hiph. Imp. of ""flN, lit. make thy 
face to shine, i. e. look propitiously upon us. — n^j&^l., Fut. Niph. 
parag. of 37E7J, and ice shall be delivered, viz. from our troubles 
and distresses. 

The temper of mind, the subdued yet deep feeling of soul, 
wliich the writer exhibits; the delicacy of his touches, the sim- 
plicity of his imagery, the earnestness with which he pleads for 
his people and country, the high sense of dependence on the mercy 
of God which he evidently cherishes, and the unaffected manner 
in which the whole is presented ; unitedly constitute one of the 
most delightful pictures of this nature which was ever drawn. 
May he who reads learn to plead for himself and for others with 
such fervency, and with such a humble yet confiding spirit ! 



OXFORD : PRINTED BY TALBOYS AND BROWNE. 









\* 



>* & 






$ <; 



^ 



*£• e>' 






■ o * 















^ 

< 






i* -^ 





' ° * <> 






r > . 















2P' v"° N A 












-> 



*c 









■ 



vV- 



^ 



, 







































^ V* 





















LIBRARY OF CONGRESS^ 

022 204 788 2 



